SlideShare a Scribd company logo
Contents
AV Receiver                                             Introduction ...................................2




TX-NR808                                                Connections.................................13




                                                        Turning On & Basic Operations ......24




Instruction Manual                                      Advanced Operations .................41




                                                        Controlling iPod & Other
                                                          Components............................75




                                                        Others...........................................88


Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV Receiver.
Please read this manual thoroughly before making
connections and plugging in the unit.
Following the instructions in this manual will enable
you to obtain optimum performance and listening
enjoyment from your new AV Receiver.
Please retain this manual for future reference.




                                                                                                    En
Introduction


          WARNING:                                                                  WARNING                        AVIS
                                                                                  RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK   RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
          TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC                                        DO NOT OPEN              NE PAS OUVRIR
          SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO
                                                                                The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
          RAIN OR MOISTURE.
                                                                                equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
                                                                                presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
          CAUTION:                                                              the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
          TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,                                 magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
          DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO                                     persons.
          USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER                                  The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
          SERVICING   TO   QUALIFIED    SERVICE                                 intended to alert the user to the presence of important
          PERSONNEL.                                                            operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
                                                                                the literature accompanying the appliance.



     Important Safety Instructions
     1.    Read these instructions.                                    15. Damage Requiring Service
     2.    Keep these instructions.                                        Unplug the apparatus from the wall outlet and refer
     3.    Heed all warnings.                                              servicing to qualified service personnel under the fol-
     4.    Follow all instructions.                                        lowing conditions:
     5.    Do not use this apparatus near water.                           A. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
     6.    Clean only with dry cloth.                                      B. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen
     7.    Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in                    into the apparatus,
           accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.                C. If the apparatus has been exposed to rain or water,
     8.    Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,         D. If the apparatus does not operate normally by fol-
           heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including                lowing the operating instructions. Adjust only
           amplifiers) that produce heat.                                       those controls that are covered by the operating
     9.    Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or                 instructions as an improper adjustment of other
           grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades                 controls may result in damage and will often
           with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug                 require extensive work by a qualified technician to
           has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide                 restore the apparatus to its normal operation,
           blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If       E. If the apparatus has been dropped or damaged in
           the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult             any way, and
           an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.          F. When the apparatus exhibits a distinct change in
     10.   Protect the power cord from being walked on or                       performance this indicates a need for service.
           pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles,     16. Object and Liquid Entry
           and the point where they exit from the apparatus.               Never push objects of any kind into the apparatus
     11.   Only use attachments/accessories specified by the               through openings as they may touch dangerous volt-
           manufacturer.                                                   age points or short-out parts that could result in a fire
     12.   Use only with the cart, stand,      PORTABLE CART WARNING       or electric shock.
           tripod, bracket, or table speci-                                The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or
           fied by the manufacturer, or                                    splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as
           sold with the apparatus. When                                   vases shall be placed on the apparatus.
           a cart is used, use caution                                     Don’t put candles or other burning objects on top of
           when moving the cart/appara-                                    this unit.
           tus combination to avoid                                    17. Batteries
                                              S3125A
           injury from tip-over.                                           Always consider the environmental issues and follow
     13.   Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when           local regulations when disposing of batteries.
           unused for long periods of time.                            18. If you install the apparatus in a built-in installation,
     14.   Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Ser-        such as a bookcase or rack, ensure that there is ade-
           vicing is required when the apparatus has been dam-             quate ventilation.
           aged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is           Leave 20 cm (8") of free space at the top and sides and
           damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen         10 cm (4") at the rear. The rear edge of the shelf or
           into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to           board above the apparatus shall be set 10 cm (4")
           rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has             away from the rear panel or wall, creating a flue-like
           been dropped.                                                   gap for warm air to escape.




En
2
Precautions
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal use              For U.S. models
   only, recording copyrighted material is illegal without
                                                                 FCC Information for User
   the permission of the copyright holder.
                                                                 CAUTION:
2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not user-ser-
   viceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact your        The user changes or modifications not expressly approved
   Onkyo dealer.                                                 by the party responsible for compliance could void the
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all over           user’s authority to operate the equipment.
   with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft cloth      NOTE:
   dampened with a weak solution of mild detergent and           This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
   water. Dry the unit immediately afterwards with a             the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
   clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive cloths, thinners, alco-       of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
   hol, or other chemical solvents, because they may             reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
   damage the finish or remove the panel lettering.              residential installation.
4. Power                                                         This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio fre-
   WARNING                                                       quency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
   BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE                           with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
   FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION                        radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
   CAREFULLY.                                                    that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
   AC outlet voltages vary from country to country.              If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio
   Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the volt-       or television reception, which can be determined by turn-
   age requirements printed on the unit’s rear panel (e.g.,      ing the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try
   AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).                          to correct the interference by one or more of the following
     The power cord plug is used to disconnect this unit         measures:
     from the AC power source. Make sure that the plug is        • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
     readily operable (easily accessible) at all times.          • Increase the separation between the equipment and
     Pressing ON/STANDBY to select Standby mode does               receiver.
     not fully shutdown the unit. If you do not intend to use    • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit differ-
     the unit for an extended period, remove the power cord        ent from that to which the receiver is connected.
     from the AC outlet.                                         • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV techni-
5.   Preventing Hearing Loss                                       cian for help.
     Caution
     Excessive sound pressure from earphones and head-           For Canadian Models
     phones can cause hearing loss.                              NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS COM-
6.   Batteries and Heat Exposure                                 PLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.
     Warning                                                     For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:
     Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not
                                                                 CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,
     be exposed to excessive heat as sunshine, fire or the
                                                                 MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,
     like.
                                                                 FULLY INSERT.
7.   Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never han-
     dle this unit or its power cord while your hands are        Modèle pour les Canadien
     wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets inside
     this unit, have it checked by your Onkyo dealer.            REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE
8.   Handling Notes                                              LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME NMB-
     • If you need to transport this unit, use the original      003 DU CANADA.
        packaging to pack it how it was when you originally      Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:
        bought it.                                               ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLEC-
     • Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit for     TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE
        a long time, because they may leave marks on the         DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPON-
        case.                                                    DANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU
     • This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm after        FOND.
        prolonged use. This is normal.
     • If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may not
        work properly the next time you turn it on, so be
        sure to use it occasionally.




                                                                                                                                  En
                                                                                                                                  3
For British models                                                 Supplied Accessories
     Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power
     supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qual-
                                                                        Make sure you have the following accessories:
     ified service personnel.
                                                                        Indoor FM antenna (➔ 21)
     IMPORTANT
                                                                        AM loop antenna (➔ 21)
     The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance
                                                                        Power cord (➔ 21)
     with the following code:
                                                                        Speaker cable labels (➔ 13)
          Blue: Neutral
                                                                        Speaker setup microphone (➔ 29)
        Brown: Live
                                                                        Remote controller and two batteries (AA/R6)
     As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appa-        (Note for China: The battery for the remote controller is not sup-
     ratus may not correspond with the coloured markings                plied for this unit.)
     identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
     The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to the           *    In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the prod-
     terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured                  uct name indicates the color. Specifications and operations are
                                                                             the same regardless of color.
     black.
     The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to
     the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured             Using the Remote Controller
     red.
                                                                        Installing the Batteries
     IMPORTANT
     The plug is fitted with an appropriate fuse. If the fuse               Note
     needs to be replaced, the replacement fuse must approved           • If the remote controller
     by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 and have the same ampere rat-               doesn’t work reliably, try
                                                                          replacing the batteries.
     ing as that indicated on the plug. Check for the ASTA
                                                                        • Don’t mix new and old
     mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.
                                                                          batteries or different
     If the power cord’s plug is not suitable for your socket out-        types of batteries.
     lets, cut it off and fit a suitable plug. Fit a suitable fuse in   • If you intend not to use
     the plug.                                                            the remote controller for
                                                                          a long time, remove the           Batteries (AA/R6)
                                                                          batteries to prevent dam-
     For European Models                                                  age from leakage or corrosion.
                                                                        • Remove expired batteries as soon as possible to prevent damage
                   Declaration of Conformity                              from leakage or corrosion.
       We, ONKYO EUROPE
            ELECTRONICS GmbH                                            Aiming the Remote Controller
            LIEGNITZERSTRASSE 6,
            82194 GROEBENZELL,                                          To use the remote controller, point it at the AV receiver’s
            GERMANY
                                                                        remote control sensor, as shown below.
       declare in own responsibility, that the ONKYO product
       described in this instruction manual is in compliance with the   Transmission
       corresponding      technical standards such as EN60065,
       EN55013, EN55020 and EN61000-3-2, -3-3.                                           Remote control sensor
         GROEBENZELL, GERMANY                                                                                           AV receiver

                                                         K. MIYAGI
                ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH




                                                                                                                      Approx. 16 ft. (5 m)

                                                                        Received
                                                                                               Transmitter

                                                                                                                        AV receiver
                                                                              Incoming sensor
                                                                                             15

                                                                                                         15
                                                                                                                     Approx. 16 ft. (5 m)
En
4
Contents
  Introduction                                                                              Advanced Operations
Important Safety Instructions ......................................... 2                 Advanced Setup ............................................................. 41
Precautions....................................................................... 3        On-screen Setup Menus............................................... 41
Supplied Accessories...................................................... 4                Common Procedures in Setup Menu ........................... 41
  Using the Remote Controller .......................................... 4                  Input/Output Assign ...................................................... 42
Features ............................................................................ 6     Speaker Setup.............................................................. 45
Front & Rear Panels......................................................... 8              Audio Adjust ................................................................. 49
  Front Panel..................................................................... 8
                                                                                            Source Setup................................................................ 50
  Display............................................................................ 9
                                                                                            Listening Mode Preset.................................................. 54
  Rear Panel ................................................................... 10         Miscellaneous ............................................................... 55
Remote Controller.......................................................... 11
                                                                                            Hardware Setup............................................................ 55
  Controlling the AV Receiver ......................................... 11
                                                                                            Lock Setup.................................................................... 58
About Home Theater ...................................................... 12
                                                                                            Using the Audio Settings .............................................. 58
  Enjoying Home Theater................................................ 12
                                                                                          NET/USB.......................................................................... 61
                                                                                            About NET .................................................................... 61
  Connections                                                                               Connecting the AV Receiver ........................................ 61
Connecting the AV Receiver ......................................... 13                     Listening to Internet Radio............................................ 62
  Connecting Your Speakers .......................................... 13                    Playing Music Files on a Server ................................... 63
  Connecting a Power Amplifier ...................................... 16                    Remote Playback from Media Server/
  About AV Connections ................................................. 17                   Personal Computer .................................................... 66
  Connecting Your Components with HDMI.................... 18                               Network Settings .......................................................... 67
  Connecting Your Components ..................................... 19                       About USB .................................................................... 68
  Connecting Onkyo      Components ............................ 20                        Multi Zone ....................................................................... 70
  Connecting Antenna..................................................... 21                Connecting Zone 2 ....................................................... 70
  Connecting the Power Cord ......................................... 21                    Connecting Zone 3 ....................................................... 71
  Which Connections Should I Use?............................... 22                         Setting the Powered Zone 2 ......................................... 71
                                                                                            Setting the Multi Zone................................................... 72
                                                                                            Using Zone 2/3 ............................................................. 72
  Turning On & Basic Operations                                                             Using the Remote Controller in
Turning On/Off the AV Receiver ................................... 24                         Zone 2/3 and Multiroom Control Kits ......................... 74
  Turning On ................................................................... 24
  Turning Off ................................................................... 24        Controlling iPod & Other Components
Basic Operations............................................................ 25
  Selecting the Language Used for                                                         Controlling iPod ............................................................. 75
    the Onscreen Setup Menus ....................................... 25                     Connecting the iPod Directly to the USB Port .............. 75
  Playing the Connected Component.............................. 25                          Connecting an Onkyo Dock .......................................... 76
  Displaying Source Information ..................................... 25                    Using the Onkyo Dock .................................................. 77
  Setting the Display Brightness ..................................... 25                   Controlling Your iPod.................................................... 78
  Muting the AV Receiver................................................ 26               Controlling Other Components..................................... 80
  Using the Sleep Timer.................................................. 26                Preprogrammed Remote Control Codes ...................... 80
  Selecting Speaker Layout ............................................ 26                  Looking up for Remote Control Code ........................... 80
  Using the Home Menu.................................................. 26                  Entering Remote Control Codes................................... 82
  Changing the Input Display .......................................... 27                  Remote Control Codes for
  Using Headphones....................................................... 27                 Onkyo Components Connected via                          ..................... 82
  Using Easy Macros ...................................................... 27               Resetting REMOTE MODE Buttons ............................. 83
  Audyssey MultEQ® Room Correction and                                                      Resetting the Remote Controller .................................. 83
    Speaker Setup ........................................................... 28            Controlling Other Components ..................................... 83
Listening to the Radio ................................................... 31               Activities Setup ............................................................. 85
  Using the Tuner............................................................ 31            Learning Commands .................................................... 86
  Presetting FM/AM Stations........................................... 32                   Using Normal Macros ................................................... 87
  Using RDS
    (excluding North American and Taiwan models) ....... 32                                 Others
Recording ....................................................................... 34
Using the Listening Modes ........................................... 35                  Troubleshooting ............................................................. 88
  Selecting Listening Modes ........................................... 35                Specifications ................................................................. 93
  About Listening Modes................................................. 36               About HDMI ..................................................................... 95
                                                                                          Using an RIHD-compatible TV, Player, or Recorder ... 96
                                                                                          Video Resolution Chart.................................................. 98


                                                                                           To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults, turn it
                                                                                           on and, while holding down VCR/DVR, press
                                                                                           ON/STANDBY (➔ 88).

                                                                                                                                                                                  En
                                                                                                                                                                                  5
Features
     Amplifier                                                   Miscellaneous
     • 135 Watts/Channel @ 8 ohms (FTC)                          • 40 SIRIUS*9/FM/AM Presets (North American mod-
     • 180 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (IEC)                            els)
     • 230 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (JEITA)                        • 40 FM/AM Presets (excluding North American mod-
     • WRAT–Wide Range Amplifier Technology                        els)
       (5 Hz to 100 kHz bandwidth)                               • Audyssey MultEQ®*4 to Correct Room Acoustic Prob-
     • Linear Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry                        lems
     • H.C.P.S. (High Current Power Supply) Massive High         • Audyssey Dynamic EQ®*4 for Loudness Correction
       Power Transformer                                         • Audyssey Dynamic Volume®*4 to Maintain Optimal
                                                                   Listening Level and Dynamic Range
     Processing                                                  • Crossover Adjustment
                                                                   (40/50/60/70/80/90/100/120/150/200 Hz)
     • THX Select2 Plus*1 Certified
                                                                 • A/V Sync Control Function (up to 250 ms)
     • HDMI Video Upscaling (to 1080p Compatible) with
                                                                 • Auto Power-down Function
       Faroudja DCDi Cinema Enhancement
                                                                 • Bi-Directional Preprogrammed (with onscreen display
     • HDMI (Ver.1.4a with Audio Return Channel, 3D), Deep-
                                                                   setup) RI-Compatible Learning Remote with 4 Activities
       Color, x.v.Color*, Lip Sync, DTS*2-HD Master Audio,
                                                                   and Mode-Key LEDs
       DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, Dolby TrueHD*3,
       Dolby Digital Plus, DSD and Multi-CH PCM                  *1
     • Dolby Pro Logic IIz*3 – New Surround Format (front-
       high)
     • Audyssey DSX™*4 for New Surround Channels (front-              Manufactured under license from THX Ltd. U.S. and foreign
       wide/front-high)                                               patent applications pending. THX and the THX logo are
     • 4 DSP Modes for Gaming; Rock/Sports/Action/RPG                 trademarks of THX Ltd. which are registered in some jurisdic-
     • Non-Scaling Configuration                                      tions. All rights reserved.
                                                                 *2
     • A-Form Listening Mode Memory
     • Direct Mode
                                                                      Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;
     • Pure Audio Mode                                                5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535;
     • Music Optimizer*5 for Compressed Digital Music files           7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and
     • 192 kHz/24-bit D/A Converters                                  worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are
     • Powerful and Highly Accurate 32-bit Processing DSP             registered trademarks, & DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio,
                                                                      and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product
     • Jitter Cleaning Circuit Technology
                                                                      includes software.
                                                                      © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
     Connections
                                                                 *3

     • 7 HDMI*6 Inputs (1 on front panel) and 1 Output (North
       American and Taiwan models)
                                                                      Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
     • 7 HDMI*6 Inputs (1 on front panel) and 2 Outputs               “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and the double-D sym-
       (European, Australian and Asian models)                        bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
     • Onkyo             for System Control                      *4

     • 6 Digital Inputs (3 Optical/3 Coaxial)
     • Component Video Switching (2 Inputs/1 Output)
                                                                      Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories™.
     • Universal Port for the Optional Dock for iPod*/HD
                                                                      U.S. and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ®,
       Radio™*7 tuner module (North American models)/                 Audyssey DSX™, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and
       DAB+ tuner module (European, Australian and Asian              Audyssey Dynamic EQ® are registered trademarks and trade-
       models)                                                        marks of Audyssey Laboratories.
     • Dual Subwoofer Pre Out                                    *5   Music Optimizer™ is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.
     • Banana Plug-Compatible Speaker Posts*8                    *6
     • Powered Zone 2
                                                                      “HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia
     • Internet Radio* Connectivity (SIRIUS Internet Radio*9/
                                                                      Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
       vTuner/Last.fm/Pandora/Rhapsody/Slacker/Mediafly/
                                                                      Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.”
       Napster)
                                                                 *7
      *   Services available may vary depending on the region.
     • Network Capability for Streaming Audio Files                   HD Radio™ and the HD Radio Ready logo are proprietary
     • Bi-Amping Capability for FL/FR with SBL/SBR                    trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation.
En   • Analog RGB Video Input (D-sub 15) for PC
6
To receive HD Radio broadcasts, you must install an Onkyo
     UP-HT1 HD Radio tuner module (sold separately).
*8   In Europe, using banana plugs to connect speakers to an audio
     amplifier is prohibited.
*9


     SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks
     of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All rights
     reserved. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii.

THX Select2 Plus
Before any home theater component can be THX Select2
Plus certified, it must pass a rigorous series of quality and
performance tests. Only then can a product feature the
THX Select2 Plus logo, which is your guarantee that the
Home Theater products you purchase will give you
superb performance for many years to come. THX
Select2 Plus requirements define hundreds of parameters,
including power amplifier performance, and pre-ampli-
fier performance and operation for both digital and ana-
log domains. THX Select2 Plus receivers also feature
proprietary THX technologies (e.g., THX Mode) which
accurately translate movie soundtracks for home theater
playback.
*    “Xantech” is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation.
*    “Niles” is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation.




     iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffle, and iPod
     touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
     other countries. iPad is a trademark of Apple Inc.
     “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an elec-
     tronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to
     iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the
     developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not
     responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
     with safety and regulatory standards.
*    “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
*    Rhapsody and the Rhapsody logo are registered trademarks of
     RealNetworks, Inc.
*    “DLNA®, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are
     trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the Digi-
     tal Living Network Alliance.”

This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual
property rights. Use of this copyright protection technol-
ogy must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and
is intended for home and other limited consumer uses only
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.




                                                                      En
                                                                      7
Front & Rear Panels
      Front Panel




                                                      Front flap                                Pull here to open the flap.

     The actual front panel has various logos printed on it. They are not shown here for clarity.
     The page numbers in parentheses show where you can find the main explanation for each item.

        ON/STANDBY button (➔ 24)                                     DISPLAY button (➔ 25)
        STANDBY indicator (➔ 24)                                     MASTER VOLUME control and indicator (➔ 25)
        ZONE 2 indicator (➔ 72)                                      PURE AUDIO button (➔ 35)
        ZONE 3 indicator (➔ 72)                                      HDMI THRU indicator (➔ 57)
        Remote control sensor/transmitter (➔ 4)                      Input selector buttons (BD/DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/
        Display (➔ 9)                                                SAT, GAME, PC, AUX, TUNER, TV/CD, PHONO,
                                                                     PORT and NET/USB) (➔ 25)

     (North American and Taiwan models)




     (European, Australian and Asian models)




En
8
The page numbers in parentheses show where you can find the main explanation for each item.
   PHONES jack (➔ 27)                                          SETUP button (➔ 41)
   ZONE 2, ZONE 3 and OFF buttons (➔ 72)                       RETURN button
   TONE button (➔ 58, 73)                                      SETUP MIC jack (➔ 29)
   LEVEL button (➔ 73)                                         USB port (➔ 68)
   MONITOR OUT button (➔ 43)                                   AUX INPUT jacks (HDMI, VIDEO, AUDIO L/R and
   LISTENING MODE buttons (MOVIE/TV, MUSIC,                    DIGITAL) (➔ 18, 19)
   GAME and THX) (➔ 35)                                        Up    and Down      buttons (➔ 58, 73)
   DIMMER button (North American and Taiwan                    MUSIC OPTIMIZER button (➔ 59)
   models) (➔ 25)                                              POWER switch (European, Australian and Asian
   MEMORY button (➔ 32)                                        models) (➔ 24)
   TUNING MODE button (➔ 31)                                   RT/PTY/TP button (European, Australian and
   TUNING, PRESET (➔ 31 to 32), arrow and                      Asian models) (➔ 32)
   ENTER buttons

 Display




For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
    Speaker/channel indicators                                 Bi AMP indicator (➔ 15)
   Z2 (Powered Zone 2) indicator (➔ 72)                        Headphone indicator (➔ 27)
   Listening mode and format indicators (➔ 35, 59)             Audyssey indicator (➔ 28, 50)
   NETWORK indicator (➔ 62)                                    Dynamic EQ indicator (➔ 50)
   Tuning indicators                                           Dynamic Vol indicator (➔ 51)
   RDS indicator (excluding North American and                 Message area
   Taiwan models) (➔ 32)                                       USB indicator (➔ 68)
   AUTO indicator (➔ 31)                                       Volume level (➔ 25)
   TUNED indicator (➔ 31)                                      MUTING indicator (➔ 26)
   FM STEREO indicator (➔ 31)
                                                               Audio input indicators
   SLEEP indicator (➔ 26)




                                                                                                              En
                                                                                                              9
Rear Panel
     (North American and Taiwan models)




                                                                   *

     (European, Australian and Asian models)




        DIGITAL IN COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks                 AC INLET
        RS232 port                                           GND screw
        Terminal for control.                                Composite, S-Video and analog audio jacks
            REMOTE CONTROL jack                              (BD/DVD IN, VCR/DVR IN and OUT, CBL/SAT IN,
        UNIVERSAL PORT jack                                  GAME IN, PC IN, TV/CD IN and PHONO IN)
        ETHERNET port                                        Multichannel input jacks
        SIRIUS antenna jack (North American models)          (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, SURR BACK
                                                             L/R and SUBWOOFER)
        MONITOR OUT V and S jacks
                                                             PRE OUT jacks
        COMPONENT VIDEO IN and MONITOR OUT
                                                             (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R,
        jacks
                                                             SB/FH/FW L/R, SUBWOOFER, ZONE 2 L/R and
        HDMI IN and OUT jacks (North American and            ZONE 3 L/R)
        Taiwan models)                                   *   SB···Surround Back, FH···Front High, FW···Front Wide
        HDMI IN and HDMI output (HDMI OUT MAIN and
                                                             Speaker Terminals
        HDMI OUT SUB) jacks (European, Australian and
        Asian models)                                        (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R,
                                                             SURR BACK L/R, FRONT HIGH L/R and
        IR IN and OUT jacks                                  FRONT WIDE/ZONE 2 L/R)
        ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 12V TRIGGER OUT jacks
        FM ANTENNA jack and AM ANTENNA terminal         See “Connecting the AV Receiver” for connection infor-
        PC IN port                                      mation (➔ 13 to 22).
En
10
Remote Controller
Controlling the AV Receiver

                                    To control the AV receiver, press RECEIVER to select
                                    Receiver mode.
                                    You can also use the remote controller to control
                                    Onkyo Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, CD player and
                                    other components.
                                    See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for more
                                    details (➔ 82).

                                   For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
                                       STANDBY button (➔ 24)
                                        ON button (➔ 24)
 *1                                     ACTIVITIES buttons (ALL OFF, MY MOVIE, MY
                                        TV and MY MUSIC) (➔ 27, 87)
                                        REMOTE MODE/INPUT SELECTOR buttons
                                        (BD/DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, AUX,
                                        TUNER, TV/CD, PHONO, PORT and NET/USB)
                                        (➔ 25)
                                        SP LAYOUT button (➔ 26)
                              *2
                                        Arrow / / /         and ENTER buttons
                                        SETUP button (➔ 41)
                                        LISTENING MODE buttons (MOVIE/TV, MUSIC,
                                        GAME and THX) (➔ 35)
                                        DIMMER button (➔ 25)
                                        DISPLAY button (➔ 25)
                                        MUTING button (➔ 26)
                                        VOL / button (➔ 25)
                                        RETURN button
                                        HOME button (➔ 26)
                                        SLEEP button (➔ 26)

                                   ■ Controlling the tuner
                                   To control the AV receiver’s tuner, press TUNER (or
                                   RECEIVER).
                                   You can select AM or FM by pressing TUNER repeatedly.
                                        Arrow / buttons (➔ 31)
                                        D.TUN button (TUNER remote mode only) (➔ 31)
                                        CH +/– button (➔ 32)
                                        Number buttons (➔ 31)

                                   *1   When you want to change the remote controller mode without
                                        changing the current input source, press MODE and within
                                        about 8 seconds, press REMOTE MODE. Then, with the AV
                                        receiver’s remote controller, you can control the component
                                        corresponding to the button you pressed.
                                   *2   VIDEO functions as a short cut of HOME.




                                                                                                      En
                                                                                                      11
About Home Theater
      Enjoying Home Theater
     Thanks to the AV receiver’s superb capabilities, you can enjoy surround sound with a real sense of movement in your
     own home—just like being in a movie theater or concert hall. With Blu-ray Discs or DVDs, you can enjoy DTS and
     Dolby Digital. With analog or digital TV, you can enjoy Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS Neo:6, or Onkyo’s original DSP lis-
     tening modes.
     You can also enjoy THX Surround EX (THX-certified THX speaker system recommended).

                                                              Front speakers (Left and Right)
                                                              These output the overall sound. Their role in a home theater is to pro-
                                                              vide a solid anchor for the sound image. They should be positioned
                                                              facing the listener at about ear level, and equidistant from the TV.
                                                              Angle them inward so as to create a triangle, with the listener at the
                                                              apex.
                                                              Center speaker
                                                              This speaker enhances the front speakers, making sound movements
                                                              distinct and providing a full sound image. In movies it’s used mainly
                                                              for dialog. Position it close to your TV facing forward at about ear
                                                              level, or at the same height as the front speakers.
                                                              Surround speakers (Left and Right)
                                                              These speakers are used for precise sound positioning and to add real-
                                                              istic ambience. Position them at the sides of the listener, or slightly
                                                              behind, about 2 to 3 feet (60 to 100 cm) above ear level. Ideally they
                                                              should be equidistant from the listener.
                                                              Subwoofer(s)
                                                              The subwoofer handles the bass sounds of the LFE (Low-Frequency
                                                              Effects) channel. The volume and quality of the bass output from your
                                                              subwoofer will depend on its position, the shape of your listening
                                                              room, and your listening position. In general, a good bass sound can be
                                                              obtained by installing the subwoofer in a front corner, or at one-third
                                                              the width of the wall, as shown.
                                                              Surround back speakers (Left and Right)
                                                              These speakers are necessary to enjoy Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES
                                                              Matrix, DTS-ES Discrete, THX Surround EX, etc. They enhance the
                                                              realism of surround sound and improve sound localization behind the
                                                  Corner      listener. Position them behind the listener about 2 to 3 feet (60 to
                                                  position    100 cm) above ear level.
                                                              Front high speakers (Left and Right)
                                                              These speakers are necessary to enjoy Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height, and
        1/3 of wall
                                                              Audyssey DSX™. They significantly enhance the spatial experience.
          position
                                                              Position them at least 3.3 feet (100 cm) above the front speakers (pref-
        Tip                                                   erably as high as possible) and at an angle slightly wider than the front
                                                              speakers.
      • To find the best position for your subwoofer, while
                                                              Front wide speakers (Left and Right)
        playing a movie or some music with good bass,
                                                              These speakers are necessary to enjoy Audyssey DSX. They signifi-
        experiment by placing your subwoofer at various
                                                              cantly enhance the spatial experience. Position them well outside of the
        positions within the room, and choose the one that
                                                              front speakers. See also http://www.audyssey.com/technology/dsx.html
        provides the most satisfying results.
                                                              about optimum speaker placement for Audyssey DSX.




En
12
Connections

Connecting the AV Receiver
 Connecting Your Speakers                                                Speaker Connection Precautions
                                                                         Read the following before connecting your speakers:
Speaker Configuration                                                    • You can connect speakers with an impedance of between
The following table indicates the channels you should use                  4 and 16 ohms. If the impedance of any of the connected
depending on the number of speakers that you have.                         speakers is 4 ohms or more, but less than 6 ohms, be sure
For 7.1-channel surround-sound playback, you need 7                        to set the minimum speaker impedance to “4ohms”
speakers and a powered subwoofer.                                          (➔ 45). If you use speakers with a lower impedance, and
                                                                           use the amplifier at high volume levels for a long period
Number of         2 3 4 5 6 7 7 7 8 8 9 9 9 10 11                          of time, the built-in protection circuit may be activated.
speakers                                                                 • Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet before
Front speakers ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔                               making any connections.
Center               ✔     ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔                       • Read the instructions supplied with your speakers.
speaker                                                                  • Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity. In other
Surround                 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔                         words, connect positive (+) terminals only to positive (+)
speakers                                                                   terminals, and negative (–) terminals only to negative (–)
Surround back                 ✔               ✔ ✔                ✔         terminals. If you get them the wrong way around, the
speaker*1*2                                                                sound will be out of phase and will sound unnatural.
Surround back                     ✔                   ✔ ✔            ✔   • Unnecessarily long, or very thin speaker cables may
speakers*2                                                                 affect the sound quality and should be avoided.
Front high                            ✔       ✔       ✔     ✔ ✔ ✔        • Be careful not to short the positive and negative wires.
speakers*2
                                                                           Doing so may damage the AV receiver.
Front wide                                ✔       ✔       ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
speakers*2
                                                                         • Make sure the metal core of the wire does not have con-
                                                                           tact with the AV receiver’s rear panel. Doing so may
*1   If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to         damage the AV receiver.
     the SURR BACK L terminals.
*2   Front high, surround back and front wide speakers cannot be
     used at the same time.
No matter how many speakers you use, a powered sub-
woofer is recommended for a really powerful and solid
bass.
To get the best from your surround sound system, you
need to set the speaker settings. You can do this automati-
cally (➔ 28) or manually (➔ 45).

Attaching the Speaker Cable Labels
The AV receiver’s positive (+) speaker terminals are all
                                                                         • Don’t connect more than one cable to each speaker ter-
red (the negative (–) speaker terminals are all black).
                                                                           minal. Doing so may damage the AV receiver.
Speaker                                                   Color          • Don’t connect one speaker to several terminals.
Front left, Front high left, Front wide left,             White
Zone 2 left
Front right, Front high right, Front wide right,          Red
Zone 2 right
Center                                                    Green
Surround left                                             Blue
Surround right                                            Gray
Surround back left                                        Brown
Surround back right                                       Tan

The supplied speaker cable labels are also color-coded and
you should attach them to the positive (+) side of each
speaker cable in accordance with the table above. Then all
you need to do is to match the color of each label to the
corresponding speaker terminal.


                                                                                                                                        En
                                                                                                                                        13
Connecting the Speaker Cables
     Screw-type speaker terminals
           Strip 1/2" to 5/8" (12 to 15 mm) of             1/2" to 5/8"(12 to 15 mm)
           insulation from the ends of the
           speaker cables, and twist the bare
           wires tightly, as shown.

     Using Banana Plugs (North American models)
     • If you are using banana plugs, tighten the speaker terminal before inserting the banana plug.
     • Do not insert the speaker code directly into the center hole of the speaker terminal.
     The following illustration shows which speaker should be connected to each pair of terminals. If you’re using only one
     surround back speaker, connect it to the SURR BACK L terminals.




          Front high         Front wide                                               Front wide       Front high
             right              right           Front right         Front left           left             left       Center
           speaker            speaker            speaker            speaker            speaker          speaker     speaker




          Surround                              Surround                               Surround                     Surround
            right                               back right                             back left                      left
          speaker                                speaker                               speaker                      speaker




En
14
Using Dipole Speakers
                                                                                            Dipole speakers             Normal speakers
You can use dipole speakers for the surround and surround
back speakers. Dipole speakers output the same sound in two
directions.
                                                                                             TV/screen                    TV/screen
Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on them to
indicate how they should be positioned. The surround dipole
speakers should be positioned so that their arrows point
toward the TV/screen, while the surround back dipole speak-
ers should be positioned so that their arrows point toward
each other, as shown.
      Front speakers
      Center speaker
      Surround speakers
      Subwoofer(s)
      Surround back speakers
      Front high speakers
      Front wide speakers

Connecting a Powered Subwoofer

Using a suitable cable, connect the AV receiver’s
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack to an input on                       Powered subwoofer
your powered subwoofer, as shown. If your sub-
woofer is unpowered and you’re using an external
amplifier, connect the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT                       LINE INPUT      LINE INPUT




jack to an input on the amp.
You can connect the powered subwoofer with two
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks respectively.
The same signal is output from each jack.                                   LINE INPUT


                                                            LINE INPUT




Bi-amping the Front Speakers

The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts can be
used with front speakers and surround back speakers respec-
tively, or bi-amped to provide separate tweeter and woofer feeds
for a pair of front speakers that support bi-amping, providing
improved bass and treble performance.
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to drive up to
  a 5.1 speaker system in the main room.
• For bi-amping, the FRONT L/R terminal posts connect to the
  front speakers’ woofer terminals; the SURR BACK L/R ter-
  minal posts connect to the front speakers’ tweeter terminals.
                                                                                                    Right              Left
• Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections shown                                            speaker           speaker
  below and turned on the AV receiver, you must set the
  “Speakers Type(Front)” setting to “Bi-Amp” to enable bi-
  amping (➔ 45).                                                                                         Tweeter (high)
                                                                                                         Woofer (low)




 Important:
 • When making the bi-amping connections, be sure to remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’ tweeter (high) and woofer (low)
   terminals.
 • Bi-amping can be used only with speakers that support bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.
                                                                                                                                          En
                                                                                                                                          15
Connecting a Power Amplifier
     If you want to use a more powerful power amplifier and use the AV receiver as a preamp, connect it to the PRE OUT
     jacks, and connect all speakers and the subwoofer to the power amplifier. If you have a powered subwoofer, connect it to
     this AV receiver’s SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack. You can connect the powered subwoofer with two SUBWOOFER
     PRE OUT jacks respectively. The same signal is output from each jack.




                                                                                       *1




                                Power amplifier




                                                                                            Powered subwoofer

                                                                                     See “Connecting a Powered
                 Front left speaker                                                  Subwoofer” for more information
                 Center speaker                                                      (➔ 15).
                 Front right speaker
                 Surround left speaker
                 Surround right speaker
                 Surround back/Front wide/Front high left speaker*1
                 Surround back/Front wide/Front high right speaker*1


             Note
            *1   Specify “None” for the channel that you don’t want to output
                 (➔ 46).
                 SB···Surround Back, FH···Front High, FW···Front Wide




En
16
About AV Connections
Connected image with AV components

    HDMI cable                                 : Video & Audio            Other cables                                : Video
                                                                                                                      : Audio


                                 AV receiver                                                          AV receiver




                               Blu-ray Disc/                                                        Blu-ray Disc/
     TV, projector, etc.       DVD player          Game console            TV, projector, etc.      DVD player           Game console


• Before making any AV connections, read the manuals supplied with your AV components.
• Don’t connect the power cord until you’ve completed and double-checked all AV connections.                                 Right!
• Push plugs in all the way to make good connections (loose connections can cause noise or malfunc-
  tions).
• To prevent interference, keep audio and video cables away from power cords and speaker cables.
                                                                                                                             Wrong!
AV Cables and Jacks

Signal            Cable                                 Jack                    Description
Video and         HDMI                                           HDMI           HDMI connections can carry digital video and audio.
Audio
Video             Component video      Y                                        Component video separates the luminance (Y) and color
                                                                  Green
                                                                                difference signals (PB/CB, PR/CR), providing the best pic-
                                       PB/CB                      Blue          ture quality (some TV manufacturers label their compo-
                                       PR/CR                                    nent video sockets slightly differently).
                                                                  Red

                  Analog RGB                                                    This is a conventional analog interface to connect a PC and
                                                                                a display device (also called D-Sub or D-subminiature).

                  S-Video                                                       S-Video separates the luminance and color signals and pro-
                                                                                vides better picture quality than composite video.
                  Composite video                                               Composite video is commonly used on TVs, VCRs, and
                                                          V       Yellow
                                                                                other video equipment.
Audio             Optical digital                               OPTICAL         Optical digital connections allow you to enjoy digital
                  audio                                                         sound such as PCM*, Dolby Digital or DTS. The audio
                                                                                quality is the same as coaxial.
                  Coaxial digital                                               Coaxial digital connections allow you to enjoy digital
                  audio                                           Orange        sound such as PCM*, Dolby Digital or DTS. The audio
                                                                                quality is the same as optical.
                  Analog audio                            L       White         Analog audio connections (RCA) carry analog audio.
                  (RCA)
                                                          R       Red
                  Multichannel ana-                                             This cable carries multichannel analog audio and is typi-
                  log audio (RCA)                                               cally used to connect DVD players with a 7.1-channel ana-
                                                                                log audio output. Several standard analog audio cables can
                                                                                be used instead of a multichannel cable.




*    Available sampling rate for PCM input signal is 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz. Even 176.4/192 kHz is effective in case of the HDMI con-
     nection.
    Note
• The AV receiver does not support SCART plugs.
• The AV receiver’s optical digital jacks have shutter-type covers that open when an optical plug is inserted and close when it’s removed.
  Push plugs in all the way.
    Caution
                                                                                                                                              En
• To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical plug straight when inserting and removing.
                                                                                                                                              17
Connecting Your Components with HDMI

                             VCR or DVD recorder/Digital Video Recorder




              Game console
                                                                       TV, projector, etc.


       Personal
       computer
                                                              Blu-ray Disc/DVD player
                                                                                                                     Camcorder

                              Satellite, cable, set-top box, etc.

     Connect your components to the appropriate jacks. The default input assignments are shown below.
     ✔: Assignment can be changed (➔ 42).

     Jack                                      Signal               Components                                                Assignable
      Input            HDMI IN 1               Audio/Video          Blu-ray Disc/DVD player                                   ✔
                       HDMI IN 2                                    VCR or DVD recorder/Digital Video Recorder                ✔
                       HDMI IN 3                                    Satellite, cable, set-top box, etc.                       ✔
                       HDMI IN 4                                    Game console                                              ✔
                       HDMI IN 5                                    Personal computer                                         ✔
                       HDMI IN 6                                    Other components                                          ✔
                       AUX INPUT HDMI                               Camcorder
     Output (North HDMI OUT                                         TV, projector, etc.
     American and
     Taiwan models)
     Output (Euro-     HDMI OUT MAIN                                TV
     pean, Austra-     HDMI OUT SUB                                 Projector, etc.
     lian and Asian
     models)


     Refer to “About HDMI” (➔ 95) and “Using an RIHD-compatible TV, Player, or Recorder” (➔ 96).
     ■ Audio return channel (ARC) function
     Audio return channel (ARC) function enables an HDMI capable TV to send the audio stream to the HDMI OUT (North
     American and Taiwan models)/HDMI OUT MAIN (European, Australian and Asian models) of the AV receiver. To
     use this function, you must select the TV/CD input selector.
     • To use ARC function, you must select the TV/CD input selector, your TV must support ARC function and “HDMI
       Control (RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ 56).
       Tip
     • To listen to audio received by the HDMI IN jacks through your TV’s speakers:
       – Set the “TV Control” setting to “On” (➔ 57) for an           -compatible TV.
       – Set the “Audio TV Out” setting to “On” (➔ 56) when the TV is not compatible with                 or the “TV Control” setting to “Off”.
       – Set your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player’s HDMI audio output setting to PCM.
       – To listen to TV audio through the AV receiver, see “Connecting Your Components” (➔ 19).
      Note
     • When listening to an HDMI component through the AV receiver, set the HDMI component so that its video can be seen on the TV
       screen (on the TV, select the input of the HDMI component connected to the AV receiver). If the TV power is off or the TV is set to
       another input source, this may result in no sound from the AV receiver or the sound may be cut off.
     • When the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (➔ 56) to hear from your TV’s speakers, by controlling the AV receiver’s volume,
       the sound will be output from the AV receiver’s speakers, too. When the “TV Control” setting is set to “On” (➔ 57) to hear from
       speakers of          -compatible TV, by controlling the AV receiver’s volume, the AV receiver’s speakers will produce sound while the
       TV’s speakers are muted. To stop the AV receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn
       down the AV receiver’s volume.
En
18
Connecting Your Components

 Front




 Rear




Connect your components to the appropriate jacks. The default input assignments are shown below.
✔: Assignment can be changed (➔ 44).

No.      Jack                                               Signal            Components                            Assignable
         AUX INPUT            VIDEO                         Composite video   Camcorder, etc
                              AUDIO L/R                     Analog audio
                              DIGITAL                       Digital audio
         COMPONENT            IN 1 (BD/DVD)                 Component video   Blu-ray Disc/DVD player               ✔
         VIDEO                IN 2 (CBL/SAT)                                  Satellite, cable, set-top box, etc.   ✔
                              MONITOR OUT                                     TV, projector, etc.
         DIGITAL              COAXIAL      IN 1 (BD/DVD)    Digital audio     Blu-ray Disc/DVD player               ✔
                                           IN 2 (VCR/DVR)                     VCR or DVD recorder/digital           ✔
                                                                              video recorder
                                           IN 3 (CBL/SAT)                     Satellite, cable, set-top box, etc.   ✔
                              OPTICAL      IN 1 (GAME)                        Game console                          ✔
                                           IN 2 (TV/CD)                       TV, CD player                         ✔
         MONITOR OUT                                        Composite video   TV, projector, etc.
                                                            and S-Video
         BD/DVD IN                                          Analog audio,     Blu-ray Disc/DVD player
         VCR/DVR IN                                         composite video   VCR or DVD recorder/digital
                                                            and S-Video       video recorder
         CBL/SAT IN                                                           Satellite, cable, set-top box, etc.
         GAME IN                                                              Game console
         PC IN                                              Analog audio      Personal computer
         TV/CD IN                                                             TV, CD player,
                                                                              cassette tape deck, MD, CD-R,
                                                                              Turntable*1
         PHONO IN                                                             Turntable*1
         UNIVERSAL PORT                                     Analog audio/     Universal port optional dock
                                                            video             (UP-A1 etc.)
         PC IN                                              Analog RGB        Personal computer                     *2

         Multichannel input                                 Analog audio      DVD player, DVD-Audio or              *3
                                                                              Super Audio CD-capable player,                     En
                                                                              or an MPEG decorder
                                                                                                                                 19
Note
     *1  Connect a turntable (MM) that has built-in a phono preamp to TV/CD IN or connect it to PHONO IN with the phono preamp turned
         off. If your turntable (MM) doesn’t have a phono preamp, connect to PHONO IN. If your turntable has a moving coil (MC) type car-
         tridge, you’ll need a commercially available MC head amp or MC transformer to connect to PHONO IN. See your turntable’s man-
         ual for details.
         If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the AV receiver’s GND screw. With some turntables, connecting the ground wire
         may produce an audible hum. If this happens, disconnect it.
     *2 When you connect your personal computer to PC IN and select PC input selector, video of the personal computer is output from
         HDMI output(s). However, because the AV receiver selects the video input in the order of HDMI > component > analog RGB, if you
         have assigned HDMI IN to the PC input selector, the AV receiver will output signals from HDMI IN in priority to PC IN.
     *3 To select the multichannel input, select the BD/DVD input selector and see “Audio Selector” (➔ 60). To adjust the subwoofer sensi-
         tivity for the multichannel input, see “Subwoofer Input Sensitivity” (➔ 45).
     • The AV receiver can output audio and video signals from the AUX INPUT jacks to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks.
     • With connection , you can listen and record audio from the external components while you are in Zone 2/3. You can listen and record
       audio from the external components in the main room; you can listen to the audio in Zone 2/3 as well.
     • With connection , you can enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. (To record or listen in Zone 2/3 as well, use and .)

     ■ How to record the video
     With the connections described above, you cannot record the video through the AV receiver. To make a connection for
     video recording (➔ 34).


      Connecting Onkyo                    Components

      Step 1:                                                             Note
      Make sure that each Onkyo component is connected                   • Use only     cables for     connections.      cables are supplied
      with an analog audio cable (connection in the hookup                 with Onkyo players (DVD, CD, etc.).
      examples) (➔ 19).                                                  • Some components have two         jacks. You can connect either
      Step 2:                                                              one to the AV receiver. The other jack is for connecting addi-
                                                                           tional    -capable components.
      Make the       connection (see illustration below).
                                                                         • Connect only Onkyo components to         jacks. Connecting other
      Step 3:                                                              manufacturer’s components may cause a malfunction.
      If you’re using an RI Dock, or cassette tape deck,                 • Some components may not support all         functions. Refer to
      change the Input Display (➔ 27).                                     the manuals supplied with your other Onkyo components.
                                                                         • While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the System On/Auto Power On
     With      (Remote Interactive), you can use the following             and Direct Change       functions do not work.
     special functions:                                                  • Do not use RI connections if you use HDMI Control (RIHD)
                                                                           (➔ 56).
     ■ System On/Auto Power On
       When you start playback on a component connected via                                                                          IN

                                                                                                                               L
           while the AV receiver is on Standby, the AV
                                                                                                                               R
       receiver will automatically turn on and select that com-
                                                                                                                                   TV/CD
       ponent as the input source.
     ■ Direct Change
                                                                                                                              FRONT

                                                                                                                                          L

       When playback is started on a component connected via                   REMOTE                                                     R
                                                                               CONTROL
          , the AV receiver automatically selects that compo-                                                                 BD/DVD

       nent as the input source.
     ■ Remote Control
       You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to con-                                                           R
                                                                                                                          ANALOG
                                                                                                                                L


       trol your other     -capable Onkyo components, point-                                e.g., CD player              AUDIO OUT


       ing the remote controller at the AV receiver’s remote
       control sensor instead of the component. You must enter
                                                                                                                         R      L
       the appropriate remote control code first (➔ 82).                                                                  ANALOG
                                                                                           e.g., DVD player              AUDIO OUT




En
20
Connecting Antenna
This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor FM antenna and AM loop antenna.
The AV receiver won’t pick up any radio signals without any antenna connected, so you must connect the antenna to use
the tuner.

                                                                                  Caution
   (North American and                       (European, Australian               • Be careful that you don’t injure yourself when
   Taiwan models)                            and Asian models)                     using thumbtacks.



        Insert the plug fully                 Insert the plug fully
        into the jack.                        into the jack.
                                                                                      Push.           Insert wire.        Release.




                                                                                            Assembling the AM loop antenna.
              Thumbtacks, etc.




                                    Indoor FM antenna (supplied)                                AM loop antenna (supplied)


 Note
• Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll need to tune into a radio station and position the antenna to achieve the best possible
  reception.
• Keep the AM loop antenna as far away as possible from your AV receiver, TV, speaker cables, and power cords.
  Tip
• If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available outdoor FM antenna instead.
• If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commercially available outdoor AM
  antenna.


 Connecting the Power Cord

 Note
                                                                         Step 1:
• Before connecting the power cord, connect all of your speak-
  ers and AV components.                                                 Connect the supplied power cord to the AV receiver’s
• Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary power surge           AC INLET.
  that might interfere with other electrical equipment on the same
  circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV receiver into a different
  branch circuit.
• Do not use a power cord other than the one supplied with the AV
  receiver. The supplied power cord is designed exclusively for
  use with the AV receiver and should not be used with any other
  equipment.                                                                                                   To AC wall outlet
• Never disconnect the power cord from the AV receiver while the
  other end is still plugged into a wall outlet. Doing so may cause
  an electric shock. Always disconnect the power cord from the           Step 2:
  wall outlet first, and then the AV receiver.
                                                                         Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.




                                                                                                                                           En
                                                                                                                                           21
Which Connections Should I Use?
     The AV receiver supports several connection formats for compatibility with a wide range of AV equipment. The format
     you choose will depend on the formats supported by your components. Use the following sections as a guide.

     Video Connection Formats
     Video component can be connected by using any one of the following video connection formats: composite video,
     S-Video, PC IN (Analog RGB), component video or HDMI, the latter offering the best picture quality.
     The AV receiver can upconvert and downconvert between video formats, depending on the “Monitor Out” setting
     (➔ 42), which generally determines whether video signals are upconverted for the component video output or the HDMI
     output.
     For optimal video performance, THX recommends that video signals pass through the system without upconver-
     sion (e.g., component video input through to component video output).
     To by-pass video upconversion in the AV receiver, simultaneously press the VCR/DVR and RETURN on the AV
     receiver. While continuing to hold down the VCR/DVR, press RETURN to toggle until “Skip” appears on the
     display. Release both buttons.
     To use the video upconversion in the AV receiver, repeat the above process until “Use” appears on the display and
     release the buttons.
     ■ “Monitor Out” setting set to “HDMI” (North American and Taiwan models)
        “Monitor Out” setting set to “HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub” (European, Australian and Asian models)
     Video input signals flow through the AV receiver as shown,                      Video Signal Flow Chart
     with composite video, S-Video, PC IN (Analog RGB) and                         Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.
     component video sources all being upconverted for the HDMI
     output.
     (North American and Taiwan models) Use this setting if              Composite  S-Video    PC IN     Component HDMI
                                                                                            (Analog RGB)
     you connect the AV receiver’s HDMI OUT to your TV.
                                                                                                  IN
     (European, Australian and Asian models) Use these set-
     tings if you connect the AV receiver’s HDMI OUT MAIN or
                                                                AV receiver
     HDMI OUT SUB, respectively, to your TV.
     The composite video, S-Video and component video outputs
     pass through their respective input signals as they are.                              MONITOR OUT
                                                                                        Composite   S-Video              Component   HDMI
      Note
     • (North American and Taiwan models) If not connected to HDMI
       OUT, the “Monitor Out” setting will be automatically switched to                                     TV, projector, etc.
       “Analog” (➔ 23).
       (European, Australian and Asian models) If not connected to the same output you have selected in the “Monitor Out” setting, the
       “Monitor Out” setting will be automatically switched to “Analog” (➔ 23).
       In this case, the setting of the output resolution will be that for HDMI output (➔ 42). Moreover, it will be switched to “1080i” when
       “1080p” is selected, and to “Through” when “Auto” is selected.

     ■ “Monitor Out” setting set to “Both”, “Both(Main)” or “Both(Sub)” (European, Australian and Asian
       models)
     Video input signals flow through the AV receiver as shown,                            Video Signal Flow Chart
     with composite video, S-Video, PC IN (Analog RGB) and
                                                                                         Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.
     component video sources all being upconverted for both
     HDMI outputs. Use these settings if you connect the AV
     receiver’s HDMI OUT MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB to your                         Composite  S-Video    PC IN    Component HDMI
     TVs.                                                                                         (Analog RGB)

     The composite video, S-Video and component video outputs                                          IN
     pass through their respective input signals as they are.
                                                                     AV receiver
         Both: Video signals are output from both HDMI outputs
         at the resolution supported by both TVs. You cannot select
         “Resolution” setting. The “Picture Adjust” setting will                                MONITOR OUT
         be that for “HDMI Main”.                                               Composite S-Video             Component HDMI

         Both(Main): Video signals are output from both HDMI
         outputs but HDMI OUT MAIN will become a priority;                                     TV, projector, etc
         depending on the resolution, video signals may not be out-
         put from HDMI OUT SUB.
         Both(Sub): Video signals are output from both HDMI outputs but HDMI OUT SUB will become a priority; depend-
En       ing on the resolution, video signals may not be output from HDMI OUT MAIN.
22
Note
• The “Monitor Out” setting will be automatically switched to “Analog” (➔ 42) if not connected to both outputs when “Both” is
  selected or if not connected to a priority output when “Both(Main)” or “Both(Sub)” is selected.

■ “Monitor Out” setting set to “Analog”
Video input signals flow through the AV receiver as shown,                                         Video Signal Flow Chart
with composite video, S-Video and PC IN (Analog RGB)
sources being upconverted for the component video output.                                     Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.
Use this setting if you connect the AV receiver’s COMPO-
NENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT to your TV.
                                                                                  Composite        S-Video      PC IN     Component       HDMI
Composite video is upconverted to S-Video and S-Video is                                                     (Analog RGB)
downconverted to composite video. Note that these conver-
                                                                                                                    IN
sions only apply to the MONITOR OUT V and S outputs,
not the VCR/DVR OUT V and S outputs.                                AV receiver
The composite video, S-Video and component video outputs
pass through their respective input signals as they are.                                                 MONITOR OUT
This signal flow also applies when the “Resolution” setting                       Composite        S-Video                  Component     HDMI
is set to “Through” (➔ 43).
                                                                                                                                   *1

                                                                                                       TV, projector, etc.

                                                                                  *1   PC IN (Analog RGB) input signal is output
                                                                                       at 720p resolution.

Video Signal Flow and the Resolution Setting
When the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog” (➔ 42),                               Video Signal Flow Chart
if the “Resolution” setting is set to anything other than                             Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.
“Through” (➔ 43), the video signal flow will be as shown
here, with composite video and S-Video sources being upcon-
verted for the component video output.                                      Composite      S-Video    Component                           HDMI

The composite video, S-Video, and component video outputs                                          IN
pass through their respective analog input signals as they are.
HDMI input signals are not output.                              AV receiver


                                                                                                         MONITOR OUT
                                                                                  Composite           S-Video            Component        HDMI




                                                                                                       TV, projector, etc.
Audio Connection Formats
Audio component can be connected by using any of the fol-
                                                                                                   Audio Signal Flow Chart
lowing audio connection formats: analog, optical, coaxial,
analog multichannel, or HDMI.                                                               Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.
When choosing a connection format, bear in mind that the
AV receiver does not convert digital input signals for analog                      Analog     Multichannel      Optical        Coaxial    HDMI
line outputs and vice versa. For example, audio signals con-
                                                                                                                    IN
nected to an optical or coaxial digital input are not output by                               *1
                                                                    AV receiver                              *1*3         *1         *1
the analog VCR/DVR OUT.
                                                                                            *3
                                                                                                                OUT
If signals are present at more than one input, the inputs will                     Analog                                                 HDMI
be selected automatically in the following order of priority:                                                                              *1 *2
HDMI, digital, analog.
                                                                                                       TV, projector, etc.
                                                                    *1   Depends on the “Audio TV Out” setting (➔ 56).
                                                                    *2   This setting is available, when “Audio Return Channel”
                                                                         setting is set to “Auto” (➔ 57), you must select the TV/CD
                                                                         input selector and your TV must support ARC function.
                                                                    *3   Only the front L/R channels are output.


                                                                                                                                                   En
                                                                                                                                                   23
Turning On & Basic Operations

     Turning On/Off the AV Receiver
      (North American and                   (European, Australian and
      Taiwan models)                        Asian models)
           ON/STANDBY
              STANDBY indicator                        STANDBY indicator
                                                                                   STANDBY
                                                                                          ON




                                                                                  RECEIVER




                                                        POWER


      Turning On

     1    (European, Australian and Asian models)
          Set POWER to the ON position ( ) on the front panel.
          The AV receiver enters Standby mode, and the STANDBY indicator comes on.

     2    Press ON/STANDBY on the front panel.
          or
          Press RECEIVER followed by ON on the remote controller.
          The AV receiver comes on, the display lights, and the STANDBY indicator goes off.
          Pressing the remote controller’s ON again will turn on any components connected via    .


      Turning Off
          Press ON/STANDBY on the front panel.
          or
          Press RECEIVER followed by STANDBY on the remote controller.
          The AV receiver will enter Standby mode. To prevent any loud surprises when you turn on the AV receiver, always
          turn down the volume before you turn it off.

     (European, Australian and Asian models)
     To completely shut down the AV receiver, set POWER to the OFF position ( ).




En
24
Basic Operations
 This manual describes the procedure using the             Displaying Source Information
 remote controller unless otherwise specified.
                                                          You can display various information about the current
                                                          input source as follows. (Components connected to the
 Selecting the Language Used for the                      UNIVERSAL PORT jack are excluded.)
 Onscreen Setup Menus
                                                                     Press RECEIVER followed by DISPLAY repeat-
You can determine the language used for the onscreen                 edly to cycle through the available information.
setup menus. See “Language” in the “OSD Setup”
(➔ 55).
                                                               Tip
                                                          • Alternatively, you can use the AV receiver’s DISPLAY.
 Playing the Connected Component
                                                          The following information can typically be displayed.
■ Operating on the AV receiver
                                                                 Input source

1    Use the input selector buttons to select the input
     source.
                                                                    Listening
                                                                      mode*1


2    Start playback on the source component.                   Signal format*2
     See also:                                                      Sampling
     • “Controlling Other Components” (➔ 80)                       frequency
     • “Controlling iPod” (➔ 75)                                     Input signal
     • “Listening to the Radio” (➔ 31)                                 resolution

3    To adjust the volume, use the MASTER VOLUME
     control.
                                                                         Output
                                                                      resolution

4
                                                          *1    The input source is displayed with the default name even
     Select a listening mode and enjoy!
                                                                when you have entered a custom name in “Name Edit”
     See also:
                                                                (➔ 52).
     • “Using the Listening Modes” (➔ 35)                 *2    If the input signal is analog, no format information is dis-
     • “Audyssey” (➔ 50)                                        played. If the input signal is PCM, the sampling frequency is
                                                                displayed. If the input signal is digital but not PCM, the signal
■ Operating with the remote controller                          format and the number of channels is displayed. For some dig-
                                                                ital input signals, including multichannel PCM, the signal for-
1    Press RECEIVER followed by INPUT SELEC-
     TOR.
                                                                mat, number of channels, and sampling frequency is
                                                                displayed.
                                                                Information is displayed for about three seconds, then the pre-
2    Start playback on the source component.                    viously displayed information reappears.
     See also:
     • “Controlling Other Components” (➔ 80)               Setting the Display Brightness
     • “Controlling iPod” (➔ 75)
     • “Listening to the Radio” (➔ 31)                    You can adjust the brightness of the AV receiver’s display.
3    To adjust the volume, use VOL / .
                                                                     Press RECEIVER followed by DIMMER repeat-
4    Select a listening mode and enjoy!                              edly to select:
     See also:                                                       • Normal + MASTER VOLUME indicator lights.
     • “Using the Listening Modes” (➔ 35)                            • Normal + MASTER VOLUME indicator goes off.
     • “Audyssey” (➔ 50)                                             • Dim + MASTER VOLUME indicator goes off.
                                                                     • Dimmer + MASTER VOLUME indicator goes
                                                                       off.

                                                               Tip
                                                          • (North American and Taiwan models) Alternatively, you can
                                                            use the AV receiver’s DIMMER.




                                                                                                                                    En
                                                                                                                                    25
Muting the AV Receiver                                              Using the Home Menu
     You can temporarily mute the output of the AV receiver.             The Home menu provides you quick access to frequently
                                                                         used menus without having to go through the long stan-
             Press RECEIVER followed by MUTING.                          dard menu. This menu enables you to change settings and
             The output is muted and the MUTING indicator                view the current information.
             flashes on the display.
                                                                         1    Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
       Tip                                                                    The following information will be superimposed on
                                                                              the TV screen.
     • To unmute, press MUTING again or adjust the volume.
     • The Mute function is cancelled when the AV receiver is set to             BD/DVD
       Standby.
                                                                                  Audio            Bass
                                                                                  Video            Treble            0dB
                                                                                  Info             Subwoofer Level
                                                                                  Input            Center Level
      Using the Sleep Timer                                                       Listening Mode   Dynamic EQ
                                                                                                   Dynamic Volume

     With the sleep timer, you can set the AV receiver to turn
     off automatically after a specified period.

             Press RECEIVER followed by SLEEP repeatedly                 2    Use / / /             to make the desired selection.
             to select the required sleep time.                               ■ Audio*1
             The sleep time can be set from 90 to 10 minutes in                  You can change the following settings: “Bass”,
             10 minute steps.                                                    “Treble”, “Subwoofer Level”, “Center Level”,
             The SLEEP indicator lights on the display when the                  “Dynamic EQ”, “Dynamic Volume”, “Late
             sleep timer has been set. The specified sleep time                  Night”, “Music Optimizer”, “Re-EQ”, “Re-
             appears on the display for about 5 seconds, then the                EQ(THX)” and “Audio Selector”.
             previous display reappears.                                        See also:
                                                                                 • “Audyssey” (➔ 50)
       Tip                                                                       • “Using the Audio Settings” (➔ 58)
     • If you need to cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP repeatedly
                                                                              ■ Video*2
       until the SLEEP indicator goes off.
     • To check the time remaining until the AV receiver sleeps, press           You can change the following settings: “Wide
       SLEEP. Note that if you press SLEEP while the sleep time is               Mode”, “Picture Mode”, “Brightness”, “Con-
       being displayed, you’ll shorten the sleep time by 10 minutes.             trast”, “Hue” and “Saturation”.
                                                                                 The remote controller’s VIDEO acts as a short-
                                                                                 cut for this menu.
      Selecting Speaker Layout
                                                                                See also:
     You can prioritize which speakers you want to use.                          • “Picture Adjust” (➔ 53)

             Press RECEIVER followed by SP LAYOUT                             ■ Info*3*4
             repeatedly.                                                          You can view the information of the following
                Speaker Layout:FH:                                                items: “Audio”, “Video” and “Tuner”.
                  The sound from front high speakers is output                ■ Input*4*5
                  by priority.                                                    You can select the input source while viewing
                Speaker Layout:FW:                                                the information as follows: the name of input
                  The sound from front wide speakers is output                    selectors, input assignments, and radio informa-
                  by priority.                                                    tion, and ARC function setting.
                Speaker Layout:SB:                                                  Press ENTER to display the current input
                  The sound from surround back speakers is out-                     source, followed by / to select the desired
                  put by priority.                                                  input source. Pressing ENTER again switches
                                                                                    to the selected input source.
      Note
                                                                              ■ Listening Mode
     • If the “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp”
                                                                                 You can select the listening modes that are
       (➔ 45), or Powered Zone 2 is being used (➔ 72), this setting
                                                                                 grouped in the following categories: “MOVIE/
       cannot be selected.
     • When the listening mode that doesn’t support front high, front            TV”, “MUSIC”, “GAME” and “THX”.
       wide or surround back speakers is used, the setting cannot be               Use / to select the category and / to
       selected.                                                                   select the listening mode. Press ENTER to
                                                                                   switch to the selected listening mode.


En
26
Note                                                              Using Headphones
*1   If Pure Audio or Direct listening mode is selected,
     “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” cannot be selected.              Connect a pair of stereo headphones with a stan-
*2   Only when you have selected “Custom” in the “Picture               dard plug (1/4 inch or 6.3 mm) to the PHONES
     Mode” (➔ 53), pressing ENTER allows you to adjust the fol-         jack.
     lowing items via the Home menu; “Brightness”, “Contrast”,
     “Hue” and “Saturation”. Press RETURN to return to the
     original Home menu.                                           Note
*3   Depending on the input source and listening mode, not all    • Always turn down the volume before connecting your head-
     channels shown here output the sound.                          phones.
*4   When you have entered a custom name in “Name Edit”           • While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES jack, the
     (➔ 52), the input source is displayed with that name. But      Headphone indicator, speaker/channel indicator FL and FR
     even if not, the component name may be displayed if the AV     lights. (The Powered Zone 2 speakers are not turned off.)
     receiver receives it via HDMI connection (➔ 18).             • When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening mode is
*5   For the PORT input selector, the name of Universal Port        set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo, Mono, Direct, or
     Option Dock will be displayed.                                 Pure Audio.
                                                                  • Only the Stereo, Direct, Pure Audio, and Mono listening modes
                                                                    can be used with headphones.
 Changing the Input Display
When you connect an       -capable Onkyo component, you            Using Easy Macros
must configure the input display so that     can work
                                                                  Using the Easy macro command in the Easy macro mode,
properly.
                                                                  you can sequentially operate Onkyo components with sim-
This setting can be done only from the front panel.
                                                                  ple commands by simply pressing one button. These com-

 1
                                                                  mands are user-specifiable (➔ 85) and the default actions
       Press TV/CD, GAME or VCR/DVR so that “TV/
                                                                  are described below. Press ACTIVITIES to start the Easy
       CD”, “GAME” or “VCR/DVR” appears on the
                                                                  macro command.
       display.
                                                                  Once the AV receiver has entered the normal macro mode,
                                                                  all of ACTIVITIES will automatically switch to the nor-
                                                                  mal macro mode. In this case, pressing ALL OFF will set
                                                                  only the AV receiver to Standby mode.

                                                                        Press MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC.
                                                                        MY MOVIE (default):
                                                                        1. The TV connected to the AV receiver is turned

 2     Press and hold down TV/CD, GAME or VCR/DVR
       (about 3 seconds) to change the input display.
                                                                           on.
                                                                        2. The Onkyo DVD player connected to the AV
       Repeat this step to select “MD”, “CDR”, “DOCK”                      receiver is turned on.
       or “TAPE”.                                                       3. The AV receiver is turned on.
       For the TV/CD input selector, the input display                  4. The input selector of the AV receiver is set to
       changes in this order:                                              “BD/DVD”.
                  TV/CD → MD → CDR                                      5. The player starts playback.*1
                   →




                       TAPE    →
                                   DOCK
                                           →                            MY TV (default):
                                                                        1. The TV connected to the AV receiver is turned
       For the GAME input selector, the setting changes in
                                                                           on.
       this order:
                                                                        2. The cable set-top box connected to the AV
                   GAME ↔ DOCK
                                                                           receiver is turned on.
       For the VCR/DVR input selector, the setting                      3. The AV receiver is turned on.
       changes in this order:                                           4. The input selector of the AV receiver is set to
                    VCR/DVR ↔ DOCK                                         “CBL/SAT”. You can enjoy cable TV.



 Note
• DOCK can be selected for the TV/CD, GAME or VCR/DVR
  input selector, but not at the same time.
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the
  remote controller for the first time (➔ 80).




                                                                                                                                         En
                                                                                                                                         27
MY MUSIC (default):                                         Audyssey MultEQ® Room Correction
            1. The Onkyo CD player connected to the AV                  and Speaker Setup
               receiver is turned on.
            2. The AV receiver is turned on.                           With the supplied calibrated microphone,
            3. The input selector of the AV receiver is set to         Audyssey MultEQ automatically determines the number
               “TV/CD”.                                                of speakers connected, their size for purposes of bass man-
            4. The player starts playback.                             agement, optimum crossover frequencies to the subwoofer
                                                                       (if present), and distances from the primary listening posi-
             Note
                                                                       tion.
            • Once you start the Easy macro command, you cannot use    Audyssey MultEQ then removes the distortion caused by
              other ACTIVITIES during the execution. If you want to
                                                                       room acoustics by capturing room acoustical problems
              operate other components halfway, press ALL OFF to
              stop and press desired ACTIVITIES.
                                                                       over the listening area in both the frequency and time
                                                                       domain. The result is clear, well-balanced sound for every-
     *1   Depending on the start-up time of Blu-ray Disc/DVD player,   one. Enabling Audyssey MultEQ allows you to also use
          the AV receiver may not activate this playback command. In   Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, which maintains the proper
          this case, press   on the remote controller.                 octave-to-octave balance at any volume level (➔ 50).
                                                                       Before using this function, connect and position all of
     Turning Off the Components                                        your speakers.
                                                                       If “Dynamic EQ” is set to “On” (➔ 50), the “Equalizer”
                                                                       setting will be set to “Audyssey” (➔ 47). On the other
            Press ALL OFF.
                                                                       hand, if it is set to “Off”, the “Dynamic Volume” setting
            1. The connected component stops and turns off.
                                                                       will be set to “Off” (➔ 51).
            2. The AV receiver turns off.
                                                                       It takes about 30 minutes to complete Audyssey MultEQ
            3. The TV connected to the AV receiver turns off
                                                                       Room Correction and Speaker Setup for 6 positions. Total
               (Standby).*1*2
                                                                       measurement time varies depending on the number of
     *1
                                                                       speakers.
          When MY MUSIC is selected, with the default settings, this
          will not be performed.
     *2   With some televisions, the power may not be turned off (or   Using Audyssey MultEQ®
          enter standby).
                                                                       Using Audyssey MultEQ® to create a listening environ-
                                                                       ment in your home theater that all listeners will enjoy,
     Changing Source Component                                         Audyssey MultEQ takes measurements at up to six posi-
     When you want to operate the component that is not                tions within the listening area. Position the microphone at
     assigned as the source component, you can assign it as the        ear height of a seated listener with the microphone tip
     source component. See the table for the default assign-           pointed directly at the ceiling using a tripod. Do not hold
     ment (➔ 85).                                                      the microphone in your hand during measurements as this
                                                                       will produce inaccurate results.
            While holding down REMOTE MODE, press and
                                                                       ■ First measurement position
            hold down MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC
                                                                         Also referred to as the Main Listening Position this
            (about 3 seconds).
                                                                         refers to the most central position where one would nor-
            ACTIVITIES that you pressed flashes twice, indicat-
                                                                         mally sit within the listening environment. MultEQ uses
            ing that the setting has been established.
                                                                         the measurements from this position to calculate
            Examples:                                                    speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum cross-
            When you press MY MUSIC and want to start the                over value for the subwoofer.
            Onkyo Cassette recorder, while holding down TV/
            CD, press and hold down MY MUSIC (about 3 sec-             ■ Second−Sixth measurement positions
            onds) flashes twice.                                         These are the other listening positions (i.e., the places
                                                                         where the other listeners will sit). You can measure up
              Tip
                                                                         to six positions.
            • This procedure can also be performed via onscreen menu
                                                                       The following examples show some typical home theater
              (➔ 85).
                                                                       seating arrangements. Choose the one that best matches
                                                                       yours, and position the microphone accordingly when
     Restoring Default
                                                                       prompted.

      1     While holding down HOME, press and hold down
            ALL OFF until ALL OFF lights (about 3 seconds).

      2     Release HOME and ALL OFF and press ALL OFF
            again.
            ALL OFF flashes twice.
En
28
4   If you use a powered subwoofer(s), adjust the sub-
                                                                             woofer volume level to 75dB.
                                      TV                                     Test tones are played through the subwoofer. Use the
                                                                             volume control on the subwoofer.
                                                                              Note
                                                                             • If your subwoofer does not have a volume control, disre-
                                                                               gard the level displayed and press ENTER to proceed to
                                                                               the next step.
                                                                             • If you set the subwoofer’s volume control to its maximum
        : Listening area                to   : Listening position              and the displayed level is lower than 75 dB, leave the sub-
                                                                               woofer’s volume control at its maximum and press
 Note                                                                          ENTER to proceed to the next step.
• Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise and Radio
  Frequency Interference (RFI) can disrupt the room measure-
                                                                         5   Press ENTER.
                                                                             Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker
  ments. Close windows, televisions, radios, air conditioners, flu-          Setup starts.
  orescent lights, home appliances, light dimmers, or other
                                                                             Test tones are played through each speaker as
  devices. Turn off the cell phone (even if it is not in use) or place
  it away from all audio electronics.
                                                                             Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker
• The microphone picks up test tones which played through each               Setup runs. This process takes a few minutes. Please
  speaker as Audyssey MultEQ® Room Correction and Speaker                    refrain from talking during measurements and do
  Setup run.                                                                 not stand between speakers and the microphone.
• Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup cannot                   Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone
  be performed while a pair of headphones is connected.                      during Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and
                                                                             Speaker Setup, unless you want to cancel the setup.
 1    Turn on the AV receiver and the connected TV.
                                                                         6   Place the setup microphone at the next position,
      On the TV, select the input to which the AV receiver
                                                                             and then press ENTER.
      is connected.
                                                                             Audyssey MultEQ performs more measurements.
 2    Set the speaker setup microphone at the Main Lis-                      This takes a few minutes.

                                                                         7
      tening Position , and connect it to the SETUP
                                                                             When prompted, repeat step 6.
      MIC jack.
      SETUP MIC jack
                                                                         8   Use / to select an option, and then press
                                                                             ENTER.

                                                                                       MultEQ: Auto Setup
                                                                                                     - - Review Speaker Configuration - -
                                                                                     Subwoofer                        Yes
                                                                                     Front                           40Hz                   TV
                                                                                     Center                          40Hz
                                                                                     Surround                       100Hz
                                      Speaker setup microphone                       Front Wide                      None
                                                                                     Front High                     100Hz
                                                                                     Surr Back                      120Hz
                                                                                     Surr Back Ch                     2ch

      The speaker setting menu appears.                                           Save
                                                                                  Cancel

 3    When you’ve finished making the settings, press
      ENTER.                                                                 The options are:
                                                                                Save:
                 MultEQ: Auto Setup
                                                                                  Save the calculated settings and exit
            Speakers Type(Front)                           Normal                 Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker
            Powered Zone2                                  Not Act
            Subwoofer                                         Yes                 Setup.
                                                                                Cancel:
      • If your front speakers are bi-amped, you must                             Cancel Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and
        select “Bi-Amp” in the “Speakers Type(Front)”                             Speaker Setup.
        setting (➔ 45). For hookup information, see “Bi-                      Note
        amping the Front Speakers” (➔ 15).                                   • You can view the calculated settings for the speaker con-
      • If you change “Powered Zone2” setting, refer to                        figuration, speaker distances, and speaker levels by using
        “Setting the Powered Zone 2” for more details                             / .

                                                                         9
        (➔ 71).                                                              Disconnect the speaker setup microphone.
      • If you are using a subwoofer(s), select “Yes” in the
        “Subwoofer” (➔ 46). If not, select “No” and skip
        step 4.


                                                                                                                                                 En
                                                                                                                                                 29
Note                                                              Changing the Speaker Settings Manually
     • When Audyssey       MultEQ® Room Correction and Speaker Setup    You can manually make changes to the settings found dur-
       is complete, the “Equalizer” will be set to “Audyssey” (➔ 47).   ing Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker
       The Audyssey indicator will light (➔ 9).
                                                                        Setup.
     • You can cancel Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and
       Speaker Setup at any point in this procedure simply by discon-   See also:
       necting the setup microphone.                                    • “Speaker Configuration” (➔ 46)
     • Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during                 • “Speaker Distance” (➔ 46)
       Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup.               • “Level Calibration” (➔ 47)
     • If the AV receiver is muted, it will be unmuted automatically
                                                                        • “Equalizer Settings” (➔ 47)
       when Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup
       starts.                                                           Note
     • Changes to the room after Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction        • Please note that THX recommends any THX main speakers be
       and Speaker Setup requires you run Audyssey MultEQ Room            set to “80Hz(THX)”. If you set up your speakers using
       Correction and Speaker Setup again, as room EQ characteristics     Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup,
       may have changed.                                                  please make sure manually that any THX speakers are set to
                                                                          80 Hz (THX) crossover (➔ 46).
     Error Messages                                                     • Sometimes due to the electrical complexities of subwoofers and
                                                                          the interaction with the room, THX recommends setting the level
     While Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker                    and the distance of the subwoofer manually.
     Setup is in progress, one of the error messages below may          • Sometimes due to interaction with the room, you may notice
     appear.                                                              irregular results when setting the level and/or distance of the
                                                                          main speakers. If this happens, THX recommends setting them
                  MultEQ: Auto Setup
                                                                          manually.

                                                                        Using a Powered Subwoofer
                                       Ambient noise is too high.

                                                                        If you’re using a powered subwoofer and it outputs very
                                                                        low-frequency sound at a low volume level, it may not be
                                                                        detected by Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and
              Retry                                                     Speaker Setup.
              Cancel
                                                                        If the “Subwoofer” appears on the “Review Speaker
                                       Error message                    Configuration” screen as “No”, increase the subwoofer’s
                                                                        volume to the half-way point, set it to its highest crossover
     The options are:                                                   frequency, and then try running Audyssey MultEQ Room
          Retry:                                                        Correction and Speaker Setup again. Note that if the vol-
            Try again.                                                  ume is set too high and the sound distorts, detection issues
          Cancel:                                                       may occur, so use an appropriate volume level. If the sub-
            Cancel Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and                  woofer has a low-pass filter switch, set it to Off or Direct.
            Speaker Setup.                                              Refer to your subwoofer’s instruction manual for details.
     • Ambient noise is too high.
        The background noise is too loud. Remove the source of
        the noise and try again.
     • Speaker Matching Error!
        The number of speakers detected was different from
        that of the first measurement. Check the speaker con-
        nection.
     • Writing Error!
        This message appears if saving fails. Try saving again.
        If this message appears after 2 or 3 attempts, contact
        your Onkyo dealer.
     • Speaker Detect Error
        This message appears if a speaker is not detected. “No”
        means that no speaker was detected.
       Tip
     • See “Speaker Configuration” for appropriate settings (➔ 13).




En
30
Listening to the Radio
                                                                ■ Manual tuning mode
 This section describes the procedure using the but-

                                                                1
 tons on the front panel unless otherwise specified.
                                                                     Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator
                                                                     goes off on the display.

                                                                2
 Using the Tuner                                                     Press and hold TUNING / .
With the built-in tuner you can enjoy AM and FM radio                The frequency stops changing when you release the
stations. You can store your favorite stations as presets for        button.
quick selection.                                                     Press the buttons repeatedly to change the frequency
This model changes FM/AM frequency in 200/10kHz (or                  one step at a time.
50/9kHz) steps (➔ 56).
                                                                In manual tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.
Listening to the Radio                                          Tuning into weak FM stereo stations
                                                                If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may be
     Press TUNER to select either “AM” or “FM”.                 impossible to get good reception. In this case, switch to
     In this example, FM has been selected.                     manual tuning mode and listen to the station in mono.
     Each time you press TUNER, the radio band
                                                                ■ Tuning into stations by frequency
     changes between AM and FM.
                                                                You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by enter-
              Band         Frequency                            ing the appropriate frequency.

                                                                1    On the remote controller, press TUNER repeat-
                                                                     edly to select “AM” or “FM”, followed by D.TUN.
     (Actual display depends on the country.)

Tuning into Radio Stations
                                                                     (Actual display depends on the country.)
■ Auto tuning mode
                                                                2    Within 8 seconds, use the number buttons to enter

1    Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator
     lights on the display.
                                                                     the frequency of the radio station.
                                                                     For example, to tune to 87.50 (FM), press 8, 7, 5, 0.

2
                                                                     If you have entered the wrong number, you can retry
     Press TUNING / .
                                                                     after 8 seconds.
     Searching stops when a station is found.

When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights.
When tuned into a stereo FM station, the FM STEREO
indicator lights on the display, as shown.

                                         TUNED
                                             AUTO




                                        FM STEREO




                                                                                                                             En
                                                                                                                             31
Presetting FM/AM Stations                                             Using RDS (excluding North American
                                                                            and Taiwan models)
     You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite
     FM/AM radio stations as presets.
                                                                            RDS works only in areas where RDS broadcasts are
     1       Tune into the FM/AM station that you want to
             store as a preset.
                                                                            available.

             See the previous section.                                     When tuned into an RDS station, the RDS indicator lights.

     2       Press MEMORY.                                                 What is RDS?
             The preset number flashes.
                                                                           RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method of
                                                                           transmitting data in FM radio signals. It was developed by
                                                                           the European Broadcasting Union (EBU) and is available
                                                                           in most European countries. Many FM stations use it these
                                                                           days. In addition to displaying text information, RDS can
     3       While the preset number is flashing (about 8 sec-
                                                                           also help you find radio stations by type (e.g., news, sport,
             onds), use PRESET / to select a preset from 1                 rock, etc.).
             through 40.
                                                                           The AV receiver supports four types of RDS information:
     4       Press MEMORY again to store the station or chan-
             nel.                                                          ■ PS (Program Service)
             The station or channel is stored and the preset num-            When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting PS
             ber stops flashing.                                             information, the station’s name will be displayed. Press-
                                                                             ing DISPLAY will display the frequency for 3 seconds.
             Repeat this procedure for all of your favorite FM/
             AM radio stations.                                            ■ RT (Radio Text)
                                                                             When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text
      Note                                                                   information, the text will be shown on the display as
     • You can name your radio presets for easy identification (➔ 52).       described in the next section.
       Its name is displayed instead of the band and frequency.            ■ PTY (Program Type)
                                                                             This allows you to search for RDS radio stations by type
     Selecting Presets                                                       (➔ 33).
                                                                           ■ TP (Traffic Program)
             To select a preset, use PRESET / on the AV
                                                                             This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that
             receiver, or the remote controller’s CH +/–.
                                                                             broadcast traffic information (➔ 33).
                                                                            Note
       Tip
                                                                           • In some cases, the text characters displayed on the AV receiver
     • You can also use the remote controller’s number buttons to select
                                                                             may not be identical to those broadcast by the radio station. Also,
       a preset directly.
                                                                             unexpected characters may be displayed when unsupported
                                                                             characters are received. This is not a malfunction.
     Deleting Presets                                                      • If the signal from an RDS station is weak, RDS data may be
                                                                             displayed intermittently or not at all.

     1       Select the preset that you want to delete.
                                                                           When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text
             See the previous section.
                                                                           information, the text can be displayed.
     2       While holding down MEMORY, press TUNING
             MODE.                                                         Displaying Radio Text (RT)
             The preset is deleted and its number disappears from
             the display.
                                                                                 Press RT/PTY/TP once.
                                                                                 The RT information scrolls across the display.

                                                                            Note
                                                                           • The message “Waiting” may appear while the AV receiver waits
                                                                             for the RT information.
                                                                           • If the message “No Text Data” appears on the display, no RT
                                                                             information is available.




En
32
Finding Stations by Type (PTY)                                  ■ RDS program types (PTY)

You can search for radio stations by type.                      Type                       Display
                                                                None                       None
1    Press RT/PTY/TP twice.                                     News reports               News
     The current program type appears on the display.           Current affairs            Affairs

2    Use PRESET / to select the type of program                 Information
                                                                Sport
                                                                                           Info
                                                                                           Sport
     you want.
     See the table shown later in this chapter.                 Education                  Educate

3
                                                                Drama                      Drama
     To start the search, press ENTER.
                                                                Culture                    Culture
     The AV receiver searches until it finds a station of
     the type you specified, at which point it stops briefly    Science and technology     Science
     before continuing with the search.                         Varied                     Varied

4
                                                                Pop music                  Pop M
     When a station you want to listen to is found, press
                                                                Rock music                 Rock M
     ENTER.
                                                                Middle of the road music   Easy M
     If no stations are found, the message “Not Found”
     appears.                                                   Light classics             Light M
                                                                Serious classics           Classics
Listening to Traffic News (TP)                                  Other music                Other M
                                                                Weather                    Weather
You can search for stations that broadcast traffic news.        Finance                    Finance
                                                                Children’s programmes      Children
1    Press RT/PTY/TP three times.                               Social affairs             Social
     If the current radio station is broadcasting TP (Traf-     Religion                   Religion
     fic Program), “[TP]” will appear on the display, and
                                                                Phone in                   Phone In
     traffic news will be heard as and when it’s broadcast.
                                                                Travel                     Travel
     If “TP” without square brackets appears, this means
                                                                Leisure                    Leisure
     that the station is not broadcasting TP.
                                                                Jazz music                 Jazz
2    To locate a station that is broadcasting TP, press
     ENTER.
                                                                Country music              Country
                                                                National music             Nation M
     The AV receiver searches until it finds a station that’s
                                                                Oldies music               Oldies
     broadcasting TP.
                                                                Folk music                 Folk M
     If no stations are found, the message “Not Found”
                                                                Documentary                Document
     appears.
                                                                Alarm test                 TEST
                                                                Alarm                      Alarm!




                                                                                                      En
                                                                                                      33
Recording
     This section explains how to record the selected input source to a component with recording capability, and how to record
     audio and video from different sources.

     Connecting a Recording Component
                                                                             3    On the source component, start playback.
                                                                                  If you select another input source during recording,
                                                                                  that input source will be recorded.

                                                                             Recording Separate AV Sources
                                                                             Here you can record audio and video from completely
                                                                             separate sources, allowing you to overdub audio onto your
                                                                             video recordings. This function takes advantage of the fact
                                                                             that when an audio-only input source (TV/CD, TUNER or
                                                                             PHONO) is selected, the video input source remains
                                          L           R
                                                                             unchanged.
                                              AUDIO       VIDEO              In the following example, audio from the CD player con-
                                                IN          IN
                                                                             nected to the TV/CD IN and video from the camcorder
                                        Cassette, CDR, MD,                   connected to the AUX INPUT VIDEO jack are recorded
           VCR, DVD recorder                                                 by the VCR connected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks.
                                                etc.


      Note                                                                                                               Camcorder

     • The AV receiver must be turned on for recording. Recording is
       not possible while it’s in Standby mode.
     • If you want to record directly from your TV or playback VCR to
       the recording VCR without going through the AV receiver, con-
       nect the TV/VCR’s audio and video outputs directly to the
       recording VCR’s audio and video inputs. See the manuals sup-
       plied with your TV and VCR for details.
     • Video signals connected to composite video inputs can be
       recorded only via composite video outputs. If your TV/VCR is
       connected to a composite video input, the recording VCR must
       be connected to a composite video output.
     • The surround sound and DSP listening modes cannot be
       recorded.
     • Copy-protected Blu-ray Disc/DVDs cannot be recorded.
     • Sources connected to a digital input cannot be recorded. Only
       analog inputs can be recorded.
     • DTS signals will be recorded as noise, so don’t attempt analog
       recording of DTS CDs or LDs.
     • While the listening mode is set to Pure Audio, no image is pro-
       vided because the power is turned off for the video circuit. If you
                                                                                             CD player                VCR
       want to make recordings, select other listening mode.
                                                                                                                      : Video signal
     AV Recording                                                                                                     : Audio signal

     Audio sources can be recorded to a recorder (e.g., cassette

                                                                             1
     deck, CDR, MD) connected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks.                           Prepare the camcorder and CD player for play-
     Video sources can be recorded to a video recorder (e.g.,                     back.
     VCR, DVD recorder) connected to the VCR/DVR OUT
     jack.                                                                   2    Prepare the VCR for recording.


     1     Use the input selector buttons to select the source               3    Press AUX input selector.
           that you want to record.
           You can watch the source while recording. The AV                  4    Press TV/CD input selector.
           receiver’s MASTER VOLUME control has no effect                         This selects the CD player as the audio source, but
           on recording.                                                          leaves the camcorder as the video source.

     2     On your recorder, start recording.                                5    Start recording on the VCR and start playback on
                                                                                  the camcorder and CD player.
                                                                                  The video from the camcorder and the audio from
En                                                                                the CD player are recorded by the VCR.
34
Using the Listening Modes
 Selecting Listening Modes
See “About Listening Modes” for detailed information about the listening modes (➔ 36).

Listening Mode Buttons


                    Press RECEIVER first.




                                                                     PURE AUDIO        MOVIE/TV, MUSIC, GAME, THX




      MUSIC                                  GAME
    MOVIE/TV                                 THX




  MOVIE/TV button                                                   PURE AUDIO button
  This button selects the listening modes intended for use          This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.
  with movies and TV.                                               When this mode is selected, the AV receiver’s display
  MUSIC button                                                      and video circuitry are turned off. Only video signals
  This button selects the listening modes intended for use          input through HDMI input can be output from an HDMI
  with music.                                                       output(s). Pressing this button again will select the pre-
  GAME button                                                       vious listening mode.
  This button selects the listening modes intended for use
  with video games.
  THX button
  This button selects the THX listening modes.

 • The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes can only be selected if your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player is connected to the AV
   receiver with a digital audio connection (coaxial, optical, or HDMI).
 • The listening modes you can select depends on the format of the input signal. To check the format, see “Displaying Source
   Information” (➔ 25).
 • While a pair of headphones is connected, you can select the following listening modes: Pure Audio, Mono, Direct, and Stereo.
 • The listening modes cannot be used while you are listening to sound through your TV speakers coming from components
   connected to the AV receiver (“TV Sp On” appears on the front panel).




                                                                                                                                  En
                                                                                                                                  35
About Listening Modes
     The AV receiver’s listening modes can transform your listening room into a movie theater or concert hall, with high fidel-
     ity and stunning surround sound.

     Explanatory Notes



      SP LAYOUT




                                                                                                  Front speakers
                                                                                                  Center speaker
       LISTENING                                                                                  Surround speakers
           MODE                                                                                   Subwoofer(s)
                                                                                                  Surround back speakers
                                                                                                  Front high speakers
                                                                                                  Front wide speakers

     ■ Input Source
     The following audio formats are supported by the listening mode.

                   This is mono (monophonic) sound.
                   This is stereo (stereophonic) sound. Two independent audio signal channels are reproduced through two
                   speakers.
                   This is 5.1-channel surround sound. This surround system has five main channels of sound and a sixth sub-
                   woofer channel (called the point-one channel).
                   This is 7.1-channel surround sound. This is a further sound enhancement to 5.1 channel sound with two
                   additional speakers that provide greater sound envelopment and more accurate positioning of sounds.
                   This is DTS-ES surround sound. This surround system can produce a discrete or a matrix-encoded sixth
                   channel from existing DTS 5.1 encoded material.
                   This is Dolby Digital EX surround sound. This provides a center back surround channel from 5.1-channel
                   sources.

     ■ Speaker Layout
     The illustration shows which speakers are activated in each channel. See “Speaker Configuration” for the speaker setup
     (➔ 46).




     Press RECEIVER followed by SP LAYOUT repeatedly to select the speakers you want to use; front high, front wide, or
     surround back.

En
36
Listening Modes

Listening Mode             Description                                                                     Input    Speaker
                                                                                                           Source   Layout
Pure Audio                 In this mode, the display and video circuitry are turned off, minimizing pos-
                           sible noise sources for the ultimate in high-fidelity audio reproduction. (As               *1
Pu r eAAu d i o
                           the video circuitry is turned off, only video signals input through HDMI
                           input can be output from an HDMI output(s).
Direct                 In this mode, audio from the input source is output without surround-sound
                       processing. The “Speaker Configuration” (presence of speakers),
D i r e c t d i oPPoPP
                       “Speaker Distance” and “A/V Sync” settings are enabled, but much of the
                       processing set via HOME is disabled. See “Advanced Setup” for more
                       details (➔ 41).
Stereo                     Sound is output by the front left and right speakers and subwoofer.
S t e r e o d i oPPoPP
Mono                     Use this mode when watching an old movie with a mono soundtrack, or use
                         it with the foreign language soundtracks recorded in the left and right chan-
Mo n o e o d i o PP o PP
                         nels of some movies. It can also be used with DVDs or other sources contain-
                         ing multiplexed audio, such as karaoke DVDs.
Multichannel               This mode is for use with PCM multichannel sources.
Mu l t i c h i o PP o PP
Dolby Pro Logic IIx*2 Dolby Pro Logic IIx expands any 2-channel source for 7.1-channel play-
Dolby Pro Logic II      back. It provides a very natural and seamless surround-sound experience that
                        fully envelops the listener. As well as music and movies, video games can
P L bMo v i e PP PP
                        also benefit from the dramatic spatial effects and vivid imaging. If you’re not
                        using any surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II will be used instead
P L bMu s i c PP PP
                        of Dolby Pro Logic IIx.
                        • Dolby PLIIx Movie
P L bGame c PP c PP
                          Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) movie (e.g.,
                          TV, DVD, VHS).
P L x GM o v i e P    P
                        • Dolby PLIIx Music
P L x GM u s i c P    P
                          Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) music source
                          (e.g., CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD).
P L x G G a m e c P c P • Dolby PLIIx Game
                          Use this mode with video games, especially those that bear the Dolby Pro
                          Logic II logo.
                           • Dolby PLIIx Movie and Dolby PLIIx Music
                             These modes use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx modes to expand 5.1-channel
                             sources for 7.1-channel playback.
Dolby Pro Logic IIz        Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height is designed to more effectively use existing                     *3
Height                     program material when height channel speaker outputs are present. Dolby
                           Pro Logic IIz Height can be used to upmix a variety of sources from movies
PL    z GH e i g h t
                           and music, but are particularly well-suited to upmix game content.
Dolby EX                 These modes expand 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-channel playback.                          *4
                         They’re especially suited to Dolby EX soundtracks that include a matrix-
Do l b y c EXoPPoPP
                         encoded surround back channel. The additional channel adds an extra dimen-
                         sion and provides an enveloping surround sound experience, perfect for
Do l b y cD i EXP      P
                         rotating and fly-by sound effects.
Dolby Digital        In this mode, audio from the input source is output without surround-sound
                     processing. “Speaker Configuration” (presence of speakers), “Speaker
Do l b y cD i oPPoPP
                     Distance”, “A/V Sync” and much of the processing set via HOME are
Dolby Digital Plus*5 enabled. See “Advanced Setup” for more details (➔ 41).
Do l b y cD+ oPPoPP                                                                                                           *1

Dolby TrueHD
DD T r u e HDP P P P P P
   l                                                                                                                          *1

DTS
DTS        d i oPPoPP




                                                                                                                                   En
                                                                                                                                   37
Listening Mode              Description                                                                    Input    Speaker
                                                                                                                Source   Layout
     DTS-HD High                 (Continued from the previous page.)
     Resolution Audio                                                                                                              *1
     D T S – HD   HR
     DTS-HD Master
     Audio                                                                                                                         *1
     D T S – HD MS T R
     DTS Express
     DTS     Exp r ess
     DSD*6
     DSD
     DTS 96/24*7         This mode is for use with DTS 96/24 sources. This is high-resolution DTS
                         with a 96 kHz sampling rate and 24-bit resolution, providing superior fidel-
     DTSe 9 6 / 2 4PP PP
                         ity. Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS 96/24 logo.
     DTS-ES Discrete*8           This mode is for use with DTS-ES Discrete soundtracks, which use a dis-                    *4
                                 crete surround back channel for true 6.1/7.1-channel playback. The seven
     ESSD i s c r e t e
                                 totally separate audio channels provide better spatial imaging and 360-
                                 degree sound localization, perfect for sounds that pan across the surround
                                 channels. Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS-ES logo, especially those with
                                 a DTS-ES Discrete soundtrack.
     DTS-ES Matrix*8             This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix soundtracks, which use a matrix-                   *4
                                 encoded back-channel for 6.1/7.1-channel playback. Use it with DVDs that
     E S SM a t r i x t e    t e
                                 bear the DTS-ES logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Matrix soundtrack.
     DTS Neo:6                  This mode expands any 2-channel source for up to 7.1-channel playback. It
                                uses seven full-bandwidth channels of matrix decoding for matrix-encoded
     Ne o : 6 t r i x t e x t e
                                material, providing a very natural and seamless surround sound experience
                                that fully envelops the listener.
     Ne o : 6 t C i n ema t e
                r x t ex
                                • Neo:6 Cinema
                                  Use this mode with any stereo movie (e.g., TV, DVD, VHS).
     Ne o : 6 t Mu s i c
                                • Neo:6 Music
                                  Use this mode with any stereo music source (e.g., CD, radio, cassette, TV,
                                  VHS, DVD).
                                 This mode uses Neo:6 to expand 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-channel                     *4
                                 playback.
     Audyssey DSX*9              Audyssey DSX™ is a scalable system that adds new speakers to improve sur-
                                 round impression. Starting with a 5.1 system Audyssey DSX first adds Wide
     Aud y s s e y     DSX
                                 channels for the biggest impact on envelopment. Research in human hearing
                                 has proven that information from the Wide channels is much more critical in
     PL    bMo v i e    DSX
                                 the presentation of a realistic soundstage than then Back Surround channels
                                 found in traditional 7.1 systems. Audyssey DSX then creates a pair of Height
     PL    bMu s i c    DSX
                                 channels to reproduce the next most important acoustical and perceptual
                                 cues. In addition to these new Wide and Height channels, Audyssey DSX
     PL    bGame       DSX
                                 applies Surround Envelopment Processing to enhance the blend between the
                                 front and surround channels.
     N e o : 6 CC i n t DS X e
               t r x ex t
                                 The combination of Dolby Pro Logic II and Audyssey DSX modes can be
     Ne o : 6 t Mu s    DSX      used.
                                 The combination of Neo:6 Cinema/Music and Audyssey DSX modes can
                                 be used.




En
38
Listening Mode             Description                                                                    Input    Speaker
                                                                                                          Source   Layout
THX                        Founded by George Lucas, THX develops stringent standards that ensure
                           movies are reproduced in movie theaters and home theaters just as the direc-
THX eC i n ema P       P
                           tor intended. THX Modes carefully optimize the tonal and spatial character-
                           istics of the soundtrack for reproduction in the home-theater environment.
NHX eMu s i c a P x a P
Teo : 6 t r x t e t e
                           They can be used with 2-channel matrixed and multichannel sources. Sur-
                           round back speaker output depends on the source material and the selected
THX eGame s a P a P
                           listening mode.
                           • THX Cinema
N H X e S 2 mC x n e m a e
Teo : 6 t r i i t x t
                             THX Cinema mode corrects theatrical soundtracks for playback in a home
                             theater environment. In this mode, THX Loudness Plus is configured for
T H X e S 2 mM u s i c
                             cinema levels and Re-EQ, Timbre Matching, and Adaptive Decorrelation
T H X e S 2 mG a m e s
                             are active.
                           • THX Music
THX e S u r r a EX a         THX Music mode is tailored for listening to music, which is typically mas-
                             tered at significantly higher levels than movies. In this mode, THX Loud-
                             ness Plus is configured for music playback and only Timbre Matching is
                             active.
                           • THX Games
                             THX Games mode is meant for spatially accurate playback of game audio,
                             which is often mixed similarly to movies but in a smaller environment. THX
                             Loudness Plus is configured for game audio levels, with Timbre Matching
                             active.
                           The combination of Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx*2 and THX Cinema/Music/
                           Games modes can be used.


                           The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height*3 and THX Cinema/
                           Music/Games modes can be used.




                           The combination of DTS Neo:6 and THX Cinema/Music/Games modes
                           can be used.



                           • THX Select2 Cinema
                             This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 7.1- channel playback. It does
                             this by analyzing the composition of the surround source, optimizing the
                             ambient and directional sounds to produce the surround back channel out-
                             put.
                           • THX Select2 Music
                             This mode is designed for use with music. It expands 5.1-channel sources
                             for 7.1-channel playback.
                           • THX Select2 Games
                             This mode is designed for use with video games. It can expand 5.1-channel
                             sources for 6.1/7.1-channel playback.
                           • THX Surround EX
                             This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1- channel playback. It’s
                             especially suited to Dolby Digital EX sources. THX Surround EX, also
                             known as Dolby Digital Surround EX, is a joint development between
                             Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd.




                                                                                                                             En
                                                                                                                             39
Onkyo-Original DSP Listening Modes

     Listening Mode              Description                                                                       Input    Speaker
                                                                                                                   Source   Layout
     Orchestra                   Suitable for classical or operatic music, this mode emphasizes the surround                      *10
                                 channels in order to widen the stereo image, and simulates the natural rever-
     Or ches t r a
                                 beration of a large hall.
     Unplugged                   Suitable for acoustic instruments, vocals, and jazz, this mode emphasizes the
                                 front stereo image, giving the impression of being right in front of the stage.
      Un p l u g g e d
     Studio-Mix                  Suitable for rock or pop music, listening to music in this mode creates a
                                 lively sound field with a powerful acoustic image, like being at a club or rock
      S t u d i o –M i x
                                 concert.
     TV Logic                    This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV shows produced in a TV studio,
                                 surround effects to the entire sound, and clarity to voices.
      TV      Log i c
     Game-RPG                    Use this mode when playing role playing game discs.
     G ame – RPG
     Game-Action                 Use this mode when playing action game discs.
     Game – A c t i o n
     Game-Rock                   Use this mode when playing rock game discs.
     Game –Ro c k
     Game-Sports                 Use this mode when playing sports game discs.
     Game – S p o r t s
     All Ch Stereo               Ideal for background music, this mode fills the entire listening area with ste-                        *10
                                 reo sound from the front, surround, and surround back speakers.
      A l l    Ch   S t e r eo
     Full Mono                   In this mode, all speakers output the same sound in mono, so the sound you
                                 hear is the same regardless of where you are within the listening room.
      Fu l l    Mo n o
     T-D (Theater-               With this mode you can enjoy a virtual surround sound even with only two or
     Dimensional)                three speakers. This works by controlling how sounds reach the listener’s left
                                 and right ears. Good results may not be possible if there’s too much reverb,
      T–D
                                 so we recommend that you use this mode in an environment with little or no
                                 natural reverb.


      Note
     *1  Based on the audio channels contained in the source, the corresponding speakers will output the sound.
     *2  If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
     *3 Surround back and front wide speakers are not supported.
     *4 Front high and front wide speakers are not supported.
     *5 For the Blu-ray Discs, Dolby Digital is used in a 3.1/5.1-channel speaker system.
     *6 AV receiver can input the DSD signal from HDMI IN. Setting the output setting on the player side to PCM might obtain a better
         sound according to the player. In that case, set the output setting on the player side to PCM.
     *7 DTS is used depending on the configuration of the AV receiver (e.g., Audyssey Dynamic EQ® is on).
     *8 If there are no surround back speakers, DTS is used.
     *9 • This listening mode can be selected only when all the following conditions are satisfied:
            a. Center speaker is connected.
            b. Either of front high or front wide speakers is connected.
         • Output can be switched between front high or front wide speakers by pressing SP LAYOUT [depending on the
            “Speaker Configuration” setting (➔ 46)].
     *10 Output can be switched between front high, front wide or surround back speakers by pressing SP LAYOUT [depending on the
         “Speaker Configuration” setting (➔ 46)].
     • The listening modes cannot be selected with some source formats.




En
40
Advanced Operations

Advanced Setup
On-screen Setup Menus                                                          Common Procedures in Setup Menu

This manual describes the procedure using the
remote controller unless otherwise specified.
                                                                                                                                  RECEIVER


                  MENU
                   1.     Input/Output Assign                                          ENTER
                                                                                       / / /
                   2.     Speaker Setup
                   3.     Audio Adjust
                   4.     Source Setup                                                SETUP                                       RETURN
                   5.     Listening Mode Preset
                   6.     Miscellaneous
                   7.     Hardware Setup
                   8.     Remote Controller Setup
                   9.     Lock Setup
   Input/Output Assign                      Miscellaneous                     The on-screen setup menus appear on the connected TV
   (➔ 42)                                   (➔ 55)                            and provide a convenient way to change the AV receiver’s
                                                                              various settings. Settings are organized into 9 categories
        1. Input/Output Assign                   6. Miscellaneous             on the main menu.
   1.
   2.
        Monitor Out
        HDMI Input
                                            1. Volume Setup
                                            2. OSD Setup
                                                                              Carry out the settings by using the on-screen display.
   3.   Component Video Input


                                                                              1
   4.   Digital Audio Input
   5.   Analog Audio Input                                                          Press RECEIVER followed by SETUP.
   Speaker Setup                            Hardware Setup                          The following menu appears.
   (➔ 45)                                   (➔ 55)
                                                                                                      MENU

        2. Speaker Setup                         7. Hardware Setup                                   1. Input/Output Assign
                                                                                                     2. Speaker Setup
   1.   Speaker Settings                    1.   Remote ID                                           3. Audio Adjust
   2.   Speaker Configuration               2.   Multi Zone                                          4. Source Setup
   3.   Speaker Distance                    3.   Tuner                                               5. Listening Mode Preset
   4.   Level Calibration                   4.   HDMI                                                6. Miscellaneous
   5.   Equalizer Settings                  5.   Auto Power Down                                     7. Hardware Setup
   6.   THX Audio Setup                     6.   Network                                             8. Remote Controller Setup
                                            7.   Firmware Update                                     9. Lock Setup

   Audio Adjust                             Remote Controller
   (➔ 49)                                   Setup (➔ 80)                              Tip
                                                                                    • If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the appropri-
        3. Audio Adjust                          8. Remote Controller Setup           ate external input is selected on your TV.

                                                                              2
   1.   Multiplex/Mono                      1. Remote Mode Setup
   2.
   3.
        Dolby
        DTS
                                            2. Activities Setup                     Use / to select a menu, and then press ENTER.
   4.   Audyssey DSX

                                                                              3
   5.   Theater-Dimensional
   6.   LFE Level                                                                   Use / to select target and then press ENTER.

   Source Setup (➔ 50)                      Lock Setup (➔ 58)                 4     Use / to select option and use / to change
                                                                                    the setting.
        4. Source Setup                          9. Lock Setup
                                                                                    Press SETUP to close the menu.
   1.   Audyssey                            Setup
   2.   IntelliVolume                                                               Press RETURN to return to the previous menu.
   3.   A/V Sync
   4.   Name Edit
   5.   Picture Adjust

                                                                               Note
   Listening Mode Preset
                                                                              • This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver by
   (➔ 54)                                                                       using SETUP, arrow buttons, and ENTER.
                                                                              • During Audyssey MultEQ® Room Correction and Speaker
        5. Listening Mode Preset
                                                                                Setup, messages, etc., that are displayed on the TV screen will
   1.   BD/DVD
   2.   VCR/DVR                                                                 appear in the Display.
   3.   CBL/SAT
   4.   GAME
   5.   PC
   6.   AUX




                                                                                                                                                  En
                                                                                                                                                  41
Explanatory Notes                                           Note
                                                                • You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI output and
                Main Menu             Speaker Setup               COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT and have the AV
                                                                  receiver upconvert the picture resolution as necessary to match
              ■ Subwoofer                                         the resolution supported by your TV (➔ 42).
                 Yes:                                           • See “Video Connection Formats” (➔ 22) for charts showing
                  Select if a subwoofer is connected.             how the “Monitor Out” and “Resolution” settings (➔ 43)
                 No:                                              affect the video signal flow through the AV receiver.
                  Select if no subwoofer is connected.          ■ Monitor Out
                                                                (North American and Taiwan models)
              Menu selection
                                                                   Analog:
              Setting target                                         Select this if your TV is connected to the COMPO-
              Setting options (default setting underlined)           NENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT, MONITOR OUT
                                                                     S, or MONITOR OUT V.
      Input/Output Assign                                          HDMI:
                                                                     Select this if your TV is connected to the HDMI
      Main Menu             Input/Output Assign                      OUT.
                                                                (European, Australian and Asian models)
                                                                   Analog:
     Monitor Out
                                                                     Select this if your TV is connected to the COMPO-
     If you connect your TV to HDMI output, “Monitor Out”            NENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT, MONITOR OUT
     setting is automatically set so that the onscreen setup         S, or MONITOR OUT V.
     menus are displayed and composite video, S-Video, and         HDMI Main:
     component video sources are upconverted* and output.            Select this if your TV is connected to the HDMI
                                                                     OUT MAIN.
        Composite video, S-Video,                                  HDMI Sub:
           component video                  HDMI                     Select this if your TV is connected to the HDMI
                                IN                                   OUT SUB.
                                                                   Both:
                                                                     Select this if your TVs are connected to the HDMI
                                                                     OUT MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB. Video signals
                               OUT
                                                                     are output from both HDMI outputs at the resolution
        Composite video, S-Video,           HDMI                     supported by both TVs.
           component video
                                                                   Both(Main):
                                                                     Select this if your TVs are connected to the HDMI
     On the “Monitor Out” settings, you can select whether or        OUT MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB. Video signals
     not to have the video sources’ images output through the        are output from both HDMI outputs but HDMI OUT
     HDMI output, as well as whether to have the onscreen            MAIN will become a priority; depending on the reso-
     setup menu output through the HDMI output or through            lution, video signals may not be output from HDMI
     an analog output.                                               OUT SUB.
                                                                   Both(Sub):
     If you connect your TV to the COMPONENT VIDEO                   Select this if your TVs are connected to the HDMI
     MONITOR OUT (not the HDMI output), “Monitor Out”                OUT MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB. Video signals
     setting is automatically set so that the onscreen setup         are output from both HDMI outputs but HDMI OUT
     menus are displayed and composite video and S-Video             SUB will become a priority; depending on the reso-
     sources are upconverted* and output.                            lution, video signals may not be output from HDMI
                                                                     OUT MAIN.
       Composite video, S-Video       Component video
                                IN




                              OUT
       Composite video, S-Video   Component video




En
42
Note                                                               ■ Resolution
                                                                    You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI output
• (North American and Taiwan models) If not connected to
  HDMI OUT, the “Monitor Out” setting will be automatically         and COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT and have
  switched to “Analog” (➔ 23).                                      the AV receiver upconvert the picture resolution as neces-
  (European, Australian and Asian models) If not connected to       sary to match the resolution supported by your TV.
  the same output you have selected in the “Monitor Out” setting,       Through*1:
  the “Monitor Out” setting will be automatically switched to             Select this to pass video through the AV receiver at
  “Analog” (➔ 23).                                                        the same resolution and with no conversion.
• When you select other than “Analog”, the onscreen setup menus
                                                                        Auto*2:
  are output by only the HDMI output. If you’re not using the
  HDMI output and select settings by mistake and the menus
                                                                          Select this to have the AV receiver automatically
  disappear, press AV receiver’s MONITOR OUT to select                    convert video at resolutions not supported by your
  “Analog”.                                                               TV.
• (European, Australian and Asian models) For Deep Color                480p (480p/576p):
  output, if the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Both(Main)” or          Select this for 480p or 576p output and video con-
  “Both(Sub)”, the number of bit may be limited due to the capa-          version as necessary.
  bility of your TV connected to a priority output.                     720p:
  Changing “Monitor Out” setting manually                                 Select this for 720p output and video conversion as
                                                                          necessary.
   1    Press MONITOR OUT on the front panel.                           1080i:
                                                                          Select this for 1080i output and video conversion as
        The current setting is displayed.
        (North American and Taiwan models)                                necessary.
                                                                        1080p*2:
                                                                          Select this for 1080p output and video conversion as
                                                                          necessary.
                                                                         Tip
        (European, Australian and Asian models)                     • The “Resolution” setting can be set for each “Monitor Out”
                                                                      setting.
                                                                     Note
                                                                    • (European, Australian and Asian models) If the “Monitor

   2
                                                                      Out” setting is set to “Both”, this setting is fixed at “Auto”.
        Press MONITOR OUT on the AV receiver
                                                                    *1 PC IN (Analog RGB) input signal is output at 720p resolution
        repeatedly to select:
                                                                        when the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog” (➔ 43)
        (North American and Taiwan models)                              and the “Resolution” setting is set to “Through”.
             Analog or HDMI                                         *2 These settings are not available when the “Monitor Out” set-
        (European, Australian and Asian models)                         ting is set to “Analog”.
             Analog, HDMI Main, HDMI Sub, Both,
             Both(Main) or Both(Sub)                                HDMI Input
        For details on each item, in the “Monitor Out”              If you connect a video component to an HDMI input, you
        settings (➔ 42).                                            must assign that input to an input selector. For example, if
                                                                    you connect your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player to HDMI
                                                                    IN 2, you must assign “HDMI2” to the “BD/DVD” input
                                                                    selector.
                                                                    If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with an
                                                                    HDMI cable, composite video, S-video and component
                                                                    video sources can be upconverted* and output by the
                                                                    HDMI output*1. You can set this for each input selector by
                                                                    selecting the “- - - - -” option.
                                                                         Composite video, S-Video,
                                                                            component video                      HDMI
                                                                                                      IN




                                                                                                 OUT
                                                                         Composite video, S-Video,               HDMI
                                                                            component video


                                                                    *1    This applies only when “Monitor Out” setting is set to other
                                                                          than “Analog” (➔ 42).
                                                                                                                                         En
                                                                                                                                         43
Here are the default assignments.                                     Component Video Input
     Input selector                    Default assignment                  If you connect a video component to a component video
     BD/DVD                            HDMI1                               input, you must assign that input to an input selector. For
     VCR/DVR                           HDMI2                               example, if you connect your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player to
                                                                           COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2, you must assign “IN2” to
     CBL/SAT                           HDMI3
                                                                           the “BD/DVD” input selector.
     GAME                              HDMI4
                                                                           If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with a
     PC                                HDMI5
                                                                           component video cable, you can set the AV receiver so
     AUX                               FRONT (Fixed)
                                                                           that composite video and S-Video sources are upcon-
     TUNER                             - - - - - (Fixed)                   verted* and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO MONI-
     TV/CD                             -----                               TOR OUT*1. You can set this for each input selector by
     PHONO                             -----                               selecting the “- - - - -” option.
     PORT                              -----                               *1   Only when “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog” (➔ 42).

     ■ BD/DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC,                                      Composite video, S-Video            Component video
        TV/CD, PHONO, PORT                                                                               IN
          HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4, HDMI5,
          HDMI6:
            Select the HDMI IN to which the video component
                                                                                                      OUT
            has been connected.                                                 Composite video, S-Video            Component video
          - - - - -:
            Output composite video, S-Video, and component                 Here are the default assignments.
            video sources from the HDMI output. The video out-
            put signal from the HDMI output is the one config-             Input selector                     Default assignment
            ured in “Component Video Input” (➔ 44).                        BD/DVD                             IN1
     • “AUX” is used only for input from the front panel.                  VCR/DVR                            -----
     • Each HDMI input cannot be assigned to two input selec-              CBL/SAT                            IN2
       tors or more. When HDMI1 - HDMI6 have already                       GAME                               -----
       been assigned, you must set first any unused input selec-           PC                                 -----
       tors to “- - - - -” or you will be unable to assign HDMI1           AUX                                -----
       - HDMI6 to input selector.                                          TUNER                              - - - - - (Fixed)
      Note                                                                 TV/CD                              -----
     • For composite video, S-Video, and component video upconver-         PHONO                              -----
       sion for the HDMI output, the “Monitor Out” setting must be         PORT                               -----
       set to other than “Analog” (➔ 42), and the “HDMI Input” set-
       ting must be set to “- - - - -”. See “Video Connection Formats”     ■ BD/DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, AUX,
       for more information on video signal flow and upconversion            TV/CD, PHONO, PORT
       (➔ 22).                                                                IN1, IN2:
     • If no video component is connected to HDMI output (even if the           Select a corresponding component video input that
       HDMI input is assigned), the AV receiver selects the video
                                                                                the video component has been connected.
       source based on the setting of “Component Video Input”.
     • When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as explained          - - - - -:
       here, the same HDMI IN will be set as a priority in the “Digital         Select if you are using HDMI output, rather than the
       Audio Input” (➔ 45). In this case, if you want to use the coaxial        COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT, for the
       or optical audio input, make the selection in the Audio Selector         output from composite video, S-Video, and compo-
       in the Home menu (➔ 26).                                                 nent video sources.
     • “TUNER” selector cannot be assigned and is fixed at the
                                                                            Note
       “- - - - -” option.
     • If you connect a component (such as UP-A1 Dock that seated          • For composite video and S-Video upconversion for the COM-
       iPod) to UNIVERSAL PORT jack, you cannot assign any input             PONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT, the “Monitor Out” set-
       to “PORT” selector.                                                   ting must be set to “Analog” (➔ 42), and the “Component
     • Do not assign the component connected with the HDMI input to          Video Input” setting must be set to “- - - - -”. See “Video Con-
       “TV/CD” selector when you set “TV Control” setting to “On”            nection Formats” for more information on video signal flow and
       (➔ 57). Otherwise, appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics              upconversion (➔ 22).
       Control) operation will not be guaranteed.                          • (North American and Taiwan models) If not connected to
                                                                             HDMI OUT, the “Monitor Out” setting will be automatically
                                                                             switched to “Analog”.
                                                                             (European, Australian and Asian models) If not connected to
                                                                             the same output you have selected in the “Monitor Out” setting,
                                                                             the “Monitor Out” setting will be automatically switched to
                                                                             “Analog” (➔ 42).
                                                                           • If you connect a component (such as UP-A1 Dock that seated
En                                                                           iPod) to the UNIVERSAL PORT jack, you cannot assign any
                                                                             input to “PORT” selector.
44
Digital Audio Input                                                      Speaker Setup
If you connect a component to a digital audio input, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example, if             Main menu                Speaker Setup
you connect your CD player to the OPTICAL IN 1, you
                                                                         Some of the settings in this section are set automatically
must assign “OPT1” to the “TV/CD” input selector.
                                                                         by Audyssey MultEQ® Room Correction and Speaker
Here are the default assignments.                                        Setup function (➔ 28).
Input selector                     Default assignment                   Here you can check the settings made by
BD/DVD                             COAX1                                Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup
VCR/DVR                            COAX2                                function, or set them manually, which is useful if you
CBL/SAT                            COAX3                                change one of the connected speakers after using
GAME                               OPT1                                 Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup
PC                                 -----                                function.
AUX                                FRONT (Fixed)                         Note
TUNER                              - - - - - (Fixed)                    • These settings are disabled when:
TV/CD                              OPT2                                   – a pair of headphones is connected, or
PHONO                              -----                                  – the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (➔ 56) and an
PORT                               -----                                    input selector other than HDMI is selected.

■ BD/DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC,                                   Speaker Settings
   TV/CD, PHONO, PORT
    COAX1, COAX2, COAX3, OPT1, OPT2:
      Select a corresponding digital audio input that the                If you change these settings, you must run
      component has been connected.                                      Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker
                                                                         Setup again (➔ 28).
    - - - - -:
      Select if the component is connected to an analog                 If the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or more but less
      audio input.                                                      than 6, set the minimum speaker impedance to 4 ohms.
• “AUX” is used only for input from the front panel.                    If you bi-amp the front speakers, you must change the
 Note                                                                   “Speakers Type(Front)” setting (➔ 45).
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector in “HDMI             For hookup information, see “Bi-amping the Front Speak-
  Input” (➔ 43), the same HDMI IN will be set as a priority in this     ers” (➔ 15).
  assignment. In this case, if you want to use the coaxial or optical
                                                                         Note
  audio input, make the selection in the Audio Selector in the
  Home menu.                                                            • When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to drive up to
• Available sampling rate for PCM signals from a digital input            5.1 speakers in the main room.
  (optical and coaxial) is 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz/16, 20, 24 bit.       • Before you change these settings, turn down the volume.
• If you connect a component (such as UP-A1 Dock that seated            ■ Speaker Impedance
  iPod) to the UNIVERSAL PORT jack, you cannot assign any
  input to “PORT” selector.
                                                                           4ohms:
                                                                            Select if the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or
Analog Audio Input                                                          more but less than 6.
                                                                           6ohms:
Some DVD players output the LFE channel from their                          Select if the impedances of all speakers are between
analog subwoofer output at 15 dB higher than normal.                        6 and 16 ohms.
With this setting, you can change the AV receiver’s sub-
woofer sensitivity to match your DVD player.                            ■ Speakers Type(Front)
                                                                           Normal:
■ Subwoofer Input Sensitivity                                               Select this if you’ve connected your front speakers
   0dB to 15dB in 5 dB step.                                                normally.
 Note                                                                      Bi-Amp:
• This setting only affects signals connected to the AV receiver’s          Select this if you’ve bi-amped your front speakers.
  multichannel input SUBWOOFER jack.                                     Note
• If you find that your subwoofer is too loud, try the 10 dB or
                                                                        • Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if “Speakers Type(Front)” is
  15 dB setting.
                                                                          set to “Bi-Amp” (➔ 71).

                                                                        ■ Powered Zone 2
                                                                        See “Setting the Powered Zone 2” (➔ 71).



                                                                                                                                           En
                                                                                                                                           45
Speaker Configuration                                                  ■ Surr Back Ch
                                                                               1ch:
                                                                                Select if only one surround back speaker is con-
      This setting is set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ®                     nected.
      Room Correction and Speaker Setup function (➔ 28).                       2ch:
                                                                                Select if two (left and right) surround back speakers
     With these settings, you can specify which speakers are                    are connected.
     connected and a crossover frequency for each speaker.
     Specify “Full Band” for speakers that can output low fre-               Note
     quency bass sounds adequately, for example, speakers                   • If the “Surr Back” setting is set to “None” (➔ 46), this setting
     with a good sized woofer. For smaller speakers, specify a                cannot be selected.
     crossover frequency. Sounds below the crossover fre-                   ■ LPF of LFE
     quency will be output by the subwoofer instead of the                    (Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel)
     speaker. Refer to your speaker’s manuals to determine the                 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz
     optimum crossover frequencies. If you set up your speak-
                                                                              With this setting, you can specify the cutoff frequency
     ers using Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and
                                                                              of the LFE channel’s low-pass filter (LPF), which can
     Speaker Setup, please make sure manually that any THX
                                                                              be used to filter out unwanted hum. The LPF only
     speakers are set to “80Hz(THX)” crossover.
                                                                              applies to sources that use the LFE channel.
     ■ Subwoofer
                                                                            ■ Double Bass
        Yes:
         Select if a subwoofer is connected.
                                                                             This setting is NOT set automatically by
        No:
                                                                             Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup
         Select if no subwoofer is connected.
                                                                             function (➔ 28).
     ■ Front
        Full Band                                                             With the Double Bass function, you can boost bass out-
        40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz,                             put by feeding bass sounds from the front left, right, and
        200Hz                                                                 center channels to the subwoofer.
      Note                                                                     On:
     • If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, the “Front” setting is
                                                                                 Double Bass function on.
       fixed at “Full Band”.                                                   Off(THX):
                                                                                 Double Bass function off.
     ■ Center*1, Surround*1, Surr Back*2*3*4*5
                                                                             Note
        Full Band
                                                                            • This function can be set only if the “Subwoofer” setting is set to
        40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz,
                                                                              “Yes”, and the “Front” setting is set to “Full Band”.
        200Hz
                                                                            • If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select “Off(THX)”.
        None:
         Select if no speaker is connected.                                 Speaker Distance
     ■ Front Wide*1*2*4*6, Front High*1*2*4*5
        Full Band                                                            This setting is set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ
        40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz,                            Room Correction and Speaker Setup function (➔ 28).
        200Hz
        None:                                                               Here you can specify the distance from each speaker to the
         Select if no speaker is connected.                                 listening position so that the sound from each speaker
                                                                            arrives at the listener’s ears as the sound designer
      Note
                                                                            intended.
     *1   “Full Band” can be selected only when “Full Band” is
          selected in the “Front” setting.                                  ■ Unit
     *2   If the “Surround” setting is set to “None”, this setting cannot      feet:
          be selected.                                                           Distances can be set in feet. Range: “0.5ft” to
     *3   If the “Surround” setting is set to anything other than “Full          “30.0ft” in 0.5 foot steps.
          Band”, “Full Band” cannot be selected here.
     *4   If the “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp”
                                                                               meters:
          (➔ 45), this setting cannot be selected.                               Distances can be set in meters. Range: “0.15m” to
     *5   If the Powered Zone 2 is being used (➔ 71), this setting can-          “9.00m” in 0.15 meter steps.
          not be selected.                                                    (The default setting varies from country to country.)
     *6   If the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Act” (➔ 71), this
          setting cannot be selected.




En
46
■ Left, Front Wide Left, Front High Left, Center,                      Equalizer Settings
  Front High Right, Front Wide Right, Right, Surr
  Right, Surr Back Right, Surr Back Left, Surr
  Left, Subwoofer                                                       This setting is set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ
   Specify the distance from the each speaker to your lis-              Room Correction and Speaker Setup function (➔ 28).
   tening position.
                                                                       With the Equalizer settings, you can adjust the tone of
 Note                                                                  speakers individually with a 7-band equalizer. The volume
• Speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in the                       of each speaker can be set (➔ 47).
  “Speaker Configuration” cannot be selected (➔ 46).
                                                                       ■ Equalizer
Level Calibration                                                         Manual:
                                                                           You can adjust the equalizer for each speaker manu-
                                                                           ally. If you selected “Manual”, continue with this
 This setting is set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ®                     procedure.
 Room Correction and Speaker Setup function (➔ 28).
                                                                             1   Press to select “Channel”, and then use              /
Here you can adjust the level of each speaker with the                             to select a speaker.

                                                                             2
built-in test tone so that the volume of each speaker is the
                                                                                 Use / to select a frequency, and then use
same at the listening position.
                                                                                 the / to adjust the level at that frequency.
■ Left, Front Wide Left, Front High Left, Center*1,                              The volume at each frequency can be adjusted
  Front High Right, Front Wide Right, Right, Surr                                from –6dB to 0dB to +6dB in 1 dB steps.
  Right, Surr Back Right, Surr Back Left, Surr Left
                                                                                  Note
   –12.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 0.5 dB step.
                                                                                 • You can select: “63Hz”, “160Hz”, “400Hz”,
■ Subwoofer*1                                                                      “1000Hz”, “2500Hz”, “6300Hz”, or “16000Hz”.
   –15.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 0.5 dB step.                                     And for the subwoofer, “25Hz”, “40Hz”, “63Hz”,
                                                                                   “100Hz”, or “160Hz”.
 Note                                                                            • While the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode is
• Speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in the                                   selected, the equalizer settings have no effect.
  “Speaker Configuration” cannot be selected (➔ 46).
                                                                                   Tip
• The speakers cannot be calibrated while the AV receiver is
  muted.                                                                         • Low frequencies (e.g., 63Hz) affect bass sounds;
• The test tone is output at the standard level for THX, which is                  high frequencies (e.g., 16000Hz) affect treble
  0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you normally listen at vol-                sounds.
  ume settings below this, be careful because the test tone will be
  much louder.                                                               3   Use to select “Channel”, and then use /
                                                                                 to select another speaker.
*1 For the center speaker and subwoofer, the level settings made
    by using the Home menu are saved (➔ 26).                                     Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each speaker.
                                                                                 You cannot select speakers that you set to “No”
  Tip
                                                                                 or “None” in the “Speaker Configuration”
• If you’re using a handheld sound level meter, adjust the level of              (➔ 46).
  each speaker so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listening position,
  measured with C-weighting and slow reading.                             Audyssey:
                                                                           This is selected automatically by Audyssey MultEQ
                                                                           Room Correction and Speaker Setup function. The
                                                                           Audyssey indicator will light (➔ 9) and
                                                                           “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” become
                                                                           available (➔ 50).
                                                                          Off:
                                                                           Tone off, response flat.




                                                                                                                                          En
                                                                                                                                          47
THX Audio Setup                                                       ■ BGC
                                                                              Off:
     With the “Surr Back Speaker Spacing” setting, you can                     Select this to turn off BGC.
     specify the distance between your surround back speakers.
                                                                              On:
     If you’re using a THX-certified subwoofer, set the “THX                   Select this to turn on BGC.
     Ultra2/Select2 Subwoofer” setting to “Yes”. You can
     then apply THX’s Boundary Gain Compensation (BGC)                      Note
     to compensate the perceived exaggeration of low frequen-              • This setting is only available if “THX Ultra2/Select2 Sub-
     cies for listeners sitting very close to a room boundary                woofer” is set to “Yes”.
     (i.e., wall).                                                         ■ Loudness Plus
     You can also set the THX Loudness Plus. When the                         Off:
     “Loudness Plus” is set to “On”, it is possible to enjoy                   Select this to turn off Loudness Plus.
     even subtle nuances of audio expression at low volume.                   On:
     This result is only available when the THX listening mode                 Select this to turn on Loudness Plus.
     is selected.
                                                                           ■ Preserve THX Settings
     ■ Surr Back Speaker Spacing
                                                                              Yes:
        < 1ft (< 0.3m):                                                        Audyssey Dynamic EQ® /
         Select this if your surround back speakers are                        Audyssey Dynamic Volume® will not be active in
         between 0 and 1 foot (0–30 cm) apart.                                 THX listening mode.
        1ft - 4ft (0.3m - 1.2m):                                              No:
         Select this if your surround back speakers are                        Audyssey Dynamic EQ /
         between 1 and 4 feet (0.3–1.2 m) apart.                               Audyssey Dynamic Volume will be active in THX
        > 4ft (> 1.2m):                                                        listening mode depending on the setting.
         Select this if your surround back speakers are more
                                                                            Note
         than 4 feet (1.2 m) apart.
                                                                           • This setting is fixed at “Yes” if “Loudness Plus” is set to “On”.
      Note
     • Cannot be set if “Surr Back Ch” is set to “1ch” (➔ 46),
       “Speakers Type(Front)” is set to “Bi-Amp” (➔ 45), “Surr              THX Loudness Plus
       Back” is set to “None” (➔ 46), or Powered Zone 2 is being used       THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control technology
       (➔ 71).                                                              featured in THX Ultra2 Plus™ and THX Select2 Plus™
                                                                            Certified receivers. With THX Loudness Plus, home
     ■ THX Ultra2/Select2 Subwoofer
                                                                            theater audiences can now experience the rich details in
        No:                                                                 a surround mix at any volume level. A consequence of
         Select this if you do not have a THX-certified sub-                turning the volume below Reference Level is that cer-
         woofer.                                                            tain sound elements can be lost or perceived differently
        Yes:                                                                by the listener. THX Loudness Plus compensates for the
         Select this if you have a THX-certified subwoofer.                 tonal and spatial shifts that occur when the volume is
      Note                                                                  reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient surround
     • If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting cannot be    channel levels and frequency response. This enables
       selected (➔ 46).                                                     users experience the true impact of soundtracks regard-
                                                                            less of the volume setting. THX Loudness Plus is auto-
                                                                            matically applied when listening in any THX listening
                                                                            mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music, and THX
                                                                            Games modes are tailored to apply the proper THX
                                                                            Loudness Plus settings for each type of content.




En
48
With this setting, you can broaden the width of the front
 Audio Adjust
                                                                       stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
                                                                       listening mode.
 Main menu                 Audio Adjust
                                                                       Dimension
With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can                    –3 to 0 to +3
adjust the sound and listening modes as you like.
                                                                       With this setting, you can move the sound field forward
                                                                       or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
Multiplex/Mono
                                                                       listening mode. Higher settings move the sound field
                                                                       backward. Lower settings move it forward.
■ Multiplex
                                                                       If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much
  This setting determines which channel of a stereo multi-
                                                                       surround sound, move the sound field forward to
  plex source is output. Use it to select audio channels or
                                                                       improve the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image
  languages with multiplex sources, multilingual TV
                                                                       feels like it’s in mono, or there’s not enough surround
  broadcasts, and so on.
                                                                       sound, move it backward.
  Input Channel
                                                                       Center Width
    Main:
                                                                         0 to 3 to 7
     The main channel is output.
                                                                       With this setting, you can adjust the width of the sound
    Sub:
                                                                       from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro
     The sub channel is output.
                                                                       Logic IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re
    Main/Sub:                                                          using a center speaker, the center channel sound is out-
     Both the main and sub channels are output.                        put by only the center speaker. (If you’re not using a
■ Mono                                                                 center speaker, the center channel sound will be distrib-
  This setting specifies the channel to be used for playing            uted to the front left and right speakers to create a phan-
  any 2-channel digital source such as Dolby Digital, or               tom center). This setting controls the front left, right,
  2-channel analog/PCM source in the Mono listening                    and center mix, allowing you to adjust the weight of the
  mode.                                                                center channel sound.
  Input Channel                                                      ■ PLIIz Height Gain
    Left + Right:                                                      The Height Gain Control in Dolby Pro Logic IIz
     Both the left and right channels are output.                      enables the listener to select how much gain is applied
    Left:                                                              to the front high speakers. There are three settings,
     Only the left channel is output.                                  “Low”, “Mid” and “High”, and the front high speakers
    Right:                                                             are accentuated in that order. While “Mid” is the default
     Only the right channel is output.                                 listening setting, the listener may adjust the Height Gain
                                                                       Control to their personal preference.
  Output Speaker
                                                                         Low:
   Center:
                                                                           Low PLIIz Height Gain becomes active.
     Mono audio is output by the center speaker.
                                                                         Mid:
   Left / Right:
                                                                           Medium PLIIz Height Gain becomes active.
     Mono audio is output by the front left and right
     speakers.                                                           High:
                                                                           High PLIIz Height Gain becomes active.
This setting determines which speakers output mono
audio when the Mono listening mode is selected.                       Note
                                                                     • If the “Front High” settings is set to “None” (➔ 46), this setting
 Note
                                                                       cannot be selected.
• If the “Center” setting is set to “None” (➔ 46), this setting is
  fixed at “Left / Right”.                                           ■ Dolby EX
                                                                       This setting determines how Dolby EX encoded signals
Dolby                                                                  are handled. This setting is unavailable if no surround
                                                                       back speakers are connected. This setting is effective
■ PLIIx Music (2ch Input)                                              with Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby
  These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo sources.               TrueHD only.
  If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these                  Auto:
  settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro                     If the source signal contains a Dolby EX flag, the
  Logic IIx.                                                              Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening mode is
  Panorama                                                                used.
   On:                                                                   Manual:
    Panorama function on.                                                 You can select any available listening mode.
   Off:
    Panorama function off.
                                                                                                                                            En
                                                                                                                                            49
Note                                                                LFE Level
     • If the “Surr Back” setting is set to “None” (➔ 46), this setting
       cannot be selected.                                                ■ Dolby Digital*1, DTS*2, Multich PCM, Dolby
     • If the “Front High” or “Front Wide” setting is enabled (➔ 46),        TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, DSD*3
       this setting is fixed at “Manual”.                                     – dB, –20dB, –10dB, or 0dB
                                                                          With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE (Low
     DTS                                                                  Frequency Effects) channel individually for each input
                                                                          sources.
     ■ Neo:6 Music                                                        If you find that low-frequency effects are too loud when
       Center Image                                                       using one of these sources, change the setting to –20 dB or
         0 to 2 to 5                                                      – dB.
       The DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode creates 6-channel               *1   Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources.
       surround sound from 2-channel stereo sources. With                 *2   DTS and DTS-HD High Resolution Audio sources.
       this setting, you can specify by how much the front left           *3   DSD (Super Audio CD) sources.
       and right channel output is attenuated in order to create
       the center channel.                                                 Source Setup
       Setting a value “0” in the middle is set to hear a sound.
       Sound is spread in left and right (the outside) so that the        Items can be set individually for each input selector.
       set value is made big. Please adjust by liking.
                                                                           Preparation
     Audyssey DSX™                                                         Press the input selector buttons to select an input source.

     ■ Soundstage                                                          Main menu                 Source Setup
        –3dB to Reference to +3dB
     With this setting, you can adjust the soundstage when using
     Audyssey DSX™.                                                       Audyssey

      Note                                                                When Audyssey MultEQ® Room Correction and Speaker
     • If the “Center” setting is set to “None”, or both “Front High”     Setup is complete, the “Equalizer” (➔ 47) will be set to
       and “Front Wide” settings are set to “None” (➔ 46), this setting   “Audyssey” and the “Dynamic EQ” will be set to “On”.
       cannot be selected.
                                                                          ■ Dynamic EQ
                                                                              Off:
     Theater-Dimensional
                                                                                Audyssey Dynamic EQ® off.
                                                                              On:
     ■ Listening Angle
                                                                                Audyssey Dynamic EQ on.
         Wide:
                                                                                The Dynamic EQ indicator will light (➔ 9).
          Select if the listening angle is 40 degrees.
                                                                            With Audyssey Dynamic EQ, you can enjoy great
         Narrow:
                                                                            sound even when listening at low volume levels.
          Select if the listening angle is 20 degrees.
                                                                            Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deterio-
       With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-Dimen-
                                                                            rating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking
       sional listening mode by specifying the angle of the
                                                                            into account human perception and room acoustics. It
       front left and right speakers relative to the listening
                                                                            does so by selecting the correct frequency response and
       position. Ideally, the front left and right speakers should
                                                                            surround volume levels moment-by-moment so that the
       be equidistant from the listening position and at an
                                                                            content sounds the way it was created at any volume
       angle close to one of the two available settings.
                                                                            level — not just at reference level.
          Front left speaker                Front right speaker            Note
                                                                          • If Pure Audio or Direct listening mode is selected, this setting
                                        20°/40°                             cannot be selected.




En
50
■ Reference Level                                                   • When “Dynamic Volume” is set to effective, “Equalizer” is set
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® Reference Level Offset                           to “Audyssey” (➔ 47) and “Dynamic EQ” is set to “On”.
                                                                      When “Dynamic EQ” is set to “Off”, “Dynamic Volume”
    0dB:
                                                                      becomes “Off” automatically.
     It should be used when listening to movies.                    • When “Dynamic Volume” is set to effective, the Dynamic Vol
    5dB:                                                              indicator will light (➔ 9).
     Select this setting for content that has a very wide           • If Pure Audio or Direct listening mode is selected, this setting
     dynamic range, such as classical music.                          cannot be selected.
    10dB:                                                           Audyssey MultEQ then removes the distortion caused by
     Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a         room acoustics by capturing room acoustical problems
     wider dynamic range. This setting should also be               over the listening area in both the frequency and time
     selected for TV content as that is usually mixed at            domain. The result is clear, well-balanced sound for every-
     10 dB below film reference.                                    one. Enabling Audyssey MultEQ allows you to also use
    15dB:                                                           Audyssey Dynamic EQ, which maintains the proper
     Select this setting for pop/rock music or other pro-           octave-to-octave balance at any volume level.
     gram material that is mixed at very high listening             Before using this function, connect and position all of
     levels and has a compressed dynamic range.                     your speakers.
  Movies are mixed in rooms calibrated for film refer-
  ence. To achieve the same reference level in a home the-           About Audyssey Dynamic EQ
  ater system each speaker level must be adjusted so that            Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deterio-
  –30 dBFS band-limited (500 Hz to 2000 Hz) pink noise               rating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking
  produces 75 dB sound pressure level at the listening               into account human perception and room acoustics.
  position. A home theater system automatically cali-                Dynamic EQ selects the correct frequency response and
  brated by Audyssey MultEQ® will play at reference                  surround levels moment-by-moment at any user-
  level when the master volume control is set to the 0 dB            selected volume setting. The result is bass response,
  position. At that level you can hear the mix as the mix-           tonal balance, and surround impression that remain con-
  ers heard it.                                                      stant despite changes in volume. Dynamic EQ combines
  Audyssey Dynamic EQ is referenced to the standard                  information from incoming source levels with actual
  film mix level. It makes adjustments to maintain the ref-          output sound levels in the room, a prerequisite for deliv-
  erence response and surround envelopment when the                  ering a loudness correction solution.
  volume is turned down from 0 dB. However, film refer-              Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in tandem with
  ence level is not always used in music or other non-film           Audyssey MultEQ to provide well-balanced sound for
  content. Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset                every listener at any volume level.
  provides three offsets from the film level reference
  (5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be selected when the
                                                                     About Audyssey Dynamic Volume
  mix level of the content is not within the standard.
                                                                     Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large
 Note                                                                variations in volume level between television programs,
• If “Dynamic EQ” setting is set to “Off”, this setting cannot be    commercials, and between the soft and loud passages of
  selected.                                                          movies. Dynamic Volume looks at the preferred volume
                                                                     setting by the user and then monitors how the volume of
■ Dynamic Volume
                                                                     program material is being perceived by listeners in real
   Off:
                                                                     time to decide whether an adjustment is needed. When-
    Audyssey Dynamic Volume® off.                                    ever necessary, Dynamic Volume makes the necessary
   Light:                                                            rapid or gradual adjustments to maintain the desired
    Light Compression Mode becomes active.                           playback volume level while optimizing the dynamic
   Medium:                                                           range. Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into
    Medium Compression Mode becomes active.                          Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is
   Heavy:                                                            adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response,
    Heavy Compression Mode becomes active. This set-                 tonal balance, surround impression, and dialog clarity
    ting affects volume the most, causing all sounds to              remain the same whether watching movies, flipping
    be of equal loudness.                                            between television channels, or changing from stereo to
 Note                                                                surround sound content.
• Even if you have selected other than “Audyssey” in “Equalizer”
  setting after performing Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction
  and Speaker Setup, selecting “On” in the “Dynamic EQ” will
  change the “Equalizer” setting to “Audyssey” (➔ 47).
• If you would like to use Audyssey Dynamic Volume, when
  using THX listening modes, set “Loudness Plus” setting to
  “Off” and set “Preserve THX Settings” setting to “No” (➔ 48).


                                                                                                                                         En
                                                                                                                                         51
IntelliVolume                                                               Name input area

     ■ IntelliVolume                                                                    4-4. Name Edit                                 BD/DVD
                                                                                        Name
          –12dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps.
     With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for each                      a    b      c       d   e   f   g   h   i     j    k     l    m
                                                                                   n    o      p       q   r   s   t   u   v     w    x     y    z
     input selector individually. This is useful if one of your
                                                                                   1    2    3         4   5   6   7   8    9   0     –          `
     source components is louder or quieter than the others.                       {    }    |         :       <   >   ?
                                                                                       Shift           Space           Back Space          OK
     Use / to set the level.
                                                                                       +10     Shift                           CLR   All Erase
     If a component is noticeably louder than the others, use
     to reduce its input level. If it’s noticeably quieter, use to
     increase its input level.                                                     A    B C            D   E   F   G   H   I     J    K     L    M
                                                                                   N    O P            Q R     S   T   U   V     W    X     Y    Z
                                                                                   !    @ #            $ %     ^   &       (     )    _          ~
     A/V Sync                                                                      [    ]              ;   ’   ,   .   /
                                                                                       Shift           Space           Back Space          OK

     ■ A/V Sync                                                                        +10     Shift                           CLR   All Erase

         0ms to 250ms in 5 ms steps.
     When using your DVD player’s progressive scanning
     function, you may find that the picture and sound are out              Shift*1:
     of sync. With the A/V Sync setting, you can correct this                 Switches the displayed character.
     by applying a delay to the audio signal.
                                                                               (Left)/ (Right):
     To view the TV picture while setting the delay, press
                                                                              Selected when the cursor is moved within the Name
     ENTER.
                                                                              input area.
     To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
                                                                            Space:
                                                                              Enters a space character.
     If HDMI Lip Sync is enabled (➔ 56) and your TV or dis-
                                                                            Back Space*2:
     play supports HDMI Lip Sync, the displayed delay time
                                                                              “Back Space” moves the cursor backward one char-
     will be the summation of the A/V Sync delay time and the
                                                                              acter space. In addition, “Back Space” deletes the
     HDMI Lip Sync delay time. The HDMI Lip Sync delay
                                                                              character to the left of the cursor.
     time is displayed underneath in parentheses.
                                                                            OK:
      Note                                                                    Selects when the entry is complete.
     • A/V Sync is disabled when the Pure Audio listening mode is
       selected, or when the Direct listening mode is used with an ana-          Tip
       log input source.                                                    *1    You can also be performed on the remote controller by
     • “A/V Sync” is not operable when the input selector is set to               using +10.
       “NET/USB”.                                                           *2    Press CLR on the remote controller, you can delete all
                                                                                  characters in the input.
     Name Edit
                                                                            To correct a character:
     You can enter a custom name for each individual input
     selector (excluding TUNER) and radio preset for easy
     identification. When entered, the custom name will appear
                                                                             1         Use / / / to select “ ”(Left) or
                                                                                       “ ”(Right), and then press ENTER.
     on the display.
     The custom name is edited using the character input                     2         Press ENTER several times to select the incor-
                                                                                       rect character (The cursor moves one letter
     screen.
                                                                                       each time ENTER is pressed).
     ■ Name
                                                                             3         Use / / / to select the correct character,
        1    Use / / / to select a character, and then                                 and then press ENTER.
             press ENTER.
             Repeat this step to enter up to 10 characters.                Note

        2
                                                                          • To name a radio preset, use TUNER to select AM or FM, and
             When you’ve finished, to store a name, be sure
                                                                            then select the preset (➔ 32).
             to use / / / to select “OK”, and then press                  • (North American models) You cannot enter a custom name for
             ENTER. Otherwise it will not be saved.                         SIRIUS radio presets.
                                                                          • “Name Edit” is not operable when the input selector is set to
                                                                            “NET/USB”.
                                                                          To restore a custom name to the default, erase the custom
                                                                          name by entering an empty white space for each letter.


En
52
Picture Adjust                                                      ■ Picture Mode*1*2
                                                                        Through:
Using “Picture Adjust”, you can adjust the picture qual-                  The following settings are set to the default values:
ity and reduce any noise appearing on the screen.
                                                                          “Film Mode”, “Edge Enhancement”, “Noise
To view the TV picture while setting, press ENTER. To                     Reduction”, “Brightness”, “Contrast”, “Hue” and
return to the previous screen, press RETURN.                              “Saturation”
 Note                                                                   Custom:
• If you are using the analog RGB input, the following settings           You can set the following settings as you like: “Film
  have no effect: “Film Mode”, “Edge Enhancement”, and                    Mode”, “Edge Enhancement”, “Noise Reduction”,
  “Noise Reduction”.                                                      “Brightness”, “Contrast”, “Hue” and “Saturation”
• “Picture Adjust” is not operable when the input selector is set       Cinema:
  to “NET/USB”.                                                           Selected when the picture source is movie film, etc.
■ Game Mode                                                             Game:
     Off:                                                                 Select to use in connecting a game console.
      Game Mode off.                                                With “Picture Mode”, you can change the following set-
     On:                                                            tings to be suitable for the movie or game screen by one
      Game Mode on.                                                 operation; “Film Mode”, “Edge Enhancement”, “Noise
If video signal delay occurs during playback on a video             Reduction”, “Brightness”, “Contrast”, “Hue” or “Satu-
component (i.e. game console), select the corresponding             ration”.
input source and set the “Game Mode” setting to “On”.                Note
The delay will decrease but in return the picture quality           • When the “Picture Mode” setting is set to other than “Custom”,
will become poor.                                                     the following settings cannot be selected: “Film Mode”, “Edge
                                                                      Enhancement”, “Noise Reduction”, “Brightness”, “Con-
■ Wide Mode*1*2
                                                                      trast”, “Hue” and “Saturation”.
This setting determines the aspect ratio.
                                                                    ■ Film Mode*2
 Note
                                                                         Video:
• When the “Game Mode” is set to “On”, this setting is fixed at
                                                                          Does not process in either “3:2” or “2:2”.
  “Full”.
                                                                         Auto:
    4:3:
                                                                          Adjusts to the picture source, automatically selecting
                                                                          “Film Mode”.
                                                                         3:2:
                                                                          Selected when the picture source is movie film, etc.
                                                                         2:2:
                                                                          Selected when the picture source is computer graph-
    Full:                                                                 ics, animation, etc.
                                                                    The AV receiver will adjust to the picture source, process-
                                                                    ing in either “3:2” or “2:2” (Film Mode). It automatically
                                                                    converts the source to the appropriate progressive signal
                                                                    and reproduces the natural quality of the original picture.
                                                                    When the “Film Mode” setting is set to “Auto”, the AV
    Zoom:                                                           receiver automatically detects the picture source and in
                                                                    either “3:2” or “2:2”. However, there may be times when
                                                                    you will get a better picture by setting “Film Mode” your-
                                                                    self.
                                                                     Note
                                                                    • If the “Game Mode” setting is set to “On” (➔ 53), this setting
    Wide Zoom:                                                        is fixed at “Video”.

                                                                    ■ Edge Enhancement*2
                                                                        0 to +10
                                                                    With this setting you can adjust the sharpness of edges in
                                                                    the picture. “0” is the softest. “+10” is the sharpest.
    Auto:
     According to the input signals and monitor output
     setting, the AV receiver automatically selects the
     “4:3”, “Full”, “Zoom” or “Wide Zoom” mode. For
     the monitor output setting (➔ 42).


                                                                                                                                       En
                                                                                                                                       53
■ Noise Reduction*2
                                                                            Listening Mode Preset
         Off:
          Noise reduction off.                                             You can assign a default listening mode to each input
         Low:                                                              source that will be selected automatically when you select
          Low noise reduction.                                             each input source. For example, you can set the default lis-
         Mid:                                                              tening mode to be used with Dolby Digital input signals.
          Medium noise reduction.                                          You can select other listening modes during playback, but
         High:                                                             the mode specified here will be resumed once the AV
          High noise reduction.                                            receiver has been set to Standby.
     With this setting, you can reduce noise appearing on the               Main menu                     Listening Mode Preset

                                                                           1
     screen.
                                                                                Use / to select the input source that you want to
      Note                                                                      set, and then press ENTER.
     • If the “Game Mode” setting is set to “On” (➔ 53), this setting           The following menu appears.
       is fixed at “Off”.
                                                                                                   5. Listening Mode Preset
     ■ Brightness*1*2                                                                         1.   BD/DVD
                                                                                              2.   VCR/DVR
        –50 to 0 to +50                                                                       3.   CBL/SAT
                                                                                              4.   GAME
          With this setting you can adjust the picture bright-                                5.   PC
                                                                                              6.   AUX
          ness. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
     ■ Contrast*1*2                                                             For “TUNER” input selector only “Analog” will be
        –50 to 0 to +50                                                         available. For “NET/USB” input source only “Digi-
         With this setting you can adjust contrast. “–50” is the                tal” will be available.
         least. “+50” is the greatest.
                                                                                  Note
     ■ Hue*1*2                                                                  • If you connect an input component (such as UP-A1 series
        –20 to 0 to +20                                                           Dock that seated iPod) to the UNIVERSAL PORT jack,
         With this setting you can adjust the red/green bal-                      you can assign only listening modes for the analog sound
         ance. “–20” is the strongest green. “+20” is the                         to “PORT” selector.
         strongest red.                                                    2    Use / to select the signal format that you want
     ■ Saturation*1*2                                                           to set, and then use / to select a listening mode.
        –50 to 0 to +50                                                         Only listening modes that can be used with each
         With this setting you can adjust saturation. “–50” is                  input signal format can be selected (➔ 36 to 40).
         the weakest color. “+50” is the strongest color.                       The “Last Valid” option means that the listening
                                                                                mode selected last will be used.
          Tip
     *1    This procedure can also be performed on the remote controller   ■ Analog/PCM
           by using the Home menu (➔ 26).                                    With this setting, you can specify the listening mode to
     *2    Press CLR if you want to reset to the default value.              be used when an analog (CD, TV, LD, VHS, MD, turn-
                                                                             table, radio, cassette, cable, satellite, etc.) or PCM digi-
                                                                             tal (CD, DVD, etc.) audio signal is played.
                                                                           ■ Mono/Multiplex Source
                                                                             With this setting, you can specify the listening mode to
                                                                             be used when a mono digital audio signal is played
                                                                             (DVD, etc.).
                                                                           ■ 2ch Source
                                                                             With this setting, the default listening mode for 2-chan-
                                                                             nel (2/0) stereo sources in a digital format, such as
                                                                             Dolby Digital or DTS.
                                                                           ■ Dolby D/Dolby D +/TrueHD
                                                                             With this setting, you can specify the listening mode to
                                                                             be used when a Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus for-
                                                                             mat digital audio signal is played (DVD, etc.). Specifies
                                                                             the default listening mode for Dolby TrueHD sources,
                                                                             such as Blu-ray or HD DVD (input via HDMI).




En
54
■ DTS/DTS-ES/DTS-HD                                            OSD Setup
  With this setting, you can specify the listening mode to
  be used when a DTS or DTS-HD High Resolution                 ■ On Screen Display
  Audio format digital audio signal is played (DVD, LD,          This preference determines whether operation details
  CD, etc.). Specifies the default listening mode for DTS-       are displayed onscreen when an AV receiver function is
  HD Master Audio sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD             adjusted.
  (input via HDMI).                                                On:
■ Other Multich Source                                              Displayed.
  Specifies the default listening mode for multichannel            Off:
  PCM sources from HDMI IN such as DVD-Audio, and                   Not displayed.
  DSD multichannel sources such as Super Audio CD.             Even when “On” is selected, operation details may not be
                                                               output if the input source is connected to an HDMI IN.
 Miscellaneous                                                 ■ TV Format (European, Australian and Asian
                                                                 models)
 Main menu              Miscellaneous                            For the on-screen setup menus to display properly, you
                                                                 must specify the TV system used in your area.
Volume Setup                                                      Auto:
                                                                    Select this to automatically detect the TV system
■ Volume Display                                                    from the video input signals.
    Absolute:                                                     NTSC:
      Display range is “Min”, “0.5” through “99.5”,                 Select this if the TV system in your area is NTSC.
      “Max”.                                                      PAL:
    Relative(THX):                                                  Select this if the TV system in your area is PAL.
      Display range is “– dB”, “–81.5dB” through               ■ Language
      “+18.0dB”.                                                   English, Deutsch, Français, Español, Italiano,
With this setting, you can choose how the volume level is          Nederlands, Svenska,
displayed.                                                     This setting determines the language used for the on-
The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative value      screen setup menus.
0 dB.
■ Muting Level                                                  Hardware Setup
   – dB (fully muted), –50dB to –10dB in 10 dB steps.
This setting determines how much the output is muted            Main menu                Hardware Setup
when the muting function is used (➔ 26).
■ Maximum Volume                                               Remote ID
    Off, 50 to 99 (Absolute display)
    Off, –32dB to +17dB (Relative display)                     ■ Remote ID
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.               1, 2, or 3
To disable this setting, select “Off”.                           When several Onkyo components are used in the same
                                                                 room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To differenti-
■ Power On Volume                                                ate the AV receiver from the other components, you can
    Last, Min, 1 to 99 or Max (Absolute display)                 change its remote ID from “1”, to “2” or “3”.
    Last, – dB, –81dB to +18dB (Relative display)               Note
      With this preference, you can specify the volume set-
                                                               • If you do change the AV receiver’s remote ID, be sure to change
      ting to be used each time the AV receiver is turned        the remote controller to the same ID (see below), otherwise, you
      on.                                                        won’t be able to control it with the remote controller.
To use the same volume level that was used when the AV
                                                               Changing the Remote Controller’s ID
receiver was turned off, select “Last”.

                                                               1
The “Power On Volume” cannot be set higher than the                  While holding down RECEIVER, press and hold
“Maximum Volume” setting.                                            down SETUP until RECEIVER lights (about 3
■ Headphone Level                                                    seconds).
    –12dB to 0dB to +12dB
With this preference, you can specify the headphone vol-
                                                               2     Use the number buttons to enter ID 1, 2, or 3.
                                                                     RECEIVER flashes twice.
ume relative to the main volume. This is useful if there’s a
volume difference between your speakers and your head-         Multi Zone
phones.
                                                               See “Setting the Multi Zone” (➔ 72).

                                                                                                                                    En
                                                                                                                                    55
Tuner                                                                   sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn
                                                                             down the AV receiver’s volume.
     For FM/AM tuning to work properly, you must specify the               • (European, Australian and Asian models) If the “Monitor
     FM/AM frequency step used in your area. Note that when                  Out” setting is set to “Both(Main)” or “Both(Sub)” (➔ 42) and
     this setting is changed, all radio presets will be deleted.             if your TV connected to a priority output cannot output the
                                                                             audio, the sound will be heard from AV receiver’s speakers.
     ■ FM/AM Frequency Step (North American and
       Taiwan models)                                                      ■ Lip Sync
        200kHz/10kHz:                                                          Disable:
          Select if 200 kHz/10 kHz steps are used in your area.                 HDMI lip sync disabled.
        50kHz/9kHz:                                                            Enable:
          Select if 50 kHz/9 kHz steps are used in your area.                   HDMI lip sync enabled.
                                                                           The AV receiver can be set to automatically correct any
     ■ AM Frequency Step (European, Australian and                         delay between the video and the audio, based on the data
       Asian models)                                                       from the connected monitor.
        10kHz:
         Select if 10 kHz steps are used in your area.                      Note
        9kHz:                                                              • This function works only if your HDMI-compatible TV supports
                                                                             HDMI Lip Sync.
         Select if 9 kHz steps are used in your area.
                                                                           • You can check the amount of delay being applied by the HDMI
                                                                             Lip Sync function on the A/V Sync screen.
     SIRIUS Settings (North American models)                               • (European, Australian and Asian models) If the “Monitor
     See the separate Satellite Radio Guide for more informa-                Out” setting is set to “HDMI Main”, “Both(Main)” or “Both”
                                                                             (➔ 42), the delay will be corrected in accordance with the mon-
     tion.
                                                                             itor connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. On the other hand, if
     ■ SAT Radio Mode                                                        “HDMI Sub” or “Both(Sub)” is selected, the delay will be cor-
       If you connect a SIRIUS Satellite Radio antenna to the                rected in accordance with the monitor connected to HDMI OUT
                                                                             SUB.
       AV receiver (sold separately), set this setting to “SIR-
       IUS”.                                                               ■ HDMI Control (RIHD)
     ■ Antenna Aiming                                                         Off:
                                                                                          disabled.
     ■ SIRIUS Parental Lock                                                   On:
       These items are for use with SIRIUS Satellite Radio.                               enabled.
       It’s not available if “SAT Radio Mode” is set to                    This function allows        -compatible components
       “None”.                                                             connected via HDMI to be controlled with the AV receiver
                                                                           (➔ 95 to 96).
     HDMI
                                                                            Note
     ■ Audio TV Out                                                        • When set to “On” and close the menu, the name of connected
         Off:                                                                           -compatible components and “RIHD On” are dis-
           The audio is not output from the HDMI output.                     played on the AV receiver.
                                                                             “Search…” → “(name)” → “RIHD On”
         On:
                                                                             When the AV receiver cannot receive the name of the compo-
           The audio is output from the HDMI output.                         nent, it is displayed as “Player*” or “Recorder*”, etc (“*”
     This preference determines whether the incoming audio                   means the number of two or more component).
     signal is output from the HDMI output. You may want to                  When set to “Off” and close the menu, “RIHD Off” are dis-
     turn this preference on if your TV is connected to the                  played on the AV receiver.
     HDMI output and you want to listen to the audio from a                  “Disconnect” → “RIHD Off”
     connected component through your TV’s speakers. Nor-                  • When an              -compatible component is connected to the
     mally, this should be set to “Off”.                                     AV receiver via the HDMI cable, the name of the connected
                                                                             component is displayed on the AV receiver display. For example,
      Note                                                                   while you are watching TV broadcasting, if you operate a
     • Listening mode cannot be changed when this setting is set to          Blu-ray Disc/DVD player (being powered on) by the remote
       “On” and the input source is not HDMI.                                control of the AV receiver, the name of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD
     • If “On” is selected and the audio can be output from the TV, the      player is displayed on the AV receiver.
       AV receiver will output no sound through its speakers. In this      • Set to “Off” when a connected piece of equipment is not com-
       case, “TV Sp On” appears on the display.                              patible or it is unclear whether the equipment is compatible or
     • When “TV Control” is set to “On”, this setting is fixed to            not.
       “Auto”.                                                             • If movement is unnatural when set to “On”, change the setting
     • With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be output even          to “Off”.
       when this setting is set to “On” (➔ 57).                            • Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for
     • When the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On”, or “TV Con-           details.
       trol” is set to “On” (➔ 57) and you’re listening through your       • (European, Australian and Asian models) The                 con-
       TV’s speakers (➔ 18), if you turn up the AV receiver’s volume         trol does not support HDMI OUT SUB. Use HDMI OUT MAIN
En     control, the sound will be output by the AV receiver’s front left     instead.
       and right speakers. To stop the AV receiver’s speakers producing
56
• When the source equipment is connected with the   connec-       Set to “On” when you want to control the AV receiver
  tion, it may malfunction if “HDMI Control (RIHD)” is set to     from an         -compatible TV that is connected to
  “On”.                                                           HDMI.
■ Audio Return Channel                                             Note
    Off:                                                          • Do not assign the component connected with the HDMI input to
     Select “Off” if you don’t want to use audio return             the TV/CD selector when you set “TV Control” setting to “On”.
     channel (ARC) function.                                        Otherwise, appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics Control)
    Auto:                                                           operation is not guaranteed.
     The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent to           • Set to “Off” when the TV is not compatible or when it is unclear
     the HDMI OUT (North American and Taiwan                        whether the TV is compatible or not.
                                                                  • The “TV Control” setting can be set only when the “HDMI
     models)/HDMI OUT MAIN (European, Australian
                                                                    Control (RIHD)” (➔ 56) and “Power Control” (➔ 57) set-
     and Asian models) of the AV receiver.
                                                                    tings are both set to “On”.
Audio return channel (ARC) function enables an HDMI               • Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for
(Audio Return Channel) capable TV to send the audio                 details.
stream to the HDMI OUT (North American and Taiwan
models)/HDMI OUT MAIN (European, Australian and
                                                                   After changing the settings of the “HDMI Control
Asian models) of the AV receiver. To use this function,
                                                                   (RIHD)”, “Audio Return Channel”, “Power Con-
you must select the TV/CD input selector and your TV
                                                                   trol”, or “TV Control”, turn off the power to all con-
must support ARC function.
                                                                   nected pieces of equipment and then turn them on again.
 Note                                                              Refer to the user’s manuals for all connected pieces of
• The “Audio Return Channel” setting can be set only when the      equipment.
  “HDMI Control (RIHD)” setting is set to “On”.
• This setting is set to “Auto” automatically when the “HDMI      Auto Power Down
  Control (RIHD)” is set to “On” first time.

■ Power Control                                                   ■ Auto Power Down
    Off:                                                              Off:
      Power Control disabled.                                           Auto Power Down disabled.
    On:                                                               On:
      Power Control enabled.                                            Auto Power Down enabled.
To link the power functions of           -compatible com-         The AV receiver will automatically perform STANDBY
ponents connected via HDMI, select “On”.                          operation when “Auto Power Down” is set to “On”, with
This setting is set to “On” automatically when the                no audio or video signal input, and if there is no operation
“HDMI Control (RIHD)” is set to “On” first time.                  for 30 minutes.
                                                                  “Auto Power Down” will display on the display and OSD
 Note                                                             from 30 seconds before the Auto Power Down functions.
• The “Power Control” setting can be set only when the “HDMI      Default setting: On (European, Australian and Asian
  Control (RIHD)” setting is set to “On”.                         models), Off (North American and Taiwan models)
• HDMI power control only works with              -compatible
  components that support it and may not work properly with        Note
  some components due to their settings or compatibility.         • Depending on some sources, the auto power-down function may
• When set to “On”, power consumption will increase.                activate during playback.
• When set to “On”, regardless of whether the AV receiver is On   • The Auto Power Down function does not work when Zone 2 or
  or in Standby, both audio and video stream from an HDMI input     Zone 3 is on.
  will be output to the TV or other components via HDMI connec-
  tion (HDMI pass through function). When the HDMI pass           Network
  through function activates in standby mode, HDMI THRU indi-
  cator will light.                                               See “Network Settings” (➔ 67).
• The power consumption during standby mode will increase dur-
  ing the HDMI pass through function; however if your TV sup-     Firmware Update
  ports CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), the power
  consumption can be saved in the following cases:                 Note
  1. The TV is in standby mode.
                                                                  • Perform the firmware update only when an announcement is
  2. You are watching a TV program.
                                                                    posted on the Onkyo web site. See the Onkyo web site for latest
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for
                                                                    information.
  details.
                                                                  • It takes about 30 minutes to complete the firmware update.
■ TV Control
                                                                  ■ Version
   Off:
                                                                  The current version of the firmware is displayed.
    TV Control disabled.
   On:
    TV Control enabled.
                                                                                                                                       En
                                                                                                                                       57
■ Receiver                                                       Tone Control Settings
        via NET:
          You can update the firmware via Internet. Check the         You can adjust the bass and treble for the front speakers,
          network connection before update.                           except when the Direct, Pure Audio or THX listening
                                                                      mode is selected.
        via USB:
          You can update the firmware from a USB mass stor-           ■ Bass
          age device.                                                    –10dB to 0dB to +10dB in 2 dB steps.
     You can update the AV receiver’s firmware. Do not shut-              You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds output
     down the power of the AV receiver while update.                      by the front speakers.
     ■ Universal Port                                                 ■ Treble
        via NET:                                                         –10dB to 0dB to +10dB in 2 dB steps.
          You can update the firmware via Internet. Check the              You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds output
          network connection before update.                                by the front speakers.
        via USB:                                                        Operating on the AV receiver
          You can update the firmware from a USB mass stor-
          age device.
     You can update the Onkyo dock’s firmware. Do not shut-
                                                                         1     Press TONE on the AV receiver repeatedly to
                                                                               select either “Bass” or “Treble”.

                                                                         2
     down the power of the AV receiver while update.
                                                                               Use Up      and Down         on the AV receiver to
      Note                                                                     adjust.
     • This update shall not be performed when no dock is connected
       to UNIVERSAL PORT jack.
                                                                       Note
                                                                      • This setting is not available when the multichannel Analog input
      Lock Setup                                                        is selected.

     With this preference, you can protect your settings by           Speaker Levels
     locking the setup menus.
                                                                      You can adjust the volume of each speaker while listening
      Main menu               Lock Setup
                                                                      to an input source.
     ■ Setup                                                          These temporary adjustments are cancelled when the AV
          Locked:                                                     receiver is set to Standby. To save the setting you made
           Setup menus locked.                                        here, go to “Level Calibration” (➔ 47) before setting the
          Unlocked:                                                   AV receiver to Standby.
           Setup menus not locked.                                    ■ Subwoofer Level
     When the setup menus are locked, you cannot change any              –15.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 1 dB steps.
     setting.
                                                                      ■ Center Level
                                                                         –12.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 1 dB steps.
      Using the Audio Settings
                                                                       Note
     You can change various audio settings from the Home              • You cannot use this function while the AV receiver is muted.
     menu (➔ 26).                                                     • Speakers that are set to “No” or “None” in the
                                                                        “Speaker Configuration” (➔ 46) cannot be adjusted.
     1     Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
                                                                      Audyssey Settings
     2     Use / to select “Audio”, and then use / / /
           to make the desired selection.                             ■ Dynamic EQ
                                                                      See “Dynamic EQ” of “Source Setup” (➔ 50).
      Note
                                                                      ■ Dynamic Volume
     • These settings are disabled when:                              See “Dynamic Volume” of “Source Setup” (➔ 51).
       – a pair of headphones is connected, or
       – the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (➔ 56) and an
         input selector other than HDMI is selected.




En
58
Late Night                                                             Re-EQ
With the Late Night function, you can reduce the dynamic               With the Re-EQ function, you can compensate a
range of Dolby Digital material so that you can still hear             soundtrack whose high-frequency content is too harsh,
quiet parts even when listening at low volume levels—                  making it more suitable for home theater viewing.
ideal for watching movies late at night when you don’t
                                                                       ■ Re-EQ
want to disturb anyone.
                                                                           Off:
■ Late Night                                                                 Re-EQ Function off.
For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources, the                      On:
options are:                                                                 Re-EQ Function on.
    Off:                                                               This function can be used with the following listening
     Late Night function off.                                          modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus,
    Low:                                                               Dolby TrueHD, Multichannel, DTS, DTS-HD High Reso-
     Small reduction in dynamic range.                                 lution Audio, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS Express,
    High:                                                              DSD, Dolby EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height, Dolby
     Large reduction in dynamic range.                                 PLIIx Movie, Neo:6 Cinema and 5.1-channel source +
                                                                       Neo:6.
For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options are:
    Auto:                                                              ■ Re-EQ(THX)
     The Late Night function is set to “On” or “Off”                      Off:
     automatically.                                                          Re-EQ (THX) Function off.
    Off:                                                                  On:
     Late Night function off.                                                Re-EQ (THX) Function on.
    On:                                                                This function can be used with the following listening
     Late Night function on.                                           modes: THX Cinema, THX Surround EX, and
 Note                                                                  THX Select2 Cinema.
• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the material         Note
  that you are playing and the intention of the original sound         • Settings for the Re-EQ function are kept in each listening mode.
  designer, and with some material there will be little or no effect     However, in THX listening mode, when the AV receiver is
  when you select the different options.                                 turned off, it will return to “On”.
• The Late Night function can be used only when the input source
  is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or Dolby TrueHD.
• The Late Night function is set to “Off” when the AV receiver is
  set to Standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources, it will be set to
  “Auto”.

Music Optimizer
The Music Optimizer function enhances the sound quality
of compressed music files. Use it with music files that use
“lossy” compression, such as MP3.
■ Music Optimizer
   Off:
    Music Optimizer off.
   On:
    Music Optimizer on. The M.Opt indicator will light
    (➔ 9).
 Note
• The Music Optimizer function only works with PCM digital
  audio input signals with a sampling rate below 48 kHz and ana-
  log audio input signals. The Music Optimizer is disabled when
  the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode is selected.
• The setting is stored individually for each input selector.
• Alternatively, you can use the AV receiver’s MUSIC OPTI-
  MIZER.




                                                                                                                                            En
                                                                                                                                            59
Audio Selector                                                        Setting the Incoming Digital Signal (Fixed
                                                                           Mode)
     You can set priorities of audio output when there are both
     digital and analog inputs.                                            By pressing ENTER while selecting “HDMI”, “COAX”,
                                                                           “OPT” in the “Audio Selector”, you can specify the input
     ■ Audio Selector
                                                                           signal in the Fixed Mode. Pressing ENTER again allows
        ARC:
                                                                           you to return to the “Audio Selector” setting.
         The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent to
                                                                           Normally, the AV receiver detects the signal format auto-
         the HDMI OUT (North American and Taiwan
                                                                           matically. However, if you experience either of the follow-
         models)/HDMI OUT MAIN (European, Australian
                                                                           ing issues when playing PCM or DTS material, you can
         and Asian models) of the AV receiver.*1
                                                                           manually set the signal format to PCM or DTS.
         With this selection the TV’s audio can be automati-
         cally selected as a priority among other assignments.             • If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are cut
                                                                             off, try setting the format to PCM.
        HDMI:
         This can be selected when HDMI IN has been                        • If noise is produced when fast forwarding or reversing a
         assigned as an input source. If both HDMI (HDMI                     DTS CD, try setting the format to DTS.
         IN) and digital audio inputs (COAXIAL IN or OPTI-                      Auto:
         CAL IN) have been assigned, HDMI input is auto-                          The format is detected automatically. If no digital
         matically selected as a priority.                                        input signal is present, the corresponding analog
        COAX:                                                                     input is used instead.
         This can be selected when COAXIAL IN has been                          PCM:
         assigned as an input source. If both coaxial and                         Only 2-channel PCM format input signals will be
         HDMI inputs have been assigned, coaxial input is                         heard. If the input signal is not PCM, the PCM indi-
         automatically selected as a priority.                                    cator will flash and noise may also be produced.
        OPT:                                                                    DTS:
         This can be selected when OPTICAL IN has been                            Only DTS (but not DTS-HD) format input signals
         assigned as an input source. If both optical and                         will be heard. If the input signal is not DTS, the DTS
         HDMI inputs have been assigned, optical input is                         indicator will flash and there will be no sound.
         automatically selected as a priority.                              Note
        Multich:                                                           • The setting is stored individually for each input selector.
         The AV receiver always outputs analog signals from                • The setting will be reset to “Auto” when you change the setting
         multichannel analog input.                                          in the “Audio Selector” (➔ 60).
        Analog:
         The AV receiver always outputs analog signals.
      Note
     • The setting is stored individually for each input selector.
     • This setting can be made only for the input source that is
       assigned as HDMI IN, COAXIAL IN, or OPTICAL IN.
     • To select the digital audio input, see “Digital Audio Input” for
       more detail (➔ 45).
     • “Multich” can be selected only when the selector is set to “BD/
       DVD”.
     *1 You can select “ARC” if you select the TV/CD input selector.
         But you cannot select it if you’ve selected “Off” in the “Audio
         Return Channel” setting (➔ 57).




En
60
NET/USB
 About NET                                                            Connecting the AV Receiver
The AV receiver is network-ready, which means you can                To connect the AV receiver to your home network, plug
hook it up to your home network with a standard Ethernet             one end of a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable into the AV
cable and enjoy the music files stored on your computer or           receiver’s ETHERNET port, and plug the other end into a
media server. If your network is connected to the Internet,          LAN port on your router or switch.
you can also enjoy Internet radio.                                   The following diagram shows how you can connect the
                                                                     AV receiver to your home network. In this example, it’s
Network Requirements                                                 connected to a LAN port on a router, which has a 4-port
                                                                     100Base-TX switch built-in.
■ Ethernet Network
For best results, a 100Base-TX switched Ethernet network
is recommended. Although it’s possible to play music on a
computer that’s connected to the network wirelessly, play-
back may be unreliable, so wired connections are recom-
mended.
■ Ethernet Router
A router manages the network, routing data and supplying
IP addresses. Your router must support the following:                 Internet radio
• NAT (Network Address Translation). NAT allows sev-
  eral networked computers to access the Internet simulta-
  neously via a single Internet connection. The AV
  receiver needs Internet access for Internet radio.                    Modem
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). DHCP
  supplies IP addresses to network devices, allowing them
  to configure themselves automatically.                                                            WAN port
                                                                           Router
• A router with a 100Base-TX switch built-in is recom-
  mended.                                                                                           LAN port
Some routers have a modem built-in, and some ISPs
                                                                                                    LAN port
require you to use specific routers. Please consult your ISP
or computer dealer if you’re unsure.
■ CAT5 Ethernet cable
Use a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight-type) to con-
nect the AV receiver to your home network.
                                                                                        LAN/Ethernet port
■ Internet Access (for Internet radio)
To receive Internet radio, your Ethernet network must
have Internet access. A narrowband Internet connection
(e.g., 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory                 Computer or media server
results, so a broadband connection is strongly recom-
mended (e.g., cable modem, xDSL modem, etc). Please
consult your ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.
 Note
• To receive Internet radio with the AV receiver, your broadband
  Internet connection must be working and able to access the Web.
  Consult your ISP if you have any problems with your Internet
  connection.
• The AV receiver uses DHCP to configure its network settings
  automatically. If you want to configure these settings manually,
  see “Network Settings” (➔ 67).
• The AV receiver does not support PPPoE settings, so if you have
  a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you must use a PPPoE-com-
  patible router.
• Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a proxy server
  to use Internet radio. If your computer is configured to use a
  proxy server, use the same settings for the AV receiver (➔ 67).

                                                                                                                               En
                                                                                                                               61
Listening to Internet Radio                                                  Note
                                                                                 • When the NETWORK indicator flashes, confirm that the
     To receive Internet radio, you must connect the AV
                                                                                   Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver.
     receiver to a network with Internet access (➔ 61).                          • Services available may vary depending on the region. See
     You can select Internet radio stations by connecting to the                   the separate instructions for more information.
     AV receiver from your computer and selecting stations in                    *1 MENU:
     your Web browser. Preset up to 40 Internet radio stations.                      When menu operations are enabled, “MENU” appears.
     Internet radio URLs in the following formats are sup-                           Press MENU to display the menu.
     ported: PLS, M3U, and podcast (RSS). However, depend-                           TOP MENU:
     ing on the type of data or audio format used by the Internet                    Press TOP MENU to go to the top menu of the Internet
                                                                                     Radio services.
     radio station, you may not be able to listen to some sta-
     tions.                                                                 2    Use / to select “1. vTuner Internet Radio”, and
      Note
                                                                                 then press ENTER.
     • If you’re using a narrowband Internet connection (e.g., 56K          3    Use / to select a program, and then press
       modem or ISDN), depending on the station, Internet radio may              ENTER.
       not work satisfactorily. For best results, use a broadband connec-        Playback starts and the following screen appears.
       tion (e.g., cable modem, xDSL modem, etc).
                                                                                                       All Stations

     Listening to vTuner Internet Radio
                                                                                                        ---
     This unit includes the full vTuner Internet Radio Service                                          1. fm indie 104
                                                                                                        The internet’s best source for i
     at no additional charge. Once you have connected your
                                                                                                        0:00:00
     unit to the Internet you can select vTuner Internet Radio to                                       WMA 128kbps 16bit/44.1kHz
     search for and play Internet radio stations and podcasts at
                                                                                            *2    Go to Menu
     any time. To enhance your Internet radio experience, the
     http://onkyo.vtuner.com/ portal is available to you as an                   *2    Press MENU to allow selection from the following
     easy way to browse to find stations, set up/organize your                         menu items.
     favorites, add your own stations, get help, etc. After the                        Stations like this:
     first time you try Internet radio/vTuner on your unit you                          Stations like the one currently being played
     can use the MAC Address of your unit to create a member                            back are displayed.
     login account (email address and password) on the http://                        Tip
     onkyo.vtuner.com/ portal. To verify your MAC Address,
                                                                                 • If you press DISPLAY, you can toggle between the play-
     please see “Network Settings” (➔ 67).                                         back screen and the list screen.
                                                           DISPLAY
                                                                            Listening to Other Internet Radio
                                                                            To listen to other internet radio stations, insert the follow-
                                                                            ing step after step 1 in the “Listening to vTuner Internet
                                                           NET/USB          Radio”.

                                                                                 On your computer, start your Web browser and
                                                                                 enter the AV receiver’s IP address in the browser’s
                                                                                 Internet address (URL) field.
          TOP MENU                                         MENU
                                                                                 The browser connects to the AV receiver and dis-
                                                                                 plays the same screen as the AV receiver.
              ENTER
                                                                                 Select the Internet radio station with your
                                                                                 browser.

     1     Press NET/USB repeatedly to select the Internet
           Radio screen.
                                                                                   Note
                                                                                 • The AV receiver’s IP address is shown on the “Network”
                                                                                   screen (➔ 67).
                                Internet Radio                                   • If you’re using DHCP, your router may not always allocate
                              1. vTuner Internet Radio                             the same IP address to the AV receiver, so if you find that
                              2. Pandora Internet Radio
                              3. Rhapsody                                          you can’t connect to the AV receiver, recheck the AV
                              4. SIRIUS Internet Radio
                              5. Slacker Internet Radio                            receiver’s IP address on the “Network” screen.
                              6. Mediafly Internet Radio
                              7. Napster Internet Radio
                              8. ---
                              9. ---
                             10. ---

                    *1       MENU    Go to Menu


           The NETWORK indicator lights (➔ 9).

En
62
Registering Presets*1                                                  1   Start your computer or media server.

Once you’ve added a station to the list, simply select it on
the Internet Radio screen, and then press ENTER to start
                                                                       2   Press NET/USB to select the “Server” screen.

playback.                                                                                   Server

*1                                                                                          Server1
     From the search results you can preset the stations and songs                          Server2
     but cannot listen to them directly.                                                    Server3
                                                                                            Server4
                                                                                            Server5
■ Items on the Internet Radio Top Menu                                                      Server6
                                                                                            Server7
                                                                                            Server8
    Create new preset:                                                                      Server9
                                                                                            Server10
     Add a favorite station or Internet Radio to the pre-
                                                                                                                    1 / 10
     sets.
    Rename this preset:                                                    The NETWORK indicator lights (➔ 9).
     You can rename the preset.
                                                                            Note
    Delete this preset:
     This will delete the preset.                                          • When the NETWORK indicator flashes, confirm the net-
                                                                             work connection.
■ Station and Song Presets                                                 • To update the screen, press RETURN.
You can add the currently playing song or station to the
presets.                                                               3   Use / to select a server, and then press ENTER.
                                                                           A list of items on the server appears.
1. Press MENU with the station selected or while a song
    is playing.                                                                             Server1

2. Use / to select “Add this station to preset”, and                                        Search
                                                                                            Recently Added
    press ENTER.                                                                            Artists
                                                                                            Album
                                                                                            Songs
                                                                                            Genre
                                                                                            Year
 Playing Music Files on a Server                                                            Rating


This section explains how to play music files on a com-                                                             1/8


puter or media server through the AV receiver. See “Sup-
ported Audio File Formats” to “About DLNA” for details                     Search
on supported music servers and music file formats.                         You can search for music by Artist, Album, or Track.
For Windows Media Player 11, see “Windows Media                             Note
Player 11 Setup” (➔ 64).
                                                                           • The search function does not work with media servers
                                                                             which do not support this function.
                                                                           • Depending on the sharing settings in the media server, the
                                               DISPLAY                       AV receiver may not able to access the content. Refer to
                                                                             the instruction manual of the media server.

                                                                       4   Use / to select an item, and then press ENTER.
                                               NET/USB
                                                                           A list of music files appears.

                                                                                            All Music
                                                                                            Song 1
                                                                                            Song 2
                                                                                            Song 3
                                                                                            My favorite song 1
                                               ENTER                                        My favorite song 2
                                                / / /                                       My favorite song 3
                                                                                            My favorite song 4
                                                                                            My favorite song 5
                                                                                            My favorite song 6
                                                                                            My favorite song 7
                                               RETURN                                                               1 / 10




                                                   ,       ,   ,   ,
                                                       ,       ,


                                               REPEAT
                                               RANDOM




                                                                                                                                          En
                                                                                                                                          63
5     Use / to select a music file, and press ENTER or              Windows Media Player 11 Setup
               to start playback.                                        This section explains how to configure Windows Media
           Playback starts and the following screen appears.             Player 11 so that the AV receiver can play the music files
                                                                         stored on your computer.
                           My favorite song 1

                             4 / 10
                             My favorite song 1                          1    Start Windows Media Player 11.

                                                                         2
                             Artist name
                             My favorite album                                On the Library menu, select Media Sharing.
                           0:00:00
                            MP3 128kbps 44.1kHz                               The Media Sharing dialog box appears.

                                                                         3
                                                  ALL

                                                                              Select the Share my media check box, and then
                                                                              click OK.
           To return to the previous menu during playback,
           press RETURN.
                                                                         4    Select the AV receiver in the list, and then click
                                                                              Allow.
           To stop playback, press .
           To select the next song, press       . To select the
                                                                         5    Click OK to close the dialog box.
                                                                              This completes the Windows Media Player 11 con-
           beginning of the current song, press        . To select            figuration.
           the previous song, press         twice.                            You can now play the music files in your Windows
           To pause playback, press . To fast forward the cur-                Media Player 11 library through the AV receiver
           rent song, press      . To fast reverse the current                (➔ 63).
           song, press      .
                                                                          Note
             Tip
                                                                         • Windows Media Player 11 can be downloaded for free from the
           • If you press DISPLAY, you can toggle between the play-        Microsoft Web site.
             back screen and the list screen.
             Note                                                        Supported Audio File Formats
           • For some sort of media server, Fast Forward/Fast Reverse/
             Pause operations do not work.                               For server playback, the AV receiver supports the follow-
                                                                         ing music file formats: MP3, WMA, WAV, FLAC, Ogg
     Random Playback                                                     Vorbis, AAC and LPCM. Not all servers support all for-
                                                                         mats.
     The Random function can only be set while the PLAY
     screen is displayed.                                                ■ MP3
     To play songs in random order, during playback (or while            • MP3 files must be MPEG-1/MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3 for-
     playback is paused or stopped), press RANDOM. All of                  mat with a sampling rate of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
     the songs in the current folder will be played in random              16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
     order. When all of the songs in the folder have been played           and a bit-rate of between 8 kbps and 320 kbps. Incom-
     once, they’ll all be played again in a different random               patible files cannot be played.
     order. To cancel random playback, press RANDOM                      • Number of channels: 2
     again.                                                              • Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 files are supported. (Play-
     Random playback supports up to 20000 songs per folder.                ing times may not display correctly.)
     If a folder contains more than this, songs over 20000 are           • MP3 files must have a “.mp3” or “.MP3” filename
     not included in random playback.                                      extension.
     Repeat Playback
     The Repeat function can only be set while the PLAY                  ■ WMA
     screen is displayed.                                                WMA stands for Windows Media Audio and is an audio
     To play songs repeatedly, during playback (or while play-           compression technology developed by Microsoft Corpora-
     back is paused or stopped), press REPEAT repeatedly to              tion. Audio can be encoded in WMA format by using
     select: Repeat1, Repeat Folder, Repeat All, or Off.                 Windows Media® Player.
     In Repeat1 mode, the current song is played repeatedly.             • WMA files must have the copyright option turned off.
     In Repeat Folder mode, all of the songs in the current              • Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,
     folder are played repeatedly.                                         22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz and
     In Repeat All mode, all of the songs on the current server            bitrates of between 5 kbps and 320 kbps, and WMA
     are played repeatedly.                                                DRM are supported. Incompatible files cannot be
                                                                           played.
     To cancel repeat playback, press REPEAT repeatedly to
     select Off.                                                         • Number of channels: 2
                                                                         • Variable bit-rates (VBR) are supported. (Playing times
      Note                                                                 may display incorrectly with VBR.)
     • If the message “No Item.” appears, this means that no informa-    • WMA Pro/Voice formats are not supported.
       tion can be retrieved from the server. In this case, check your
                                                                         • WMA files must have a “.wma” or “.WMA” filename
       server, network, and AV receiver connections.
En                                                                         extension.
64
■ WMA Lossless                                               ■ LPCM (Linear PCM)
• Sampling rates of 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz       • Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,
  and bitrates of between 5 kbps and 320 kbps are sup-         22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz,
  ported. Incompatible files cannot be played.                 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz are supported.
• Quantization bit: 16 bit, 24 bit                           • Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
• Number of channels: 2                                      • Number of channels: 2
• Variable bit-rates (VBR) are supported. (Playing times
  may display incorrectly with VBR.)                         Server Requirements
• WMA files must have a “.wma” or “.WMA” filename
                                                             The AV receiver can play digital music files stored on a
  extension.
                                                             computer or media server and supports the following tech-
■ WAV                                                        nologies:
WAV files contain uncompressed PCM digital audio.            • Windows Media Player 11
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,       • Windows Media Connect 2.0
  22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz,       • DLNA-certified media server
  88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz are supported. Incompatible files     If the operating system of your computer is Windows
  cannot be played.                                          Vista, Windows Media Player 11 is already installed.
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit                    Windows Media Player 11 for Windows XP can be down-
• Number of channels: 2                                      loaded for free from the Microsoft Web site.
• WAV files must have a “.wav” or “.WAV” filename            • The computer or media server must be on the same net-
  extension.                                                   work as the AV receiver.
                                                             • Each folder may contain up to 20000 music files, and
■ AAC
                                                               folders may be nested up to 16 levels deep.
AAC stands for MPEG-2/MPEG-4 Audio.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,        Note
  22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz,       • For some sort of media server, the AV receiver may not able to
  88.2 kHz, 96 kHz and bitrates of between 8 and               recognize it, or may not able to play stored music files.
  320 kbps, are supported. Incompatible files cannot be
  played.                                                    Minimum system requirements for Windows Media
• Number of channels: 2                                      Player 11 for Windows XP
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) files are supported. (Playing      Operating system
  times may not display correctly.)                          Windows XP Home Edition (SP2), Windows XP Profes-
• AAC files must have a “.aac”, “.m4a”, “.mp4”, “.3gp”,      sional (SP2), Windows XP Tablet PC Edition (SP2),
  “.3g2”, “.AAC”, “.M4A”, “.MP4”, “.3GP” or “.3G2”           Update Rollup 2 for Windows XP Media Center Edition
  filename extension.                                        2005 (KB900325), October 2006 Update Rollup for
                                                             Windows XP Media Center Edition (KB925766)
■ FLAC                                                       Processor:       233 MHz Intel Pentium II, Advanced
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression.                    Micro Devices (AMD), etc.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,       Memory:          64 MB
  22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz,
                                                             Hard disk:       200 MB of free space
  88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz are supported. Incompatible files
  cannot be played.                                          Drive:           CD or DVD drive
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit                    Modem:           28.8 kbps
• Number of channels: 2                                      Sound card:      16-bit sound card
• Variable bit-rates (VBR) are supported. (Playing times     Monitor:         Super VGA (800 x 600)
  may display incorrectly with VBR.)                         Video card:      64 MB VRAM, DirectX 9.0b
• FLAC files must have a “.flac” or “.FLAC” filename         Software:        Microsoft ActiveSync (only when
  extension.                                                                  using a Windows Mobile-based Pocket
 Note                                                                         PC or smartphone)
• Not all servers support all formats.                       Web browser: Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or
                                                                              Netscape 7.1
■ Ogg Vorbis
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz,       About DLNA
  22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz and
  bitrates of between 48 kbps and 500 kbps are supported.    The Digital Living Network Alliance is an international,
  Incompatible files cannot be played.                       cross-industry collaboration. Members of DLNA develop
                                                             a concept of wired and wireless interoperable networks
• Number of channels: 2
                                                             where digital content such as photos, music, and videos
• Variable bit-rates (VBR) are supported. (Playing times
                                                             can be shared through consumer electronics, personal
  may display incorrectly with VBR.)
                                                             computers, and mobile devices in and beyond the home.
• Ogg Vorbis files must have a “.ogg” or “.OGG” filename     The AV receiver certificate the DLNA Interoperability
  extension.                                                                                                                    En
                                                             Guidelines version 1.5.
                                                                                                                                65
Remote Playback from Media Server/                                  Using Remote Playback
      Personal Computer
     Remote Playback means you can play the music files
                                                                          1    Start Windows Media Player 12.
                                                                               Before remote playback, setup on Windows Media
     stored on the DLNA-certified device such as media server                  Player 12 is required.
     with this product by operating the controller device in the
     home network.                                                        2    On the product, press NET/USB to select the
                                                                               server screen.
     Server Requirements                                                       A list of media server appears.
                                                                                 Tip
     • Windows Media Player 12
                                                                               • The NETWORK indicator on the product’s display lights
     • DLNA-certified (the DLNA Interoperability Guidelines
                                                                                 up. When it flashes, confirm the network connection.
       version 1.5) media server or controller device
     Setting varies depending on the device. Refer to your                      Note
     device’s instruction manual for details.                                  • While the music files on another media server are being
     If the operating system of your personal computer is Win-                   played, remote playback cannot be used. Stop playback on
                                                                                 another media server.
     dows 7, Windows Media Player 12 is already installed.
     For more information, see the Microsoft Web site.                    3    On Windows Media Player 12, right-click on
                                                                               music file.
     Supported Music File Formats                                              Right-click menu appears. For selecting another
                                                                               media server, select media server from “Other
     See “Supported Audio File Formats” (➔ 64).
                                                                               Libraries” menu on Windows Media Player 12.

                                                                          4
      Note                                                                     Select the product from right-click menu.
     • For remote playback, this product does not support the following        “Play to” window appears and playback on the prod-
       music file formats: FLAC and Ogg Vorbis.
                                                                               uct starts. Operations during remote playback can be
                                                                               made from “Play to” window of Windows 7 on your
     Windows Media Player 12 Setup                                             personal computer. During remote playback, opera-
     This section explains how to configure Windows Media                      tions (such as Playback, Pause, Fast Forward, Fast
     Player 12 so that the product can play the music files                    Rewind, Previous, Next, Repeat, Random) cannot be
     stored on your personal computer.                                         made on the product.


     1
                                                                                              Remote Playback
           Start Windows Media Player 12.

     2
                                                                                                My favorite song 1
           On the “Stream” menu, select “Turn on media                                          Artist name
           streaming”.                                                                          My favorite album
                                                                                               1:00:00
           A dialog box appears.                                                                MP3 128kbps 44.1kHz


     3     Move your cursor and click on “Turn on media
           streaming”.                                                           Tip
           A list of media server appears. Wording may vary                    • To stop playback and return to the previous menu during
           slightly depending on the network location.                           remote playback, press RETURN on the product or
                                                                                 remote controller. To stop playback during remote play-
     4     Select the product in the list, and then click                        back, press Stop [ ] on the remote controller.

                                                                          5
           “Allowed”.
                                                                               Adjusting the Volume
     5     Click “OK” to close the dialog box.                                 You can adjust the volume of your AV receiver by
           This completes the Windows Media Player 12 con-                     adjusting the volume bar in the “Remote playback”
           figuration.                                                         window. The default maximum volume for the AV
           You can now play the music files in your Windows                    receiver is 82 (0dB). If you wish to change this, enter
           Media Player 12 library through the product.                        the maximum volume value from the Web Setup in
                                                                               your browser.
                                                                               The volume value of the remote window and the vol-
                                                                               ume value of the AV receiver may not always match.
                                                                               Adjustments you make to the volume in the AV
                                                                               receiver will not be reflected in the “Remote play-
                                                                               back” window.




                                                                          Windows and the Windows logo are trademarks of the
                                                                          Microsoft group of companies.
En
66
Network Settings                                                      5     When you’ve finished, press RETURN.
                                                                             The save confirmation screen appears.
 Note
                                                                                           7-6. Network
• When modifying network settings, after modifying it is neces-                           Save
  sary to execute “Save”.                                                                 Cancel




This section explains how to configure the AV receiver’s               6     Use / to select “Save”, and then press ENTER.
network settings manually.                                                   When modifying network settings, after modifying it
If your router’s DHCP server is enabled, you don’t need to                   is necessary to execute “Save”.
change any of these settings, as the AV receiver is set use
DHCP to configure itself automatically by default (i.e.,
                                                                       7     When you’ve finished, press SETUP.
                                                                             The setup menu closes.
DHCP is set to Enable). If, however, your router’s DHCP
server is disabled, for example, you’re using static IP
                                                                        Note
addresses, you’ll need to configure these settings yourself,
                                                                       • This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver by
in which case, a knowledge of Ethernet networking is
                                                                         using its SETUP, arrows, and ENTER.
essential.
What’s DHCP?                                                           ■ Mac Address
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used by                  This is the AV receiver’s MAC (Media Access Control)
routers, computers, the AV receiver, and other devices to              address. This address cannot be changed.
automatically configure themselves on a network.
                                                                       ■ DHCP
What’s DNS?
                                                                       This setting determines whether or not the AV receiver
The DNS (Domain Name System) translates domain                         uses DHCP to automatically configure its IP Address,
names into IP addresses. For example, when you enter a                 Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server settings.
domain name such as www.onkyousa.com in your Web
                                                                           Enable:
browser, before accessing the site, your browser uses DNS
                                                                             DHCP enabled.
to translate this into an IP address, in this case
                                                                           Disable:
63.148.251.142.
                                                                             DHCP disabled.

1     Press RECEIVER, followed by SETUP.                               If you select “Disable”, you must configure the “IP
                                                                       Address”, “Subnet Mask”, “Gateway”, and “DNS
      The main menu appears onscreen.
                                                                       Server” settings yourself.
      If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the
      appropriate external input is selected on your TV.               ■ IP Address
2     Use / to select “Hardware Setup”, and then                       If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must
                                                                       specify an IP address. Enter a static IP address provided
      press ENTER.
      The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.                               by your ISP.
                                                                       The IP address must be within the following ranges.
                        7. Hardware Setup                                  Class A:
                   1.
                   2.
                        Remote ID
                        Multi Zone
                                                                             10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
                   3.   Tuner
                   4.   HDMI
                                                                           Class B:
                   5.   Auto Power Down
                   6.   Network
                                                                             172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
                   7.   Firmware Update
                                                                           Class C:

3     Use / to select “Network”, and then press                              192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
                                                                       Most routers use Class C IP addresses.
      ENTER.
      The “Network” screen appears.                                    ■ Subnet Mask
                        7-6. Network
                                                                       If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must
                    MAC Address          xx : xx : xx − yy : yy : yy
                                                                       specify a subnet mask address.
                    DHCP                                    Disable
                      IP Address                  aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd      Enter the subnet mask address provided by your ISP (typi-
                      Subnet Mask                 aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
                      Gateway                     aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd      cally: 255.255.255.0).
                      DNS Server                  aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd

                    Proxy URL          http://www.proxy.xxx.com        ■ Gateway
                    Proxy Port                              8080
                                                                       If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must
                                                                       specify a gateway address.
                                                                       Enter the gateway address provided by your ISP.
4     Use / to select the setting, and use / to set
                                                                       ■ DNS Server
      them.
      To enter an IP address, select the setting, and then             If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must
      press ENTER. The arrow can then be used to enter                 specify a DNS server.
      numbers. Press ENTER again to set the number.                    Enter the DNS server addresses provided by your ISP.
      The settings are explained below.                                ■ Proxy URL                                                    En
                                                                       To use a Web proxy, enter its URL here.                        67
■ Proxy Port
                                                                    About USB
     If you’re using a Web proxy, enter a proxy port number
     here.                                                         USB can be used to play music files stored on USB mass
                                                                   storage devices (e.g., USB flash drives and MP3 players),
     ■ Control
                                                                   which can be plugged into the AV receiver’s USB port.
     This setting enables or disables control over the network.
         Enable:                                                   Supported Audio File Formats
          Control over the network enabled.
         Disable:                                                  For USB mass storage device playback, the AV receiver
          Control over the network disabled.                       supports music file formats.
      Note
                                                                   See “Supported Audio File Formats” (➔ 64).
     • When set to “Enable”, power consumption on standby mode
                                                                   USB Mass Storage Device Requirements
       slightly increases.

     ■ Port Number                                                 • The AV receiver supports USB devices that support the
                                                                     USB mass storage device class.
     This is the network port used for control over the network.
                                                                   • Playback may not be possible with some USB devices
      Note                                                           even if they conform to the USB mass storage device
     • Set the port number between from “49152” to “65535”.          class.
                                                                   • USB devices formatted with the FAT16 or FAT32 file
                                                                     system are supported.
                                                                   • If the storage device has been partitioned, each section
                                                                     will be treated as an independent device.
                                                                   • Each folder may contain up to 20000 music files and
                                                                     folders, and folders may be nested up to 16 levels deep.
                                                                   • USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not
                                                                     supported.

                                                                   Playing Music Files on a USB Device
                                                                   This section explains how to play music files on a USB
                                                                   mass storage device.


                                                                                                            DISPLAY




                                                                                                            NET/USB




                                                                                                            ENTER
                                                                                                             / / /


                                                                                                            RETURN

                                                                                                                ,       ,   ,   ,
                                                                                                                    ,       ,


                                                                                                            REPEAT
                                                                                                            RANDOM




En
68
1   Plug your USB mass storage device into the AV
    receiver’s USB port.
                                                               Random Playback
                                                               The Random function can only be set while the PLAY

2
                                                               screen is displayed.
    Press NET/USB repeatedly to select the “USB”
                                                               To play songs in random order, while the list of songs is
    input.
                                                               displayed, press RANDOM. All of the songs in the cur-
                         USB                                   rent folder will be played in random order. When all of the
                        USB Storage                            songs in the folder have been played once, they’ll all be
                                                               played again in a different random order. To cancel ran-
                                                               dom playback, press RANDOM again.
                                                               Random playback supports up to 20,000 songs per folder.
                                                               If a folder contains more than this, songs over 20,000 are
                                            1/1
                                                               not included in random playback.
                                                               Repeat Playback
    The USB indicator lights (➔ 9) if the AV receiver is       The Repeat function can only be set while the PLAY
    able to read the USB mass storage device. The USB          screen is displayed.
    indicator flashes if the AV receiver cannot read the       To play songs repeatedly, during playback (or while play-
    USB mass storage device.                                   back is paused or stopped), press REPEAT repeatedly to
3   Use / to select a USB mass storage device, and             select: Repeat1, Repeat Folder, Repeat All, or Off.
                                                               In Repeat1 mode, the current song is played repeatedly.
    then press ENTER.
    A list of the device’s contents appears.                   In Repeat Folder mode, all of the songs in the current
                                                               folder are played repeatedly.
                         USB Storage
                                                               In Repeat All mode, all of the songs on the USB mass
                         Folder1
                         Folder2                               storage device (in the same partition) are played repeat-
                         01_Song_Track1
                         02_Song_Track2                        edly.
                         03_Song_Track3
                         04_Song_Track4                        To cancel repeat playback, press REPEAT repeatedly to
                         05_Song_Track5
                         06_Song_Track6                        select Off.
                         07_Song_Track7
                         08_Song_Track8                         Note
                                            2/5

                                                               • If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the AV receiver’s USB
    To open a folder, use / to select it, and then press         port, we recommend that you use its AC adapter to power it.
                                                               • Do not connect the AV receiver’s USB port to a USB port on
    ENTER.
                                                                 your computer. Music on your computer cannot be played
4   Use / to select a music file, and press ENTER or             through the AV receiver in this way.
                                                               • The AV receiver supports USB MP3 players that support the
        to start playback.
                                                                 USB Mass Storage Class standard, which allows USB storage
    Playback starts and the following screen appears.
                                                                 devices to be connected to computers without the need for spe-
                         Folder1
                                                                 cial drivers or software. Note that not all USB MP3 players sup-
                                                                 port the USB Mass Storage Class standard. Refer your USB
                        1/17                                     MP3 player’s instruction manual for details.
                        02_Song_Track2
                        Artist                                 • Protected WMA music files on an MP3 player cannot be played.
                        Album
                00:10                       01:12:34           • Onkyo accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or dam-
                MP3 128kbps 16bit/44.1kHz                        age to data stored on a USB mass storage device when that
                                                                 device is used with the AV receiver. We recommend that you
                                                                 back up your important music files beforehand.
                                                               • MP3 players containing music files that are managed with spe-
    To return to the previous menu during playback,              cial music software, and the iPod containing music files man-
    press RETURN.                                                aged with iTunes are not supported.
                                                               • Operation with all USB mass storage devices including the abil-
    To stop or pause playback, press or , respec-                ity to power them is not guaranteed.
    tively.                                                    • Do not connect your USB mass storage device via a USB hub.
    To select the next song, press     . To select the           The USB mass storage device must be connected directly to the
    beginning of the current song, press      . To select        AV receiver’s USB port.
                                                               • If the USB mass storage device contains a lot of data, the AV
    the previous song, press       twice.
                                                                 receiver make take a while to read it.
    To fast forward the current song, press      . To fast     • USB memory devices with security functions cannot be played.
    reverse the current song, press     .
     Tip
    • If you press DISPLAY, you can toggle between the play-
      back screen and the list screen.




                                                                                                                                    En
                                                                                                                                    69
Multi Zone
     In addition to your main listening room, you can also enjoy playback in the other room, or as we call Multi Zone. And,
     you can select a different source for each room.

      Connecting Zone 2                                             Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers to an
                                                                    Amp in Zone 2
     There are two ways you can connect Zone 2 speakers:
                                                                    This setup allows 7.1-channel playback in your main lis-
     1. Connect them directly to the AV receiver.
                                                                    tening room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2,
     2. Connect them to an amp in Zone 2.
                                                                    with a different source in each room.
     Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers Directly
     to the AV receiver                                              Hookup
                                                                     • Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
     This setup allows 5.1-channel playback in your main room          ZONE 2 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input on
     and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2, with a different         your Zone 2 amp.
     source in each room. This is called Powered Zone 2, as the      • Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the speaker terminals on
     Zone 2 speakers are powered by the AV receiver. Note that         your Zone 2 amp.
     when Powered Zone 2 is turned off, you can enjoy 7.1-
     channel playback in your main room.
                                                                       Main room

      To use this setup, you must set the “Powered Zone2”
      setting to “Act” (➔ 71).                                                                       TV


      Hookup                                                                                  AV receiver
      • Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the AV receiver’s FRONT
        WIDE/ZONE 2 L/R terminals.


          Main room


                                  TV


                                                                       Zone 2
                             AV receiver
                                                                                                              IN

                                                                                                 R        L



                                                                                                Receiver/
                                                                                             integrated amp


                                                                     Note
                                                                    • With the default settings, the Zone 2 volume must be set on the
              Zone 2                                                  Zone 2 amp. If your Zone 2 amp has no volume control, set the
                 R                                   L                “Zone2 Out” setting to “Variable” so that you can set the
                                                                      Zone 2 volume on the AV receiver (➔ 72).

                                                                    Zone 2 12V Trigger
                                                                    When Zone 2 is turned on, the output from the ZONE 2
      Note                                                          12V TRIGGER OUT goes high (+12 volts, 150 milliam-
     • With this setup, the Zone 2 volume is controlled by the AV   peres max). Connecting this jack to a 12-volt trigger input
       receiver.                                                    on a component in Zone 2 will make that component turn
     • Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if “Speakers Type(Front)” is   on or off as and when Zone 2 is turned on or off on the AV
       set to “Bi-Amp” (➔ 45).
                                                                    receiver.




En
70
Connecting Zone 3                                                   Setting the Powered Zone 2
Connecting Your Zone 3 Speakers to an                               If you’ve connected your Zone 2 speakers to the AV
Amp in Zone 3                                                       receiver, as explained in “Connecting Your Zone 2 Speak-
                                                                    ers Directly to the AV receiver” (➔ 70), you must set the
This setup allows 7.1-channel playback in your main lis-            “Powered Zone2” setting to “Act” (Activated).
tening room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 3,
with a different source in each room.                               1    Press RECEIVER followed by SETUP.
                                                                         The main menu appears onscreen.
 Hookup                                                                     Tip
 • Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s                   • If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the appropri-
   ZONE 3 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input on                    ate external input is selected on your TV.
   your Zone 3 amp.
 • Connect your Zone 3 speakers to the speaker terminals on         2    Use / to select “Speaker Setup”, and then press
   your Zone 3 amp.                                                      ENTER.
                                                                         The “Speaker Setup” menu appears.
   Main room
                                                                                           2. Speaker Setup
                                                                                      1.   Speaker Settings
                                                                                      2.   Speaker Configuration
                                                                                      3.   Speaker Distance
                                 TV                                                   4.   Level Calibration
                                                                                      5.   Equalizer Settings
                                                                                      6.   THX Audio Setup



                          AV receiver                               3    Use / to select “Speaker Settings”, and then
                                                                         press ENTER.
                                                                         The “Speaker Settings” menu appears.

                                                                                           2–1. Speaker Settings
                                                                                      Speaker Impedance            6ohms
                                                                                      Speakers Type(Front)         Normal
                                                                                      Powered Zone2                Not Act




                                                                    4    Use / to select “Powered Zone2”, and use /
   Zone 3                                                                to select:
                                                                             Not Act:
                                          IN
                                                                               Use FRONT WIDE/ZONE 2 L/R terminals to
                             R        L
                                                                               connect front wide speakers. (Powered Zone 2
                           Receiver/                                           disabled.)
                        integrated amp                                       Act:
                                                                               Use FRONT WIDE/ZONE 2 L/R terminals to
                                                                               connect Zone 2 speakers. (Powered Zone 2
 Note                                                                          enabled.)
• With the default settings, the Zone 3 volume must be set on the
  Zone 3 amp. If your Zone 3 amp has no volume control, set the     5    Press SETUP.
                                                                         The setup menu closes.
  “Zone3 Out” setting to “Variable” so that you can set the
  Zone 3 volume on the AV receiver (➔ 72).
                                                                     Note
Zone 3 12V Trigger                                                  • Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if “Speakers Type(Front)” is
                                                                      set to “Bi-Amp” (➔ 45).
When Zone 3 is turned on, the output from the ZONE 3                • This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver by
12V TRIGGER OUT goes high (+12 volts, 25 milliam-                     using SETUP, arrows, and ENTER.
peres max). Connecting this jack to a 12-volt trigger input
on a component in Zone 3 will make that component turn
on or off as and when Zone 3 is turned on or off on the AV
receiver.




                                                                                                                                      En
                                                                                                                                      71
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver was
      Setting the Multi Zone
                                                                          last turned off, select “Last”.

     1     Press RECEIVER followed by SETUP.                              The “Zone2 Power On Volume” and “Zone3 Power On
                                                                          Volume” cannot be set higher than the “Zone2 Maximum
           The main menu appears onscreen.
                                                                          Volume” and “Zone3 Maximum Volume” setting.
             Tip
           • If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the appropri-
             ate external input is selected on your TV.
                                                                           Using Zone 2/3

     2     Use / to select “Hardware Setup”, and then                     This section explains how to turn Zone 2/3 on and off,
                                                                          how to select an input source for Zone 2/3, and how to
           press ENTER.
           The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.                             adjust the volume for Zone 2/3.

                             7. Hardware Setup                            Controlling Zone 2/3 from the AV receiver
                        1.   Remote ID
                        2.   Multi Zone
                        3.   Tuner                                         ZONE 3 indicator
                        4.   HDMI
                        5.   Auto Power Down                                   ZONE 2 indicator
                        6.   Network
                        7.   Firmware Update



     3     Use / to select “Multi Zone”, and then press
           ENTER.
           The “Multi Zone” menu appears.

                             7-2. Multi Zone
                        Zone2 Out                Fixed
                        Zone2 Maximum Volume        Off
                        Zone2 Power On Volume     Last
                        Zone3 Out                Fixed
                                                                               ZONE 3    Input selector buttons
                        Zone3 Maximum Volume        Off
                        Zone3 Power On Volume     Last                      ZONE 2   OFF

     4     Use / to select an item, and use               /   to change
                                                                          1    To turn on Zone 2/3 and select an input source,
           it.                                                                 press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 followed by an input
           The items are explained below.                                      selector button within 8 seconds.
     5     Press SETUP.
                                                                               Zone 2/3 turns on, the ZONE 2/3 indicator lights.
           The setup menu closes.
                                                                                  Tip

      Note                                                                     • ZONE 2/3 12V TRIGGER OUT goes high (+12 V).

     • This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver by              To select AM or FM, press TUNER input selector
       using SETUP, arrows, and ENTER.                                         and ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 repeatedly.
                                                                               (North American models) You can also select SIR-
     ■ Zone2 Out, Zone3 Out
                                                                               IUS.
          Fixed:
           The Zone 2/3 volume must be set on the amp in that                  To select the same source as that of the main room,
           zone.                                                               press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 twice. “Zone 2 Selector:
          Variable:                                                            Source” or “Zone 3 Selector: Source” appears on
           The Zone 2/3 volume can be set on the AV receiver.                  the display.
     If you’ve connected your Zone 2/3 speakers to an amp
     with no volume control, set the “Zone2 Out” and “Zone3
                                                                          2    To turn off Zone 2/3, press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3.
                                                                               ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator flashes.
     Out” setting, respectively, to “Variable” so that you can
     set the volume, balance, and tone of zone 2 and volume                    Press OFF.
     and balance of zone 3 on the AV receiver.                                 The zone is turned off, and the ZONE 2 or ZONE 3
                                                                               indicator goes off.
     ■ Zone2 Maximum Volume,
       Zone3 Maximum Volume
                                                                           Note
        Off, 50 to 99 (Absolute display)
                                                                          • When Zone 2/3 is turned off, the output from the ZONE 2/3
        Off, –32dB to +17dB (Relative display)
                                                                            12V TRIGGER OUT goes low (0 volts).
     With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for
     Zone 2/3.
     ■ Zone2 Power On Volume,
       Zone3 Power On Volume
        Last, Min, 1 to 99 or Max (Absolute display)
        Last, – dB, –81dB to +18dB (Relative display)
     This setting determines what the volume will be for
En   Zone 2/3 each time the AV receiver is turned on.
72
Controlling Zone 2/3 with the Remote                                  Adjusting the Volume for Zones
Controller
                                                                            On the remote controller, press ZONE repeatedly,
      STANDBY                                                               and then use VOL / .
              ON                               ZONE
                                                                            On the AV receiver, press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3
                                                                            (the ZONE 2/3 indicator and Zone 2/3 selector on
        INPUT                                                               the display flashes) and press LEVEL followed by
    SELECTOR
                                                                            Up /Down within 8 seconds.

                                                                      Muting Zones

 Note
                                                                            On the remote controller, press ZONE repeatedly,
• To control Zone 2/3, you must press the remote controller’s
                                                                            and then press MUTING.
  ZONE first.
• ZONE turns red while Zone 2 is on, and green while Zone 3 is
                                                                            To unmute a zone, on the remote controller, press
  on.
                                                                            ZONE, and then press MUTING again.

1     Press ZONE repeatedly, then point the remote
      controller at the AV receiver and press ON.                     Adjusting the Tone and Balance of Zones
        Tip
      • The ZONE 2/3 12V TRIGGER OUT goes high (+12 V).               1     On the AV receiver, press ZONE 2.

2     To select an input source for Zone 2/3, press
      ZONE repeatedly, followed by INPUT SELEC-
                                                                      2     Press the AV receiver’s TONE repeatedly to select
                                                                            “Bass”, “Treble” or “Balance”.
      TOR.
      To select AM or FM, press TUNER input selector                  3     Use / to adjust the bass, treble or balance.
                                                                            • You can boost or cut the bass or treble from –10 dB
      and ZONE repeatedly.
                                                                              to +10 dB in 2 dB steps.
      (North American models) You can also select SIR-
                                                                            • You can adjust the balance from 0 in the center to
      IUS.
                                                                              +10 dB to the right or +10 dB to the left in 2 dB
3     To turn off Zone 2/3, press ZONE repeatedly, fol-
      lowed by STANDBY.
                                                                              steps.

                                                                       Note
 Note                                                                 • Zones can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.
• Only analog input sources are output by the ZONE 2/3 PRE            • The Zone 2 volume, tone, and balance function have no effect on
  OUT and FRONT WIDE/ZONE 2 L/R terminals. Digital input                ZONE 2 PRE OUT when the “Zone2 Out” setting is set to
  sources are not output. If no sound is heard when an input source     “Fixed” (➔ 72).
  is selected, check if it’s connected to an analog input.            • The Zone 3 volume function has no effect on ZONE 3 PRE
• You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations for your          OUT when the “Zone3 Out” setting is set to “Fixed” (➔ 72).
  main room and Zone 2/3. The same AM/FM radio station will be        • Even if you repeatedly press the remote controller’s ZONE to
  heard in each room. For example, if you have an FM station for        select zones, the last zone selection will be retained once you
  the main room, that station will also be used in Zone 2.              have switched to other components by pressing other REMOTE
• When you connect Zone 2 speakers directly to the AV receiver,         MODE after pressing ZONE.
  listening modes that require surround back speakers or front high
  speakers or front wide speakers (6.1/7.1), such as Dolby Digital
  EX, DTS-ES, THX Select2 Cinema, Dolby Pro Logic IIz
  Height, and Audyssey DSX™ are unavailable.
• When the input selector of Zone 2/3 is selected, power consump-
  tion on standby mode slightly increases.
• While Zone 2/3 is on,        functions will not work.




                                                                                                                                          En
                                                                                                                                          73
Using the Remote Controller in                                Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet
      Zone 2/3 and Multiroom Control Kits                           In this setup, the IR receiver picks up the infrared signals
                                                                    from the remote controller and feeds them to the AV
     To control the AV receiver with the remote controller          receiver located in the cabinet via the connecting block.
     while you’re in Zone 2 or Zone 3, you’ll need a commer-
     cially available multiroom remote control kit for each
     zone.
                                                                                                                     IR
     • Multiroom kits are made by Niles and Xantech.                                         Connecting              receiver
     These kits can also be used when there isn’t a clear line of                            block
     sight to the AV receiver’s remote sensor, such as when it’s     IR IN
     installed inside a cabinet.

     Using a Multiroom Kit with Zone 2/3
     In this setup, the IR receiver in Zone 2/3 picks up the                      Inside
                                                                                 cabinet                 Remote controller
     infrared signals from the remote controller and feeds them
     through to the AV receiver in the main room via the con-                         Signal flow
     necting block.
            IR IN
                                                                    Using a Multiroom Kit with Other
                                                                    Components
                                                IR
                          Connect-                                  In this setup, an IR emitter is connected to the AV
                                                receiver
                          ing block                                 receiver’s IR OUT jack and placed in front of the other
                                                                    component’s remote control sensor. Infrared signals
                                                                    received at the AV receiver’s IR IN jack are fed through to
                                                                    the other component via the IR emitter. Signals picked up
                                                                    by the AV receiver’s remote control sensor are not output.
                                        Remote controller

                    Main room               Zone 2/3
                                                                                                                 IR receiver
                                                                                             Connecting
                    Signal flow                                                              block
                                                                        IR IN
     The miniplug cable from the connecting block should be                                    AV receiver
                                                                     IR OUT
     connected to the AV receiver’s IR IN jack, as shown
     below.                                                                                    IR Emitter

                             From the connecting block                                         Remote controller
                                                                                               Other component

                    Miniplug cable
                                                                                      Signal flow

                                                                    The IR emitter should be connected to the AV receiver’s
                                                                    IR OUT jack, as shown below.


                                                                                               Miniplug cable
                          AV receiver                                                             Other component
                                                                                                                             Remote
                                                                             AV receiver                                     control
                                                                                                                             sensor
                                                                                                                 Emitter
                                                                                              Miniplug
                                                                                                             IR Emitter


                                                                                           Signal flow




En
74
Controlling iPod & Other Components

Controlling iPod
 Connecting the iPod Directly to the                                                         3   Press DISPLAY to switch to Extended Mode*3.
 USB Port                                                                                        A list of your iPod model’s contents appears. To
                                                                                                 open a folder, use / to select it, and then press
USB can be used to play music files stored on iPod/                                              ENTER.
iPhone, which can be plugged into the AV receiver’s USB
                                                                                                    Tip
port.
                                                                                                 • With the default settings, the iPod/iPhone can be manipu-
                                                                                                   lated as Standard Mode*2.
                                                                                                 • Pressing DISPLAY again switches back to Standard
                                                                                                   Mode.

                                                                                             4   Use / to select a music file, and press ENTER or
                                                                                                      to start playback.
                                                                                                 • To return to the previous menu during playback,
                                                                                                   press RETURN.
                                                                                                 • To stop or pause playback, press or , respec-
                                                                                                   tively.
                                                                                                 • To select the next song, press       . To select the
               USB port                                                                            beginning of the current song, press         . To select
                                                                                                   the previous song, press        twice.
Playing Music Files on the iPod/iPhone                                                           • To fast forward the current song, press         . To
This section explains how to play music files on the iPod/                                         fast reverse the current song, press       .
iPhone.                                                                                          • To switch the repeat mode, press REPEAT. To
                                                                                                   switch the random mode, press RANDOM.

                                                            DISPLAY                      Standard Mode control
                                                                                         The content information is not displayed onscreen, but can
                                                                                         be manipulated using the iPod/iPhone or the Remote Con-
                                                                                         trol (NET/USB).
                                                            NET/USB
                                                                                             Note
                                                                                         • The audio of video content can be played back but no video will
                                                            ALBUM +/–                      be displayed onscreen.
                                                             / , ENTER,
                                                            PLAYLIST /                   Extended Mode control
                                                                                         The content information is displayed (lists are displayed)
                                                            RETURN                       on the on-screen, and you can select and manipulate the
                                                                                         content while looking at the screen.
                                                                     ,       ,   ,   ,   Top screen list:
                                                                         ,       ,       •   Playlists*4
                                                                                         •   Artists*4
                                                            REPEAT                       •   Albums*4
                                                            RANDOM                       •   Genres*4
                                                                                         •   Songs*4

1
                                                                                         •   Composers*4
     Press NET/USB repeatedly to select the USB                                          •   Shuffle Songs*5
     input.                                                                              •   Now Playing*6
2    Connect the USB cable that comes with the iPod/
     iPhone*1 to the USB port at the front of the AV
                                                                                         *1   Compatible iPod models
                                                                                              Made for:
     receiver.                                                                                • iPod touch (1st and 2nd generation)
     • The USB indicator lights (➔ 9) if the AV receiver                                      • iPod classic
       is able to read the iPod/iPhone.                                                       • iPod (5th generation)
                                                                                              • iPod nano (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation)
     • The USB indicator flashes if the AV receiver can-
                                                                                              • All iPhone models
       not read the iPod/iPhone.

                     iPod(STD)


                    Push “DISPLAY” button switch to Extended mode.
                                                                                                                                                               En
                                                                                                                                                               75
*2   The following iPod models are not supported in Standard                              *3   When you disconnect the iPod/iPhone, the AV receiver stores
          Mode. These iPod models can only be controlled in Extended                                the mode. This means that if you disconnect when in
          Mode.                                                                                     Extended Mode, the AV receiver will start in Extended Mode
          • iPod (5th generation)                                                                   when you next connect the iPod/iPhone.
          • iPod nano (1st generation)                                                         *4   Displays a list.
                                                                                               *5   Plays all tracks in random order.
                                                                                               *6   Displays information about currently playing track.


      Connecting an Onkyo Dock

                                                                  *1




     No.     Onkyo Dock                                                Cable                          Note                                             Page
             UP-A1 Dock                                                —                              • When UP-A1 Dock that seated iPod is con-       77
             (Universal Port Option Dock)                                                               nected, the power consumption on standby
                                                                                                        mode slightly increases.
                                                                                                      • You can control your iPod when “PORT” is
                                                                                                        selected as the input source.
                                                                                                      • See the UP-A1 Dock’s instruction manual for
                                                                                                        more information.
             ND-S1                                                     Optical digital audio          • See the ND-S1’s instruction manual for more 77
                                                                                                        information.
                                                                                                      *1 The ND-S1’s audio outputs are digital out-

                     ON
                                                                       Coaxial digital audio              puts. If the digital audio input on your AV
                       /ST
                          AN
                               DB




                                                                                                          receiver cannot be assigned to an input selec-
                                 Y


                                 ST
                                   AN
                                     DB
                                       Y




                                                                                                          tor whose Input Display can be set to
                                           iP o
                                               d


                                                   PC


                                                        UN SYN
                                                          SY C/
                                                             NC
                                                                            cable*1                       “DOCK”, do not connect the           cable, oth-
                                                                                                          erwise a malfunction may occur.
             RI Dock                                                   Analog audio (RCA)             • See the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more 78
                                                                                                        information.
                                                                                                      *1 To use      (Remote Interactive), you must
                                                                                                          make an analog audio connection (RCA)
                                                                       Component video
                                                                                                          between the AV receiver and the RI Dock.
                                                                           Y
                                                                           PB/CB
                                                                           PR/CR

                                                                       Composite video


                                                                            cable*1


     Models sold are different depending on the region.



En
76
■ Using Your iPod models Alarm Clock
 Using the Onkyo Dock
                                                                     You can use your iPod models Alarm Clock function to
                                                                     automatically turn on your iPod and the AV receiver at a
 Dock is sold separately.                                            specified time. The AV receiver’s input source will auto-
 For the latest information on the Onkyo Dock compo-                 matically be set to the PORT selector.
 nents, see the Onkyo web site at:
                                                                      Note
 http://www.onkyo.com
 Before using the Onkyo Dock components, update                      • To use this function, your iPod must be in the UP-A1 Dock, and
                                                                       the UP-A1 Dock must be connected to the AV receiver.
 your iPod with the latest software, available from the
                                                                     • This function works only in the Standard mode (➔ 79).
 Apple web site.
                                                                     • When you use this function, be sure to set the AV receiver’s vol-
 For supported iPod models, see the instruction man-                   ume control to a suitable level.
 ual of the Onkyo Dock.                                              • When Zone 2/3 is turned on, you can’t use this function.
                                                                     • You cannot use this function for sound effects on your iPod.
UP-A1 Dock
                                                                     ■ Charging Your iPod models Battery
With the UP-A1 Dock, you can easily play the music,                  The UP-A1 Dock charges your iPod models battery while
photo, or movie stored on your Apple iPod through the AV             your iPod is in the UP-A1 Dock and connected to the
receiver and enjoy great sound.                                      UNIVERSAL PORT jack on the AV receiver. While your
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to operate           iPod is seated in the UP-A1 Dock, its battery will be
your iPod.                                                           charged when the AV receiver is set to “On” or “Standby”.

■ Basic Operation                                                     Note
                                                                     • When UP-A1 Dock that seated iPod is connected, the power
                                                                       consumption on standby mode slightly increases.
 The AV receiver may take several seconds to startup, so
 you might not hear the first few seconds of the first               ■ Status Messages
 song.                                                               • PORT Reading
                                                                        The AV receiver is checking the connection with the
Auto Power On                                                           dock.
If you start iPod playback while the AV receiver is on               • PORT Not Support
Standby, the AV receiver will automatically turn on and
                                                                        The AV receiver do not support the connected dock.
select your iPod as the input source.
                                                                     • PORT UP-A1
Direct Change
                                                                        UP-A1 Dock is connected.
If you start iPod playback while listening to another input
source, the AV receiver will automatically select your iPod           Note
as the input source.                                                 • The AV receiver displays the message “UP-A1” for several sec-
Using the AV receiver’s Remote Controller                              onds after recognizing the UP-A1.
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to control           • When the status message is not displayed on the AV receiver’s
                                                                       display, check the connection to your iPod.
basic iPod functions (➔ 78).
                                                                     ND-S1
 ■ Operating Notes
 • Functionality depends on your iPod model and generation.          With the ND-S1 Digital Media Transport, you can easily
 • Before selecting a different input source, stop iPod playback     play the music stored on your iPod through the AV
   to prevent the AV receiver from selecting the iPod input          receiver and enjoy great sound.
   source by mistake.                                                The ND-S1 processes the digital audio signal directly
 • If any accessories are connected to your iPod, the AV receiver    from your iPod for high-quality digital audio output (opti-
   may not be able to select the input source properly.              cal or coaxial).
 • When connecting UP-A1 Dock to the radio tuner UP-HT1
   (North American models)/UP-DT1 (European, Australian               Note
   and Asian models) with AUTO selected by the tuner’s Mode
                                                                     • You must select “iPod” using ND-S1’s iPod/PC button.
   Selector switch, you can switch the input source between UP-
                                                                     • Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK” (➔ 27).
   A1 Dock and the tuner, by pressing PORT repeatedly on the
   front panel.
 • While your iPod is in the UP-A1 Dock, its volume control has
   no effect. If you adjust your iPod models volume control while
   it’s in the UP-A1 Dock, make sure it’s not set too high before
   you reconnect your headphones.
 • The Auto Power On function will not work if you set your
   iPod in the UP-A1 Dock while it is playing.
 • When Zone 2/3 is turned on, you can’t use Auto Power On and
   Direct Change functions.
 • Do not turn off the power with the iPod still connected to this
   unit via the UP-A1 Dock.
 • Set your iPod in the UP-A1 Dock after the AV receiver turns
                                                                                                                                           En
   on.
                                                                                                                                           77
RI Dock
                                                                         ■ Operating Notes
     With the RI Dock, you can easily play the music stored on           • Use the AV receiver’s volume control to adjust the playback
     your Apple iPod through the AV receiver and enjoy great               volume.
     sound, and watch iPod slideshows and videos on your TV.             • While your iPod is inserted in the ND-S1 or RI Dock, its vol-
     In addition, the onscreen display (OSD) allows you to                 ume control has no effect. If you adjust your iPod models vol-
                                                                           ume control while it’s in the UP-A1 Dock, make sure it’s not set
     view, navigate, and select your iPod model’s contents on
                                                                           too high before you reconnect your headphones.
     your TV, and with the supplied remote controller, you can
     control your iPod from the comfort of your sofa. You can
     even use the AV receiver’s remote controller to operate             Note
     your iPod.                                                         • On the 5th generation iPod and iPod nano, the click wheel is
                                                                          disabled during playback. For ND-S1, use iPod button to start
      Note                                                                and stop playback and the remote controller to control other iPod
     • Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the AV      functions.
       receiver’s remote controller for the first time (➔ 82).
     • Connect the RI Dock to the AV receiver with an         cable
       (➔ 76).
                                                                         Controlling Your iPod
     • Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or “HDD/               By pressing REMOTE MODE that’s been programmed
       DOCK”.
                                                                        with the remote control code for your Dock, you can con-
     • Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK” (➔ 27).
                                                                        trol your iPod in the Dock.
     ■ System Function                                                  See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for details on
     System On                                                          entering a remote control code (➔ 82).
     When you turn on the AV receiver, the ND-S1, RI Dock               See the Dock’s instruction manual for more information.
     and iPod turn on automatically. In addition, when the
                                                                        ■ UP-A1 Dock
     ND-S1, RI Dock and iPod are on, the AV receiver can be
     turned on by pressing ON/STANDBY.                                  PORT is preprogrammed with the remote control code for
                                                                        controlling a Dock with Universal Port connector.
     Auto Power On
                                                                        You can control your iPod when “PORT” is selected as
     If you press the remote controller’s     while the AV
                                                                        the input source.
     receiver is on Standby, the AV receiver will automatically
     turn on, select your iPod as the input source, and your
                                                                        Without the RI Control
     iPod will start playback.
     Direct Change                                                      You must enter a remote control code 82990 first (➔ 82).
     If you start iPod playback while listening to another input
                                                                        ■ ND-S1
     source, the AV receiver will automatically switch to the
                                                                        • Select “iPod” using ND-S1’s iPod/PC button.
     input to which the ND-S1 and RI Dock is connected.
     Using the AV receiver’s Remote Controller                          ■ RI Dock
     You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to control         • Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or “HDD/
     basic iPod functions.                                                DOCK”.
     Using Your iPod models Alarm Clock                                 • ON/STANDBY may not work with a remote control
     If you use the Alarm Clock function on your iPod to start            code (without     ). In this case, make an  connection
     playback, the AV receiver will automatically turn on at the          and enter a remote control code 81993 (with    ).
     specified time and select your iPod as the input source.
      Note
                                                                        With the RI Control
     • Linked operations do not work with video playback or when the    In this case, make an     connection and enter a remote
       alarm is set to play a sound.
     • If you use your iPod with any other accessories, iPod playback
                                                                        control code 81993 (with      ).
       detection may not work.                                          • Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK” (➔ 27).
     • This function works only in the Standard mode (➔ 79).




En
78
✔: Available buttons
              Press the appropriate REMOTE
              MODE first.                                                                      Onkyo Dock




                                                                                                                UP-A1 Dock




                                                                                                                                             Dock
                                                                                                                                 ND-S1
                                                                       Buttons

                                                                           ON, STANDBY                                       ✔           ✔*1
                                                                           TOP MENU                                          ✔*5         ✔*6
                                                                             / / / ENTER                    ✔                ✔*5         ✔
                                                                           PLAYLIST /                       ✔*3              ✔           ✔
                                                                               ,       ,   ,     ,   ,      ✔                ✔           ✔
                                                                                   ,
                                                                           REPEAT                           ✔                ✔           ✔
                                                                           RANDOM                           ✔                ✔           ✔
                                                                           PLAY MODE                        ✔*4              ✔*5         ✔*4
                                                                           DISPLAY*7                        ✔*2              ✔*5         ✔
                                                                           MUTING                           ✔                ✔*5         ✔
                                                                           ALBUM +/–                        ✔                ✔           ✔
                                                                           VOL /                            ✔                ✔*5         ✔
                                                                           MENU                                              ✔*5         ✔
                                                                           RETURN                           ✔




• With some iPod models, generations and RI Docks, certain buttons may not work as expected.
• For detailed operation of the iPod, please refer to the instruction manual of RI Dock.
*1 This button does not turn the Onkyo DS-A2 or DS-A2X RI Dock on or off. Your iPod may not respond the first time you press this
   button, in which case you should press it again.
   This is because the remote controller transmits the On and Standby commands alternately, so if your iPod is already on, it will
   remain on when the remote controller transmits an On command.
   Similarly, if your iPod is already off, it will remain off when the remote controller transmits an Off command.
*2 Press DISPLAY to change the following modes:
   Standard mode
   Nothing is displayed on your TV and you navigate and select your contents by using your iPod models display.
   Only this mode can playback the video.
   Extended mode (Music)
   Playlists (artists, albums, songs, and so on) are displayed on your TV, and you can navigate and select your music while looking at
   your TV.
   Extended mode (Video)
   Playlists (Movies, Music Videos, TV Shows, Video Podcasts, or Rentals) are displayed on your TV, and you can navigate and select
   your video while looking at your TV.
*3 In Extended mode (see *2), PLAYLIST is used as the page jump button.
   With the page modes, you can quickly locate your favorite songs even when your song lists, artist lists, and so on are very long.
*4 Resume mode
   With the Resume function, you can resume playback of the song that was playing when you removed your iPod from the RI Dock or
   Standard mode is selected.
*5 Operation can be performed if you connect ND-S1 with an            cable.
*6 TOP MENU works as a Mode button when used with a DS-A2 RI Dock.
*7 DISPLAY turns on backlight for 30 seconds.

 Note
• In Extended mode (see *2), the playback will be continued even if the AV receiver is turned off.
• In Extended mode (see *2), you cannot operate your iPod directly.
• In Extended mode (see *2), it may take some time to acquire the contents.                                                                         En
                                                                                                                                                    79
Controlling Other Components
     You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller
     (RC-771M) to control your other AV components, includ-            4   Use / to select remote mode, and then press
                                                                           ENTER.
     ing those made by other manufacturers. This section
                                                                           The category selection menu appears.
     explains how to enter the remote control code (with the
     default underlined) for a component that you want to con-                             8–1. Remote Mode Setup                      TV
     trol: DVD, TV, CD, etc.                                                          TV
                                                                                      TV/DVD
     • Learn commands directly from another component’s                               TV/VCR

       remote controller (➔ 86).
     • Program ACTIVITIES to perform a sequence of up to 32            5   Use / to select category, and then press
       remote control actions (➔ 87).                                      ENTER.
                                                                           The brand name input panel appears.
      Preprogrammed Remote Control                                                         8–1. Remote Mode Setup                      TV

      Codes                                                                           Category
                                                                                      Brand
                                                                                                                                            TV



     The following REMOTE MODE are preprogrammed
     with remote control codes for controlling the components                         A    B   C   D    E   F   G   H        I     J    K     L M
                                                                                      N    O   P   Q R      S   T   U       V W         X     Y    Z
     listed. You do not need to enter a remote control code to                        1    2   3   4    5   6   7   8       9      0    –     & @
                                                                                                   Space                Back Space          Search
     control these components.
     For details on controlling these components, see the pages

                                                                       6
     indicated.
                                                                           Use / / / to select a character, and then
     BD/DVD Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player (➔ 83)                               press ENTER.
     TV/CD  Onkyo CD player (➔ 83)                                         Repeat this step from the 1st character to the 3rd
                                                                           character of the brand name.
     PORT   Onkyo Universal Port Option (➔ 78)
                                                                           When you have entered the 3rd character, press
                                                                           ENTER.
      Looking up for Remote Control Code                                   After searching, a list of the brand name appears.
     You can look up for appropriate remote control code from                              8–1. Remote Mode Setup                      TV
     on-screen setup menu.                                                            Category                                              TV
                                                                                      Brand
      Note
     • This setting can be carried out by using on-screen setup menu                      Sonawa
                                                                                          Sonber
       only.                                                                              Songba
                                                                                          Sonic


     1
                                                                                          Soniko
              Press RECEIVER followed by SETUP.                                                                                        Search DB

              The main menu appears onscreen.
              If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the
              appropriate external input is selected on your TV.
                                                                       7   When you have a network connection, use to
                                                                           select “Search DB”, and then press ENTER.

     2        Use / to select “Remote Controller Setup”,                   The AV receiver accesses and searches the data-
                                                                           base. After searching, a list of the brand name
              and then press ENTER.
              The “Remote Controller Setup” menu appears.                  appears.
                                                                                           8–1. Remote Mode Setup                      TV
                            8. Remote Controller Setup
                                                                                      Category                                              TV
                          1. Remote Mode Setup                                        Brand
                          2. Activities Setup


                                                                                          Sonawa
                                                                                          Sonber

     3
                                                                                          Songba
              Use / to select “Remote Mode Setup”, and                                    Sonic
                                                                                          Soniko
              then press ENTER.                                                                                                        Not Listed
              The “Remote Mode Setup” menu appears.

                            8–1. Remote Mode Setup
                                                                             Tip
                          TV                                               • If you cannot access the database, a message “Cannot
                          BD/DVD
                          VCR/DVR                                            connect to datebase.” will appear. Press ENTER to
                          CBL/SAT
                          GAME                                               return to the previous step.
                          PC
                          AUX                                              • If the brand name is not found, use to select “Not
                          TV/CD                                              Listed”, and then press ENTER.
                          PHONO
                                                                           When you do NOT have a network connection,
                                                                           skip this step and go to step 8.
En
80
8    When you have a network connection, select
     the brand name again, and then press ENTER.
                                                                                   13   When you have a network connection, a mes-
                                                                                        sage “Successful” will appear. Now the transfer
     When you do NOT have a network connection,                                         is successful!
     use / to select the brand name, and then                                           You’ll return to the category selection menu.
     press ENTER.                                                                       Press SETUP to end the remote mode setup.
     The following screen appears.                                                      When you do NOT have a network connection,
                                                                                        the following screen appears.
                  8–1. Remote Mode Setup                            TV
                                                                                        Push any key (except for arrow buttons and
                Category                                                  TV
                Brand                                                  Sonic            ENTER) to see if the component responds.
                Model                                                (Option)

                                                                                                          8–1. Remote Mode Setup                            TV
                                                                                                      Category                                                    TV
                                                                                                      Brand                                                 XXXXX
                                                                                                      Code                                             xxxxx[***/***]

                Skip                                                                                    1. Push some key to see if the TV responds.
                Search by model number( via network )                                                   (except Arrow and Enter.)
                                                                                                        2. Choose “Works” or “Doesn’t work”.




9    The AV receiver accesses and searches the
     database. Select “Search by model number( via
                                                                                                *
                                                                                                      Works
                                                                                                      Doesn’t work (Try next code)
     network )”, and then press ENTER. When you                                         *   When category other than TV have been selected,
     do NOT have a network connection, select                                               the content is different.
     “Skip” when you don’t want to select the
     model, and then press ENTER.                                                  14   If you can control component, press
     If you select “Skip”, you will go to step 11.                                      RECEIVER, use / to select “Works”, and
                                                                                        then press ENTER.
10   Enter the model in a similar manner as in the
     case of the brand name (step 6).                                                                   8–1. Remote Mode Setup                            TV
                                                                                                     Category                                                   TV
       Tip                                                                                           Brand                                                XXXXX
                                                                                                     Code                                            xxxxx[***/***]
     • After entering the 3rd character, press ENTER to start                                         Now we are ready to transfer data to the remote.
       searching.                                                                                     Please hold the remote so that it is facing the receiver.
                                                                                                      Use ENTER button of your remote to activate “OK”.
     • You cannot enter a space character.                                                            Ready?



11   Use / to select the model, and then press                                                       OK
     ENTER.
     If the brand name is not found, use to select                                      If you cannot control component, use / to
     “Not Listed”, and then press ENTER.                                                select “Doesn’t work (Try next code)” and
     After searching is completed, a message for                                        press ENTER.
     remote control code transfer will appear.                                          The next code appears.
                     8–1. Remote Mode Setup
                 Category
                                                                       TV
                                                                             TV
                                                                                   15   Press ENTER to transfer the determined code.
                 Brand                                                 XXXXX
                 Model                                            xxxxx[***/***]               Remote control sensor (Transmitter)
                   Now we are ready to transfer data to remote.
                   Please hold remote so that it is facing the receiver.                            Incoming sensor
                   Ready?
                                                                                                                            15

                 OK                                                                                                                         15

                                                                                                                                   Approx.
12   While pointing the remote controller at the AV                                                           15° off center       16ft. (5 m)
                                                                                                              (Left/Right/Up/Down)
     receiver’s remote control sensor, press ENTER.

             Remote control sensor (Transmitter)                                   16   Press ENTER.
                                                                                        You’ll return to the category selection menu.
                Incoming sensor                                                         Press SETUP to end the remote mode setup.
                                         15

                                                         15

                                                Approx.
                           15° off center       16ft. (5 m)
                           (Left/Right/Up/Down)




                                                                                                                                                                        En
                                                                                                                                                                        81
Entering Remote Control Codes                                   2     Enter the appropriate remote control code for
                                                                            REMOTE MODE.
     You’ll need to enter a code for each component that you                • BD/DVD
     want to control.                                                           31612:

     1
                                                                                 Onkyo DVD player with
           Look up the appropriate remote control code in
                                                                            • TV/CD
           the separate Remote Control Codes list.
                                                                                71327:
           The codes are organized by category (e.g., DVD
           player, TV, etc.).                                                    Onkyo CD player with
                                                                                42157:
     2     While holding down REMOTE MODE to which
           you want to enter a code, press and hold down
                                                                                 Onkyo cassette tape deck with
           DISPLAY (about 3 seconds).                                       • PORT
           The REMOTE MODE button lights.                                       81993:
                                                                                 Onkyo Dock with
             Note                                                           See the previous section for how to enter remote
           • Remote control codes cannot be entered for RECEIVER            control codes.
             and ZONE.
           • Only TV remote control codes can be entered for TV.              Note
           • Except for RECEIVER, TV and ZONE, remote control               • When using a cassette tape deck connected via       , press
             codes from any category can be entered as REMOTE                 and hold TV/CD to switch to TAPE.

                                                                      3
             MODE. However, these buttons also work as input selec-
             tor buttons (➔ 25), so choose a REMOTE MODE that               Press REMOTE MODE, point the remote control-
             corresponds with the input to which you connect your           ler at the AV receiver, and operate the component.
             component. For example, if you connect your CD player
             to the CD input, choose TV/CD when entering its remote   If you want to control an Onkyo component by pointing
             control code.                                            the remote controller directly at it, or you want to control

     3     Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to
           enter the 5-digit remote control code.
                                                                      an Onkyo component that’s not connected via
                                                                      following remote control codes:
                                                                                                                           , use the

           REMOTE MODE button flashes twice.                          • BD/DVD
           If the remote control code is not entered success-             30627:
           fully, REMOTE MODE button will flash once                        Onkyo DVD player without
           slowly.                                                    • TV/CD
                                                                          71817:
      Note                                                                  Onkyo CD player without
     • The remote control codes provided are correct at the time of       11807:
       printing, but are subject to change.                                 TV with
                                                                      If you want to control an Onkyo component by pointing the
      Remote Control Codes for Onkyo                                  remote controller directly at it, use the following remote
                                                                      control codes:
      Components Connected via                                            32900:
     Onkyo components that are connected via          are con-              Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player
     trolled by pointing the remote controller at the AV                  32901:
     receiver, not the component. This allows you to control                Onkyo HD-DVD player
     components that are out of view, in a rack, for example.             70868:
                                                                            Onkyo MD recorder without
     1     Make sure the Onkyo component is connected                     71323:
           with an    cable and an analog audio cable                       Onkyo CD recorder without
           (RCA).                                                         82990:
           See “Connecting Onkyo u Components” for details                  Onkyo Dock without
           (➔ 20).
                                                                       Note
                                                                      • If you connect a cassette tape deck to the TV/CD IN jack, or
                                                                        connect an RI Dock to the to the TV/CD IN or VCR/DVR IN or
                                                                        GAME IN jacks, for       to work properly, you must set the Input
                                                                        Display accordingly (➔ 27).




En
82
Resetting REMOTE MODE Buttons                                  Controlling Other Components
You can reset a REMOTE MODE to its default remote              By pressing REMOTE MODE that’s been programmed
control code.                                                  with the remote control code for your component, you can
                                                               control your component as below.
1    While holding down REMOTE MODE that you
     want to reset, press and hold down HOME until
                                                               For details on entering a remote control code for other
                                                               components, see “Entering Remote Control Codes”
     REMOTE MODE button lights (about 3 seconds).              (➔ 82).
2    Within 30 seconds, press REMOTE MODE again.
                                                               Controlling a TV
     REMOTE MODE button flashes twice, indicating
     that the button has been reset.                           TV is preprogrammed with the remote control code for
     Each of REMOTE MODE is preprogrammed with a               controlling a TV that supports the         *1 (limited to
     remote control code. When a button is reset, its pre-     some models). The TV must be able to receive remote
     programmed code is restored.
                                                               control commands via             and be connected to the
      Note                                                     AV receiver via HDMI. If controlling your TV via
     • The learning command is also reset.                                doesn’t work very well, program your TV’s
                                                               remote control code into TV and use the TV remote mode
                                                               to control your TV.
 Resetting the Remote Controller
You can reset the remote controller to its default settings.   Controlling a Blu-ray Disc/DVD Player, HD
                                                               DVD Player or DVD Recorder
1    While holding down RECEIVER, press and hold
     down HOME until RECEIVER lights (about 3 sec-
                                                               BD/DVD is preprogrammed with the remote control code
                                                               for controlling a component that supports the        *1
     onds).
                                                               (limited to some models). The component must be able to
2    Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER again.                  receive remote control commands via           and be
     RECEIVER flashes twice, indicating that the               connected to the AV receiver via HDMI.
     remote controller has been reset.
                                                               *1   The          supported by the AV receiver is the CEC
                                                                    system control function of the HDMI standard.




                                                                                                                           En
                                                                                                                           83
✔: Available buttons
                  Press the appropriate REMOTE
                  MODE first.                                        Components




                                                                                                DVD player/DVD recorder




                                                                                                                                                CD player/CD recorder

                                                                                                                                                Cassette tape deck
                                                                                                                          Blu-ray Disc player



                                                                                                                                                Satellite receiver
                                                                                                                          HD DVD player



                                                                                                                                                Cable receiver

                                                                                                                                                MD recorder
                                                                                                                          VCR/PVR
                                                                                          TV
                                                               Buttons
                                                                    ON, STANDBY          ✔      ✔                                      ✔ ✔              ✔        ✔
                                                                       , INPUT,          ✔
                                                                    TV VOL /
                                                                    GUIDE                ✔                                             ✔ ✔
                                                                    TOP MENU                    ✔
                                                                     / / /               ✔      ✔                                      ✔ ✔              ✔
                                                                    ENTER
                                                                    SETUP                ✔      ✔                                      ✔ ✔              ✔
                                                                        ,       ,   ,   , ✔*1   ✔                                      ✔ ✔              ✔        ✔*3
                                                                            ,       ,
                                                                    SEARCH               ✔*1*2 ✔*1 ✔*2                                          ✔*2 ✔
                                                                    REPEAT               ✔*1*2 ✔                          ✔*2                   ✔*2 ✔
                                                                    RANDOM               ✔*1*2 ✔*1 ✔*2                                          ✔*2 ✔
                                                                    PLAY MODE            ✔*1*2 ✔*1 ✔*2                                          ✔*2 ✔
                                                                    Number: 1 to 9, 0 ✔         ✔                                      ✔ ✔              ✔
                                                                    Number: +10          ✔*1    ✔*1                                    ✔ ✔              ✔
                                                                    DISPLAY              ✔      ✔                                      ✔ ✔              ✔
                                                                    MUTING               ✔      ✔                                      ✔ ✔              ✔        ✔
                                                                    CH +/–               ✔      ✔                                      ✔ ✔
                                                                    DISC +/–                    ✔                                                       ✔
                                                                    PREV CH              ✔                                             ✔ ✔
                                                                    MENU                        ✔
                                                                    RETURN               ✔      ✔                                      ✔ ✔
                                                                    CLR                  ✔      ✔                                      ✔ ✔              ✔

                                                               *1   The            function is not supported. The          sup-
                                                                    ported by the AV receiver is the CEC system control function
                                                                    of the HDMI standard.
                                                               *2   These buttons function as colored buttons or A, B, C, D but-
                                                                    tons.
                                                               *3       (Pause) functions as reverse playback.
                                                                Note
                                                               • See the “Controlling Your iPod” about the operation of iPod
                                                                 (➔ 78).




      Note
     • With some components, certain buttons may not work as
       expected, and some may not work at all.




En
84
Activities Setup                                                                  ■ Source Power On
                                                                                      Enable:
Via onscreen menu, you can specify what actions will be                                Source to turn on “Enable”.
taken by the Easy macro command in the Easy macro                                     Disable:
mode (➔ 27).                                                                           Source to turn on “Disable”.
                                                                                     This option enables the Source to turn on when
1    Press RECEIVER followed by SETUP.                                               ACTIVITIES is pressed.
     The main menu appears onscreen.
                                                                                   ■ Receiver Power On
       Tip
                                                                                      Enable:
     • If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the appropri-                         AV receiver to turn on “Enable”.
       ate external input is selected on your TV.
                                                                                      Disable:
2    Use / to select “Remote Controller Setup”, and                                     AV receiver to turn on “Disable”.
     then press ENTER.                                                               This option enables the AV receiver to turn on
     The “Remote Controller Setup” menu appears.                                     when ACTIVITIES is pressed.
                    8. Remote Controller Setup                                     ■ Receiver Source Change
                  1. Remote Mode Setup
                  2. Activities Setup
                                                                                       Enable:
                                                                                         AV receiver input selector is change.
                                                                                       Disable:
3    Use / to select “Activities Setup”, and then                                        AV receiver input selector is not change.
                                                                                     This option enables the AV receiver input selector
     press ENTER.
     The “Activities Setup” menu appears.                                            to change when ACTIVITIES is pressed.
                                                                                   ■ Source Play
                    8–2. Activities Setup
                  My Movie                                                            Enable:
                  My TV
                  My Music                                                              Start playback the source of “Enable”.
                                                                                      Disable:
                                                                                        Start playback the source of “Disable”.
4    Use / to select “My Movie”, “My TV”, or “My                                     This option enables the Source to start playback
     Music”, and then press ENTER.                                                   when ACTIVITIES is pressed.
     ■ My Movie:
       Actions for MY MOVIE is changed.                                     Here are the default settings.

     ■ My TV:                                                               Item                  Default Settings
       Actions for MY TV is changed.                                                              My Movie     My TV       My Music
                                                                            Source                BD/DVD       CBL/SAT     CD
     ■ My Music:
                                                                            TV Power On           Enable       Enable      Disable
       Actions for MY MUSIC is changed.
                                                                            Source Power On Enable             Enable      Enable
5    Use / to select an item, and use                       /   to change   Receiver Power        Enable       Enable      Enable
     the settings.                                                          On
     The items are explained below.                                         Receiver Source       Enable       Enable      Enable
                                                                            Change
                    8–2. Activities Setup        My Movie
                                                                            Source Play           Enable       Disable     Enable
                  Source                         BD/DVD
                  TV Power On                     Enable
                  Source Power On                 Enable
                  Receiver Power On               Enable
                  Receiver Source Change          Enable
                  Source Play                     Enable




     ■ Source
        BD/DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC,
        AUX, TUNER, TV/CD, PHONO, PORT,
        NET/USB
       With this setting, you can choose the input source.
     ■ TV Power On
         Enable:
          TV to turn on “Enable”.
         Disable:
          TV to turn on “Disable”.
        This option enables the TV to turn on when
        ACTIVITIES is pressed.
                                                                                                                                          En
                                                                                                                                          85
6   Press ENTER.
                                                                                    Learning Commands
         A message for transfer will appear.
                                                                                   The AV receiver’s remote controller can learn the com-
                         8–2. Activities Setup                        My Movie
                                                                                   mands of other remote controllers. By transmitting, for
                                                                                   example, the Play command from your CD player’s
                       Now we are ready to transfer data to the remote.
                                                                                   remote controller, the remote controller can learn it, and
                       Please hold the remote so that it is facing the receiver.   then transmit the exact same command when its          is
                       Use ENTER button of your remote to activate “OK”.
                       Ready?                                                      pressed in the CD remote mode.
                      OK
                                                                                   This is useful when you’ve entered the appropriate remote
                                                                                   control code (➔ 82) but some buttons don’t work as
                                                                                   expected.
         To use the remote controller, point it at the AV
         receiver’s remote control sensor, as shown below.
                                Transmitter
                                                                     AV receiver               ON
               Incoming sensor
                                  15
                                                                                         REMOTE
                                                                                           MODE
                                                   15
                                         Approx.
                    15° off center
                                         16ft. (5 m)
                    (Left/Right/Up/Down)

     7   Press ENTER.
                                                                                   1    While holding down REMOTE MODE for the
                         8–2. Activities Setup                        My Movie          mode in which you want to use the command,
                                                                                        press and hold down ON until REMOTE MODE
                                                                                        button lights (about 3 seconds).
                                                  Wait...
                                                                                   2    On the supplied remote controller, press the but-
                                                                                        ton you want to learn the new command.

                                                                                   3    Point the remote controllers at each other, about 2
                                                                                        to 6 inches (5 to 15 cm) apart, and then press and
                                                                                        hold the button whose command you want to learn
         When the transfer is successful, the following screen                          until REMOTE MODE button flashes.
         appears.                                                                       If the command is learned successfully, REMOTE
                                                                                        MODE button flashes twice.
                         8–2. Activities Setup                        My Movie




                                                                                                                                                                                                            E
                                                                                                                                                                                                             M
                                                                                                                                                                                                                LU
                                                                                                                                                                                                                  VO
                                                                                                                                                                                                                           G
                                                                                                                                                                                                                           TIN
                                                                                                                                                                                                                               U
                                                                                                                                                                                                            STE
                                                                                                                                                                                                         TEON
                                                                                                                                                                                                          T   L
                                                                                                                                                                                                                SE
                                                                                                                                                                                                                      H
                                                                                                                                                                                                                       C
                                                                                                                                                  ET                                      S
                                                                                                                                                                                     ER E
                                                                                                                                      D




                                                                                                                                                                                    N PR
                                                                                                                                       C




                                                                                                                                                                                        D
                                                                                                                                                                                     DV




                                               Successful
                                                                                                                                 H
                                                                                                                              I-CT




                                                                                                                                                                                 TU




                                                                                               About 2 to 6
                                                                                                                          ULTPU




                                                                                                                                            O
                                                                                                                                             N
                                                                                                                         M IN




                                                                                                                                                   R O




                                                                                                                                                                               P
                                                                                                                                                 TO PH




                                                                                                                                                                             U
                                                                                                                                                                           O
                                                                                                                                                                          R
                                                                                                                                       RE




                                                                                                                                                                        G
                                                                                                                                     SU D




                                                                                                                                                                    LE R
                                                                                                                                                                      C
                                                                                                                                       O




                                                                                                                                                                 SE E




                                                                                                                                                                                                                  C
                                                                                                                                     M




                                                                                                                                                              T UN




                                                                                                                                                                   -2




                                                                                                                                                                                                                  IS
                                                                                                                                                                                                    D
                                                                                                                                                                EO




                                                                                                                                                                                                                      D
                                                                                                                                                            PU T




                                                                                                                                                                                                     C
                                                                                                                                            ER




                                                                                                                                                            VID
                                                                                                                                             M




                                                                                                                                                        PE
                                                                                                                                                 IM




                                                                                                                                                         IN




                                                                                               inches (5 to 15 cm)
                                                                                                                                                                                              -1
                                                                                                                                                   D




                                                                                                                                                      TA




                                                                                                                                                                                               EO
                                                                                                                                                         P




                                                                                                                                                                                                   VID
                                                                                                                                                          EE
                                                                                                                                                             SL




                                                                                                                                                                                     D
                                                                                                                                                                                  DV
                                                                                                                                                                  ER
                                                                                                                                                                        W
                                                                                                                                                                      PO




                      Return




     8   Press ENTER.
                                                                                                                     Supplied remote
         The “Activities Setup” menu appears onscreen.
                                                                                                                     controller
     9   Press SETUP.
         The setup menu closes.
                                                                                   4    To learn more commands, repeat steps 2 and 3.
                                                                                        Press any REMOTE MODE when you’ve finished.
                                                                                        REMOTE MODE button flashes twice.




En
86
Note                                                                 1     While holding down RECEIVER, press and hold
                                                                            down MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC until
• The following buttons cannot learn new commands: REMOTE
  MODE, ALL OFF, MY MOVIE, MY TV, MY MUSIC.
                                                                            MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC lights (about
• The remote controller can learn approximately 70 to 90 com-               3 seconds).
  mands, although this will be less if commands that use a lot of
  memory are learned.
                                                                      2     Press the buttons whose actions you want to pro-
                                                                            gram into the macro in the order you want them
• Remote controller buttons such as Play, Stop, Pause, and so on            performed.
  are preprogrammed with commands for controlling Onkyo CD
  players, cassette decks, and DVD players. However, they can
                                                                            For the CD example above, you’d press the following
  learn new commands, and you can restore the preprogrammed                 buttons: ON, TV/CD,     .
  commands at any time by resetting the remote controller (➔ 83).             Note
• To overwrite a previously learned command, repeat this proce-
                                                                            • MODE is invalid at macro making operation.
  dure.
• Depending on the remote controller that you are using, there may
  be some buttons that won’t work as expected, or even some
                                                                      3     When you’ve finished, press ACTIVITIES again.
                                                                            ACTIVITIES button flashes twice.
  remotes that cannot be learned at all.                                    If you enter 32 commands, the process will finish
• Only commands from infrared remote controllers can be learned.
                                                                            automatically.
• When the remote controller’s batteries expire, all learned com-
  mands will be lost and will have to be learned all over again, so
  don’t discard your other remote controllers.                         Note

■ Deleting Learning Commands                                          • Once you have taught a new macro commands, the original
                                                                        macro will no longer work. If you retrieve it, you will have to
1. While holding down REMOTE MODE for the mode
                                                                        taught again.
   in which you want to delete the command, press and
   hold down TV        until REMOTE MODE button                       Running Macros
   lights (about 3 seconds).
2. Press REMOTE MODE or the button from which you
                                                                            Press MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC.
   want to delete the commands.
   REMOTE MODE button flashes twice.                                        The commands in the macro are transmitted in the
                                                                            order in which they were programmed. Keep the
   When you press REMOTE MODE, all commands
                                                                            remote controller pointed at the AV receiver until all
   learned in that remote mode will be deleted.
                                                                            of the commands have been transmitted.
                                                                            Macros can be run at any time, regardless of the cur-
 Using Normal Macros                                                        rent remote controller mode.
You can program the remote controller’s ACTIVITIES to
perform a sequence of remote control actions.
                                                                      Deleting Macros
Example:
To play a CD you typically need to perform the following              1     While holding down HOME, press and hold down
                                                                            ALL OFF until ALL OFF lights (about 3 seconds).
actions:
1. Press RECEIVER to select the Receiver remote con-
    troller mode.
                                                                      2     Press ALL OFF again.
                                                                            ALL OFF flashes twice.
2. Press ON to turn on the AV receiver.
                                                                              Note
3. Press TV/CD to select the TV/CD input source.
                                                                            • It changes into Easy macro mode when the macro is
4. Press      to start playback on the CD player.
                                                                              deleted (➔ 27).
You can program ACTIVITIES so that all four actions are                     • When you using Normal macro mode, you cannot use the
performed with just one button press.                                         easy macro command including the change of the source
                                                                              component.
Making Macros
Each ACTIVITIES can store one macro, and each macro
can contain up to 32 commands.




        ALL OFF                                 MY MOVIE,
                                                MY TV,
                                                MY MUSIC


                                                RECEIVER



                                                                                                                                          En
                                                                                                                                          87
Others

     Troubleshooting
     If you have any trouble using the AV receiver, look for a
                                                                      Audio
     solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue your-
     self, contact your Onkyo dealer.                                 ■ There’s no sound, or it’s very quiet
                                                                        Make sure that the digital input source is selected    45
      If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting the        properly.
      AV receiver before contacting your Onkyo dealer.                  Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed 17
      To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults, turn it         in all the way.
      on and, while holding down VCR/DVR, press ON/                     Make sure that the inputs and outputs of all compo-    18-20
      STANDBY. “Clear” will appear on the display and                   nents are connected properly.
      the AV receiver will enter Standby mode.                          Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is   13
                                                                        correct, and that the bare wires are in contact with
                                                                        the metal part of each speaker terminal.
                                                                        Make sure that the input source is properly selected. 25
                                                                        Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.    13
                                                                        Check the volume. The AV receiver is designed for —
      Note that resetting the AV receiver will delete your              home theater enjoyment. It has a wide volume range,
      radio presets and custom settings.                                allowing precise adjustment.
                                                                        If the MUTING indicator is flashing on the display, 26
                                                                        press the remote controller’s MUTING to unmute
                                                                        the AV receiver.
                                                                        While a pair of headphones is connected to the   27
                                                                        PHONES jack, no sound is output by the speakers.
                                                                        If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to —
                                                                        an HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output set-
                                                                        tings, and be sure to select a supported audio format.
                                               RECEIVER                 Check the digital audio output setting on the con-     —
                                                                        nected device. On some game consoles, such as
                                                                        those that support DVD, the default setting is off.
                                                                        With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an       —
                                               HOME                     audio output format from a menu.
                                                                        If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must       —
                                                                        connect an MC head amp, or an MC transformer.
      To reset the remote controller to its factory defaults,           Make sure that none of the connecting cables are       —
      while holding down RECEIVER, press and hold down                  bent, twisted, or damaged.
      HOME until RECEIVER button lights (about 3 sec-                   Not all listening modes use all speakers.              36
      onds). Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER again.                   Specify the speaker distances and adjust the individ- 46
                                                                        ual speaker levels.
      Power                                                             Make sure that the speaker setup microphone is not     —
                                                                        still connected.
     ■ Can’t turn on the AV receiver                                    The input signal format is set to “PCM” or “DTS”.      60
        Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged   —           Set it to “Auto”.
        into the wall outlet.
        Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait five —       ■ Only the front speakers produce sound
        seconds or more, then plug it in again.                         When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected, —
                                                                        only the front speakers and subwoofer produce
     ■ The STANDBY indicator flashes red                                sound.
        The protection circuit has been activated. Remove    —          In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers 49
        the power cord from the wall outlet immediately.                output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set
        Disconnect all speaker cables and input sources, and            to “Left / Right”.
        leave the AV receiver with its power cord discon-               Check the Speaker Configuration.                       46
        nected for 1 hour. After that, reconnect the power
        cord and set the volume to maximum. If the AV
        receiver stays on, set the volume to minimum, dis-
        connect the power cord, and reconnect your speakers
        and input sources. If the AV receiver turns off when
        you set the volume to maximum, disconnect the
        power cord, and contact your Onkyo dealer.



En
88
■ Only the center speaker produces sound                      ■ Can’t get 6.1/7.1 playback
  If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro —         If no surround back speakers, front wide and front  —
  Logic IIx Music, or Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game lis-             high speakers are connected, or the Zone 2 speakers
  tening mode with a mono source, such as an AM                 are being used, 6.1/7.1 playback is not possible.
  radio station or mono TV program, the sound is con-           You can not always select all of the listening modes, 36–40
  centrated in the center speaker.                              depending on the number of the speakers connected.
  In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers 49
  output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set         ■ The speaker volume cannot be set as required
  to “Center”.
                                                                (The volume cannot be set to 100.0(MAX))
  Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.      46
                                                                Check to see if a maximum volume has been set.       55
■ The surround speakers produce no sound                        If the volume level of each individual speaker has    28, 46
                                                                been adjusted to high positive values, then the maxi-
  When the T-D (Theater-Dimensional), Stereo or         —       mum master volume possible may be reduced. Note
  Mono listening mode is selected, the surround                 that the individual speaker volume levels are set
  speakers produce no sound.                                    automatically after Audyssey MultEQ® Room Cor-
  Depending on the source and current listening mode, —         rection and Speaker Setup function has been com-
  not much sound may be produced by the surround                pleted.
  speakers. Try selecting another listening mode.
  Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.      46    ■ Noise can be heard
                                                                Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power   —
■ The center speaker produces no sound                          cords, speaker cables, and so on may degrade the
  When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected, —         audio performance, so don’t do it.
  the center speaker produces no sound.                         An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try —
  In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers 49        repositioning your cables.
  output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set
  to “Left / Right”.                                          ■ The Late Night function doesn’t work
  Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.      46      Make sure the source material is Dolby Digital,      59
                                                                Dolby Digital Plus, and Dolby TrueHD.
■ The front high, front wide and surround back
  speakers produce no sound                                   ■ About DTS signals
  Depending on the current listening mode, no sound     36      When DTS program material ends and the DTS bit- —
  may be produced by the front high, front wide and             stream stops, the AV receiver remains in DTS listen-
  surround back speakers. Select another listening              ing mode and the DTS indicator remains on. This is
  mode.                                                         to prevent noise when you use the pause, fast for-
  Not much sound may be produced by the front high, —           ward, or fast reverse function on your player. If you
  front wide and surround back speakers with some               switch your player from DTS to PCM, because the
  sources.                                                      AV receiver does not switch formats immediately,
  Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.      46      you may not hear any sound, in which case you
                                                                should stop your player for about three seconds, and
  While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback in the 70        then resume playback.
  main room is reduced to 5.1-channels and the front
  high, front wide and surround back speakers produce           With some CD and LD players, you won’t be able to —
  no sound.                                                     playback DTS material properly even though your
                                                                player is connected to a digital input on the AV
                                                                receiver. This is usually because the DTS bitstream
■ The subwoofer produces no sound                               has been processed (e.g., output level, sampling rate,
  When you play source material that contains no     —          or frequency response changed) and the AV receiver
  information in the LFE channel, the subwoofer pro-            doesn’t recognize it as a genuine DTS signal. In such
  duces no sound.                                               cases, you may hear noise.
  Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.      46      When playing DTS program material, using the          —
                                                                pause, fast forward, or fast reverse function on your
                                                                player may produce a short audible noise. This is not
■ There’s no sound with a certain signal format                 a malfunction.
  Check the digital audio output setting on the con-    —
  nected device. On some game consoles, such as               ■ The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN
  those that support DVD, the default setting is off.           can’t be heard
  With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an      —
  audio output format from a menu.                              Since it takes longer to identify the format of an    —
                                                                HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio sig-
  Depending on the input signal, some listening modes 36–40     nals, audio output may not start immediately.
  cannot be selected.

■ Can’t select the Pure Audio listening mode
  The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected      —
  while Zone 2/3 is on.
                                                                                                                               En
                                                                                                                               89
Video                                                              Tuner
     ■ There’s no picture                                               ■ Reception is noisy, FM stereo reception is
       Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed 17
                                                                          noisy, or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t light
       in all the way.                                                    Relocate your antenna.                                 —
       Make sure that each video component is properly        18, 19,     Move the AV receiver away from your TV or com-         —
       connected.                                             76          puter.
       If your TV is connected to the HDMI output, select 43              Listen to the station in mono.                         31
       “- - - - -” in the “HDMI Input” setup to watch com-
                                                                          When listening to an AM station, operating the         —
       posite video, and component video sources.                         remote controller may cause noise.
       If the video source is connected to a component     19, 42         Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.     —
       video input, you must assign that input to an input
       selector, and your TV must be connected to either                  Concrete walls weaken radio signals.                   —
       the HDMI output or COMPONENT VIDEO MON-                            If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor —
       ITOR OUT.                                                          antenna.
       If the video source is connected to a composite video 19
       input, your TV must be connected to the HDMI out-
                                                                        Remote Controller
       put or the corresponding composite video output.
       If the video source is connected to an HDMI input,     18, 43    ■ The remote controller doesn’t work
       you must assign that input to an input selector, and
       your TV must be connected to the HDMI output.                      Before operating this unit, be sure to press           —
                                                                          RECEIVER.
       While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the —
       video circuitry is turned off and only video signals               Make sure that the batteries are installed with the    4
       input through HDMI IN can be output.                               correct polarity.
       On your TV, make sure that the video input to which —              Install new batteries. Don’t mix different types of    4
       the AV receiver is connected is selected.                          batteries, or old and new batteries.
                                                                          Make sure that the remote controller is not too far    4
     ■ There’s no picture from a source connected to                      away from the AV receiver, and that there’s no
                                                                          obstruction between the remote controller and the
       an HDMI IN
                                                                          AV receiver’s remote control sensor.
       Reliable operation with an HDMI-to-DVI adapter is 95               Make sure that the AV receiver is not subjected to     —
       not guaranteed. In addition, video signals from a PC               direct sunshine or inverter-type fluorescent lights.
       are not guaranteed.                                                Relocate if necessary.
       When the Resolution is set to any resolution not sup- 43           If the AV receiver is installed in a rack or cabinet —
       ported by the TV, no video is output by the HDMI                   with colored-glass doors, the remote controller may
       outputs.                                                           not work reliably when the doors are closed.
       If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the       —           Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote con-      11, 83
       AV receiver’s display, this indicates that your TV                 troller mode.
       does not support the current video resolution and
                                                                          When using the remote controller to control other      —
       you need to select another resolution on your DVD
                                                                          manufacturers’ AV components, some buttons may
       player.
                                                                          not work as expected.
                                                                          Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control 82
     ■ The on-screen menus don’t appear                                   code.
       (European, Australian and Asian models) Specify 55                 Make sure to set the same ID on both the AV receiver 55
       the TV system used in your area in the TV Format                   and remote controller.
       Setup.
       On your TV, make sure that the video input to which —            ■ Can’t control other components
       the AV receiver is connected is selected.
                                                                          If it’s an Onkyo component, make sure that the       20
       When the AV receiver doesn’t connect TV with           —
       HDMI, onscreen menus are not displayed.                            cable and analog audio cable are connected properly.
                                                                          Connecting only an      cable won’t work.
     ■ The picture is distorted                                           Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote con-      11, 83
                                                                          troller mode.
       (European, Australian and Asian models) Specify 55                 If you’ve connected a cassette tape deck, to the TV/ 27
       the TV system used in your area in the TV Format.                  CD IN jack, or an RI Dock to the TV/CD IN or
                                                                          GAME IN or VCR/DVR IN jacks, for the remote
     ■ The on screen display does not appear                              controller to work properly, you must set the display.
       Depending on the input signal, the on screen display 55            If you cannot operate it, you will need to enter the   80
       may not appear when the input signal from the                      appropriate remote control code.
       HDMI IN is output to a device connected to the                     To control another manufacturer’s component, point 82
       HDMI output.                                                       the remote controller at that component.
                                                                          To control an Onkyo component that’s connected via 82
                                                                              , point the remote controller at the AV receiver.
                                                                          Be sure to enter the appropriate remote control code
                                                                          first.
En
90
To control an Onkyo component that’s not connected 82           If the server is serving large music files to several —
  via     , point the remote controller at the compo-             networked devices simultaneously, the network may
  nent. Be sure to enter the appropriate remote control           become overloaded and playback may be inter-
  code first.                                                     rupted. Reduce the number of playback devices on
  The entered remote control code may not be correct. —           the network, upgrade your network, or use a switch
  If more than one code is listed, try each one.                  instead of a hub.


■ Can’t learn commands from another remote                      ■ Can’t connect to the AV receiver from a Web
  controller                                                      browser

  When learning commands, make sure that the trans- —             If you’re using DHCP, your router may not always —
  mitting ends of both remote controllers are pointing            allocate the same IP address to the AV receiver, so if
  at each other.                                                  you find that you can’t connect to a server or Internet
                                                                  radio station, recheck the AV receiver’s IP address
  Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that —         on Network screen.
  cannot be used for learning? Some commands can-
  not be learned, especially those that contain several           Check the “Network Settings”.                       67
  instructions.
                                                                USB Mass Storage Device Playback
Recording
                                                                ■ Can’t access the music files on a USB device
■ Can’t record                                                    Make sure the USB device is plugged in properly.    —
  On your recorder, make sure the correct input is     —          The AV receiver supports USB devices that support —
  selected.                                                       the USB mass storage device class. However, play-
  To prevent signal loops and damage to the AV           —        back may not be possible with some USB devices
  receiver, input signals are not fed through to outputs          even if they conform to the USB mass storage device
  with the same name (VCR/DVR IN to VCR/DVR                       class.
  OUT).                                                           USB memory devices with security functions cannot —
  When the Pure Audio listening mode is selected,      —          be played.
  recording is not possible because no video signals
  are output. Select another listening mode.
                                                                Others

Zone 2/3                                                        ■ Stand-by power consumption
                                                                  In the following cases, the power consumption could 56, 68,
■ There’s no sound                                                reach a maximum of 55W:                             76
  Only components connected to analog inputs can be —             1. You are using the Universal Port jack.
  played in Zone 2/3.                                             2. “Control” is set to “Enable” in the “Network”
                                                                       setting.
■ The Zone 2 speakers produce no sound                            3. “HDMI Control (RIHD)” setting is set to
                                                                       “On”. (Depending on the TV status, the AV
  Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if “Speakers           45              receiver will enter Standby mode as usual.)
  Type(Front)” is set to “Bi-Amp”.
  To use the Zone 2 speakers, you must set the “Pow- 71         ■ The sound changes when I connect my
  ered Zone2” setting to “Act”.                                   headphones
                                                                  When a pair of headphones is connected, the listen- —
Music Server and Internet Radio                                   ing mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to
                                                                  Stereo, Mono, Direct, or Pure Audio.
■ Can’t access the server or Internet radio
  Check the network connection between the AV          —        ■ The speaker distance cannot be set as required
  receiver and your router or switch.
                                                                  In some cases, corrected values suitable for home   —
  Make sure that your modem and router are properly —             theater use may be set automatically.
  connected, and make sure they are both turned on.
  Make sure the server is up and running and compati- 65, 66    ■ The display doesn’t work
  ble with the AV receiver.
                                                                  The display is turned off when the Pure Audio listen- —
  Check the “Network Settings”.                        67
                                                                  ing mode is selected.

■ Playback stops while listening to music files on
                                                                ■ How do I change the language of a multiplex
  the server
                                                                  source
  Make sure your server is compatible with the AV      65, 66
                                                                  Use the “Multiplex” setting on the “Audio Adjust” 49
  receiver.
                                                                  menu to select “Main” or “Sub”.
  If you download or copy large files on your com-    —
  puter, playback may be interrupted. Try closing any
  unused programs, use a more powerful computer, or
  use a dedicated server.
                                                                                                                                En
                                                                                                                                91
■ The       functions don’t work                                     Important Note Regarding Video Playback
       To use    , you must make an       connection and an 20
       analog audio connection (RCA) between the compo-                  The AV receiver can upconvert component video, S-
       nent and AV receiver, even if they are connected dig-             Video, and composite video sources for display on a TV
       itally.                                                           connected to the HDMI output. However, if the picture
                                                                         quality of the source is poor, upconversion may make the
     ■ The functions System On/Auto Power On and                         picture worse or disappear altogether.
       Direct Change don’t work for components                           In this case, try the following:
       connected via
       These functions don’t work when Zone 2/3 is turned 20             1     If the video source is connected to a component
                                                                               video input, connect your TV to the COMPO-
       on.
                                                                               NENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT.
     ■ When performing “Audyssey MultEQ® Room                                  If the video source is connected to an S-Video input,
       Correction and Speaker Setup”, the                                      connect your TV to a MONITOR OUT S.
       measurement fails showing the message                                   If the video source is connected to a composite video
       “Ambient noise is too high.”.                                           input, connect your TV to MONITOR OUT V.

                                                                         2
       This can be caused by any malfunction in your          —
                                                                               On the main menu, select “Input/Output Assign”,
       speaker unit. Check if the unit produces normal
       sounds.                                                                 and then select “HDMI Input”.
                                                                               Select the relevant input selector, and assign it to
     ■ The following settings can be made for the                              “- - - - -” (➔ 43).

                                                                         3
       S-Video and composite video inputs                                      On the main menu, select “Input/Output Assign”,
       You must use the buttons on the unit to make these set-                 and then select “Component Video Input” (➔ 44):
       tings.
      1. While holding down the input selector button for the input               If the video source is connected to COMPO-
         source that you want to set, press SETUP.                                NENT VIDEO IN 1, select the relevant input
      2. Use / to change the setting.                                             selector, and assign it to “IN1”.
      3. Press the input selector button for the input source that you
         want to set when you’ve finished.                                        If the video source is connected to COMPO-
     • Video Attenuation                                                          NENT VIDEO IN 2, select the relevant input
                                                                                  selector, and assign it to “IN2”.
       This setting can be made for the BD/DVD, VCR/DVR,
       CBL/SAT, GAME, or AUX input.                                               If the video source is connected to an S-Video
       If you have a games console connected to the composite                     input or composite video input, select the relevant
       video input, and the picture isn’t very clear, you can                     input selector, and assign it to “- - - - -”.
       attenuate the gain.
       Video ATT:OFF: (default).                                          Note
       Video ATT:ON: Gain reduced by 2dB.                                • If “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog”, press VCR/DVR
                                                                           and RETURN on the AV receiver at the same time. Select
      The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for signal                  “Skip” in the “VideoProcessor” setting on the display. To reset
      processing and control functions. In very rare situations,           back to the original setting, press the same button at the same
                                                                           time. If you select “Use”, the AV receiver will output video sig-
      severe interference, noise from an external source, or
                                                                           nals from the video processor.
      static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely
      event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the
      wall outlet, wait at least five seconds, and then plug it
      back in again.


      Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD
      rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by
      the unit’s malfunction. Before you record important
      data, make sure that the material will be recorded cor-
      rectly.


      Before disconnecting the power cord from the wall out-
      let, set the AV receiver to Standby.




En
92
Specifications
Amplifier Section                                                    Tuner Section

Rated Output Power                                                   FM Tuning Frequency Range
 All channels:          (North American)                                                   (North American and Taiwan)
                        135 watts minimum continuous power
                        per channel, 8 ohm loads, 2 channels                               87.5 MHz - 107.9 MHz
                        driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a                                (Others) 87.5 MHz - 108.0 MHz, RDS
                        maximum total harmonic distortion of         AM Tuning Frequency Range
                        0.08% (FTC)                                                        (North American and Taiwan)
                        145 watts minimum continuous power
                        per channel, 8 ohm loads, 2 channels                               530 kHz - 1710 kHz
                        driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total                              (Others)
                        harmonic distortion of 0.7% (FTC)                                  522/530 kHz - 1611/1710 kHz
                        160 watts minimum continuous power           Preset Channel        40
                        per channel, 6 ohm loads, 2 channels
                        driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total        Digital Tuner (North American)
                        harmonic distortion of 0.1% (FTC)                                  SIRIUS
                        (Others)
                        7 ch × 180 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven   General
                        (IEC)
Maximum Effective Output Power
                        (Asian)                                      Power Supply         (North American and Taiwan)
                        7 ch × 230 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven
                                                                                         AC 120 V, 60 Hz
                                                                                         (Others) AC 220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz
                        (JEITA)
                                                                     Power Consumption   (North American) 7.5 A
Dynamic Power           300 W (3 Ω, Front)                                               (Others) 710 W
                        250 W (4 Ω, Front)
                        150 W (8 Ω, Front)                           Stand-by Power Consumption
THD (Total Harmonic Distortion)                                                          (North American and Taiwan) 0.2 W
                        0.08% (Power Rated)                                              (Others) 0.3 W
Damping Factor          60 (Front, 1 kHz, 8 Ω)                       Dimensions          435 mm × 198.5 mm × 435.5 mm
                                                                     (W × H × D)         17-1/8" × 7-13/16" × 17-1/8"
Input Sensitivity and Impedance
                        200 mV/47 kΩ (LINE)                          Weight                (North American and Taiwan)
                        2.5 mV/47 kΩ (PHONO MM)                                            18.3 kg (40.3 lbs.)
Rated RCA Output Level and Impedance                                                       (Others) 18.4 kg (40.6 lbs.)
                        200 mV/470 Ω (PRE OUT)
                                                                     ■ HDMI
Maximum RCA Output Level and Impedance
                        4.6 V/470 Ω (PRE OUT)                        Input                 IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4, IN 5, IN 6,
Phono Overload          70 mV (MM 1 kHz 0.5%)                                              AUX INPUT
Frequency Response 5 Hz - 100 kHz/+1 dB, -3 dB (Direct mode)         Output                (North American and Taiwan)
Tone Control Characteristics                                                               OUT
                                                                                           (European, Australian and Asian)
                        ±10 dB, 50 Hz (BASS)
                                                                                           OUT MAIN, OUT SUB
                        ±10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)
                                                                     Video Resolution      1080p
Signal to Noise Ratio 110 dB (LINE, IHF-A)
                        80 dB (PHONO, IHF-A)                         Audio Format          Dolby TrueHD, DTS Master Audio,
                                                                                           DVD-Audio, DSD
Speaker Impedance       4 or 6 Ω - 16 Ω
                                                                     Supported             3D, Audio Return Channel, Deep Color,
                                                                                           x.v.Color, LipSync, CEC
Video Section
                                                                     ■ Video Inputs
Input Sensitivity/Output Level and Impedance
                       1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Component and S-Video Y)         Component             IN 1, IN 2
                       0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (Component PB/CB, PR/CR)        S-Video               BD/DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME
                       0.25 Vp-p/75 Ω (S-Video C)                    Composite             BD/DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME,
                       1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Composite)                                             AUX
Component Video Frequency Response                                   Analog RGB input      PC IN
                       5 Hz - 100 MHz/+0 dB, -3 dB
                                                                     ■ Video Outputs

                                                                     Component             MONITOR OUT
                                                                     S-Video               MONITOR OUT, VCR/DVR OUT
                                                                     Composite             MONITOR OUT, VCR/DVR OUT

                                                                     ■ Audio Inputs

                                                                     Digital               Optical: 2 (Rear), 1 (Front)
                                                                                           Coaxial: 3
                                                                     Analog                BD/DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME,
                                                                                           PC, TV/CD, AUX, PHONO
                                                                     Multichannel Inputs   7.1
                                                                                                                                   En
                                                                                                                                   93
■ Audio Outputs

     Analog                VCR/DVR, ZONE 2/3 PRE OUT
     Analog Multichannel Pre Outputs
                           7
     Subwoofer Pre Outputs 2
     Speaker Outputs       Main (L, R, C, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, FHL,
                           FHR) + ZONE2/Front Wide (L, R)
     Phones                1 (6.3 ø)

     ■ Others

     SETUP MIC             1
     RS232                 1
     Ethernet              1
     IR Input              1
     IR Output             1
     12 V Trigger Out      2
     USB                   1
     Universal Port        1
     RI                    1


     Specifications and features are subject to change
     without notice.




En
94
About HDMI
Designed to meet the increased demands of digital TV, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a new digital
interface standard for connecting TVs, projectors, Blu-ray Disc/DVD players, set-top boxes, and other video compo-
nents. Until now, several separate video and audio cables have been required to connect AV components. With HDMI, a
single cable can carry control signals, digital video, and up to eight channels of digital audio (2-channel PCM, multichan-
nel digital audio, and multichannel PCM).
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface)*1, so TVs and displays with
a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (This may not work with some TVs and displays,
resulting in no picture.)
The AV receiver uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection)*2, so only HDCP-compatible components can
display the picture.

 The AV receiver’s HDMI interface is based on the following:
 Audio Return Channel, 3D, x.v.Color, Deep Color, Lip Sync, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution
 Audio, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DSD and Multichannel PCM

Supported Audio Formats
• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)
• Multichannel linear PCM (up to 7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)
• Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS-HD
  Master Audio)
Your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player must also support HDMI output of the above audio formats.

About Copyright Protection
The AV receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection)*2, a copy-protection system for digital
video signals. Other devices connected to the AV receiver via HDMI must also support HDCP.


*1   DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface standard set by the DDWG*3 in 1999.
*2   HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The video encryption technology developed by Intel for HDMI/DVI. It’s
     designed to protect video content and requires a HDCP-compatible device to display the encrypted video.
*3   DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel, Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and Silicon Image, this
     open industry group’s objective is to address the industry’s requirements for a digital connectivity specification for high-performance
     PCs and digital displays.


 Note
• The HDMI video stream is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface), so TVs and displays with a DVI input can be connected by
  using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (Note that DVI connections only carry video, so you’ll need to make a separate connection for
  audio.) However, reliable operation with such an adapter is not guaranteed. In addition, video signals from a PC are not supported.
• The HDMI audio signal (sampling rate, bit length, etc.) may be restricted by the connected source component. If the picture is poor or
  there’s no sound from a component connected via HDMI, check its setup. Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for
  details.




                                                                                                                                               En
                                                                                                                                               95
Using an RIHD-compatible TV, Player, or Recorder
               , which stands for Remote Interactive over HDMI, is the name of the system control function found on Onkyo
     components. The AV receiver can be used with CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), which allows system control over
     HDMI and is part of the HDMI standard. CEC provides interoperability between various components, however, opera-
     tion with components other than           -compatible components cannot be guaranteed.

     ■ About            -compatible components                           ■ Operations that can be performed with
     The following components are            -compatible. (As               connection
     of February 2010) See the Onkyo web site for latest infor-          For             -compatible TV
     mation.                                                             The following linked operation is possible by connecting
     TV                                                                  the AV receiver to an             -compatible TV.
     • Panasonic VIERA Link compatible TV                                • The AV receiver will enter Standby mode when the
     • Toshiba REGZA-LINK compatible TV                                    power of the TV is turned to Standby.
     • Sharp TV (See Onkyo web site for latest information on            • You can set on the menu screen of the TV to either out-
       compatible models.)                                                 put the audio from the speakers connected to the AV
     Players/Recorders                                                     receiver, or from the speakers of the TV.
     • Onkyo and Integra           -compatible players                   • It is possible to output the video/audio from the antenna
     • Panasonic VIERA Link compatible players and record-                 or from the input jack of the TV from the speakers con-
       ers (only when used together with Panasonic VIERA                   nected to the AV receiver. (A connection such as optical
       Link compatible TV)                                                 digital cable or similar is required above the HDMI
     • Toshiba REGZA-LINK compatible players and record-                   cable.)
       ers (only when used together with Toshiba REGZA-                  • Input to the AV receiver can be selected with the remote
       LINK compatible TV)                                                 controller of the TV.
     • Sharp players and recorders (only when used together              • Operations such as volume adjustment or similar for the
       with Sharp TV)                                                      AV receiver can be performed from the remote controller
                                                                           of the TV.
     *    Models other than those mentioned above may have some          For             -compatible players/recorders
          interoperability if compatible with CEC which is part of the   The following link operation is possible by connecting the
          HDMI Standard, but operation cannot be guaranteed.             AV receiver to an              -compatible player/recorder.
         Note                                                            • When the playback is started on the player/recorder,
     • Do not connect the           -compatible component more than        input of the AV receiver will switch to the HDMI input
       the following number to the HDMI input terminal so that the         of the player/recorder that is playing back.
       linked operations work properly.                                  • Operation of the player/recorder is possible with the
       –Blu-ray Disc/DVD player is up to three.                            remote controller supplied with the AV receiver.
       –Blu-ray Disc recorder/DVD recorder/Digital Video Recorder is
         up to three.                                                    *   Not all functions may operate depending on the model.
       –Cable/Satellite Set-top box is up to four.
     • Do not connect the AV receiver to the other AV receiver/AV
       amplifier via HDMI.
     • When the            -compatible component more than the
       above-mentioned is connected, the linked operations are not
       guaranteed.




En
96
■ How to connect and setup
                                                                 3   Confirm the settings.

1
                                                                     1. Turn on the power for all connected components.
    Confirm the connecting and setting.
                                                                     2. Turn off the power of the TV, and confirm that
    1. Connect the HDMI OUT or HDMI OUT MAIN
                                                                        the power of the connected components is turned
       jack to the HDMI input jack of the TV.
                                                                        off automatically with the link operation.
                  Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.                      3. Turn on the power of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD
                                                                        player/recorder.
                                                                     4. Start playback of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player/
                                         HDMI                           recorder, and confirm the following.
                                         connection                     • The power of the AV receiver is turned on
                                                                          automatically, and input with the Blu-ray
                           AV receiver                                    Disc/DVD player/recorder connected is
                                                                          selected.
        DIGITAL AUDIO                    HDMI                           • The power of the TV is turned on automati-
             connection                  connection                       cally, and input with the AV receiver con-
            (OPTICAL)                                                     nected is selected.
                                                                     5. Following the operating instructions of the TV,
                                                                        select “Use the TV speakers” from the menu
                        TV, projector, etc.                             screen of the TV, and confirm that the audio is
    2. Connect the audio output from the TV to the                      output from the speakers of the TV, and not from
       OPTICAL IN 2 jack of the AV receiver using an                    the speakers connected to the AV receiver.
       optical digital cable.                                        6. Select “Use the speakers connected from the AV
                                                                        receiver” from the menu screen of the TV, and
     Note
                                                                        confirm that the audio is output from the speak-
    • When you use the audio return channel (ARC) function
                                                                        ers connected to the AV receiver, and not from
      with TV an HDMI (Audio Return Channel) capable TV,
      this connection is not required (➔ 57).                           the TV speakers.
    3. Connect the HDMI output of the Blu-ray Disc/                   Note
       DVD player/recorder to the HDMI IN 1 jack of                  • Perform the above operations when you initially use the
       the AV receiver.                                                AV receiver, when the settings of each component are
                                                                       changed, when the main power of each component is
     Note
                                                                       turned off, when the power cable is disconnected from the
    • It is necessary to assign the HDMI input when connecting         power supply, or when there has been a power outage.
      the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player/recorder to other jacks
      (➔ 43). Do not assign the components connected to the      4   Operate with the remote controller.
      HDMI IN to the TV/CD input at this time. Appropriate           See the list of available buttons (➔ 84).
      CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) operation can not be
                                                                      Note
      guaranteed.
                                                                     • Audio from DVD-Audio or Super Audio CD may not out-
2   Change each item in the “HDMI” as below:                           put from the TV speakers. You will be able to output the
    • HDMI Control (RIHD): On                                          audio from the TV speakers by setting the audio output of
    • Audio Return Channel (ARC): Auto                                 the DVD player to 2ch PCM. (It may not be possible
    • Power Control: On                                                depending on the player models.)
                                                                     • Even if you set to output audio on the TV speakers, audio
    • TV Control: On
                                                                       will be output from the speakers connected to the AV
                                                                       receiver when you adjust the volume or switch the input
    See details of each setting (➔ 56, 57).                            on the AV receiver. To output audio from the TV speakers,
                                                                       re-do the operations on the TV.
                                                                     • Do not connect the        cable when connecting to the
                                                                       and      audio control compatible components.
                                                                     • When you select anything other than the HDMI jack
                                                                       where the AV receiver is connected as the input on the TV,
                                                                       input on the AV receiver will be switched to “TV/CD”.
                                                                     • The AV receiver will automatically power on in conjunc-
                                                                       tion when it determines it to be necessary. Even if the AV
                                                                       receiver is connected to an            compatible TV or
                                                                       player/recorder, it will not power on if it is not necessary.
                                                                       It may not power on in conjunction when the TV is set to
                                                                       output audio from the TV.
                                                                     • Linked functions with the AV receiver may not work
                                                                       depending on the model. Operate the AV receiver directly
                                                                       in such cases.


                                                                                                                                       En
                                                                                                                                       97
Video Resolution Chart
     The following tables show how video signals at different resolutions are output by the AV receiver.
     NTSC/PAL
                                                                                                                             ✔: Output

                              Output    HDMI                                    Component                                S-Video
                                                                                                                         Composite
     Input
                                        1080p 1080i 720p        480p/ 480i/     1080p 1080i 720p        480p/ 480i/      480i/576i
                                                                576p 576i                               576p 576i
     HDMI                  1080p        ✔
                           1080i        ✔       ✔       ✔
                           720p         ✔       ✔       ✔
                           480p/576p ✔          ✔       ✔       ✔
                           480i/576i    ✔       ✔       ✔       ✔       ✔
     Component             1080p        ✔                                       ✔
                           1080i        ✔       ✔       ✔                               ✔       ✔
                           720p         ✔       ✔       ✔                               ✔       ✔
                           480p/576p ✔          ✔       ✔       ✔                       ✔*2     ✔*2     ✔
                           480i/576i    ✔       ✔       ✔       ✔       ✔               ✔*2     ✔*2     ✔        ✔
     S-Video               480i/576i    ✔       ✔       ✔       ✔       ✔               ✔*2     ✔*2     ✔        ✔       ✔
     Composite
     PC IN (Analog RGB)*1               ✔       ✔       ✔       ✔                       ✔*3     ✔*3     ✔*3

     *1   Available resolution:
          [640 × 480 60/72/75 Hz]
          [800 × 600 56/60/72/75 Hz]
          [1024 × 768 60/70/75 Hz]
          [1280 × 1024 60 Hz]
     *2   The output is limited to 480p/576p for an effective signal in the effect of Macrovision.
     *3   PC IN (Analog RGB) input signal is output at 720p resolution when you select “Analog” in the “Monitor Out” setting (➔ 42) and
          “Through” in the “Resolution” setting (➔ 43).




En
98
Memo




       En
       99
Sales & Product Planning Div. : 2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN
                      Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8163

                      ONKYO U.S.A. CORPORATION
                      18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.
                      Tel: 800-229-1687, 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650 http://www.us.onkyo.com/
                      ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH
                      Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY
                      Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4401-555 http://www.eu.onkyo.com/
                      ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH (UK BRANCH)
                      The Coach House 81A High Street, Marlow, Buckinghamshire, SL7 1AB, UK
                      Tel: +44-(0)1628-473-350 Fax: +44-(0)1628-401-700
                      ONKYO CHINA LIMITED
                      Unit 1 & 12, 9/F, Ever Gain Plaza Tower 1, 88, Container Port Road, Kwai Chung,
                      N.T., Hong Kong. Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039
                      http://www.ch.onkyo.com/



                                                                                                               Y1004-1


SN 29400329
(C) Copyright 2010 ONKYO CORPORATION Japan. All rights reserved.
                                                                                                 * 2 9 4 0 0 3 2 9 *

More Related Content

PDF
Samsung Camcorder Q10 User Manual
PDF
Br hd50 brochure
PDF
Mcintosh mc aire_manual
PDF
Samsung Camcorder MX10 User Manual
PDF
Dpc3010
PDF
Samsung Camcorder SC-DX100 User Manual
PDF
ASL Intercom PS279
PDF
JVC VF-HP790 LCD Studio Viewfinder
Samsung Camcorder Q10 User Manual
Br hd50 brochure
Mcintosh mc aire_manual
Samsung Camcorder MX10 User Manual
Dpc3010
Samsung Camcorder SC-DX100 User Manual
ASL Intercom PS279
JVC VF-HP790 LCD Studio Viewfinder

What's hot (17)

PDF
Samsung Camcorder SC-DX200 User Manual
PDF
Samson Sz240480
PDF
70 0 Avr 3803 En
PDF
JVC SR-HD1350EU Blu-ray recorder + 250GB HDD
PDF
ASL Intercom PS6379
PDF
Owners manual
PDF
English vol1
PDF
Marantz NA7004 user manual
PDF
JVC GY-HM750E Operation Manual
PDF
JVC GY-HM750
PDF
ASL Intercom PS289
PDF
Pro6 Op Manual V1.00 B
PDF
Gy hm700 - final
PDF
Sony PMW-350K Operation Manual
PDF
JVC GY-HM150E Manual
PDF
ASL Intercom PS4379
PDF
JVC GY-HM790E Operation Manual
Samsung Camcorder SC-DX200 User Manual
Samson Sz240480
70 0 Avr 3803 En
JVC SR-HD1350EU Blu-ray recorder + 250GB HDD
ASL Intercom PS6379
Owners manual
English vol1
Marantz NA7004 user manual
JVC GY-HM750E Operation Manual
JVC GY-HM750
ASL Intercom PS289
Pro6 Op Manual V1.00 B
Gy hm700 - final
Sony PMW-350K Operation Manual
JVC GY-HM150E Manual
ASL Intercom PS4379
JVC GY-HM790E Operation Manual
Ad

Viewers also liked (19)

PPTX
DSTT Travel Time Changes
PDF
Digital trends 2011
PDF
North link capital committee briefing 4 14-11 final
PDF
Sme loans
PPTX
Top ten modeling agencies
PDF
พับริบบิ้นห่อเหรียญโปรยทาน
PPTX
HiNative Trek
PDF
「MCS 2012」のご紹介
PDF
2013 メディア&コンテンツ・サーベイのご紹介 0510
PDF
Social Commerce Introduction
PDF
พระคาถาชินบัญชร
DOC
Databases used in forensic sciences and current status of this science in pak...
PPT
The Big Idea
PPT
Halloween1
PPTX
Alterobiografia rossana
PDF
North Corridor Transit Project - December 16th Board Briefing
ODP
Robin hood and the archery
PPT
Low Temperature FAC
PPTX
The grufallo story
DSTT Travel Time Changes
Digital trends 2011
North link capital committee briefing 4 14-11 final
Sme loans
Top ten modeling agencies
พับริบบิ้นห่อเหรียญโปรยทาน
HiNative Trek
「MCS 2012」のご紹介
2013 メディア&コンテンツ・サーベイのご紹介 0510
Social Commerce Introduction
พระคาถาชินบัญชร
Databases used in forensic sciences and current status of this science in pak...
The Big Idea
Halloween1
Alterobiografia rossana
North Corridor Transit Project - December 16th Board Briefing
Robin hood and the archery
Low Temperature FAC
The grufallo story
Ad

Similar to Manual tx nr808-en (20)

PDF
Vsx 51 operating-instructions051911
PDF
Vsx 51 operating-instructions051911
PDF
Korg1 10
PDF
Dmix 300 Manual
PDF
Behpmx2000 man
PDF
Roland V-440 HD
PDF
V 440 Hd R E2
PDF
V 440 Hd R E2
PDF
T748 a v surround sound receiver english manual
PDF
T748 a v surround sound receiver english manual
PDF
ASL Intercom PS 279
PDF
Vsx 52 operating-instructions051911
PDF
Home cinema sherwood r 772
PDF
High Definition Digital Camcorder Samsung H300 User Manual
PDF
영문메뉴얼
PDF
PDF
영문메뉴얼
PDF
ASL Intercom PS 289
PDF
Panasonic ag dvx100-b
PDF
1 pdfsam hdcsd60-mul
Vsx 51 operating-instructions051911
Vsx 51 operating-instructions051911
Korg1 10
Dmix 300 Manual
Behpmx2000 man
Roland V-440 HD
V 440 Hd R E2
V 440 Hd R E2
T748 a v surround sound receiver english manual
T748 a v surround sound receiver english manual
ASL Intercom PS 279
Vsx 52 operating-instructions051911
Home cinema sherwood r 772
High Definition Digital Camcorder Samsung H300 User Manual
영문메뉴얼
영문메뉴얼
ASL Intercom PS 289
Panasonic ag dvx100-b
1 pdfsam hdcsd60-mul

Manual tx nr808-en

  • 1. Contents AV Receiver Introduction ...................................2 TX-NR808 Connections.................................13 Turning On & Basic Operations ......24 Instruction Manual Advanced Operations .................41 Controlling iPod & Other Components............................75 Others...........................................88 Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV Receiver. Please read this manual thoroughly before making connections and plugging in the unit. Following the instructions in this manual will enable you to obtain optimum performance and listening enjoyment from your new AV Receiver. Please retain this manual for future reference. En
  • 2. Introduction WARNING: WARNING AVIS RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC DO NOT OPEN NE PAS OUVRIR SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an RAIN OR MOISTURE. equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within CAUTION: the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO persons. USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE intended to alert the user to the presence of important PERSONNEL. operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. Important Safety Instructions 1. Read these instructions. 15. Damage Requiring Service 2. Keep these instructions. Unplug the apparatus from the wall outlet and refer 3. Heed all warnings. servicing to qualified service personnel under the fol- 4. Follow all instructions. lowing conditions: 5. Do not use this apparatus near water. A. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, 6. Clean only with dry cloth. B. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen 7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in into the apparatus, accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. C. If the apparatus has been exposed to rain or water, 8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, D. If the apparatus does not operate normally by fol- heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including lowing the operating instructions. Adjust only amplifiers) that produce heat. those controls that are covered by the operating 9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or instructions as an improper adjustment of other grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades controls may result in damage and will often with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug require extensive work by a qualified technician to has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide restore the apparatus to its normal operation, blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If E. If the apparatus has been dropped or damaged in the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult any way, and an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. F. When the apparatus exhibits a distinct change in 10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or performance this indicates a need for service. pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, 16. Object and Liquid Entry and the point where they exit from the apparatus. Never push objects of any kind into the apparatus 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the through openings as they may touch dangerous volt- manufacturer. age points or short-out parts that could result in a fire 12. Use only with the cart, stand, PORTABLE CART WARNING or electric shock. tripod, bracket, or table speci- The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or fied by the manufacturer, or splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as sold with the apparatus. When vases shall be placed on the apparatus. a cart is used, use caution Don’t put candles or other burning objects on top of when moving the cart/appara- this unit. tus combination to avoid 17. Batteries S3125A injury from tip-over. Always consider the environmental issues and follow 13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when local regulations when disposing of batteries. unused for long periods of time. 18. If you install the apparatus in a built-in installation, 14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Ser- such as a bookcase or rack, ensure that there is ade- vicing is required when the apparatus has been dam- quate ventilation. aged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is Leave 20 cm (8") of free space at the top and sides and damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen 10 cm (4") at the rear. The rear edge of the shelf or into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to board above the apparatus shall be set 10 cm (4") rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has away from the rear panel or wall, creating a flue-like been dropped. gap for warm air to escape. En 2
  • 3. Precautions 1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal use For U.S. models only, recording copyrighted material is illegal without FCC Information for User the permission of the copyright holder. CAUTION: 2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not user-ser- viceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact your The user changes or modifications not expressly approved Onkyo dealer. by the party responsible for compliance could void the 3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all over user’s authority to operate the equipment. with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft cloth NOTE: dampened with a weak solution of mild detergent and This equipment has been tested and found to comply with water. Dry the unit immediately afterwards with a the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive cloths, thinners, alco- of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide hol, or other chemical solvents, because they may reasonable protection against harmful interference in a damage the finish or remove the panel lettering. residential installation. 4. Power This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio fre- WARNING quency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION radio communications. However, there is no guarantee CAREFULLY. that interference will not occur in a particular installation. AC outlet voltages vary from country to country. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the volt- or television reception, which can be determined by turn- age requirements printed on the unit’s rear panel (e.g., ing the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz). to correct the interference by one or more of the following The power cord plug is used to disconnect this unit measures: from the AC power source. Make sure that the plug is • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. readily operable (easily accessible) at all times. • Increase the separation between the equipment and Pressing ON/STANDBY to select Standby mode does receiver. not fully shutdown the unit. If you do not intend to use • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit differ- the unit for an extended period, remove the power cord ent from that to which the receiver is connected. from the AC outlet. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV techni- 5. Preventing Hearing Loss cian for help. Caution Excessive sound pressure from earphones and head- For Canadian Models phones can cause hearing loss. NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS COM- 6. Batteries and Heat Exposure PLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003. Warning For models having a power cord with a polarized plug: Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, be exposed to excessive heat as sunshine, fire or the MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, like. FULLY INSERT. 7. Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never han- dle this unit or its power cord while your hands are Modèle pour les Canadien wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets inside this unit, have it checked by your Onkyo dealer. REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE 8. Handling Notes LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME NMB- • If you need to transport this unit, use the original 003 DU CANADA. packaging to pack it how it was when you originally Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée: bought it. ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLEC- • Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit for TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE a long time, because they may leave marks on the DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPON- case. DANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU • This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm after FOND. prolonged use. This is normal. • If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may not work properly the next time you turn it on, so be sure to use it occasionally. En 3
  • 4. For British models Supplied Accessories Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qual- Make sure you have the following accessories: ified service personnel. Indoor FM antenna (➔ 21) IMPORTANT AM loop antenna (➔ 21) The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance Power cord (➔ 21) with the following code: Speaker cable labels (➔ 13) Blue: Neutral Speaker setup microphone (➔ 29) Brown: Live Remote controller and two batteries (AA/R6) As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appa- (Note for China: The battery for the remote controller is not sup- ratus may not correspond with the coloured markings plied for this unit.) identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to the * In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the prod- terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured uct name indicates the color. Specifications and operations are the same regardless of color. black. The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured Using the Remote Controller red. Installing the Batteries IMPORTANT The plug is fitted with an appropriate fuse. If the fuse Note needs to be replaced, the replacement fuse must approved • If the remote controller by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 and have the same ampere rat- doesn’t work reliably, try replacing the batteries. ing as that indicated on the plug. Check for the ASTA • Don’t mix new and old mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse. batteries or different If the power cord’s plug is not suitable for your socket out- types of batteries. lets, cut it off and fit a suitable plug. Fit a suitable fuse in • If you intend not to use the plug. the remote controller for a long time, remove the Batteries (AA/R6) batteries to prevent dam- For European Models age from leakage or corrosion. • Remove expired batteries as soon as possible to prevent damage Declaration of Conformity from leakage or corrosion. We, ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH Aiming the Remote Controller LIEGNITZERSTRASSE 6, 82194 GROEBENZELL, To use the remote controller, point it at the AV receiver’s GERMANY remote control sensor, as shown below. declare in own responsibility, that the ONKYO product described in this instruction manual is in compliance with the Transmission corresponding technical standards such as EN60065, EN55013, EN55020 and EN61000-3-2, -3-3. Remote control sensor GROEBENZELL, GERMANY AV receiver K. MIYAGI ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH Approx. 16 ft. (5 m) Received Transmitter AV receiver Incoming sensor 15 15 Approx. 16 ft. (5 m) En 4
  • 5. Contents Introduction Advanced Operations Important Safety Instructions ......................................... 2 Advanced Setup ............................................................. 41 Precautions....................................................................... 3 On-screen Setup Menus............................................... 41 Supplied Accessories...................................................... 4 Common Procedures in Setup Menu ........................... 41 Using the Remote Controller .......................................... 4 Input/Output Assign ...................................................... 42 Features ............................................................................ 6 Speaker Setup.............................................................. 45 Front & Rear Panels......................................................... 8 Audio Adjust ................................................................. 49 Front Panel..................................................................... 8 Source Setup................................................................ 50 Display............................................................................ 9 Listening Mode Preset.................................................. 54 Rear Panel ................................................................... 10 Miscellaneous ............................................................... 55 Remote Controller.......................................................... 11 Hardware Setup............................................................ 55 Controlling the AV Receiver ......................................... 11 Lock Setup.................................................................... 58 About Home Theater ...................................................... 12 Using the Audio Settings .............................................. 58 Enjoying Home Theater................................................ 12 NET/USB.......................................................................... 61 About NET .................................................................... 61 Connections Connecting the AV Receiver ........................................ 61 Connecting the AV Receiver ......................................... 13 Listening to Internet Radio............................................ 62 Connecting Your Speakers .......................................... 13 Playing Music Files on a Server ................................... 63 Connecting a Power Amplifier ...................................... 16 Remote Playback from Media Server/ About AV Connections ................................................. 17 Personal Computer .................................................... 66 Connecting Your Components with HDMI.................... 18 Network Settings .......................................................... 67 Connecting Your Components ..................................... 19 About USB .................................................................... 68 Connecting Onkyo Components ............................ 20 Multi Zone ....................................................................... 70 Connecting Antenna..................................................... 21 Connecting Zone 2 ....................................................... 70 Connecting the Power Cord ......................................... 21 Connecting Zone 3 ....................................................... 71 Which Connections Should I Use?............................... 22 Setting the Powered Zone 2 ......................................... 71 Setting the Multi Zone................................................... 72 Using Zone 2/3 ............................................................. 72 Turning On & Basic Operations Using the Remote Controller in Turning On/Off the AV Receiver ................................... 24 Zone 2/3 and Multiroom Control Kits ......................... 74 Turning On ................................................................... 24 Turning Off ................................................................... 24 Controlling iPod & Other Components Basic Operations............................................................ 25 Selecting the Language Used for Controlling iPod ............................................................. 75 the Onscreen Setup Menus ....................................... 25 Connecting the iPod Directly to the USB Port .............. 75 Playing the Connected Component.............................. 25 Connecting an Onkyo Dock .......................................... 76 Displaying Source Information ..................................... 25 Using the Onkyo Dock .................................................. 77 Setting the Display Brightness ..................................... 25 Controlling Your iPod.................................................... 78 Muting the AV Receiver................................................ 26 Controlling Other Components..................................... 80 Using the Sleep Timer.................................................. 26 Preprogrammed Remote Control Codes ...................... 80 Selecting Speaker Layout ............................................ 26 Looking up for Remote Control Code ........................... 80 Using the Home Menu.................................................. 26 Entering Remote Control Codes................................... 82 Changing the Input Display .......................................... 27 Remote Control Codes for Using Headphones....................................................... 27 Onkyo Components Connected via ..................... 82 Using Easy Macros ...................................................... 27 Resetting REMOTE MODE Buttons ............................. 83 Audyssey MultEQ® Room Correction and Resetting the Remote Controller .................................. 83 Speaker Setup ........................................................... 28 Controlling Other Components ..................................... 83 Listening to the Radio ................................................... 31 Activities Setup ............................................................. 85 Using the Tuner............................................................ 31 Learning Commands .................................................... 86 Presetting FM/AM Stations........................................... 32 Using Normal Macros ................................................... 87 Using RDS (excluding North American and Taiwan models) ....... 32 Others Recording ....................................................................... 34 Using the Listening Modes ........................................... 35 Troubleshooting ............................................................. 88 Selecting Listening Modes ........................................... 35 Specifications ................................................................. 93 About Listening Modes................................................. 36 About HDMI ..................................................................... 95 Using an RIHD-compatible TV, Player, or Recorder ... 96 Video Resolution Chart.................................................. 98 To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults, turn it on and, while holding down VCR/DVR, press ON/STANDBY (➔ 88). En 5
  • 6. Features Amplifier Miscellaneous • 135 Watts/Channel @ 8 ohms (FTC) • 40 SIRIUS*9/FM/AM Presets (North American mod- • 180 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (IEC) els) • 230 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (JEITA) • 40 FM/AM Presets (excluding North American mod- • WRAT–Wide Range Amplifier Technology els) (5 Hz to 100 kHz bandwidth) • Audyssey MultEQ®*4 to Correct Room Acoustic Prob- • Linear Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry lems • H.C.P.S. (High Current Power Supply) Massive High • Audyssey Dynamic EQ®*4 for Loudness Correction Power Transformer • Audyssey Dynamic Volume®*4 to Maintain Optimal Listening Level and Dynamic Range Processing • Crossover Adjustment (40/50/60/70/80/90/100/120/150/200 Hz) • THX Select2 Plus*1 Certified • A/V Sync Control Function (up to 250 ms) • HDMI Video Upscaling (to 1080p Compatible) with • Auto Power-down Function Faroudja DCDi Cinema Enhancement • Bi-Directional Preprogrammed (with onscreen display • HDMI (Ver.1.4a with Audio Return Channel, 3D), Deep- setup) RI-Compatible Learning Remote with 4 Activities Color, x.v.Color*, Lip Sync, DTS*2-HD Master Audio, and Mode-Key LEDs DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, Dolby TrueHD*3, Dolby Digital Plus, DSD and Multi-CH PCM *1 • Dolby Pro Logic IIz*3 – New Surround Format (front- high) • Audyssey DSX™*4 for New Surround Channels (front- Manufactured under license from THX Ltd. U.S. and foreign wide/front-high) patent applications pending. THX and the THX logo are • 4 DSP Modes for Gaming; Rock/Sports/Action/RPG trademarks of THX Ltd. which are registered in some jurisdic- • Non-Scaling Configuration tions. All rights reserved. *2 • A-Form Listening Mode Memory • Direct Mode Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942; • Pure Audio Mode 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; • Music Optimizer*5 for Compressed Digital Music files 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and • 192 kHz/24-bit D/A Converters worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are • Powerful and Highly Accurate 32-bit Processing DSP registered trademarks, & DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio, and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product • Jitter Cleaning Circuit Technology includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Connections *3 • 7 HDMI*6 Inputs (1 on front panel) and 1 Output (North American and Taiwan models) Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. • 7 HDMI*6 Inputs (1 on front panel) and 2 Outputs “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and the double-D sym- (European, Australian and Asian models) bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. • Onkyo for System Control *4 • 6 Digital Inputs (3 Optical/3 Coaxial) • Component Video Switching (2 Inputs/1 Output) Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories™. • Universal Port for the Optional Dock for iPod*/HD U.S. and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ®, Radio™*7 tuner module (North American models)/ Audyssey DSX™, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and DAB+ tuner module (European, Australian and Asian Audyssey Dynamic EQ® are registered trademarks and trade- models) marks of Audyssey Laboratories. • Dual Subwoofer Pre Out *5 Music Optimizer™ is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation. • Banana Plug-Compatible Speaker Posts*8 *6 • Powered Zone 2 “HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia • Internet Radio* Connectivity (SIRIUS Internet Radio*9/ Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI vTuner/Last.fm/Pandora/Rhapsody/Slacker/Mediafly/ Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.” Napster) *7 * Services available may vary depending on the region. • Network Capability for Streaming Audio Files HD Radio™ and the HD Radio Ready logo are proprietary • Bi-Amping Capability for FL/FR with SBL/SBR trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation. En • Analog RGB Video Input (D-sub 15) for PC 6
  • 7. To receive HD Radio broadcasts, you must install an Onkyo UP-HT1 HD Radio tuner module (sold separately). *8 In Europe, using banana plugs to connect speakers to an audio amplifier is prohibited. *9 SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii. THX Select2 Plus Before any home theater component can be THX Select2 Plus certified, it must pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product feature the THX Select2 Plus logo, which is your guarantee that the Home Theater products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come. THX Select2 Plus requirements define hundreds of parameters, including power amplifier performance, and pre-ampli- fier performance and operation for both digital and ana- log domains. THX Select2 Plus receivers also feature proprietary THX technologies (e.g., THX Mode) which accurately translate movie soundtracks for home theater playback. * “Xantech” is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation. * “Niles” is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation. iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffle, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. iPad is a trademark of Apple Inc. “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an elec- tronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. * “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. * Rhapsody and the Rhapsody logo are registered trademarks of RealNetworks, Inc. * “DLNA®, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the Digi- tal Living Network Alliance.” This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technol- ogy must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited consumer uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. En 7
  • 8. Front & Rear Panels Front Panel Front flap Pull here to open the flap. The actual front panel has various logos printed on it. They are not shown here for clarity. The page numbers in parentheses show where you can find the main explanation for each item. ON/STANDBY button (➔ 24) DISPLAY button (➔ 25) STANDBY indicator (➔ 24) MASTER VOLUME control and indicator (➔ 25) ZONE 2 indicator (➔ 72) PURE AUDIO button (➔ 35) ZONE 3 indicator (➔ 72) HDMI THRU indicator (➔ 57) Remote control sensor/transmitter (➔ 4) Input selector buttons (BD/DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/ Display (➔ 9) SAT, GAME, PC, AUX, TUNER, TV/CD, PHONO, PORT and NET/USB) (➔ 25) (North American and Taiwan models) (European, Australian and Asian models) En 8
  • 9. The page numbers in parentheses show where you can find the main explanation for each item. PHONES jack (➔ 27) SETUP button (➔ 41) ZONE 2, ZONE 3 and OFF buttons (➔ 72) RETURN button TONE button (➔ 58, 73) SETUP MIC jack (➔ 29) LEVEL button (➔ 73) USB port (➔ 68) MONITOR OUT button (➔ 43) AUX INPUT jacks (HDMI, VIDEO, AUDIO L/R and LISTENING MODE buttons (MOVIE/TV, MUSIC, DIGITAL) (➔ 18, 19) GAME and THX) (➔ 35) Up and Down buttons (➔ 58, 73) DIMMER button (North American and Taiwan MUSIC OPTIMIZER button (➔ 59) models) (➔ 25) POWER switch (European, Australian and Asian MEMORY button (➔ 32) models) (➔ 24) TUNING MODE button (➔ 31) RT/PTY/TP button (European, Australian and TUNING, PRESET (➔ 31 to 32), arrow and Asian models) (➔ 32) ENTER buttons Display For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses. Speaker/channel indicators Bi AMP indicator (➔ 15) Z2 (Powered Zone 2) indicator (➔ 72) Headphone indicator (➔ 27) Listening mode and format indicators (➔ 35, 59) Audyssey indicator (➔ 28, 50) NETWORK indicator (➔ 62) Dynamic EQ indicator (➔ 50) Tuning indicators Dynamic Vol indicator (➔ 51) RDS indicator (excluding North American and Message area Taiwan models) (➔ 32) USB indicator (➔ 68) AUTO indicator (➔ 31) Volume level (➔ 25) TUNED indicator (➔ 31) MUTING indicator (➔ 26) FM STEREO indicator (➔ 31) Audio input indicators SLEEP indicator (➔ 26) En 9
  • 10. Rear Panel (North American and Taiwan models) * (European, Australian and Asian models) DIGITAL IN COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks AC INLET RS232 port GND screw Terminal for control. Composite, S-Video and analog audio jacks REMOTE CONTROL jack (BD/DVD IN, VCR/DVR IN and OUT, CBL/SAT IN, UNIVERSAL PORT jack GAME IN, PC IN, TV/CD IN and PHONO IN) ETHERNET port Multichannel input jacks SIRIUS antenna jack (North American models) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, SURR BACK L/R and SUBWOOFER) MONITOR OUT V and S jacks PRE OUT jacks COMPONENT VIDEO IN and MONITOR OUT (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, jacks SB/FH/FW L/R, SUBWOOFER, ZONE 2 L/R and HDMI IN and OUT jacks (North American and ZONE 3 L/R) Taiwan models) * SB···Surround Back, FH···Front High, FW···Front Wide HDMI IN and HDMI output (HDMI OUT MAIN and Speaker Terminals HDMI OUT SUB) jacks (European, Australian and Asian models) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, SURR BACK L/R, FRONT HIGH L/R and IR IN and OUT jacks FRONT WIDE/ZONE 2 L/R) ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 12V TRIGGER OUT jacks FM ANTENNA jack and AM ANTENNA terminal See “Connecting the AV Receiver” for connection infor- PC IN port mation (➔ 13 to 22). En 10
  • 11. Remote Controller Controlling the AV Receiver To control the AV receiver, press RECEIVER to select Receiver mode. You can also use the remote controller to control Onkyo Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, CD player and other components. See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for more details (➔ 82). For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses. STANDBY button (➔ 24) ON button (➔ 24) *1 ACTIVITIES buttons (ALL OFF, MY MOVIE, MY TV and MY MUSIC) (➔ 27, 87) REMOTE MODE/INPUT SELECTOR buttons (BD/DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, AUX, TUNER, TV/CD, PHONO, PORT and NET/USB) (➔ 25) SP LAYOUT button (➔ 26) *2 Arrow / / / and ENTER buttons SETUP button (➔ 41) LISTENING MODE buttons (MOVIE/TV, MUSIC, GAME and THX) (➔ 35) DIMMER button (➔ 25) DISPLAY button (➔ 25) MUTING button (➔ 26) VOL / button (➔ 25) RETURN button HOME button (➔ 26) SLEEP button (➔ 26) ■ Controlling the tuner To control the AV receiver’s tuner, press TUNER (or RECEIVER). You can select AM or FM by pressing TUNER repeatedly. Arrow / buttons (➔ 31) D.TUN button (TUNER remote mode only) (➔ 31) CH +/– button (➔ 32) Number buttons (➔ 31) *1 When you want to change the remote controller mode without changing the current input source, press MODE and within about 8 seconds, press REMOTE MODE. Then, with the AV receiver’s remote controller, you can control the component corresponding to the button you pressed. *2 VIDEO functions as a short cut of HOME. En 11
  • 12. About Home Theater Enjoying Home Theater Thanks to the AV receiver’s superb capabilities, you can enjoy surround sound with a real sense of movement in your own home—just like being in a movie theater or concert hall. With Blu-ray Discs or DVDs, you can enjoy DTS and Dolby Digital. With analog or digital TV, you can enjoy Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS Neo:6, or Onkyo’s original DSP lis- tening modes. You can also enjoy THX Surround EX (THX-certified THX speaker system recommended). Front speakers (Left and Right) These output the overall sound. Their role in a home theater is to pro- vide a solid anchor for the sound image. They should be positioned facing the listener at about ear level, and equidistant from the TV. Angle them inward so as to create a triangle, with the listener at the apex. Center speaker This speaker enhances the front speakers, making sound movements distinct and providing a full sound image. In movies it’s used mainly for dialog. Position it close to your TV facing forward at about ear level, or at the same height as the front speakers. Surround speakers (Left and Right) These speakers are used for precise sound positioning and to add real- istic ambience. Position them at the sides of the listener, or slightly behind, about 2 to 3 feet (60 to 100 cm) above ear level. Ideally they should be equidistant from the listener. Subwoofer(s) The subwoofer handles the bass sounds of the LFE (Low-Frequency Effects) channel. The volume and quality of the bass output from your subwoofer will depend on its position, the shape of your listening room, and your listening position. In general, a good bass sound can be obtained by installing the subwoofer in a front corner, or at one-third the width of the wall, as shown. Surround back speakers (Left and Right) These speakers are necessary to enjoy Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-ES Discrete, THX Surround EX, etc. They enhance the realism of surround sound and improve sound localization behind the Corner listener. Position them behind the listener about 2 to 3 feet (60 to position 100 cm) above ear level. Front high speakers (Left and Right) These speakers are necessary to enjoy Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height, and 1/3 of wall Audyssey DSX™. They significantly enhance the spatial experience. position Position them at least 3.3 feet (100 cm) above the front speakers (pref- Tip erably as high as possible) and at an angle slightly wider than the front speakers. • To find the best position for your subwoofer, while Front wide speakers (Left and Right) playing a movie or some music with good bass, These speakers are necessary to enjoy Audyssey DSX. They signifi- experiment by placing your subwoofer at various cantly enhance the spatial experience. Position them well outside of the positions within the room, and choose the one that front speakers. See also http://www.audyssey.com/technology/dsx.html provides the most satisfying results. about optimum speaker placement for Audyssey DSX. En 12
  • 13. Connections Connecting the AV Receiver Connecting Your Speakers Speaker Connection Precautions Read the following before connecting your speakers: Speaker Configuration • You can connect speakers with an impedance of between The following table indicates the channels you should use 4 and 16 ohms. If the impedance of any of the connected depending on the number of speakers that you have. speakers is 4 ohms or more, but less than 6 ohms, be sure For 7.1-channel surround-sound playback, you need 7 to set the minimum speaker impedance to “4ohms” speakers and a powered subwoofer. (➔ 45). If you use speakers with a lower impedance, and use the amplifier at high volume levels for a long period Number of 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 7 8 8 9 9 9 10 11 of time, the built-in protection circuit may be activated. speakers • Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet before Front speakers ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ making any connections. Center ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ • Read the instructions supplied with your speakers. speaker • Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity. In other Surround ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ words, connect positive (+) terminals only to positive (+) speakers terminals, and negative (–) terminals only to negative (–) Surround back ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ terminals. If you get them the wrong way around, the speaker*1*2 sound will be out of phase and will sound unnatural. Surround back ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ • Unnecessarily long, or very thin speaker cables may speakers*2 affect the sound quality and should be avoided. Front high ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ • Be careful not to short the positive and negative wires. speakers*2 Doing so may damage the AV receiver. Front wide ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ speakers*2 • Make sure the metal core of the wire does not have con- tact with the AV receiver’s rear panel. Doing so may *1 If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to damage the AV receiver. the SURR BACK L terminals. *2 Front high, surround back and front wide speakers cannot be used at the same time. No matter how many speakers you use, a powered sub- woofer is recommended for a really powerful and solid bass. To get the best from your surround sound system, you need to set the speaker settings. You can do this automati- cally (➔ 28) or manually (➔ 45). Attaching the Speaker Cable Labels The AV receiver’s positive (+) speaker terminals are all • Don’t connect more than one cable to each speaker ter- red (the negative (–) speaker terminals are all black). minal. Doing so may damage the AV receiver. Speaker Color • Don’t connect one speaker to several terminals. Front left, Front high left, Front wide left, White Zone 2 left Front right, Front high right, Front wide right, Red Zone 2 right Center Green Surround left Blue Surround right Gray Surround back left Brown Surround back right Tan The supplied speaker cable labels are also color-coded and you should attach them to the positive (+) side of each speaker cable in accordance with the table above. Then all you need to do is to match the color of each label to the corresponding speaker terminal. En 13
  • 14. Connecting the Speaker Cables Screw-type speaker terminals Strip 1/2" to 5/8" (12 to 15 mm) of 1/2" to 5/8"(12 to 15 mm) insulation from the ends of the speaker cables, and twist the bare wires tightly, as shown. Using Banana Plugs (North American models) • If you are using banana plugs, tighten the speaker terminal before inserting the banana plug. • Do not insert the speaker code directly into the center hole of the speaker terminal. The following illustration shows which speaker should be connected to each pair of terminals. If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURR BACK L terminals. Front high Front wide Front wide Front high right  right Front right Front left left left Center speaker speaker speaker speaker speaker speaker speaker Surround Surround Surround Surround right back right back left left speaker speaker speaker speaker En 14
  • 15. Using Dipole Speakers Dipole speakers Normal speakers You can use dipole speakers for the surround and surround back speakers. Dipole speakers output the same sound in two directions. TV/screen TV/screen Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on them to indicate how they should be positioned. The surround dipole speakers should be positioned so that their arrows point toward the TV/screen, while the surround back dipole speak- ers should be positioned so that their arrows point toward each other, as shown. Front speakers Center speaker Surround speakers Subwoofer(s) Surround back speakers Front high speakers Front wide speakers Connecting a Powered Subwoofer Using a suitable cable, connect the AV receiver’s SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack to an input on Powered subwoofer your powered subwoofer, as shown. If your sub- woofer is unpowered and you’re using an external amplifier, connect the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT LINE INPUT LINE INPUT jack to an input on the amp. You can connect the powered subwoofer with two SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks respectively. The same signal is output from each jack. LINE INPUT LINE INPUT Bi-amping the Front Speakers The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts can be used with front speakers and surround back speakers respec- tively, or bi-amped to provide separate tweeter and woofer feeds for a pair of front speakers that support bi-amping, providing improved bass and treble performance. • When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to drive up to a 5.1 speaker system in the main room. • For bi-amping, the FRONT L/R terminal posts connect to the front speakers’ woofer terminals; the SURR BACK L/R ter- minal posts connect to the front speakers’ tweeter terminals. Right Left • Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections shown speaker speaker below and turned on the AV receiver, you must set the “Speakers Type(Front)” setting to “Bi-Amp” to enable bi- amping (➔ 45). Tweeter (high) Woofer (low) Important: • When making the bi-amping connections, be sure to remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’ tweeter (high) and woofer (low) terminals. • Bi-amping can be used only with speakers that support bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual. En 15
  • 16. Connecting a Power Amplifier If you want to use a more powerful power amplifier and use the AV receiver as a preamp, connect it to the PRE OUT jacks, and connect all speakers and the subwoofer to the power amplifier. If you have a powered subwoofer, connect it to this AV receiver’s SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack. You can connect the powered subwoofer with two SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks respectively. The same signal is output from each jack. *1 Power amplifier Powered subwoofer See “Connecting a Powered Front left speaker Subwoofer” for more information Center speaker (➔ 15). Front right speaker Surround left speaker Surround right speaker Surround back/Front wide/Front high left speaker*1 Surround back/Front wide/Front high right speaker*1 Note *1 Specify “None” for the channel that you don’t want to output (➔ 46). SB···Surround Back, FH···Front High, FW···Front Wide En 16
  • 17. About AV Connections Connected image with AV components HDMI cable : Video & Audio Other cables : Video : Audio AV receiver AV receiver Blu-ray Disc/ Blu-ray Disc/ TV, projector, etc. DVD player Game console TV, projector, etc. DVD player Game console • Before making any AV connections, read the manuals supplied with your AV components. • Don’t connect the power cord until you’ve completed and double-checked all AV connections. Right! • Push plugs in all the way to make good connections (loose connections can cause noise or malfunc- tions). • To prevent interference, keep audio and video cables away from power cords and speaker cables. Wrong! AV Cables and Jacks Signal Cable Jack Description Video and HDMI HDMI HDMI connections can carry digital video and audio. Audio Video Component video Y Component video separates the luminance (Y) and color Green difference signals (PB/CB, PR/CR), providing the best pic- PB/CB Blue ture quality (some TV manufacturers label their compo- PR/CR nent video sockets slightly differently). Red Analog RGB This is a conventional analog interface to connect a PC and a display device (also called D-Sub or D-subminiature). S-Video S-Video separates the luminance and color signals and pro- vides better picture quality than composite video. Composite video Composite video is commonly used on TVs, VCRs, and V Yellow other video equipment. Audio Optical digital OPTICAL Optical digital connections allow you to enjoy digital audio sound such as PCM*, Dolby Digital or DTS. The audio quality is the same as coaxial. Coaxial digital Coaxial digital connections allow you to enjoy digital audio Orange sound such as PCM*, Dolby Digital or DTS. The audio quality is the same as optical. Analog audio L White Analog audio connections (RCA) carry analog audio. (RCA) R Red Multichannel ana- This cable carries multichannel analog audio and is typi- log audio (RCA) cally used to connect DVD players with a 7.1-channel ana- log audio output. Several standard analog audio cables can be used instead of a multichannel cable. * Available sampling rate for PCM input signal is 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz. Even 176.4/192 kHz is effective in case of the HDMI con- nection. Note • The AV receiver does not support SCART plugs. • The AV receiver’s optical digital jacks have shutter-type covers that open when an optical plug is inserted and close when it’s removed. Push plugs in all the way. Caution En • To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical plug straight when inserting and removing. 17
  • 18. Connecting Your Components with HDMI VCR or DVD recorder/Digital Video Recorder Game console TV, projector, etc. Personal computer Blu-ray Disc/DVD player Camcorder Satellite, cable, set-top box, etc. Connect your components to the appropriate jacks. The default input assignments are shown below. ✔: Assignment can be changed (➔ 42). Jack Signal Components Assignable Input HDMI IN 1 Audio/Video Blu-ray Disc/DVD player ✔ HDMI IN 2 VCR or DVD recorder/Digital Video Recorder ✔ HDMI IN 3 Satellite, cable, set-top box, etc. ✔ HDMI IN 4 Game console ✔ HDMI IN 5 Personal computer ✔ HDMI IN 6 Other components ✔ AUX INPUT HDMI Camcorder Output (North HDMI OUT TV, projector, etc. American and Taiwan models) Output (Euro- HDMI OUT MAIN TV pean, Austra- HDMI OUT SUB Projector, etc. lian and Asian models) Refer to “About HDMI” (➔ 95) and “Using an RIHD-compatible TV, Player, or Recorder” (➔ 96). ■ Audio return channel (ARC) function Audio return channel (ARC) function enables an HDMI capable TV to send the audio stream to the HDMI OUT (North American and Taiwan models)/HDMI OUT MAIN (European, Australian and Asian models) of the AV receiver. To use this function, you must select the TV/CD input selector. • To use ARC function, you must select the TV/CD input selector, your TV must support ARC function and “HDMI Control (RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ 56). Tip • To listen to audio received by the HDMI IN jacks through your TV’s speakers: – Set the “TV Control” setting to “On” (➔ 57) for an -compatible TV. – Set the “Audio TV Out” setting to “On” (➔ 56) when the TV is not compatible with or the “TV Control” setting to “Off”. – Set your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player’s HDMI audio output setting to PCM. – To listen to TV audio through the AV receiver, see “Connecting Your Components” (➔ 19). Note • When listening to an HDMI component through the AV receiver, set the HDMI component so that its video can be seen on the TV screen (on the TV, select the input of the HDMI component connected to the AV receiver). If the TV power is off or the TV is set to another input source, this may result in no sound from the AV receiver or the sound may be cut off. • When the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (➔ 56) to hear from your TV’s speakers, by controlling the AV receiver’s volume, the sound will be output from the AV receiver’s speakers, too. When the “TV Control” setting is set to “On” (➔ 57) to hear from speakers of -compatible TV, by controlling the AV receiver’s volume, the AV receiver’s speakers will produce sound while the TV’s speakers are muted. To stop the AV receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV receiver’s volume. En 18
  • 19. Connecting Your Components Front Rear Connect your components to the appropriate jacks. The default input assignments are shown below. ✔: Assignment can be changed (➔ 44). No. Jack Signal Components Assignable AUX INPUT VIDEO Composite video Camcorder, etc AUDIO L/R Analog audio DIGITAL Digital audio COMPONENT IN 1 (BD/DVD) Component video Blu-ray Disc/DVD player ✔ VIDEO IN 2 (CBL/SAT) Satellite, cable, set-top box, etc. ✔ MONITOR OUT TV, projector, etc. DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1 (BD/DVD) Digital audio Blu-ray Disc/DVD player ✔ IN 2 (VCR/DVR) VCR or DVD recorder/digital ✔ video recorder IN 3 (CBL/SAT) Satellite, cable, set-top box, etc. ✔ OPTICAL IN 1 (GAME) Game console ✔ IN 2 (TV/CD) TV, CD player ✔ MONITOR OUT Composite video TV, projector, etc. and S-Video BD/DVD IN Analog audio, Blu-ray Disc/DVD player VCR/DVR IN composite video VCR or DVD recorder/digital and S-Video video recorder CBL/SAT IN Satellite, cable, set-top box, etc. GAME IN Game console PC IN Analog audio Personal computer TV/CD IN TV, CD player, cassette tape deck, MD, CD-R, Turntable*1 PHONO IN Turntable*1 UNIVERSAL PORT Analog audio/ Universal port optional dock video (UP-A1 etc.) PC IN Analog RGB Personal computer *2 Multichannel input Analog audio DVD player, DVD-Audio or *3 Super Audio CD-capable player, En or an MPEG decorder 19
  • 20. Note *1 Connect a turntable (MM) that has built-in a phono preamp to TV/CD IN or connect it to PHONO IN with the phono preamp turned off. If your turntable (MM) doesn’t have a phono preamp, connect to PHONO IN. If your turntable has a moving coil (MC) type car- tridge, you’ll need a commercially available MC head amp or MC transformer to connect to PHONO IN. See your turntable’s man- ual for details. If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the AV receiver’s GND screw. With some turntables, connecting the ground wire may produce an audible hum. If this happens, disconnect it. *2 When you connect your personal computer to PC IN and select PC input selector, video of the personal computer is output from HDMI output(s). However, because the AV receiver selects the video input in the order of HDMI > component > analog RGB, if you have assigned HDMI IN to the PC input selector, the AV receiver will output signals from HDMI IN in priority to PC IN. *3 To select the multichannel input, select the BD/DVD input selector and see “Audio Selector” (➔ 60). To adjust the subwoofer sensi- tivity for the multichannel input, see “Subwoofer Input Sensitivity” (➔ 45). • The AV receiver can output audio and video signals from the AUX INPUT jacks to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks. • With connection , you can listen and record audio from the external components while you are in Zone 2/3. You can listen and record audio from the external components in the main room; you can listen to the audio in Zone 2/3 as well. • With connection , you can enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. (To record or listen in Zone 2/3 as well, use and .) ■ How to record the video With the connections described above, you cannot record the video through the AV receiver. To make a connection for video recording (➔ 34). Connecting Onkyo Components Step 1: Note Make sure that each Onkyo component is connected • Use only cables for connections. cables are supplied with an analog audio cable (connection in the hookup with Onkyo players (DVD, CD, etc.). examples) (➔ 19). • Some components have two jacks. You can connect either Step 2: one to the AV receiver. The other jack is for connecting addi- tional -capable components. Make the connection (see illustration below). • Connect only Onkyo components to jacks. Connecting other Step 3: manufacturer’s components may cause a malfunction. If you’re using an RI Dock, or cassette tape deck, • Some components may not support all functions. Refer to change the Input Display (➔ 27). the manuals supplied with your other Onkyo components. • While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the System On/Auto Power On With (Remote Interactive), you can use the following and Direct Change functions do not work. special functions: • Do not use RI connections if you use HDMI Control (RIHD) (➔ 56). ■ System On/Auto Power On When you start playback on a component connected via IN L while the AV receiver is on Standby, the AV R receiver will automatically turn on and select that com- TV/CD ponent as the input source. ■ Direct Change FRONT L When playback is started on a component connected via REMOTE R CONTROL , the AV receiver automatically selects that compo- BD/DVD nent as the input source. ■ Remote Control You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to con- R ANALOG L trol your other -capable Onkyo components, point- e.g., CD player AUDIO OUT ing the remote controller at the AV receiver’s remote control sensor instead of the component. You must enter R L the appropriate remote control code first (➔ 82). ANALOG e.g., DVD player AUDIO OUT En 20
  • 21. Connecting Antenna This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor FM antenna and AM loop antenna. The AV receiver won’t pick up any radio signals without any antenna connected, so you must connect the antenna to use the tuner. Caution (North American and (European, Australian • Be careful that you don’t injure yourself when Taiwan models) and Asian models) using thumbtacks. Insert the plug fully Insert the plug fully into the jack. into the jack. Push. Insert wire. Release. Assembling the AM loop antenna. Thumbtacks, etc. Indoor FM antenna (supplied) AM loop antenna (supplied) Note • Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll need to tune into a radio station and position the antenna to achieve the best possible reception. • Keep the AM loop antenna as far away as possible from your AV receiver, TV, speaker cables, and power cords. Tip • If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available outdoor FM antenna instead. • If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commercially available outdoor AM antenna. Connecting the Power Cord Note Step 1: • Before connecting the power cord, connect all of your speak- ers and AV components. Connect the supplied power cord to the AV receiver’s • Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary power surge AC INLET. that might interfere with other electrical equipment on the same circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV receiver into a different branch circuit. • Do not use a power cord other than the one supplied with the AV receiver. The supplied power cord is designed exclusively for use with the AV receiver and should not be used with any other equipment. To AC wall outlet • Never disconnect the power cord from the AV receiver while the other end is still plugged into a wall outlet. Doing so may cause an electric shock. Always disconnect the power cord from the Step 2: wall outlet first, and then the AV receiver. Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet. En 21
  • 22. Which Connections Should I Use? The AV receiver supports several connection formats for compatibility with a wide range of AV equipment. The format you choose will depend on the formats supported by your components. Use the following sections as a guide. Video Connection Formats Video component can be connected by using any one of the following video connection formats: composite video, S-Video, PC IN (Analog RGB), component video or HDMI, the latter offering the best picture quality. The AV receiver can upconvert and downconvert between video formats, depending on the “Monitor Out” setting (➔ 42), which generally determines whether video signals are upconverted for the component video output or the HDMI output. For optimal video performance, THX recommends that video signals pass through the system without upconver- sion (e.g., component video input through to component video output). To by-pass video upconversion in the AV receiver, simultaneously press the VCR/DVR and RETURN on the AV receiver. While continuing to hold down the VCR/DVR, press RETURN to toggle until “Skip” appears on the display. Release both buttons. To use the video upconversion in the AV receiver, repeat the above process until “Use” appears on the display and release the buttons. ■ “Monitor Out” setting set to “HDMI” (North American and Taiwan models) “Monitor Out” setting set to “HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub” (European, Australian and Asian models) Video input signals flow through the AV receiver as shown, Video Signal Flow Chart with composite video, S-Video, PC IN (Analog RGB) and Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc. component video sources all being upconverted for the HDMI output. (North American and Taiwan models) Use this setting if Composite S-Video PC IN Component HDMI (Analog RGB) you connect the AV receiver’s HDMI OUT to your TV. IN (European, Australian and Asian models) Use these set- tings if you connect the AV receiver’s HDMI OUT MAIN or AV receiver HDMI OUT SUB, respectively, to your TV. The composite video, S-Video and component video outputs pass through their respective input signals as they are. MONITOR OUT Composite S-Video Component HDMI Note • (North American and Taiwan models) If not connected to HDMI OUT, the “Monitor Out” setting will be automatically switched to TV, projector, etc. “Analog” (➔ 23). (European, Australian and Asian models) If not connected to the same output you have selected in the “Monitor Out” setting, the “Monitor Out” setting will be automatically switched to “Analog” (➔ 23). In this case, the setting of the output resolution will be that for HDMI output (➔ 42). Moreover, it will be switched to “1080i” when “1080p” is selected, and to “Through” when “Auto” is selected. ■ “Monitor Out” setting set to “Both”, “Both(Main)” or “Both(Sub)” (European, Australian and Asian models) Video input signals flow through the AV receiver as shown, Video Signal Flow Chart with composite video, S-Video, PC IN (Analog RGB) and Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc. component video sources all being upconverted for both HDMI outputs. Use these settings if you connect the AV receiver’s HDMI OUT MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB to your Composite S-Video PC IN Component HDMI TVs. (Analog RGB) The composite video, S-Video and component video outputs IN pass through their respective input signals as they are. AV receiver Both: Video signals are output from both HDMI outputs at the resolution supported by both TVs. You cannot select “Resolution” setting. The “Picture Adjust” setting will MONITOR OUT be that for “HDMI Main”. Composite S-Video Component HDMI Both(Main): Video signals are output from both HDMI outputs but HDMI OUT MAIN will become a priority; TV, projector, etc depending on the resolution, video signals may not be out- put from HDMI OUT SUB. Both(Sub): Video signals are output from both HDMI outputs but HDMI OUT SUB will become a priority; depend- En ing on the resolution, video signals may not be output from HDMI OUT MAIN. 22
  • 23. Note • The “Monitor Out” setting will be automatically switched to “Analog” (➔ 42) if not connected to both outputs when “Both” is selected or if not connected to a priority output when “Both(Main)” or “Both(Sub)” is selected. ■ “Monitor Out” setting set to “Analog” Video input signals flow through the AV receiver as shown, Video Signal Flow Chart with composite video, S-Video and PC IN (Analog RGB) sources being upconverted for the component video output. Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc. Use this setting if you connect the AV receiver’s COMPO- NENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT to your TV. Composite S-Video PC IN Component HDMI Composite video is upconverted to S-Video and S-Video is (Analog RGB) downconverted to composite video. Note that these conver- IN sions only apply to the MONITOR OUT V and S outputs, not the VCR/DVR OUT V and S outputs. AV receiver The composite video, S-Video and component video outputs pass through their respective input signals as they are. MONITOR OUT This signal flow also applies when the “Resolution” setting Composite S-Video Component HDMI is set to “Through” (➔ 43). *1 TV, projector, etc. *1 PC IN (Analog RGB) input signal is output at 720p resolution. Video Signal Flow and the Resolution Setting When the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog” (➔ 42), Video Signal Flow Chart if the “Resolution” setting is set to anything other than Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc. “Through” (➔ 43), the video signal flow will be as shown here, with composite video and S-Video sources being upcon- verted for the component video output. Composite S-Video Component HDMI The composite video, S-Video, and component video outputs IN pass through their respective analog input signals as they are. HDMI input signals are not output. AV receiver MONITOR OUT Composite S-Video Component HDMI TV, projector, etc. Audio Connection Formats Audio component can be connected by using any of the fol- Audio Signal Flow Chart lowing audio connection formats: analog, optical, coaxial, analog multichannel, or HDMI. Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc. When choosing a connection format, bear in mind that the AV receiver does not convert digital input signals for analog Analog Multichannel Optical Coaxial HDMI line outputs and vice versa. For example, audio signals con- IN nected to an optical or coaxial digital input are not output by *1 AV receiver *1*3 *1 *1 the analog VCR/DVR OUT. *3 OUT If signals are present at more than one input, the inputs will Analog HDMI be selected automatically in the following order of priority: *1 *2 HDMI, digital, analog. TV, projector, etc. *1 Depends on the “Audio TV Out” setting (➔ 56). *2 This setting is available, when “Audio Return Channel” setting is set to “Auto” (➔ 57), you must select the TV/CD input selector and your TV must support ARC function. *3 Only the front L/R channels are output. En 23
  • 24. Turning On & Basic Operations Turning On/Off the AV Receiver (North American and (European, Australian and Taiwan models) Asian models) ON/STANDBY STANDBY indicator STANDBY indicator STANDBY ON RECEIVER POWER Turning On 1 (European, Australian and Asian models) Set POWER to the ON position ( ) on the front panel. The AV receiver enters Standby mode, and the STANDBY indicator comes on. 2 Press ON/STANDBY on the front panel. or Press RECEIVER followed by ON on the remote controller. The AV receiver comes on, the display lights, and the STANDBY indicator goes off. Pressing the remote controller’s ON again will turn on any components connected via . Turning Off Press ON/STANDBY on the front panel. or Press RECEIVER followed by STANDBY on the remote controller. The AV receiver will enter Standby mode. To prevent any loud surprises when you turn on the AV receiver, always turn down the volume before you turn it off. (European, Australian and Asian models) To completely shut down the AV receiver, set POWER to the OFF position ( ). En 24
  • 25. Basic Operations This manual describes the procedure using the Displaying Source Information remote controller unless otherwise specified. You can display various information about the current input source as follows. (Components connected to the Selecting the Language Used for the UNIVERSAL PORT jack are excluded.) Onscreen Setup Menus Press RECEIVER followed by DISPLAY repeat- You can determine the language used for the onscreen edly to cycle through the available information. setup menus. See “Language” in the “OSD Setup” (➔ 55). Tip • Alternatively, you can use the AV receiver’s DISPLAY. Playing the Connected Component The following information can typically be displayed. ■ Operating on the AV receiver Input source 1 Use the input selector buttons to select the input source. Listening mode*1 2 Start playback on the source component. Signal format*2 See also: Sampling • “Controlling Other Components” (➔ 80) frequency • “Controlling iPod” (➔ 75) Input signal • “Listening to the Radio” (➔ 31) resolution 3 To adjust the volume, use the MASTER VOLUME control. Output resolution 4 *1 The input source is displayed with the default name even Select a listening mode and enjoy! when you have entered a custom name in “Name Edit” See also: (➔ 52). • “Using the Listening Modes” (➔ 35) *2 If the input signal is analog, no format information is dis- • “Audyssey” (➔ 50) played. If the input signal is PCM, the sampling frequency is displayed. If the input signal is digital but not PCM, the signal ■ Operating with the remote controller format and the number of channels is displayed. For some dig- ital input signals, including multichannel PCM, the signal for- 1 Press RECEIVER followed by INPUT SELEC- TOR. mat, number of channels, and sampling frequency is displayed. Information is displayed for about three seconds, then the pre- 2 Start playback on the source component. viously displayed information reappears. See also: • “Controlling Other Components” (➔ 80) Setting the Display Brightness • “Controlling iPod” (➔ 75) • “Listening to the Radio” (➔ 31) You can adjust the brightness of the AV receiver’s display. 3 To adjust the volume, use VOL / . Press RECEIVER followed by DIMMER repeat- 4 Select a listening mode and enjoy! edly to select: See also: • Normal + MASTER VOLUME indicator lights. • “Using the Listening Modes” (➔ 35) • Normal + MASTER VOLUME indicator goes off. • “Audyssey” (➔ 50) • Dim + MASTER VOLUME indicator goes off. • Dimmer + MASTER VOLUME indicator goes off. Tip • (North American and Taiwan models) Alternatively, you can use the AV receiver’s DIMMER. En 25
  • 26. Muting the AV Receiver Using the Home Menu You can temporarily mute the output of the AV receiver. The Home menu provides you quick access to frequently used menus without having to go through the long stan- Press RECEIVER followed by MUTING. dard menu. This menu enables you to change settings and The output is muted and the MUTING indicator view the current information. flashes on the display. 1 Press RECEIVER followed by HOME. Tip The following information will be superimposed on the TV screen. • To unmute, press MUTING again or adjust the volume. • The Mute function is cancelled when the AV receiver is set to BD/DVD Standby. Audio Bass Video Treble 0dB Info Subwoofer Level Input Center Level Using the Sleep Timer Listening Mode Dynamic EQ Dynamic Volume With the sleep timer, you can set the AV receiver to turn off automatically after a specified period. Press RECEIVER followed by SLEEP repeatedly 2 Use / / / to make the desired selection. to select the required sleep time. ■ Audio*1 The sleep time can be set from 90 to 10 minutes in You can change the following settings: “Bass”, 10 minute steps. “Treble”, “Subwoofer Level”, “Center Level”, The SLEEP indicator lights on the display when the “Dynamic EQ”, “Dynamic Volume”, “Late sleep timer has been set. The specified sleep time Night”, “Music Optimizer”, “Re-EQ”, “Re- appears on the display for about 5 seconds, then the EQ(THX)” and “Audio Selector”. previous display reappears. See also: • “Audyssey” (➔ 50) Tip • “Using the Audio Settings” (➔ 58) • If you need to cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP repeatedly ■ Video*2 until the SLEEP indicator goes off. • To check the time remaining until the AV receiver sleeps, press You can change the following settings: “Wide SLEEP. Note that if you press SLEEP while the sleep time is Mode”, “Picture Mode”, “Brightness”, “Con- being displayed, you’ll shorten the sleep time by 10 minutes. trast”, “Hue” and “Saturation”. The remote controller’s VIDEO acts as a short- cut for this menu. Selecting Speaker Layout See also: You can prioritize which speakers you want to use. • “Picture Adjust” (➔ 53) Press RECEIVER followed by SP LAYOUT ■ Info*3*4 repeatedly. You can view the information of the following Speaker Layout:FH: items: “Audio”, “Video” and “Tuner”. The sound from front high speakers is output ■ Input*4*5 by priority. You can select the input source while viewing Speaker Layout:FW: the information as follows: the name of input The sound from front wide speakers is output selectors, input assignments, and radio informa- by priority. tion, and ARC function setting. Speaker Layout:SB: Press ENTER to display the current input The sound from surround back speakers is out- source, followed by / to select the desired put by priority. input source. Pressing ENTER again switches to the selected input source. Note ■ Listening Mode • If the “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp” You can select the listening modes that are (➔ 45), or Powered Zone 2 is being used (➔ 72), this setting grouped in the following categories: “MOVIE/ cannot be selected. • When the listening mode that doesn’t support front high, front TV”, “MUSIC”, “GAME” and “THX”. wide or surround back speakers is used, the setting cannot be Use / to select the category and / to selected. select the listening mode. Press ENTER to switch to the selected listening mode. En 26
  • 27. Note Using Headphones *1 If Pure Audio or Direct listening mode is selected, “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” cannot be selected. Connect a pair of stereo headphones with a stan- *2 Only when you have selected “Custom” in the “Picture dard plug (1/4 inch or 6.3 mm) to the PHONES Mode” (➔ 53), pressing ENTER allows you to adjust the fol- jack. lowing items via the Home menu; “Brightness”, “Contrast”, “Hue” and “Saturation”. Press RETURN to return to the original Home menu. Note *3 Depending on the input source and listening mode, not all • Always turn down the volume before connecting your head- channels shown here output the sound. phones. *4 When you have entered a custom name in “Name Edit” • While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES jack, the (➔ 52), the input source is displayed with that name. But Headphone indicator, speaker/channel indicator FL and FR even if not, the component name may be displayed if the AV lights. (The Powered Zone 2 speakers are not turned off.) receiver receives it via HDMI connection (➔ 18). • When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening mode is *5 For the PORT input selector, the name of Universal Port set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo, Mono, Direct, or Option Dock will be displayed. Pure Audio. • Only the Stereo, Direct, Pure Audio, and Mono listening modes can be used with headphones. Changing the Input Display When you connect an -capable Onkyo component, you Using Easy Macros must configure the input display so that can work Using the Easy macro command in the Easy macro mode, properly. you can sequentially operate Onkyo components with sim- This setting can be done only from the front panel. ple commands by simply pressing one button. These com- 1 mands are user-specifiable (➔ 85) and the default actions Press TV/CD, GAME or VCR/DVR so that “TV/ are described below. Press ACTIVITIES to start the Easy CD”, “GAME” or “VCR/DVR” appears on the macro command. display. Once the AV receiver has entered the normal macro mode, all of ACTIVITIES will automatically switch to the nor- mal macro mode. In this case, pressing ALL OFF will set only the AV receiver to Standby mode. Press MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC. MY MOVIE (default): 1. The TV connected to the AV receiver is turned 2 Press and hold down TV/CD, GAME or VCR/DVR (about 3 seconds) to change the input display. on. 2. The Onkyo DVD player connected to the AV Repeat this step to select “MD”, “CDR”, “DOCK” receiver is turned on. or “TAPE”. 3. The AV receiver is turned on. For the TV/CD input selector, the input display 4. The input selector of the AV receiver is set to changes in this order: “BD/DVD”. TV/CD → MD → CDR 5. The player starts playback.*1 → TAPE → DOCK → MY TV (default): 1. The TV connected to the AV receiver is turned For the GAME input selector, the setting changes in on. this order: 2. The cable set-top box connected to the AV GAME ↔ DOCK receiver is turned on. For the VCR/DVR input selector, the setting 3. The AV receiver is turned on. changes in this order: 4. The input selector of the AV receiver is set to VCR/DVR ↔ DOCK “CBL/SAT”. You can enjoy cable TV. Note • DOCK can be selected for the TV/CD, GAME or VCR/DVR input selector, but not at the same time. • Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the remote controller for the first time (➔ 80). En 27
  • 28. MY MUSIC (default): Audyssey MultEQ® Room Correction 1. The Onkyo CD player connected to the AV and Speaker Setup receiver is turned on. 2. The AV receiver is turned on. With the supplied calibrated microphone, 3. The input selector of the AV receiver is set to Audyssey MultEQ automatically determines the number “TV/CD”. of speakers connected, their size for purposes of bass man- 4. The player starts playback. agement, optimum crossover frequencies to the subwoofer (if present), and distances from the primary listening posi- Note tion. • Once you start the Easy macro command, you cannot use Audyssey MultEQ then removes the distortion caused by other ACTIVITIES during the execution. If you want to room acoustics by capturing room acoustical problems operate other components halfway, press ALL OFF to stop and press desired ACTIVITIES. over the listening area in both the frequency and time domain. The result is clear, well-balanced sound for every- *1 Depending on the start-up time of Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, one. Enabling Audyssey MultEQ allows you to also use the AV receiver may not activate this playback command. In Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, which maintains the proper this case, press on the remote controller. octave-to-octave balance at any volume level (➔ 50). Before using this function, connect and position all of Turning Off the Components your speakers. If “Dynamic EQ” is set to “On” (➔ 50), the “Equalizer” setting will be set to “Audyssey” (➔ 47). On the other Press ALL OFF. hand, if it is set to “Off”, the “Dynamic Volume” setting 1. The connected component stops and turns off. will be set to “Off” (➔ 51). 2. The AV receiver turns off. It takes about 30 minutes to complete Audyssey MultEQ 3. The TV connected to the AV receiver turns off Room Correction and Speaker Setup for 6 positions. Total (Standby).*1*2 measurement time varies depending on the number of *1 speakers. When MY MUSIC is selected, with the default settings, this will not be performed. *2 With some televisions, the power may not be turned off (or Using Audyssey MultEQ® enter standby). Using Audyssey MultEQ® to create a listening environ- ment in your home theater that all listeners will enjoy, Changing Source Component Audyssey MultEQ takes measurements at up to six posi- When you want to operate the component that is not tions within the listening area. Position the microphone at assigned as the source component, you can assign it as the ear height of a seated listener with the microphone tip source component. See the table for the default assign- pointed directly at the ceiling using a tripod. Do not hold ment (➔ 85). the microphone in your hand during measurements as this will produce inaccurate results. While holding down REMOTE MODE, press and ■ First measurement position hold down MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC Also referred to as the Main Listening Position this (about 3 seconds). refers to the most central position where one would nor- ACTIVITIES that you pressed flashes twice, indicat- mally sit within the listening environment. MultEQ uses ing that the setting has been established. the measurements from this position to calculate Examples: speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum cross- When you press MY MUSIC and want to start the over value for the subwoofer. Onkyo Cassette recorder, while holding down TV/ CD, press and hold down MY MUSIC (about 3 sec- ■ Second−Sixth measurement positions onds) flashes twice. These are the other listening positions (i.e., the places where the other listeners will sit). You can measure up Tip to six positions. • This procedure can also be performed via onscreen menu The following examples show some typical home theater (➔ 85). seating arrangements. Choose the one that best matches yours, and position the microphone accordingly when Restoring Default prompted. 1 While holding down HOME, press and hold down ALL OFF until ALL OFF lights (about 3 seconds). 2 Release HOME and ALL OFF and press ALL OFF again. ALL OFF flashes twice. En 28
  • 29. 4 If you use a powered subwoofer(s), adjust the sub- woofer volume level to 75dB. TV Test tones are played through the subwoofer. Use the volume control on the subwoofer. Note • If your subwoofer does not have a volume control, disre- gard the level displayed and press ENTER to proceed to the next step. • If you set the subwoofer’s volume control to its maximum : Listening area to : Listening position and the displayed level is lower than 75 dB, leave the sub- woofer’s volume control at its maximum and press Note ENTER to proceed to the next step. • Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise and Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) can disrupt the room measure- 5 Press ENTER. Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker ments. Close windows, televisions, radios, air conditioners, flu- Setup starts. orescent lights, home appliances, light dimmers, or other Test tones are played through each speaker as devices. Turn off the cell phone (even if it is not in use) or place it away from all audio electronics. Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker • The microphone picks up test tones which played through each Setup runs. This process takes a few minutes. Please speaker as Audyssey MultEQ® Room Correction and Speaker refrain from talking during measurements and do Setup run. not stand between speakers and the microphone. • Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup cannot Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone be performed while a pair of headphones is connected. during Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup, unless you want to cancel the setup. 1 Turn on the AV receiver and the connected TV. 6 Place the setup microphone at the next position, On the TV, select the input to which the AV receiver and then press ENTER. is connected. Audyssey MultEQ performs more measurements. 2 Set the speaker setup microphone at the Main Lis- This takes a few minutes. 7 tening Position , and connect it to the SETUP When prompted, repeat step 6. MIC jack. SETUP MIC jack 8 Use / to select an option, and then press ENTER. MultEQ: Auto Setup - - Review Speaker Configuration - - Subwoofer Yes Front 40Hz TV Center 40Hz Surround 100Hz Speaker setup microphone Front Wide None Front High 100Hz Surr Back 120Hz Surr Back Ch 2ch The speaker setting menu appears. Save Cancel 3 When you’ve finished making the settings, press ENTER. The options are: Save: MultEQ: Auto Setup Save the calculated settings and exit Speakers Type(Front) Normal Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Powered Zone2 Not Act Subwoofer Yes Setup. Cancel: • If your front speakers are bi-amped, you must Cancel Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and select “Bi-Amp” in the “Speakers Type(Front)” Speaker Setup. setting (➔ 45). For hookup information, see “Bi- Note amping the Front Speakers” (➔ 15). • You can view the calculated settings for the speaker con- • If you change “Powered Zone2” setting, refer to figuration, speaker distances, and speaker levels by using “Setting the Powered Zone 2” for more details / . 9 (➔ 71). Disconnect the speaker setup microphone. • If you are using a subwoofer(s), select “Yes” in the “Subwoofer” (➔ 46). If not, select “No” and skip step 4. En 29
  • 30. Note Changing the Speaker Settings Manually • When Audyssey MultEQ® Room Correction and Speaker Setup You can manually make changes to the settings found dur- is complete, the “Equalizer” will be set to “Audyssey” (➔ 47). ing Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker The Audyssey indicator will light (➔ 9). Setup. • You can cancel Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup at any point in this procedure simply by discon- See also: necting the setup microphone. • “Speaker Configuration” (➔ 46) • Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during • “Speaker Distance” (➔ 46) Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup. • “Level Calibration” (➔ 47) • If the AV receiver is muted, it will be unmuted automatically • “Equalizer Settings” (➔ 47) when Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup starts. Note • Changes to the room after Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction • Please note that THX recommends any THX main speakers be and Speaker Setup requires you run Audyssey MultEQ Room set to “80Hz(THX)”. If you set up your speakers using Correction and Speaker Setup again, as room EQ characteristics Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup, may have changed. please make sure manually that any THX speakers are set to 80 Hz (THX) crossover (➔ 46). Error Messages • Sometimes due to the electrical complexities of subwoofers and the interaction with the room, THX recommends setting the level While Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker and the distance of the subwoofer manually. Setup is in progress, one of the error messages below may • Sometimes due to interaction with the room, you may notice appear. irregular results when setting the level and/or distance of the main speakers. If this happens, THX recommends setting them MultEQ: Auto Setup manually. Using a Powered Subwoofer Ambient noise is too high. If you’re using a powered subwoofer and it outputs very low-frequency sound at a low volume level, it may not be detected by Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Retry Speaker Setup. Cancel If the “Subwoofer” appears on the “Review Speaker Error message Configuration” screen as “No”, increase the subwoofer’s volume to the half-way point, set it to its highest crossover The options are: frequency, and then try running Audyssey MultEQ Room Retry: Correction and Speaker Setup again. Note that if the vol- Try again. ume is set too high and the sound distorts, detection issues Cancel: may occur, so use an appropriate volume level. If the sub- Cancel Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and woofer has a low-pass filter switch, set it to Off or Direct. Speaker Setup. Refer to your subwoofer’s instruction manual for details. • Ambient noise is too high. The background noise is too loud. Remove the source of the noise and try again. • Speaker Matching Error! The number of speakers detected was different from that of the first measurement. Check the speaker con- nection. • Writing Error! This message appears if saving fails. Try saving again. If this message appears after 2 or 3 attempts, contact your Onkyo dealer. • Speaker Detect Error This message appears if a speaker is not detected. “No” means that no speaker was detected. Tip • See “Speaker Configuration” for appropriate settings (➔ 13). En 30
  • 31. Listening to the Radio ■ Manual tuning mode This section describes the procedure using the but- 1 tons on the front panel unless otherwise specified. Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator goes off on the display. 2 Using the Tuner Press and hold TUNING / . With the built-in tuner you can enjoy AM and FM radio The frequency stops changing when you release the stations. You can store your favorite stations as presets for button. quick selection. Press the buttons repeatedly to change the frequency This model changes FM/AM frequency in 200/10kHz (or one step at a time. 50/9kHz) steps (➔ 56). In manual tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono. Listening to the Radio Tuning into weak FM stereo stations If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may be Press TUNER to select either “AM” or “FM”. impossible to get good reception. In this case, switch to In this example, FM has been selected. manual tuning mode and listen to the station in mono. Each time you press TUNER, the radio band ■ Tuning into stations by frequency changes between AM and FM. You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by enter- Band Frequency ing the appropriate frequency. 1 On the remote controller, press TUNER repeat- edly to select “AM” or “FM”, followed by D.TUN. (Actual display depends on the country.) Tuning into Radio Stations (Actual display depends on the country.) ■ Auto tuning mode 2 Within 8 seconds, use the number buttons to enter 1 Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator lights on the display. the frequency of the radio station. For example, to tune to 87.50 (FM), press 8, 7, 5, 0. 2 If you have entered the wrong number, you can retry Press TUNING / . after 8 seconds. Searching stops when a station is found. When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the FM STEREO indicator lights on the display, as shown. TUNED AUTO FM STEREO En 31
  • 32. Presetting FM/AM Stations Using RDS (excluding North American and Taiwan models) You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite FM/AM radio stations as presets. RDS works only in areas where RDS broadcasts are 1 Tune into the FM/AM station that you want to store as a preset. available. See the previous section. When tuned into an RDS station, the RDS indicator lights. 2 Press MEMORY. What is RDS? The preset number flashes. RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method of transmitting data in FM radio signals. It was developed by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU) and is available in most European countries. Many FM stations use it these days. In addition to displaying text information, RDS can 3 While the preset number is flashing (about 8 sec- also help you find radio stations by type (e.g., news, sport, onds), use PRESET / to select a preset from 1 rock, etc.). through 40. The AV receiver supports four types of RDS information: 4 Press MEMORY again to store the station or chan- nel. ■ PS (Program Service) The station or channel is stored and the preset num- When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting PS ber stops flashing. information, the station’s name will be displayed. Press- ing DISPLAY will display the frequency for 3 seconds. Repeat this procedure for all of your favorite FM/ AM radio stations. ■ RT (Radio Text) When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text Note information, the text will be shown on the display as • You can name your radio presets for easy identification (➔ 52). described in the next section. Its name is displayed instead of the band and frequency. ■ PTY (Program Type) This allows you to search for RDS radio stations by type Selecting Presets (➔ 33). ■ TP (Traffic Program) To select a preset, use PRESET / on the AV This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that receiver, or the remote controller’s CH +/–. broadcast traffic information (➔ 33). Note Tip • In some cases, the text characters displayed on the AV receiver • You can also use the remote controller’s number buttons to select may not be identical to those broadcast by the radio station. Also, a preset directly. unexpected characters may be displayed when unsupported characters are received. This is not a malfunction. Deleting Presets • If the signal from an RDS station is weak, RDS data may be displayed intermittently or not at all. 1 Select the preset that you want to delete. When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text See the previous section. information, the text can be displayed. 2 While holding down MEMORY, press TUNING MODE. Displaying Radio Text (RT) The preset is deleted and its number disappears from the display. Press RT/PTY/TP once. The RT information scrolls across the display. Note • The message “Waiting” may appear while the AV receiver waits for the RT information. • If the message “No Text Data” appears on the display, no RT information is available. En 32
  • 33. Finding Stations by Type (PTY) ■ RDS program types (PTY) You can search for radio stations by type. Type Display None None 1 Press RT/PTY/TP twice. News reports News The current program type appears on the display. Current affairs Affairs 2 Use PRESET / to select the type of program Information Sport Info Sport you want. See the table shown later in this chapter. Education Educate 3 Drama Drama To start the search, press ENTER. Culture Culture The AV receiver searches until it finds a station of the type you specified, at which point it stops briefly Science and technology Science before continuing with the search. Varied Varied 4 Pop music Pop M When a station you want to listen to is found, press Rock music Rock M ENTER. Middle of the road music Easy M If no stations are found, the message “Not Found” appears. Light classics Light M Serious classics Classics Listening to Traffic News (TP) Other music Other M Weather Weather You can search for stations that broadcast traffic news. Finance Finance Children’s programmes Children 1 Press RT/PTY/TP three times. Social affairs Social If the current radio station is broadcasting TP (Traf- Religion Religion fic Program), “[TP]” will appear on the display, and Phone in Phone In traffic news will be heard as and when it’s broadcast. Travel Travel If “TP” without square brackets appears, this means Leisure Leisure that the station is not broadcasting TP. Jazz music Jazz 2 To locate a station that is broadcasting TP, press ENTER. Country music Country National music Nation M The AV receiver searches until it finds a station that’s Oldies music Oldies broadcasting TP. Folk music Folk M If no stations are found, the message “Not Found” Documentary Document appears. Alarm test TEST Alarm Alarm! En 33
  • 34. Recording This section explains how to record the selected input source to a component with recording capability, and how to record audio and video from different sources. Connecting a Recording Component 3 On the source component, start playback. If you select another input source during recording, that input source will be recorded. Recording Separate AV Sources Here you can record audio and video from completely separate sources, allowing you to overdub audio onto your video recordings. This function takes advantage of the fact that when an audio-only input source (TV/CD, TUNER or PHONO) is selected, the video input source remains L R unchanged. AUDIO VIDEO In the following example, audio from the CD player con- IN IN nected to the TV/CD IN and video from the camcorder Cassette, CDR, MD, connected to the AUX INPUT VIDEO jack are recorded VCR, DVD recorder by the VCR connected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks. etc. Note Camcorder • The AV receiver must be turned on for recording. Recording is not possible while it’s in Standby mode. • If you want to record directly from your TV or playback VCR to the recording VCR without going through the AV receiver, con- nect the TV/VCR’s audio and video outputs directly to the recording VCR’s audio and video inputs. See the manuals sup- plied with your TV and VCR for details. • Video signals connected to composite video inputs can be recorded only via composite video outputs. If your TV/VCR is connected to a composite video input, the recording VCR must be connected to a composite video output. • The surround sound and DSP listening modes cannot be recorded. • Copy-protected Blu-ray Disc/DVDs cannot be recorded. • Sources connected to a digital input cannot be recorded. Only analog inputs can be recorded. • DTS signals will be recorded as noise, so don’t attempt analog recording of DTS CDs or LDs. • While the listening mode is set to Pure Audio, no image is pro- vided because the power is turned off for the video circuit. If you CD player VCR want to make recordings, select other listening mode. : Video signal AV Recording : Audio signal Audio sources can be recorded to a recorder (e.g., cassette 1 deck, CDR, MD) connected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks. Prepare the camcorder and CD player for play- Video sources can be recorded to a video recorder (e.g., back. VCR, DVD recorder) connected to the VCR/DVR OUT jack. 2 Prepare the VCR for recording. 1 Use the input selector buttons to select the source 3 Press AUX input selector. that you want to record. You can watch the source while recording. The AV 4 Press TV/CD input selector. receiver’s MASTER VOLUME control has no effect This selects the CD player as the audio source, but on recording. leaves the camcorder as the video source. 2 On your recorder, start recording. 5 Start recording on the VCR and start playback on the camcorder and CD player. The video from the camcorder and the audio from En the CD player are recorded by the VCR. 34
  • 35. Using the Listening Modes Selecting Listening Modes See “About Listening Modes” for detailed information about the listening modes (➔ 36). Listening Mode Buttons Press RECEIVER first. PURE AUDIO MOVIE/TV, MUSIC, GAME, THX MUSIC GAME MOVIE/TV THX MOVIE/TV button PURE AUDIO button This button selects the listening modes intended for use This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode. with movies and TV. When this mode is selected, the AV receiver’s display MUSIC button and video circuitry are turned off. Only video signals This button selects the listening modes intended for use input through HDMI input can be output from an HDMI with music. output(s). Pressing this button again will select the pre- GAME button vious listening mode. This button selects the listening modes intended for use with video games. THX button This button selects the THX listening modes. • The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes can only be selected if your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player is connected to the AV receiver with a digital audio connection (coaxial, optical, or HDMI). • The listening modes you can select depends on the format of the input signal. To check the format, see “Displaying Source Information” (➔ 25). • While a pair of headphones is connected, you can select the following listening modes: Pure Audio, Mono, Direct, and Stereo. • The listening modes cannot be used while you are listening to sound through your TV speakers coming from components connected to the AV receiver (“TV Sp On” appears on the front panel). En 35
  • 36. About Listening Modes The AV receiver’s listening modes can transform your listening room into a movie theater or concert hall, with high fidel- ity and stunning surround sound. Explanatory Notes SP LAYOUT Front speakers Center speaker LISTENING Surround speakers MODE Subwoofer(s) Surround back speakers Front high speakers Front wide speakers ■ Input Source The following audio formats are supported by the listening mode. This is mono (monophonic) sound. This is stereo (stereophonic) sound. Two independent audio signal channels are reproduced through two speakers. This is 5.1-channel surround sound. This surround system has five main channels of sound and a sixth sub- woofer channel (called the point-one channel). This is 7.1-channel surround sound. This is a further sound enhancement to 5.1 channel sound with two additional speakers that provide greater sound envelopment and more accurate positioning of sounds. This is DTS-ES surround sound. This surround system can produce a discrete or a matrix-encoded sixth channel from existing DTS 5.1 encoded material. This is Dolby Digital EX surround sound. This provides a center back surround channel from 5.1-channel sources. ■ Speaker Layout The illustration shows which speakers are activated in each channel. See “Speaker Configuration” for the speaker setup (➔ 46). Press RECEIVER followed by SP LAYOUT repeatedly to select the speakers you want to use; front high, front wide, or surround back. En 36
  • 37. Listening Modes Listening Mode Description Input Speaker Source Layout Pure Audio In this mode, the display and video circuitry are turned off, minimizing pos- sible noise sources for the ultimate in high-fidelity audio reproduction. (As *1 Pu r eAAu d i o the video circuitry is turned off, only video signals input through HDMI input can be output from an HDMI output(s). Direct In this mode, audio from the input source is output without surround-sound processing. The “Speaker Configuration” (presence of speakers), D i r e c t d i oPPoPP “Speaker Distance” and “A/V Sync” settings are enabled, but much of the processing set via HOME is disabled. See “Advanced Setup” for more details (➔ 41). Stereo Sound is output by the front left and right speakers and subwoofer. S t e r e o d i oPPoPP Mono Use this mode when watching an old movie with a mono soundtrack, or use it with the foreign language soundtracks recorded in the left and right chan- Mo n o e o d i o PP o PP nels of some movies. It can also be used with DVDs or other sources contain- ing multiplexed audio, such as karaoke DVDs. Multichannel This mode is for use with PCM multichannel sources. Mu l t i c h i o PP o PP Dolby Pro Logic IIx*2 Dolby Pro Logic IIx expands any 2-channel source for 7.1-channel play- Dolby Pro Logic II back. It provides a very natural and seamless surround-sound experience that fully envelops the listener. As well as music and movies, video games can P L bMo v i e PP PP also benefit from the dramatic spatial effects and vivid imaging. If you’re not using any surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II will be used instead P L bMu s i c PP PP of Dolby Pro Logic IIx. • Dolby PLIIx Movie P L bGame c PP c PP Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV, DVD, VHS). P L x GM o v i e P P • Dolby PLIIx Music P L x GM u s i c P P Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) music source (e.g., CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD). P L x G G a m e c P c P • Dolby PLIIx Game Use this mode with video games, especially those that bear the Dolby Pro Logic II logo. • Dolby PLIIx Movie and Dolby PLIIx Music These modes use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx modes to expand 5.1-channel sources for 7.1-channel playback. Dolby Pro Logic IIz Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height is designed to more effectively use existing *3 Height program material when height channel speaker outputs are present. Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height can be used to upmix a variety of sources from movies PL z GH e i g h t and music, but are particularly well-suited to upmix game content. Dolby EX These modes expand 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-channel playback. *4 They’re especially suited to Dolby EX soundtracks that include a matrix- Do l b y c EXoPPoPP encoded surround back channel. The additional channel adds an extra dimen- sion and provides an enveloping surround sound experience, perfect for Do l b y cD i EXP P rotating and fly-by sound effects. Dolby Digital In this mode, audio from the input source is output without surround-sound processing. “Speaker Configuration” (presence of speakers), “Speaker Do l b y cD i oPPoPP Distance”, “A/V Sync” and much of the processing set via HOME are Dolby Digital Plus*5 enabled. See “Advanced Setup” for more details (➔ 41). Do l b y cD+ oPPoPP *1 Dolby TrueHD DD T r u e HDP P P P P P l *1 DTS DTS d i oPPoPP En 37
  • 38. Listening Mode Description Input Speaker Source Layout DTS-HD High (Continued from the previous page.) Resolution Audio *1 D T S – HD HR DTS-HD Master Audio *1 D T S – HD MS T R DTS Express DTS Exp r ess DSD*6 DSD DTS 96/24*7 This mode is for use with DTS 96/24 sources. This is high-resolution DTS with a 96 kHz sampling rate and 24-bit resolution, providing superior fidel- DTSe 9 6 / 2 4PP PP ity. Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS 96/24 logo. DTS-ES Discrete*8 This mode is for use with DTS-ES Discrete soundtracks, which use a dis- *4 crete surround back channel for true 6.1/7.1-channel playback. The seven ESSD i s c r e t e totally separate audio channels provide better spatial imaging and 360- degree sound localization, perfect for sounds that pan across the surround channels. Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS-ES logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Discrete soundtrack. DTS-ES Matrix*8 This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix soundtracks, which use a matrix- *4 encoded back-channel for 6.1/7.1-channel playback. Use it with DVDs that E S SM a t r i x t e t e bear the DTS-ES logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Matrix soundtrack. DTS Neo:6 This mode expands any 2-channel source for up to 7.1-channel playback. It uses seven full-bandwidth channels of matrix decoding for matrix-encoded Ne o : 6 t r i x t e x t e material, providing a very natural and seamless surround sound experience that fully envelops the listener. Ne o : 6 t C i n ema t e r x t ex • Neo:6 Cinema Use this mode with any stereo movie (e.g., TV, DVD, VHS). Ne o : 6 t Mu s i c • Neo:6 Music Use this mode with any stereo music source (e.g., CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD). This mode uses Neo:6 to expand 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-channel *4 playback. Audyssey DSX*9 Audyssey DSX™ is a scalable system that adds new speakers to improve sur- round impression. Starting with a 5.1 system Audyssey DSX first adds Wide Aud y s s e y DSX channels for the biggest impact on envelopment. Research in human hearing has proven that information from the Wide channels is much more critical in PL bMo v i e DSX the presentation of a realistic soundstage than then Back Surround channels found in traditional 7.1 systems. Audyssey DSX then creates a pair of Height PL bMu s i c DSX channels to reproduce the next most important acoustical and perceptual cues. In addition to these new Wide and Height channels, Audyssey DSX PL bGame DSX applies Surround Envelopment Processing to enhance the blend between the front and surround channels. N e o : 6 CC i n t DS X e t r x ex t The combination of Dolby Pro Logic II and Audyssey DSX modes can be Ne o : 6 t Mu s DSX used. The combination of Neo:6 Cinema/Music and Audyssey DSX modes can be used. En 38
  • 39. Listening Mode Description Input Speaker Source Layout THX Founded by George Lucas, THX develops stringent standards that ensure movies are reproduced in movie theaters and home theaters just as the direc- THX eC i n ema P P tor intended. THX Modes carefully optimize the tonal and spatial character- istics of the soundtrack for reproduction in the home-theater environment. NHX eMu s i c a P x a P Teo : 6 t r x t e t e They can be used with 2-channel matrixed and multichannel sources. Sur- round back speaker output depends on the source material and the selected THX eGame s a P a P listening mode. • THX Cinema N H X e S 2 mC x n e m a e Teo : 6 t r i i t x t THX Cinema mode corrects theatrical soundtracks for playback in a home theater environment. In this mode, THX Loudness Plus is configured for T H X e S 2 mM u s i c cinema levels and Re-EQ, Timbre Matching, and Adaptive Decorrelation T H X e S 2 mG a m e s are active. • THX Music THX e S u r r a EX a THX Music mode is tailored for listening to music, which is typically mas- tered at significantly higher levels than movies. In this mode, THX Loud- ness Plus is configured for music playback and only Timbre Matching is active. • THX Games THX Games mode is meant for spatially accurate playback of game audio, which is often mixed similarly to movies but in a smaller environment. THX Loudness Plus is configured for game audio levels, with Timbre Matching active. The combination of Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx*2 and THX Cinema/Music/ Games modes can be used. The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height*3 and THX Cinema/ Music/Games modes can be used. The combination of DTS Neo:6 and THX Cinema/Music/Games modes can be used. • THX Select2 Cinema This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 7.1- channel playback. It does this by analyzing the composition of the surround source, optimizing the ambient and directional sounds to produce the surround back channel out- put. • THX Select2 Music This mode is designed for use with music. It expands 5.1-channel sources for 7.1-channel playback. • THX Select2 Games This mode is designed for use with video games. It can expand 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-channel playback. • THX Surround EX This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1- channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby Digital EX sources. THX Surround EX, also known as Dolby Digital Surround EX, is a joint development between Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd. En 39
  • 40. Onkyo-Original DSP Listening Modes Listening Mode Description Input Speaker Source Layout Orchestra Suitable for classical or operatic music, this mode emphasizes the surround *10 channels in order to widen the stereo image, and simulates the natural rever- Or ches t r a beration of a large hall. Unplugged Suitable for acoustic instruments, vocals, and jazz, this mode emphasizes the front stereo image, giving the impression of being right in front of the stage. Un p l u g g e d Studio-Mix Suitable for rock or pop music, listening to music in this mode creates a lively sound field with a powerful acoustic image, like being at a club or rock S t u d i o –M i x concert. TV Logic This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV shows produced in a TV studio, surround effects to the entire sound, and clarity to voices. TV Log i c Game-RPG Use this mode when playing role playing game discs. G ame – RPG Game-Action Use this mode when playing action game discs. Game – A c t i o n Game-Rock Use this mode when playing rock game discs. Game –Ro c k Game-Sports Use this mode when playing sports game discs. Game – S p o r t s All Ch Stereo Ideal for background music, this mode fills the entire listening area with ste- *10 reo sound from the front, surround, and surround back speakers. A l l Ch S t e r eo Full Mono In this mode, all speakers output the same sound in mono, so the sound you hear is the same regardless of where you are within the listening room. Fu l l Mo n o T-D (Theater- With this mode you can enjoy a virtual surround sound even with only two or Dimensional) three speakers. This works by controlling how sounds reach the listener’s left and right ears. Good results may not be possible if there’s too much reverb, T–D so we recommend that you use this mode in an environment with little or no natural reverb. Note *1 Based on the audio channels contained in the source, the corresponding speakers will output the sound. *2 If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used. *3 Surround back and front wide speakers are not supported. *4 Front high and front wide speakers are not supported. *5 For the Blu-ray Discs, Dolby Digital is used in a 3.1/5.1-channel speaker system. *6 AV receiver can input the DSD signal from HDMI IN. Setting the output setting on the player side to PCM might obtain a better sound according to the player. In that case, set the output setting on the player side to PCM. *7 DTS is used depending on the configuration of the AV receiver (e.g., Audyssey Dynamic EQ® is on). *8 If there are no surround back speakers, DTS is used. *9 • This listening mode can be selected only when all the following conditions are satisfied: a. Center speaker is connected. b. Either of front high or front wide speakers is connected. • Output can be switched between front high or front wide speakers by pressing SP LAYOUT [depending on the “Speaker Configuration” setting (➔ 46)]. *10 Output can be switched between front high, front wide or surround back speakers by pressing SP LAYOUT [depending on the “Speaker Configuration” setting (➔ 46)]. • The listening modes cannot be selected with some source formats. En 40
  • 41. Advanced Operations Advanced Setup On-screen Setup Menus Common Procedures in Setup Menu This manual describes the procedure using the remote controller unless otherwise specified. RECEIVER MENU 1. Input/Output Assign ENTER / / / 2. Speaker Setup 3. Audio Adjust 4. Source Setup SETUP RETURN 5. Listening Mode Preset 6. Miscellaneous 7. Hardware Setup 8. Remote Controller Setup 9. Lock Setup Input/Output Assign Miscellaneous The on-screen setup menus appear on the connected TV (➔ 42) (➔ 55) and provide a convenient way to change the AV receiver’s various settings. Settings are organized into 9 categories 1. Input/Output Assign 6. Miscellaneous on the main menu. 1. 2. Monitor Out HDMI Input 1. Volume Setup 2. OSD Setup Carry out the settings by using the on-screen display. 3. Component Video Input 1 4. Digital Audio Input 5. Analog Audio Input Press RECEIVER followed by SETUP. Speaker Setup Hardware Setup The following menu appears. (➔ 45) (➔ 55) MENU 2. Speaker Setup 7. Hardware Setup 1. Input/Output Assign 2. Speaker Setup 1. Speaker Settings 1. Remote ID 3. Audio Adjust 2. Speaker Configuration 2. Multi Zone 4. Source Setup 3. Speaker Distance 3. Tuner 5. Listening Mode Preset 4. Level Calibration 4. HDMI 6. Miscellaneous 5. Equalizer Settings 5. Auto Power Down 7. Hardware Setup 6. THX Audio Setup 6. Network 8. Remote Controller Setup 7. Firmware Update 9. Lock Setup Audio Adjust Remote Controller (➔ 49) Setup (➔ 80) Tip • If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the appropri- 3. Audio Adjust 8. Remote Controller Setup ate external input is selected on your TV. 2 1. Multiplex/Mono 1. Remote Mode Setup 2. 3. Dolby DTS 2. Activities Setup Use / to select a menu, and then press ENTER. 4. Audyssey DSX 3 5. Theater-Dimensional 6. LFE Level Use / to select target and then press ENTER. Source Setup (➔ 50) Lock Setup (➔ 58) 4 Use / to select option and use / to change the setting. 4. Source Setup 9. Lock Setup Press SETUP to close the menu. 1. Audyssey Setup 2. IntelliVolume Press RETURN to return to the previous menu. 3. A/V Sync 4. Name Edit 5. Picture Adjust Note Listening Mode Preset • This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver by (➔ 54) using SETUP, arrow buttons, and ENTER. • During Audyssey MultEQ® Room Correction and Speaker 5. Listening Mode Preset Setup, messages, etc., that are displayed on the TV screen will 1. BD/DVD 2. VCR/DVR appear in the Display. 3. CBL/SAT 4. GAME 5. PC 6. AUX En 41
  • 42. Explanatory Notes Note • You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI output and Main Menu Speaker Setup COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture resolution as necessary to match ■ Subwoofer the resolution supported by your TV (➔ 42). Yes: • See “Video Connection Formats” (➔ 22) for charts showing Select if a subwoofer is connected. how the “Monitor Out” and “Resolution” settings (➔ 43) No: affect the video signal flow through the AV receiver. Select if no subwoofer is connected. ■ Monitor Out (North American and Taiwan models) Menu selection Analog: Setting target Select this if your TV is connected to the COMPO- Setting options (default setting underlined) NENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT, MONITOR OUT S, or MONITOR OUT V. Input/Output Assign HDMI: Select this if your TV is connected to the HDMI Main Menu Input/Output Assign OUT. (European, Australian and Asian models) Analog: Monitor Out Select this if your TV is connected to the COMPO- If you connect your TV to HDMI output, “Monitor Out” NENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT, MONITOR OUT setting is automatically set so that the onscreen setup S, or MONITOR OUT V. menus are displayed and composite video, S-Video, and HDMI Main: component video sources are upconverted* and output. Select this if your TV is connected to the HDMI OUT MAIN. Composite video, S-Video, HDMI Sub: component video HDMI Select this if your TV is connected to the HDMI IN OUT SUB. Both: Select this if your TVs are connected to the HDMI OUT MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB. Video signals OUT are output from both HDMI outputs at the resolution Composite video, S-Video, HDMI supported by both TVs. component video Both(Main): Select this if your TVs are connected to the HDMI On the “Monitor Out” settings, you can select whether or OUT MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB. Video signals not to have the video sources’ images output through the are output from both HDMI outputs but HDMI OUT HDMI output, as well as whether to have the onscreen MAIN will become a priority; depending on the reso- setup menu output through the HDMI output or through lution, video signals may not be output from HDMI an analog output. OUT SUB. Both(Sub): If you connect your TV to the COMPONENT VIDEO Select this if your TVs are connected to the HDMI MONITOR OUT (not the HDMI output), “Monitor Out” OUT MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB. Video signals setting is automatically set so that the onscreen setup are output from both HDMI outputs but HDMI OUT menus are displayed and composite video and S-Video SUB will become a priority; depending on the reso- sources are upconverted* and output. lution, video signals may not be output from HDMI OUT MAIN. Composite video, S-Video Component video IN OUT Composite video, S-Video Component video En 42
  • 43. Note ■ Resolution You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI output • (North American and Taiwan models) If not connected to HDMI OUT, the “Monitor Out” setting will be automatically and COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT and have switched to “Analog” (➔ 23). the AV receiver upconvert the picture resolution as neces- (European, Australian and Asian models) If not connected to sary to match the resolution supported by your TV. the same output you have selected in the “Monitor Out” setting, Through*1: the “Monitor Out” setting will be automatically switched to Select this to pass video through the AV receiver at “Analog” (➔ 23). the same resolution and with no conversion. • When you select other than “Analog”, the onscreen setup menus Auto*2: are output by only the HDMI output. If you’re not using the HDMI output and select settings by mistake and the menus Select this to have the AV receiver automatically disappear, press AV receiver’s MONITOR OUT to select convert video at resolutions not supported by your “Analog”. TV. • (European, Australian and Asian models) For Deep Color 480p (480p/576p): output, if the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Both(Main)” or Select this for 480p or 576p output and video con- “Both(Sub)”, the number of bit may be limited due to the capa- version as necessary. bility of your TV connected to a priority output. 720p: Changing “Monitor Out” setting manually Select this for 720p output and video conversion as necessary. 1 Press MONITOR OUT on the front panel. 1080i: Select this for 1080i output and video conversion as The current setting is displayed. (North American and Taiwan models) necessary. 1080p*2: Select this for 1080p output and video conversion as necessary. Tip (European, Australian and Asian models) • The “Resolution” setting can be set for each “Monitor Out” setting. Note • (European, Australian and Asian models) If the “Monitor 2 Out” setting is set to “Both”, this setting is fixed at “Auto”. Press MONITOR OUT on the AV receiver *1 PC IN (Analog RGB) input signal is output at 720p resolution repeatedly to select: when the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog” (➔ 43) (North American and Taiwan models) and the “Resolution” setting is set to “Through”. Analog or HDMI *2 These settings are not available when the “Monitor Out” set- (European, Australian and Asian models) ting is set to “Analog”. Analog, HDMI Main, HDMI Sub, Both, Both(Main) or Both(Sub) HDMI Input For details on each item, in the “Monitor Out” If you connect a video component to an HDMI input, you settings (➔ 42). must assign that input to an input selector. For example, if you connect your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player to HDMI IN 2, you must assign “HDMI2” to the “BD/DVD” input selector. If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with an HDMI cable, composite video, S-video and component video sources can be upconverted* and output by the HDMI output*1. You can set this for each input selector by selecting the “- - - - -” option. Composite video, S-Video, component video HDMI IN OUT Composite video, S-Video, HDMI component video *1 This applies only when “Monitor Out” setting is set to other than “Analog” (➔ 42). En 43
  • 44. Here are the default assignments. Component Video Input Input selector Default assignment If you connect a video component to a component video BD/DVD HDMI1 input, you must assign that input to an input selector. For VCR/DVR HDMI2 example, if you connect your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2, you must assign “IN2” to CBL/SAT HDMI3 the “BD/DVD” input selector. GAME HDMI4 If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with a PC HDMI5 component video cable, you can set the AV receiver so AUX FRONT (Fixed) that composite video and S-Video sources are upcon- TUNER - - - - - (Fixed) verted* and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO MONI- TV/CD ----- TOR OUT*1. You can set this for each input selector by PHONO ----- selecting the “- - - - -” option. PORT ----- *1 Only when “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog” (➔ 42). ■ BD/DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, Composite video, S-Video Component video TV/CD, PHONO, PORT IN HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4, HDMI5, HDMI6: Select the HDMI IN to which the video component OUT has been connected. Composite video, S-Video Component video - - - - -: Output composite video, S-Video, and component Here are the default assignments. video sources from the HDMI output. The video out- put signal from the HDMI output is the one config- Input selector Default assignment ured in “Component Video Input” (➔ 44). BD/DVD IN1 • “AUX” is used only for input from the front panel. VCR/DVR ----- • Each HDMI input cannot be assigned to two input selec- CBL/SAT IN2 tors or more. When HDMI1 - HDMI6 have already GAME ----- been assigned, you must set first any unused input selec- PC ----- tors to “- - - - -” or you will be unable to assign HDMI1 AUX ----- - HDMI6 to input selector. TUNER - - - - - (Fixed) Note TV/CD ----- • For composite video, S-Video, and component video upconver- PHONO ----- sion for the HDMI output, the “Monitor Out” setting must be PORT ----- set to other than “Analog” (➔ 42), and the “HDMI Input” set- ting must be set to “- - - - -”. See “Video Connection Formats” ■ BD/DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, AUX, for more information on video signal flow and upconversion TV/CD, PHONO, PORT (➔ 22). IN1, IN2: • If no video component is connected to HDMI output (even if the Select a corresponding component video input that HDMI input is assigned), the AV receiver selects the video the video component has been connected. source based on the setting of “Component Video Input”. • When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as explained - - - - -: here, the same HDMI IN will be set as a priority in the “Digital Select if you are using HDMI output, rather than the Audio Input” (➔ 45). In this case, if you want to use the coaxial COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT, for the or optical audio input, make the selection in the Audio Selector output from composite video, S-Video, and compo- in the Home menu (➔ 26). nent video sources. • “TUNER” selector cannot be assigned and is fixed at the Note “- - - - -” option. • If you connect a component (such as UP-A1 Dock that seated • For composite video and S-Video upconversion for the COM- iPod) to UNIVERSAL PORT jack, you cannot assign any input PONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT, the “Monitor Out” set- to “PORT” selector. ting must be set to “Analog” (➔ 42), and the “Component • Do not assign the component connected with the HDMI input to Video Input” setting must be set to “- - - - -”. See “Video Con- “TV/CD” selector when you set “TV Control” setting to “On” nection Formats” for more information on video signal flow and (➔ 57). Otherwise, appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics upconversion (➔ 22). Control) operation will not be guaranteed. • (North American and Taiwan models) If not connected to HDMI OUT, the “Monitor Out” setting will be automatically switched to “Analog”. (European, Australian and Asian models) If not connected to the same output you have selected in the “Monitor Out” setting, the “Monitor Out” setting will be automatically switched to “Analog” (➔ 42). • If you connect a component (such as UP-A1 Dock that seated En iPod) to the UNIVERSAL PORT jack, you cannot assign any input to “PORT” selector. 44
  • 45. Digital Audio Input Speaker Setup If you connect a component to a digital audio input, you must assign that input to an input selector. For example, if Main menu Speaker Setup you connect your CD player to the OPTICAL IN 1, you Some of the settings in this section are set automatically must assign “OPT1” to the “TV/CD” input selector. by Audyssey MultEQ® Room Correction and Speaker Here are the default assignments. Setup function (➔ 28). Input selector Default assignment Here you can check the settings made by BD/DVD COAX1 Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup VCR/DVR COAX2 function, or set them manually, which is useful if you CBL/SAT COAX3 change one of the connected speakers after using GAME OPT1 Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup PC ----- function. AUX FRONT (Fixed) Note TUNER - - - - - (Fixed) • These settings are disabled when: TV/CD OPT2 – a pair of headphones is connected, or PHONO ----- – the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (➔ 56) and an PORT ----- input selector other than HDMI is selected. ■ BD/DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, Speaker Settings TV/CD, PHONO, PORT COAX1, COAX2, COAX3, OPT1, OPT2: Select a corresponding digital audio input that the If you change these settings, you must run component has been connected. Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup again (➔ 28). - - - - -: Select if the component is connected to an analog If the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or more but less audio input. than 6, set the minimum speaker impedance to 4 ohms. • “AUX” is used only for input from the front panel. If you bi-amp the front speakers, you must change the Note “Speakers Type(Front)” setting (➔ 45). • When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector in “HDMI For hookup information, see “Bi-amping the Front Speak- Input” (➔ 43), the same HDMI IN will be set as a priority in this ers” (➔ 15). assignment. In this case, if you want to use the coaxial or optical Note audio input, make the selection in the Audio Selector in the Home menu. • When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to drive up to • Available sampling rate for PCM signals from a digital input 5.1 speakers in the main room. (optical and coaxial) is 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz/16, 20, 24 bit. • Before you change these settings, turn down the volume. • If you connect a component (such as UP-A1 Dock that seated ■ Speaker Impedance iPod) to the UNIVERSAL PORT jack, you cannot assign any input to “PORT” selector. 4ohms: Select if the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or Analog Audio Input more but less than 6. 6ohms: Some DVD players output the LFE channel from their Select if the impedances of all speakers are between analog subwoofer output at 15 dB higher than normal. 6 and 16 ohms. With this setting, you can change the AV receiver’s sub- woofer sensitivity to match your DVD player. ■ Speakers Type(Front) Normal: ■ Subwoofer Input Sensitivity Select this if you’ve connected your front speakers 0dB to 15dB in 5 dB step. normally. Note Bi-Amp: • This setting only affects signals connected to the AV receiver’s Select this if you’ve bi-amped your front speakers. multichannel input SUBWOOFER jack. Note • If you find that your subwoofer is too loud, try the 10 dB or • Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if “Speakers Type(Front)” is 15 dB setting. set to “Bi-Amp” (➔ 71). ■ Powered Zone 2 See “Setting the Powered Zone 2” (➔ 71). En 45
  • 46. Speaker Configuration ■ Surr Back Ch 1ch: Select if only one surround back speaker is con- This setting is set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ® nected. Room Correction and Speaker Setup function (➔ 28). 2ch: Select if two (left and right) surround back speakers With these settings, you can specify which speakers are are connected. connected and a crossover frequency for each speaker. Specify “Full Band” for speakers that can output low fre- Note quency bass sounds adequately, for example, speakers • If the “Surr Back” setting is set to “None” (➔ 46), this setting with a good sized woofer. For smaller speakers, specify a cannot be selected. crossover frequency. Sounds below the crossover fre- ■ LPF of LFE quency will be output by the subwoofer instead of the (Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel) speaker. Refer to your speaker’s manuals to determine the 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz optimum crossover frequencies. If you set up your speak- With this setting, you can specify the cutoff frequency ers using Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and of the LFE channel’s low-pass filter (LPF), which can Speaker Setup, please make sure manually that any THX be used to filter out unwanted hum. The LPF only speakers are set to “80Hz(THX)” crossover. applies to sources that use the LFE channel. ■ Subwoofer ■ Double Bass Yes: Select if a subwoofer is connected. This setting is NOT set automatically by No: Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup Select if no subwoofer is connected. function (➔ 28). ■ Front Full Band With the Double Bass function, you can boost bass out- 40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz, put by feeding bass sounds from the front left, right, and 200Hz center channels to the subwoofer. Note On: • If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, the “Front” setting is Double Bass function on. fixed at “Full Band”. Off(THX): Double Bass function off. ■ Center*1, Surround*1, Surr Back*2*3*4*5 Note Full Band • This function can be set only if the “Subwoofer” setting is set to 40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz, “Yes”, and the “Front” setting is set to “Full Band”. 200Hz • If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select “Off(THX)”. None: Select if no speaker is connected. Speaker Distance ■ Front Wide*1*2*4*6, Front High*1*2*4*5 Full Band This setting is set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ 40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz, Room Correction and Speaker Setup function (➔ 28). 200Hz None: Here you can specify the distance from each speaker to the Select if no speaker is connected. listening position so that the sound from each speaker arrives at the listener’s ears as the sound designer Note intended. *1 “Full Band” can be selected only when “Full Band” is selected in the “Front” setting. ■ Unit *2 If the “Surround” setting is set to “None”, this setting cannot feet: be selected. Distances can be set in feet. Range: “0.5ft” to *3 If the “Surround” setting is set to anything other than “Full “30.0ft” in 0.5 foot steps. Band”, “Full Band” cannot be selected here. *4 If the “Speakers Type(Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp” meters: (➔ 45), this setting cannot be selected. Distances can be set in meters. Range: “0.15m” to *5 If the Powered Zone 2 is being used (➔ 71), this setting can- “9.00m” in 0.15 meter steps. not be selected. (The default setting varies from country to country.) *6 If the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Act” (➔ 71), this setting cannot be selected. En 46
  • 47. ■ Left, Front Wide Left, Front High Left, Center, Equalizer Settings Front High Right, Front Wide Right, Right, Surr Right, Surr Back Right, Surr Back Left, Surr Left, Subwoofer This setting is set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ Specify the distance from the each speaker to your lis- Room Correction and Speaker Setup function (➔ 28). tening position. With the Equalizer settings, you can adjust the tone of Note speakers individually with a 7-band equalizer. The volume • Speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in the of each speaker can be set (➔ 47). “Speaker Configuration” cannot be selected (➔ 46). ■ Equalizer Level Calibration Manual: You can adjust the equalizer for each speaker manu- ally. If you selected “Manual”, continue with this This setting is set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ® procedure. Room Correction and Speaker Setup function (➔ 28). 1 Press to select “Channel”, and then use / Here you can adjust the level of each speaker with the to select a speaker. 2 built-in test tone so that the volume of each speaker is the Use / to select a frequency, and then use same at the listening position. the / to adjust the level at that frequency. ■ Left, Front Wide Left, Front High Left, Center*1, The volume at each frequency can be adjusted Front High Right, Front Wide Right, Right, Surr from –6dB to 0dB to +6dB in 1 dB steps. Right, Surr Back Right, Surr Back Left, Surr Left Note –12.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 0.5 dB step. • You can select: “63Hz”, “160Hz”, “400Hz”, ■ Subwoofer*1 “1000Hz”, “2500Hz”, “6300Hz”, or “16000Hz”. –15.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 0.5 dB step. And for the subwoofer, “25Hz”, “40Hz”, “63Hz”, “100Hz”, or “160Hz”. Note • While the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode is • Speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in the selected, the equalizer settings have no effect. “Speaker Configuration” cannot be selected (➔ 46). Tip • The speakers cannot be calibrated while the AV receiver is muted. • Low frequencies (e.g., 63Hz) affect bass sounds; • The test tone is output at the standard level for THX, which is high frequencies (e.g., 16000Hz) affect treble 0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you normally listen at vol- sounds. ume settings below this, be careful because the test tone will be much louder. 3 Use to select “Channel”, and then use / to select another speaker. *1 For the center speaker and subwoofer, the level settings made by using the Home menu are saved (➔ 26). Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each speaker. You cannot select speakers that you set to “No” Tip or “None” in the “Speaker Configuration” • If you’re using a handheld sound level meter, adjust the level of (➔ 46). each speaker so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listening position, measured with C-weighting and slow reading. Audyssey: This is selected automatically by Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup function. The Audyssey indicator will light (➔ 9) and “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” become available (➔ 50). Off: Tone off, response flat. En 47
  • 48. THX Audio Setup ■ BGC Off: With the “Surr Back Speaker Spacing” setting, you can Select this to turn off BGC. specify the distance between your surround back speakers. On: If you’re using a THX-certified subwoofer, set the “THX Select this to turn on BGC. Ultra2/Select2 Subwoofer” setting to “Yes”. You can then apply THX’s Boundary Gain Compensation (BGC) Note to compensate the perceived exaggeration of low frequen- • This setting is only available if “THX Ultra2/Select2 Sub- cies for listeners sitting very close to a room boundary woofer” is set to “Yes”. (i.e., wall). ■ Loudness Plus You can also set the THX Loudness Plus. When the Off: “Loudness Plus” is set to “On”, it is possible to enjoy Select this to turn off Loudness Plus. even subtle nuances of audio expression at low volume. On: This result is only available when the THX listening mode Select this to turn on Loudness Plus. is selected. ■ Preserve THX Settings ■ Surr Back Speaker Spacing Yes: < 1ft (< 0.3m): Audyssey Dynamic EQ® / Select this if your surround back speakers are Audyssey Dynamic Volume® will not be active in between 0 and 1 foot (0–30 cm) apart. THX listening mode. 1ft - 4ft (0.3m - 1.2m): No: Select this if your surround back speakers are Audyssey Dynamic EQ / between 1 and 4 feet (0.3–1.2 m) apart. Audyssey Dynamic Volume will be active in THX > 4ft (> 1.2m): listening mode depending on the setting. Select this if your surround back speakers are more Note than 4 feet (1.2 m) apart. • This setting is fixed at “Yes” if “Loudness Plus” is set to “On”. Note • Cannot be set if “Surr Back Ch” is set to “1ch” (➔ 46), “Speakers Type(Front)” is set to “Bi-Amp” (➔ 45), “Surr THX Loudness Plus Back” is set to “None” (➔ 46), or Powered Zone 2 is being used THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control technology (➔ 71). featured in THX Ultra2 Plus™ and THX Select2 Plus™ Certified receivers. With THX Loudness Plus, home ■ THX Ultra2/Select2 Subwoofer theater audiences can now experience the rich details in No: a surround mix at any volume level. A consequence of Select this if you do not have a THX-certified sub- turning the volume below Reference Level is that cer- woofer. tain sound elements can be lost or perceived differently Yes: by the listener. THX Loudness Plus compensates for the Select this if you have a THX-certified subwoofer. tonal and spatial shifts that occur when the volume is Note reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient surround • If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting cannot be channel levels and frequency response. This enables selected (➔ 46). users experience the true impact of soundtracks regard- less of the volume setting. THX Loudness Plus is auto- matically applied when listening in any THX listening mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music, and THX Games modes are tailored to apply the proper THX Loudness Plus settings for each type of content. En 48
  • 49. With this setting, you can broaden the width of the front Audio Adjust stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music listening mode. Main menu Audio Adjust Dimension With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can –3 to 0 to +3 adjust the sound and listening modes as you like. With this setting, you can move the sound field forward or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music Multiplex/Mono listening mode. Higher settings move the sound field backward. Lower settings move it forward. ■ Multiplex If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much This setting determines which channel of a stereo multi- surround sound, move the sound field forward to plex source is output. Use it to select audio channels or improve the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image languages with multiplex sources, multilingual TV feels like it’s in mono, or there’s not enough surround broadcasts, and so on. sound, move it backward. Input Channel Center Width Main: 0 to 3 to 7 The main channel is output. With this setting, you can adjust the width of the sound Sub: from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro The sub channel is output. Logic IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re Main/Sub: using a center speaker, the center channel sound is out- Both the main and sub channels are output. put by only the center speaker. (If you’re not using a ■ Mono center speaker, the center channel sound will be distrib- This setting specifies the channel to be used for playing uted to the front left and right speakers to create a phan- any 2-channel digital source such as Dolby Digital, or tom center). This setting controls the front left, right, 2-channel analog/PCM source in the Mono listening and center mix, allowing you to adjust the weight of the mode. center channel sound. Input Channel ■ PLIIz Height Gain Left + Right: The Height Gain Control in Dolby Pro Logic IIz Both the left and right channels are output. enables the listener to select how much gain is applied Left: to the front high speakers. There are three settings, Only the left channel is output. “Low”, “Mid” and “High”, and the front high speakers Right: are accentuated in that order. While “Mid” is the default Only the right channel is output. listening setting, the listener may adjust the Height Gain Control to their personal preference. Output Speaker Low: Center: Low PLIIz Height Gain becomes active. Mono audio is output by the center speaker. Mid: Left / Right: Medium PLIIz Height Gain becomes active. Mono audio is output by the front left and right speakers. High: High PLIIz Height Gain becomes active. This setting determines which speakers output mono audio when the Mono listening mode is selected. Note • If the “Front High” settings is set to “None” (➔ 46), this setting Note cannot be selected. • If the “Center” setting is set to “None” (➔ 46), this setting is fixed at “Left / Right”. ■ Dolby EX This setting determines how Dolby EX encoded signals Dolby are handled. This setting is unavailable if no surround back speakers are connected. This setting is effective ■ PLIIx Music (2ch Input) with Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo sources. TrueHD only. If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these Auto: settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro If the source signal contains a Dolby EX flag, the Logic IIx. Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening mode is Panorama used. On: Manual: Panorama function on. You can select any available listening mode. Off: Panorama function off. En 49
  • 50. Note LFE Level • If the “Surr Back” setting is set to “None” (➔ 46), this setting cannot be selected. ■ Dolby Digital*1, DTS*2, Multich PCM, Dolby • If the “Front High” or “Front Wide” setting is enabled (➔ 46), TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, DSD*3 this setting is fixed at “Manual”. – dB, –20dB, –10dB, or 0dB With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE (Low DTS Frequency Effects) channel individually for each input sources. ■ Neo:6 Music If you find that low-frequency effects are too loud when Center Image using one of these sources, change the setting to –20 dB or 0 to 2 to 5 – dB. The DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode creates 6-channel *1 Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources. surround sound from 2-channel stereo sources. With *2 DTS and DTS-HD High Resolution Audio sources. this setting, you can specify by how much the front left *3 DSD (Super Audio CD) sources. and right channel output is attenuated in order to create the center channel. Source Setup Setting a value “0” in the middle is set to hear a sound. Sound is spread in left and right (the outside) so that the Items can be set individually for each input selector. set value is made big. Please adjust by liking. Preparation Audyssey DSX™ Press the input selector buttons to select an input source. ■ Soundstage Main menu Source Setup –3dB to Reference to +3dB With this setting, you can adjust the soundstage when using Audyssey DSX™. Audyssey Note When Audyssey MultEQ® Room Correction and Speaker • If the “Center” setting is set to “None”, or both “Front High” Setup is complete, the “Equalizer” (➔ 47) will be set to and “Front Wide” settings are set to “None” (➔ 46), this setting “Audyssey” and the “Dynamic EQ” will be set to “On”. cannot be selected. ■ Dynamic EQ Off: Theater-Dimensional Audyssey Dynamic EQ® off. On: ■ Listening Angle Audyssey Dynamic EQ on. Wide: The Dynamic EQ indicator will light (➔ 9). Select if the listening angle is 40 degrees. With Audyssey Dynamic EQ, you can enjoy great Narrow: sound even when listening at low volume levels. Select if the listening angle is 20 degrees. Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deterio- With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-Dimen- rating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking sional listening mode by specifying the angle of the into account human perception and room acoustics. It front left and right speakers relative to the listening does so by selecting the correct frequency response and position. Ideally, the front left and right speakers should surround volume levels moment-by-moment so that the be equidistant from the listening position and at an content sounds the way it was created at any volume angle close to one of the two available settings. level — not just at reference level. Front left speaker Front right speaker Note • If Pure Audio or Direct listening mode is selected, this setting 20°/40° cannot be selected. En 50
  • 51. ■ Reference Level • When “Dynamic Volume” is set to effective, “Equalizer” is set Audyssey Dynamic EQ® Reference Level Offset to “Audyssey” (➔ 47) and “Dynamic EQ” is set to “On”. When “Dynamic EQ” is set to “Off”, “Dynamic Volume” 0dB: becomes “Off” automatically. It should be used when listening to movies. • When “Dynamic Volume” is set to effective, the Dynamic Vol 5dB: indicator will light (➔ 9). Select this setting for content that has a very wide • If Pure Audio or Direct listening mode is selected, this setting dynamic range, such as classical music. cannot be selected. 10dB: Audyssey MultEQ then removes the distortion caused by Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a room acoustics by capturing room acoustical problems wider dynamic range. This setting should also be over the listening area in both the frequency and time selected for TV content as that is usually mixed at domain. The result is clear, well-balanced sound for every- 10 dB below film reference. one. Enabling Audyssey MultEQ allows you to also use 15dB: Audyssey Dynamic EQ, which maintains the proper Select this setting for pop/rock music or other pro- octave-to-octave balance at any volume level. gram material that is mixed at very high listening Before using this function, connect and position all of levels and has a compressed dynamic range. your speakers. Movies are mixed in rooms calibrated for film refer- ence. To achieve the same reference level in a home the- About Audyssey Dynamic EQ ater system each speaker level must be adjusted so that Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deterio- –30 dBFS band-limited (500 Hz to 2000 Hz) pink noise rating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking produces 75 dB sound pressure level at the listening into account human perception and room acoustics. position. A home theater system automatically cali- Dynamic EQ selects the correct frequency response and brated by Audyssey MultEQ® will play at reference surround levels moment-by-moment at any user- level when the master volume control is set to the 0 dB selected volume setting. The result is bass response, position. At that level you can hear the mix as the mix- tonal balance, and surround impression that remain con- ers heard it. stant despite changes in volume. Dynamic EQ combines Audyssey Dynamic EQ is referenced to the standard information from incoming source levels with actual film mix level. It makes adjustments to maintain the ref- output sound levels in the room, a prerequisite for deliv- erence response and surround envelopment when the ering a loudness correction solution. volume is turned down from 0 dB. However, film refer- Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in tandem with ence level is not always used in music or other non-film Audyssey MultEQ to provide well-balanced sound for content. Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset every listener at any volume level. provides three offsets from the film level reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be selected when the About Audyssey Dynamic Volume mix level of the content is not within the standard. Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large Note variations in volume level between television programs, • If “Dynamic EQ” setting is set to “Off”, this setting cannot be commercials, and between the soft and loud passages of selected. movies. Dynamic Volume looks at the preferred volume setting by the user and then monitors how the volume of ■ Dynamic Volume program material is being perceived by listeners in real Off: time to decide whether an adjustment is needed. When- Audyssey Dynamic Volume® off. ever necessary, Dynamic Volume makes the necessary Light: rapid or gradual adjustments to maintain the desired Light Compression Mode becomes active. playback volume level while optimizing the dynamic Medium: range. Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into Medium Compression Mode becomes active. Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is Heavy: adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response, Heavy Compression Mode becomes active. This set- tonal balance, surround impression, and dialog clarity ting affects volume the most, causing all sounds to remain the same whether watching movies, flipping be of equal loudness. between television channels, or changing from stereo to Note surround sound content. • Even if you have selected other than “Audyssey” in “Equalizer” setting after performing Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup, selecting “On” in the “Dynamic EQ” will change the “Equalizer” setting to “Audyssey” (➔ 47). • If you would like to use Audyssey Dynamic Volume, when using THX listening modes, set “Loudness Plus” setting to “Off” and set “Preserve THX Settings” setting to “No” (➔ 48). En 51
  • 52. IntelliVolume Name input area ■ IntelliVolume 4-4. Name Edit BD/DVD Name –12dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps. With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for each a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z input selector individually. This is useful if one of your 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 – ` source components is louder or quieter than the others. { } | : < > ? Shift Space Back Space OK Use / to set the level. +10 Shift CLR All Erase If a component is noticeably louder than the others, use to reduce its input level. If it’s noticeably quieter, use to increase its input level. A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ! @ # $ % ^ & ( ) _ ~ A/V Sync [ ] ; ’ , . / Shift Space Back Space OK ■ A/V Sync +10 Shift CLR All Erase 0ms to 250ms in 5 ms steps. When using your DVD player’s progressive scanning function, you may find that the picture and sound are out Shift*1: of sync. With the A/V Sync setting, you can correct this Switches the displayed character. by applying a delay to the audio signal. (Left)/ (Right): To view the TV picture while setting the delay, press Selected when the cursor is moved within the Name ENTER. input area. To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Space: Enters a space character. If HDMI Lip Sync is enabled (➔ 56) and your TV or dis- Back Space*2: play supports HDMI Lip Sync, the displayed delay time “Back Space” moves the cursor backward one char- will be the summation of the A/V Sync delay time and the acter space. In addition, “Back Space” deletes the HDMI Lip Sync delay time. The HDMI Lip Sync delay character to the left of the cursor. time is displayed underneath in parentheses. OK: Note Selects when the entry is complete. • A/V Sync is disabled when the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, or when the Direct listening mode is used with an ana- Tip log input source. *1 You can also be performed on the remote controller by • “A/V Sync” is not operable when the input selector is set to using +10. “NET/USB”. *2 Press CLR on the remote controller, you can delete all characters in the input. Name Edit To correct a character: You can enter a custom name for each individual input selector (excluding TUNER) and radio preset for easy identification. When entered, the custom name will appear 1 Use / / / to select “ ”(Left) or “ ”(Right), and then press ENTER. on the display. The custom name is edited using the character input 2 Press ENTER several times to select the incor- rect character (The cursor moves one letter screen. each time ENTER is pressed). ■ Name 3 Use / / / to select the correct character, 1 Use / / / to select a character, and then and then press ENTER. press ENTER. Repeat this step to enter up to 10 characters. Note 2 • To name a radio preset, use TUNER to select AM or FM, and When you’ve finished, to store a name, be sure then select the preset (➔ 32). to use / / / to select “OK”, and then press • (North American models) You cannot enter a custom name for ENTER. Otherwise it will not be saved. SIRIUS radio presets. • “Name Edit” is not operable when the input selector is set to “NET/USB”. To restore a custom name to the default, erase the custom name by entering an empty white space for each letter. En 52
  • 53. Picture Adjust ■ Picture Mode*1*2 Through: Using “Picture Adjust”, you can adjust the picture qual- The following settings are set to the default values: ity and reduce any noise appearing on the screen. “Film Mode”, “Edge Enhancement”, “Noise To view the TV picture while setting, press ENTER. To Reduction”, “Brightness”, “Contrast”, “Hue” and return to the previous screen, press RETURN. “Saturation” Note Custom: • If you are using the analog RGB input, the following settings You can set the following settings as you like: “Film have no effect: “Film Mode”, “Edge Enhancement”, and Mode”, “Edge Enhancement”, “Noise Reduction”, “Noise Reduction”. “Brightness”, “Contrast”, “Hue” and “Saturation” • “Picture Adjust” is not operable when the input selector is set Cinema: to “NET/USB”. Selected when the picture source is movie film, etc. ■ Game Mode Game: Off: Select to use in connecting a game console. Game Mode off. With “Picture Mode”, you can change the following set- On: tings to be suitable for the movie or game screen by one Game Mode on. operation; “Film Mode”, “Edge Enhancement”, “Noise If video signal delay occurs during playback on a video Reduction”, “Brightness”, “Contrast”, “Hue” or “Satu- component (i.e. game console), select the corresponding ration”. input source and set the “Game Mode” setting to “On”. Note The delay will decrease but in return the picture quality • When the “Picture Mode” setting is set to other than “Custom”, will become poor. the following settings cannot be selected: “Film Mode”, “Edge Enhancement”, “Noise Reduction”, “Brightness”, “Con- ■ Wide Mode*1*2 trast”, “Hue” and “Saturation”. This setting determines the aspect ratio. ■ Film Mode*2 Note Video: • When the “Game Mode” is set to “On”, this setting is fixed at Does not process in either “3:2” or “2:2”. “Full”. Auto: 4:3: Adjusts to the picture source, automatically selecting “Film Mode”. 3:2: Selected when the picture source is movie film, etc. 2:2: Selected when the picture source is computer graph- Full: ics, animation, etc. The AV receiver will adjust to the picture source, process- ing in either “3:2” or “2:2” (Film Mode). It automatically converts the source to the appropriate progressive signal and reproduces the natural quality of the original picture. When the “Film Mode” setting is set to “Auto”, the AV Zoom: receiver automatically detects the picture source and in either “3:2” or “2:2”. However, there may be times when you will get a better picture by setting “Film Mode” your- self. Note • If the “Game Mode” setting is set to “On” (➔ 53), this setting Wide Zoom: is fixed at “Video”. ■ Edge Enhancement*2 0 to +10 With this setting you can adjust the sharpness of edges in the picture. “0” is the softest. “+10” is the sharpest. Auto: According to the input signals and monitor output setting, the AV receiver automatically selects the “4:3”, “Full”, “Zoom” or “Wide Zoom” mode. For the monitor output setting (➔ 42). En 53
  • 54. ■ Noise Reduction*2 Listening Mode Preset Off: Noise reduction off. You can assign a default listening mode to each input Low: source that will be selected automatically when you select Low noise reduction. each input source. For example, you can set the default lis- Mid: tening mode to be used with Dolby Digital input signals. Medium noise reduction. You can select other listening modes during playback, but High: the mode specified here will be resumed once the AV High noise reduction. receiver has been set to Standby. With this setting, you can reduce noise appearing on the Main menu Listening Mode Preset 1 screen. Use / to select the input source that you want to Note set, and then press ENTER. • If the “Game Mode” setting is set to “On” (➔ 53), this setting The following menu appears. is fixed at “Off”. 5. Listening Mode Preset ■ Brightness*1*2 1. BD/DVD 2. VCR/DVR –50 to 0 to +50 3. CBL/SAT 4. GAME With this setting you can adjust the picture bright- 5. PC 6. AUX ness. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest. ■ Contrast*1*2 For “TUNER” input selector only “Analog” will be –50 to 0 to +50 available. For “NET/USB” input source only “Digi- With this setting you can adjust contrast. “–50” is the tal” will be available. least. “+50” is the greatest. Note ■ Hue*1*2 • If you connect an input component (such as UP-A1 series –20 to 0 to +20 Dock that seated iPod) to the UNIVERSAL PORT jack, With this setting you can adjust the red/green bal- you can assign only listening modes for the analog sound ance. “–20” is the strongest green. “+20” is the to “PORT” selector. strongest red. 2 Use / to select the signal format that you want ■ Saturation*1*2 to set, and then use / to select a listening mode. –50 to 0 to +50 Only listening modes that can be used with each With this setting you can adjust saturation. “–50” is input signal format can be selected (➔ 36 to 40). the weakest color. “+50” is the strongest color. The “Last Valid” option means that the listening mode selected last will be used. Tip *1 This procedure can also be performed on the remote controller ■ Analog/PCM by using the Home menu (➔ 26). With this setting, you can specify the listening mode to *2 Press CLR if you want to reset to the default value. be used when an analog (CD, TV, LD, VHS, MD, turn- table, radio, cassette, cable, satellite, etc.) or PCM digi- tal (CD, DVD, etc.) audio signal is played. ■ Mono/Multiplex Source With this setting, you can specify the listening mode to be used when a mono digital audio signal is played (DVD, etc.). ■ 2ch Source With this setting, the default listening mode for 2-chan- nel (2/0) stereo sources in a digital format, such as Dolby Digital or DTS. ■ Dolby D/Dolby D +/TrueHD With this setting, you can specify the listening mode to be used when a Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus for- mat digital audio signal is played (DVD, etc.). Specifies the default listening mode for Dolby TrueHD sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD (input via HDMI). En 54
  • 55. ■ DTS/DTS-ES/DTS-HD OSD Setup With this setting, you can specify the listening mode to be used when a DTS or DTS-HD High Resolution ■ On Screen Display Audio format digital audio signal is played (DVD, LD, This preference determines whether operation details CD, etc.). Specifies the default listening mode for DTS- are displayed onscreen when an AV receiver function is HD Master Audio sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD adjusted. (input via HDMI). On: ■ Other Multich Source Displayed. Specifies the default listening mode for multichannel Off: PCM sources from HDMI IN such as DVD-Audio, and Not displayed. DSD multichannel sources such as Super Audio CD. Even when “On” is selected, operation details may not be output if the input source is connected to an HDMI IN. Miscellaneous ■ TV Format (European, Australian and Asian models) Main menu Miscellaneous For the on-screen setup menus to display properly, you must specify the TV system used in your area. Volume Setup Auto: Select this to automatically detect the TV system ■ Volume Display from the video input signals. Absolute: NTSC: Display range is “Min”, “0.5” through “99.5”, Select this if the TV system in your area is NTSC. “Max”. PAL: Relative(THX): Select this if the TV system in your area is PAL. Display range is “– dB”, “–81.5dB” through ■ Language “+18.0dB”. English, Deutsch, Français, Español, Italiano, With this setting, you can choose how the volume level is Nederlands, Svenska, displayed. This setting determines the language used for the on- The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative value screen setup menus. 0 dB. ■ Muting Level Hardware Setup – dB (fully muted), –50dB to –10dB in 10 dB steps. This setting determines how much the output is muted Main menu Hardware Setup when the muting function is used (➔ 26). ■ Maximum Volume Remote ID Off, 50 to 99 (Absolute display) Off, –32dB to +17dB (Relative display) ■ Remote ID With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume. 1, 2, or 3 To disable this setting, select “Off”. When several Onkyo components are used in the same room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To differenti- ■ Power On Volume ate the AV receiver from the other components, you can Last, Min, 1 to 99 or Max (Absolute display) change its remote ID from “1”, to “2” or “3”. Last, – dB, –81dB to +18dB (Relative display) Note With this preference, you can specify the volume set- • If you do change the AV receiver’s remote ID, be sure to change ting to be used each time the AV receiver is turned the remote controller to the same ID (see below), otherwise, you on. won’t be able to control it with the remote controller. To use the same volume level that was used when the AV Changing the Remote Controller’s ID receiver was turned off, select “Last”. 1 The “Power On Volume” cannot be set higher than the While holding down RECEIVER, press and hold “Maximum Volume” setting. down SETUP until RECEIVER lights (about 3 ■ Headphone Level seconds). –12dB to 0dB to +12dB With this preference, you can specify the headphone vol- 2 Use the number buttons to enter ID 1, 2, or 3. RECEIVER flashes twice. ume relative to the main volume. This is useful if there’s a volume difference between your speakers and your head- Multi Zone phones. See “Setting the Multi Zone” (➔ 72). En 55
  • 56. Tuner sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV receiver’s volume. For FM/AM tuning to work properly, you must specify the • (European, Australian and Asian models) If the “Monitor FM/AM frequency step used in your area. Note that when Out” setting is set to “Both(Main)” or “Both(Sub)” (➔ 42) and this setting is changed, all radio presets will be deleted. if your TV connected to a priority output cannot output the audio, the sound will be heard from AV receiver’s speakers. ■ FM/AM Frequency Step (North American and Taiwan models) ■ Lip Sync 200kHz/10kHz: Disable: Select if 200 kHz/10 kHz steps are used in your area. HDMI lip sync disabled. 50kHz/9kHz: Enable: Select if 50 kHz/9 kHz steps are used in your area. HDMI lip sync enabled. The AV receiver can be set to automatically correct any ■ AM Frequency Step (European, Australian and delay between the video and the audio, based on the data Asian models) from the connected monitor. 10kHz: Select if 10 kHz steps are used in your area. Note 9kHz: • This function works only if your HDMI-compatible TV supports HDMI Lip Sync. Select if 9 kHz steps are used in your area. • You can check the amount of delay being applied by the HDMI Lip Sync function on the A/V Sync screen. SIRIUS Settings (North American models) • (European, Australian and Asian models) If the “Monitor See the separate Satellite Radio Guide for more informa- Out” setting is set to “HDMI Main”, “Both(Main)” or “Both” (➔ 42), the delay will be corrected in accordance with the mon- tion. itor connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. On the other hand, if ■ SAT Radio Mode “HDMI Sub” or “Both(Sub)” is selected, the delay will be cor- If you connect a SIRIUS Satellite Radio antenna to the rected in accordance with the monitor connected to HDMI OUT SUB. AV receiver (sold separately), set this setting to “SIR- IUS”. ■ HDMI Control (RIHD) ■ Antenna Aiming Off: disabled. ■ SIRIUS Parental Lock On: These items are for use with SIRIUS Satellite Radio. enabled. It’s not available if “SAT Radio Mode” is set to This function allows -compatible components “None”. connected via HDMI to be controlled with the AV receiver (➔ 95 to 96). HDMI Note ■ Audio TV Out • When set to “On” and close the menu, the name of connected Off: -compatible components and “RIHD On” are dis- The audio is not output from the HDMI output. played on the AV receiver. “Search…” → “(name)” → “RIHD On” On: When the AV receiver cannot receive the name of the compo- The audio is output from the HDMI output. nent, it is displayed as “Player*” or “Recorder*”, etc (“*” This preference determines whether the incoming audio means the number of two or more component). signal is output from the HDMI output. You may want to When set to “Off” and close the menu, “RIHD Off” are dis- turn this preference on if your TV is connected to the played on the AV receiver. HDMI output and you want to listen to the audio from a “Disconnect” → “RIHD Off” connected component through your TV’s speakers. Nor- • When an -compatible component is connected to the mally, this should be set to “Off”. AV receiver via the HDMI cable, the name of the connected component is displayed on the AV receiver display. For example, Note while you are watching TV broadcasting, if you operate a • Listening mode cannot be changed when this setting is set to Blu-ray Disc/DVD player (being powered on) by the remote “On” and the input source is not HDMI. control of the AV receiver, the name of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD • If “On” is selected and the audio can be output from the TV, the player is displayed on the AV receiver. AV receiver will output no sound through its speakers. In this • Set to “Off” when a connected piece of equipment is not com- case, “TV Sp On” appears on the display. patible or it is unclear whether the equipment is compatible or • When “TV Control” is set to “On”, this setting is fixed to not. “Auto”. • If movement is unnatural when set to “On”, change the setting • With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be output even to “Off”. when this setting is set to “On” (➔ 57). • Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for • When the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On”, or “TV Con- details. trol” is set to “On” (➔ 57) and you’re listening through your • (European, Australian and Asian models) The con- TV’s speakers (➔ 18), if you turn up the AV receiver’s volume trol does not support HDMI OUT SUB. Use HDMI OUT MAIN En control, the sound will be output by the AV receiver’s front left instead. and right speakers. To stop the AV receiver’s speakers producing 56
  • 57. • When the source equipment is connected with the connec- Set to “On” when you want to control the AV receiver tion, it may malfunction if “HDMI Control (RIHD)” is set to from an -compatible TV that is connected to “On”. HDMI. ■ Audio Return Channel Note Off: • Do not assign the component connected with the HDMI input to Select “Off” if you don’t want to use audio return the TV/CD selector when you set “TV Control” setting to “On”. channel (ARC) function. Otherwise, appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) Auto: operation is not guaranteed. The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent to • Set to “Off” when the TV is not compatible or when it is unclear the HDMI OUT (North American and Taiwan whether the TV is compatible or not. • The “TV Control” setting can be set only when the “HDMI models)/HDMI OUT MAIN (European, Australian Control (RIHD)” (➔ 56) and “Power Control” (➔ 57) set- and Asian models) of the AV receiver. tings are both set to “On”. Audio return channel (ARC) function enables an HDMI • Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for (Audio Return Channel) capable TV to send the audio details. stream to the HDMI OUT (North American and Taiwan models)/HDMI OUT MAIN (European, Australian and After changing the settings of the “HDMI Control Asian models) of the AV receiver. To use this function, (RIHD)”, “Audio Return Channel”, “Power Con- you must select the TV/CD input selector and your TV trol”, or “TV Control”, turn off the power to all con- must support ARC function. nected pieces of equipment and then turn them on again. Note Refer to the user’s manuals for all connected pieces of • The “Audio Return Channel” setting can be set only when the equipment. “HDMI Control (RIHD)” setting is set to “On”. • This setting is set to “Auto” automatically when the “HDMI Auto Power Down Control (RIHD)” is set to “On” first time. ■ Power Control ■ Auto Power Down Off: Off: Power Control disabled. Auto Power Down disabled. On: On: Power Control enabled. Auto Power Down enabled. To link the power functions of -compatible com- The AV receiver will automatically perform STANDBY ponents connected via HDMI, select “On”. operation when “Auto Power Down” is set to “On”, with This setting is set to “On” automatically when the no audio or video signal input, and if there is no operation “HDMI Control (RIHD)” is set to “On” first time. for 30 minutes. “Auto Power Down” will display on the display and OSD Note from 30 seconds before the Auto Power Down functions. • The “Power Control” setting can be set only when the “HDMI Default setting: On (European, Australian and Asian Control (RIHD)” setting is set to “On”. models), Off (North American and Taiwan models) • HDMI power control only works with -compatible components that support it and may not work properly with Note some components due to their settings or compatibility. • Depending on some sources, the auto power-down function may • When set to “On”, power consumption will increase. activate during playback. • When set to “On”, regardless of whether the AV receiver is On • The Auto Power Down function does not work when Zone 2 or or in Standby, both audio and video stream from an HDMI input Zone 3 is on. will be output to the TV or other components via HDMI connec- tion (HDMI pass through function). When the HDMI pass Network through function activates in standby mode, HDMI THRU indi- cator will light. See “Network Settings” (➔ 67). • The power consumption during standby mode will increase dur- ing the HDMI pass through function; however if your TV sup- Firmware Update ports CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), the power consumption can be saved in the following cases: Note 1. The TV is in standby mode. • Perform the firmware update only when an announcement is 2. You are watching a TV program. posted on the Onkyo web site. See the Onkyo web site for latest • Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for information. details. • It takes about 30 minutes to complete the firmware update. ■ TV Control ■ Version Off: The current version of the firmware is displayed. TV Control disabled. On: TV Control enabled. En 57
  • 58. ■ Receiver Tone Control Settings via NET: You can update the firmware via Internet. Check the You can adjust the bass and treble for the front speakers, network connection before update. except when the Direct, Pure Audio or THX listening mode is selected. via USB: You can update the firmware from a USB mass stor- ■ Bass age device. –10dB to 0dB to +10dB in 2 dB steps. You can update the AV receiver’s firmware. Do not shut- You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds output down the power of the AV receiver while update. by the front speakers. ■ Universal Port ■ Treble via NET: –10dB to 0dB to +10dB in 2 dB steps. You can update the firmware via Internet. Check the You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds output network connection before update. by the front speakers. via USB: Operating on the AV receiver You can update the firmware from a USB mass stor- age device. You can update the Onkyo dock’s firmware. Do not shut- 1 Press TONE on the AV receiver repeatedly to select either “Bass” or “Treble”. 2 down the power of the AV receiver while update. Use Up and Down on the AV receiver to Note adjust. • This update shall not be performed when no dock is connected to UNIVERSAL PORT jack. Note • This setting is not available when the multichannel Analog input Lock Setup is selected. With this preference, you can protect your settings by Speaker Levels locking the setup menus. You can adjust the volume of each speaker while listening Main menu Lock Setup to an input source. ■ Setup These temporary adjustments are cancelled when the AV Locked: receiver is set to Standby. To save the setting you made Setup menus locked. here, go to “Level Calibration” (➔ 47) before setting the Unlocked: AV receiver to Standby. Setup menus not locked. ■ Subwoofer Level When the setup menus are locked, you cannot change any –15.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 1 dB steps. setting. ■ Center Level –12.0dB to 0.0dB to +12.0dB in 1 dB steps. Using the Audio Settings Note You can change various audio settings from the Home • You cannot use this function while the AV receiver is muted. menu (➔ 26). • Speakers that are set to “No” or “None” in the “Speaker Configuration” (➔ 46) cannot be adjusted. 1 Press RECEIVER followed by HOME. Audyssey Settings 2 Use / to select “Audio”, and then use / / / to make the desired selection. ■ Dynamic EQ See “Dynamic EQ” of “Source Setup” (➔ 50). Note ■ Dynamic Volume • These settings are disabled when: See “Dynamic Volume” of “Source Setup” (➔ 51). – a pair of headphones is connected, or – the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (➔ 56) and an input selector other than HDMI is selected. En 58
  • 59. Late Night Re-EQ With the Late Night function, you can reduce the dynamic With the Re-EQ function, you can compensate a range of Dolby Digital material so that you can still hear soundtrack whose high-frequency content is too harsh, quiet parts even when listening at low volume levels— making it more suitable for home theater viewing. ideal for watching movies late at night when you don’t ■ Re-EQ want to disturb anyone. Off: ■ Late Night Re-EQ Function off. For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources, the On: options are: Re-EQ Function on. Off: This function can be used with the following listening Late Night function off. modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Low: Dolby TrueHD, Multichannel, DTS, DTS-HD High Reso- Small reduction in dynamic range. lution Audio, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS Express, High: DSD, Dolby EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height, Dolby Large reduction in dynamic range. PLIIx Movie, Neo:6 Cinema and 5.1-channel source + Neo:6. For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options are: Auto: ■ Re-EQ(THX) The Late Night function is set to “On” or “Off” Off: automatically. Re-EQ (THX) Function off. Off: On: Late Night function off. Re-EQ (THX) Function on. On: This function can be used with the following listening Late Night function on. modes: THX Cinema, THX Surround EX, and Note THX Select2 Cinema. • The effect of the Late Night function depends on the material Note that you are playing and the intention of the original sound • Settings for the Re-EQ function are kept in each listening mode. designer, and with some material there will be little or no effect However, in THX listening mode, when the AV receiver is when you select the different options. turned off, it will return to “On”. • The Late Night function can be used only when the input source is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or Dolby TrueHD. • The Late Night function is set to “Off” when the AV receiver is set to Standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources, it will be set to “Auto”. Music Optimizer The Music Optimizer function enhances the sound quality of compressed music files. Use it with music files that use “lossy” compression, such as MP3. ■ Music Optimizer Off: Music Optimizer off. On: Music Optimizer on. The M.Opt indicator will light (➔ 9). Note • The Music Optimizer function only works with PCM digital audio input signals with a sampling rate below 48 kHz and ana- log audio input signals. The Music Optimizer is disabled when the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode is selected. • The setting is stored individually for each input selector. • Alternatively, you can use the AV receiver’s MUSIC OPTI- MIZER. En 59
  • 60. Audio Selector Setting the Incoming Digital Signal (Fixed Mode) You can set priorities of audio output when there are both digital and analog inputs. By pressing ENTER while selecting “HDMI”, “COAX”, “OPT” in the “Audio Selector”, you can specify the input ■ Audio Selector signal in the Fixed Mode. Pressing ENTER again allows ARC: you to return to the “Audio Selector” setting. The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent to Normally, the AV receiver detects the signal format auto- the HDMI OUT (North American and Taiwan matically. However, if you experience either of the follow- models)/HDMI OUT MAIN (European, Australian ing issues when playing PCM or DTS material, you can and Asian models) of the AV receiver.*1 manually set the signal format to PCM or DTS. With this selection the TV’s audio can be automati- cally selected as a priority among other assignments. • If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are cut off, try setting the format to PCM. HDMI: This can be selected when HDMI IN has been • If noise is produced when fast forwarding or reversing a assigned as an input source. If both HDMI (HDMI DTS CD, try setting the format to DTS. IN) and digital audio inputs (COAXIAL IN or OPTI- Auto: CAL IN) have been assigned, HDMI input is auto- The format is detected automatically. If no digital matically selected as a priority. input signal is present, the corresponding analog COAX: input is used instead. This can be selected when COAXIAL IN has been PCM: assigned as an input source. If both coaxial and Only 2-channel PCM format input signals will be HDMI inputs have been assigned, coaxial input is heard. If the input signal is not PCM, the PCM indi- automatically selected as a priority. cator will flash and noise may also be produced. OPT: DTS: This can be selected when OPTICAL IN has been Only DTS (but not DTS-HD) format input signals assigned as an input source. If both optical and will be heard. If the input signal is not DTS, the DTS HDMI inputs have been assigned, optical input is indicator will flash and there will be no sound. automatically selected as a priority. Note Multich: • The setting is stored individually for each input selector. The AV receiver always outputs analog signals from • The setting will be reset to “Auto” when you change the setting multichannel analog input. in the “Audio Selector” (➔ 60). Analog: The AV receiver always outputs analog signals. Note • The setting is stored individually for each input selector. • This setting can be made only for the input source that is assigned as HDMI IN, COAXIAL IN, or OPTICAL IN. • To select the digital audio input, see “Digital Audio Input” for more detail (➔ 45). • “Multich” can be selected only when the selector is set to “BD/ DVD”. *1 You can select “ARC” if you select the TV/CD input selector. But you cannot select it if you’ve selected “Off” in the “Audio Return Channel” setting (➔ 57). En 60
  • 61. NET/USB About NET Connecting the AV Receiver The AV receiver is network-ready, which means you can To connect the AV receiver to your home network, plug hook it up to your home network with a standard Ethernet one end of a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable into the AV cable and enjoy the music files stored on your computer or receiver’s ETHERNET port, and plug the other end into a media server. If your network is connected to the Internet, LAN port on your router or switch. you can also enjoy Internet radio. The following diagram shows how you can connect the AV receiver to your home network. In this example, it’s Network Requirements connected to a LAN port on a router, which has a 4-port 100Base-TX switch built-in. ■ Ethernet Network For best results, a 100Base-TX switched Ethernet network is recommended. Although it’s possible to play music on a computer that’s connected to the network wirelessly, play- back may be unreliable, so wired connections are recom- mended. ■ Ethernet Router A router manages the network, routing data and supplying IP addresses. Your router must support the following: Internet radio • NAT (Network Address Translation). NAT allows sev- eral networked computers to access the Internet simulta- neously via a single Internet connection. The AV receiver needs Internet access for Internet radio. Modem • DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). DHCP supplies IP addresses to network devices, allowing them to configure themselves automatically. WAN port Router • A router with a 100Base-TX switch built-in is recom- mended. LAN port Some routers have a modem built-in, and some ISPs LAN port require you to use specific routers. Please consult your ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure. ■ CAT5 Ethernet cable Use a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight-type) to con- nect the AV receiver to your home network. LAN/Ethernet port ■ Internet Access (for Internet radio) To receive Internet radio, your Ethernet network must have Internet access. A narrowband Internet connection (e.g., 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory Computer or media server results, so a broadband connection is strongly recom- mended (e.g., cable modem, xDSL modem, etc). Please consult your ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure. Note • To receive Internet radio with the AV receiver, your broadband Internet connection must be working and able to access the Web. Consult your ISP if you have any problems with your Internet connection. • The AV receiver uses DHCP to configure its network settings automatically. If you want to configure these settings manually, see “Network Settings” (➔ 67). • The AV receiver does not support PPPoE settings, so if you have a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you must use a PPPoE-com- patible router. • Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a proxy server to use Internet radio. If your computer is configured to use a proxy server, use the same settings for the AV receiver (➔ 67). En 61
  • 62. Listening to Internet Radio Note • When the NETWORK indicator flashes, confirm that the To receive Internet radio, you must connect the AV Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV receiver. receiver to a network with Internet access (➔ 61). • Services available may vary depending on the region. See You can select Internet radio stations by connecting to the the separate instructions for more information. AV receiver from your computer and selecting stations in *1 MENU: your Web browser. Preset up to 40 Internet radio stations. When menu operations are enabled, “MENU” appears. Internet radio URLs in the following formats are sup- Press MENU to display the menu. ported: PLS, M3U, and podcast (RSS). However, depend- TOP MENU: ing on the type of data or audio format used by the Internet Press TOP MENU to go to the top menu of the Internet Radio services. radio station, you may not be able to listen to some sta- tions. 2 Use / to select “1. vTuner Internet Radio”, and Note then press ENTER. • If you’re using a narrowband Internet connection (e.g., 56K 3 Use / to select a program, and then press modem or ISDN), depending on the station, Internet radio may ENTER. not work satisfactorily. For best results, use a broadband connec- Playback starts and the following screen appears. tion (e.g., cable modem, xDSL modem, etc). All Stations Listening to vTuner Internet Radio --- This unit includes the full vTuner Internet Radio Service 1. fm indie 104 The internet’s best source for i at no additional charge. Once you have connected your 0:00:00 unit to the Internet you can select vTuner Internet Radio to WMA 128kbps 16bit/44.1kHz search for and play Internet radio stations and podcasts at *2 Go to Menu any time. To enhance your Internet radio experience, the http://onkyo.vtuner.com/ portal is available to you as an *2 Press MENU to allow selection from the following easy way to browse to find stations, set up/organize your menu items. favorites, add your own stations, get help, etc. After the Stations like this: first time you try Internet radio/vTuner on your unit you Stations like the one currently being played can use the MAC Address of your unit to create a member back are displayed. login account (email address and password) on the http:// Tip onkyo.vtuner.com/ portal. To verify your MAC Address, • If you press DISPLAY, you can toggle between the play- please see “Network Settings” (➔ 67). back screen and the list screen. DISPLAY Listening to Other Internet Radio To listen to other internet radio stations, insert the follow- ing step after step 1 in the “Listening to vTuner Internet NET/USB Radio”. On your computer, start your Web browser and enter the AV receiver’s IP address in the browser’s Internet address (URL) field. TOP MENU MENU The browser connects to the AV receiver and dis- plays the same screen as the AV receiver. ENTER Select the Internet radio station with your browser. 1 Press NET/USB repeatedly to select the Internet Radio screen. Note • The AV receiver’s IP address is shown on the “Network” screen (➔ 67). Internet Radio • If you’re using DHCP, your router may not always allocate 1. vTuner Internet Radio the same IP address to the AV receiver, so if you find that 2. Pandora Internet Radio 3. Rhapsody you can’t connect to the AV receiver, recheck the AV 4. SIRIUS Internet Radio 5. Slacker Internet Radio receiver’s IP address on the “Network” screen. 6. Mediafly Internet Radio 7. Napster Internet Radio 8. --- 9. --- 10. --- *1 MENU Go to Menu The NETWORK indicator lights (➔ 9). En 62
  • 63. Registering Presets*1 1 Start your computer or media server. Once you’ve added a station to the list, simply select it on the Internet Radio screen, and then press ENTER to start 2 Press NET/USB to select the “Server” screen. playback. Server *1 Server1 From the search results you can preset the stations and songs Server2 but cannot listen to them directly. Server3 Server4 Server5 ■ Items on the Internet Radio Top Menu Server6 Server7 Server8 Create new preset: Server9 Server10 Add a favorite station or Internet Radio to the pre- 1 / 10 sets. Rename this preset: The NETWORK indicator lights (➔ 9). You can rename the preset. Note Delete this preset: This will delete the preset. • When the NETWORK indicator flashes, confirm the net- work connection. ■ Station and Song Presets • To update the screen, press RETURN. You can add the currently playing song or station to the presets. 3 Use / to select a server, and then press ENTER. A list of items on the server appears. 1. Press MENU with the station selected or while a song is playing. Server1 2. Use / to select “Add this station to preset”, and Search Recently Added press ENTER. Artists Album Songs Genre Year Playing Music Files on a Server Rating This section explains how to play music files on a com- 1/8 puter or media server through the AV receiver. See “Sup- ported Audio File Formats” to “About DLNA” for details Search on supported music servers and music file formats. You can search for music by Artist, Album, or Track. For Windows Media Player 11, see “Windows Media Note Player 11 Setup” (➔ 64). • The search function does not work with media servers which do not support this function. • Depending on the sharing settings in the media server, the DISPLAY AV receiver may not able to access the content. Refer to the instruction manual of the media server. 4 Use / to select an item, and then press ENTER. NET/USB A list of music files appears. All Music Song 1 Song 2 Song 3 My favorite song 1 ENTER My favorite song 2 / / / My favorite song 3 My favorite song 4 My favorite song 5 My favorite song 6 My favorite song 7 RETURN 1 / 10 , , , , , , REPEAT RANDOM En 63
  • 64. 5 Use / to select a music file, and press ENTER or Windows Media Player 11 Setup to start playback. This section explains how to configure Windows Media Playback starts and the following screen appears. Player 11 so that the AV receiver can play the music files stored on your computer. My favorite song 1 4 / 10 My favorite song 1 1 Start Windows Media Player 11. 2 Artist name My favorite album On the Library menu, select Media Sharing. 0:00:00 MP3 128kbps 44.1kHz The Media Sharing dialog box appears. 3 ALL Select the Share my media check box, and then click OK. To return to the previous menu during playback, press RETURN. 4 Select the AV receiver in the list, and then click Allow. To stop playback, press . To select the next song, press . To select the 5 Click OK to close the dialog box. This completes the Windows Media Player 11 con- beginning of the current song, press . To select figuration. the previous song, press twice. You can now play the music files in your Windows To pause playback, press . To fast forward the cur- Media Player 11 library through the AV receiver rent song, press . To fast reverse the current (➔ 63). song, press . Note Tip • Windows Media Player 11 can be downloaded for free from the • If you press DISPLAY, you can toggle between the play- Microsoft Web site. back screen and the list screen. Note Supported Audio File Formats • For some sort of media server, Fast Forward/Fast Reverse/ Pause operations do not work. For server playback, the AV receiver supports the follow- ing music file formats: MP3, WMA, WAV, FLAC, Ogg Random Playback Vorbis, AAC and LPCM. Not all servers support all for- mats. The Random function can only be set while the PLAY screen is displayed. ■ MP3 To play songs in random order, during playback (or while • MP3 files must be MPEG-1/MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3 for- playback is paused or stopped), press RANDOM. All of mat with a sampling rate of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, the songs in the current folder will be played in random 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz order. When all of the songs in the folder have been played and a bit-rate of between 8 kbps and 320 kbps. Incom- once, they’ll all be played again in a different random patible files cannot be played. order. To cancel random playback, press RANDOM • Number of channels: 2 again. • Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 files are supported. (Play- Random playback supports up to 20000 songs per folder. ing times may not display correctly.) If a folder contains more than this, songs over 20000 are • MP3 files must have a “.mp3” or “.MP3” filename not included in random playback. extension. Repeat Playback The Repeat function can only be set while the PLAY ■ WMA screen is displayed. WMA stands for Windows Media Audio and is an audio To play songs repeatedly, during playback (or while play- compression technology developed by Microsoft Corpora- back is paused or stopped), press REPEAT repeatedly to tion. Audio can be encoded in WMA format by using select: Repeat1, Repeat Folder, Repeat All, or Off. Windows Media® Player. In Repeat1 mode, the current song is played repeatedly. • WMA files must have the copyright option turned off. In Repeat Folder mode, all of the songs in the current • Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz, folder are played repeatedly. 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz and In Repeat All mode, all of the songs on the current server bitrates of between 5 kbps and 320 kbps, and WMA are played repeatedly. DRM are supported. Incompatible files cannot be played. To cancel repeat playback, press REPEAT repeatedly to select Off. • Number of channels: 2 • Variable bit-rates (VBR) are supported. (Playing times Note may display incorrectly with VBR.) • If the message “No Item.” appears, this means that no informa- • WMA Pro/Voice formats are not supported. tion can be retrieved from the server. In this case, check your • WMA files must have a “.wma” or “.WMA” filename server, network, and AV receiver connections. En extension. 64
  • 65. ■ WMA Lossless ■ LPCM (Linear PCM) • Sampling rates of 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz • Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz, and bitrates of between 5 kbps and 320 kbps are sup- 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz, ported. Incompatible files cannot be played. 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz are supported. • Quantization bit: 16 bit, 24 bit • Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit • Number of channels: 2 • Number of channels: 2 • Variable bit-rates (VBR) are supported. (Playing times may display incorrectly with VBR.) Server Requirements • WMA files must have a “.wma” or “.WMA” filename The AV receiver can play digital music files stored on a extension. computer or media server and supports the following tech- ■ WAV nologies: WAV files contain uncompressed PCM digital audio. • Windows Media Player 11 • Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz, • Windows Media Connect 2.0 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz, • DLNA-certified media server 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz are supported. Incompatible files If the operating system of your computer is Windows cannot be played. Vista, Windows Media Player 11 is already installed. • Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit Windows Media Player 11 for Windows XP can be down- • Number of channels: 2 loaded for free from the Microsoft Web site. • WAV files must have a “.wav” or “.WAV” filename • The computer or media server must be on the same net- extension. work as the AV receiver. • Each folder may contain up to 20000 music files, and ■ AAC folders may be nested up to 16 levels deep. AAC stands for MPEG-2/MPEG-4 Audio. • Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz, Note 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz, • For some sort of media server, the AV receiver may not able to 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz and bitrates of between 8 and recognize it, or may not able to play stored music files. 320 kbps, are supported. Incompatible files cannot be played. Minimum system requirements for Windows Media • Number of channels: 2 Player 11 for Windows XP • Variable bit-rate (VBR) files are supported. (Playing Operating system times may not display correctly.) Windows XP Home Edition (SP2), Windows XP Profes- • AAC files must have a “.aac”, “.m4a”, “.mp4”, “.3gp”, sional (SP2), Windows XP Tablet PC Edition (SP2), “.3g2”, “.AAC”, “.M4A”, “.MP4”, “.3GP” or “.3G2” Update Rollup 2 for Windows XP Media Center Edition filename extension. 2005 (KB900325), October 2006 Update Rollup for Windows XP Media Center Edition (KB925766) ■ FLAC Processor: 233 MHz Intel Pentium II, Advanced FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. Micro Devices (AMD), etc. • Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz, Memory: 64 MB 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz, Hard disk: 200 MB of free space 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz are supported. Incompatible files cannot be played. Drive: CD or DVD drive • Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit Modem: 28.8 kbps • Number of channels: 2 Sound card: 16-bit sound card • Variable bit-rates (VBR) are supported. (Playing times Monitor: Super VGA (800 x 600) may display incorrectly with VBR.) Video card: 64 MB VRAM, DirectX 9.0b • FLAC files must have a “.flac” or “.FLAC” filename Software: Microsoft ActiveSync (only when extension. using a Windows Mobile-based Pocket Note PC or smartphone) • Not all servers support all formats. Web browser: Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or Netscape 7.1 ■ Ogg Vorbis • Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz, About DLNA 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz and bitrates of between 48 kbps and 500 kbps are supported. The Digital Living Network Alliance is an international, Incompatible files cannot be played. cross-industry collaboration. Members of DLNA develop a concept of wired and wireless interoperable networks • Number of channels: 2 where digital content such as photos, music, and videos • Variable bit-rates (VBR) are supported. (Playing times can be shared through consumer electronics, personal may display incorrectly with VBR.) computers, and mobile devices in and beyond the home. • Ogg Vorbis files must have a “.ogg” or “.OGG” filename The AV receiver certificate the DLNA Interoperability extension. En Guidelines version 1.5. 65
  • 66. Remote Playback from Media Server/ Using Remote Playback Personal Computer Remote Playback means you can play the music files 1 Start Windows Media Player 12. Before remote playback, setup on Windows Media stored on the DLNA-certified device such as media server Player 12 is required. with this product by operating the controller device in the home network. 2 On the product, press NET/USB to select the server screen. Server Requirements A list of media server appears. Tip • Windows Media Player 12 • The NETWORK indicator on the product’s display lights • DLNA-certified (the DLNA Interoperability Guidelines up. When it flashes, confirm the network connection. version 1.5) media server or controller device Setting varies depending on the device. Refer to your Note device’s instruction manual for details. • While the music files on another media server are being If the operating system of your personal computer is Win- played, remote playback cannot be used. Stop playback on another media server. dows 7, Windows Media Player 12 is already installed. For more information, see the Microsoft Web site. 3 On Windows Media Player 12, right-click on music file. Supported Music File Formats Right-click menu appears. For selecting another media server, select media server from “Other See “Supported Audio File Formats” (➔ 64). Libraries” menu on Windows Media Player 12. 4 Note Select the product from right-click menu. • For remote playback, this product does not support the following “Play to” window appears and playback on the prod- music file formats: FLAC and Ogg Vorbis. uct starts. Operations during remote playback can be made from “Play to” window of Windows 7 on your Windows Media Player 12 Setup personal computer. During remote playback, opera- This section explains how to configure Windows Media tions (such as Playback, Pause, Fast Forward, Fast Player 12 so that the product can play the music files Rewind, Previous, Next, Repeat, Random) cannot be stored on your personal computer. made on the product. 1 Remote Playback Start Windows Media Player 12. 2 My favorite song 1 On the “Stream” menu, select “Turn on media Artist name streaming”. My favorite album 1:00:00 A dialog box appears. MP3 128kbps 44.1kHz 3 Move your cursor and click on “Turn on media streaming”. Tip A list of media server appears. Wording may vary • To stop playback and return to the previous menu during slightly depending on the network location. remote playback, press RETURN on the product or remote controller. To stop playback during remote play- 4 Select the product in the list, and then click back, press Stop [ ] on the remote controller. 5 “Allowed”. Adjusting the Volume 5 Click “OK” to close the dialog box. You can adjust the volume of your AV receiver by This completes the Windows Media Player 12 con- adjusting the volume bar in the “Remote playback” figuration. window. The default maximum volume for the AV You can now play the music files in your Windows receiver is 82 (0dB). If you wish to change this, enter Media Player 12 library through the product. the maximum volume value from the Web Setup in your browser. The volume value of the remote window and the vol- ume value of the AV receiver may not always match. Adjustments you make to the volume in the AV receiver will not be reflected in the “Remote play- back” window. Windows and the Windows logo are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. En 66
  • 67. Network Settings 5 When you’ve finished, press RETURN. The save confirmation screen appears. Note 7-6. Network • When modifying network settings, after modifying it is neces- Save sary to execute “Save”. Cancel This section explains how to configure the AV receiver’s 6 Use / to select “Save”, and then press ENTER. network settings manually. When modifying network settings, after modifying it If your router’s DHCP server is enabled, you don’t need to is necessary to execute “Save”. change any of these settings, as the AV receiver is set use DHCP to configure itself automatically by default (i.e., 7 When you’ve finished, press SETUP. The setup menu closes. DHCP is set to Enable). If, however, your router’s DHCP server is disabled, for example, you’re using static IP Note addresses, you’ll need to configure these settings yourself, • This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver by in which case, a knowledge of Ethernet networking is using its SETUP, arrows, and ENTER. essential. What’s DHCP? ■ Mac Address DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used by This is the AV receiver’s MAC (Media Access Control) routers, computers, the AV receiver, and other devices to address. This address cannot be changed. automatically configure themselves on a network. ■ DHCP What’s DNS? This setting determines whether or not the AV receiver The DNS (Domain Name System) translates domain uses DHCP to automatically configure its IP Address, names into IP addresses. For example, when you enter a Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server settings. domain name such as www.onkyousa.com in your Web Enable: browser, before accessing the site, your browser uses DNS DHCP enabled. to translate this into an IP address, in this case Disable: 63.148.251.142. DHCP disabled. 1 Press RECEIVER, followed by SETUP. If you select “Disable”, you must configure the “IP Address”, “Subnet Mask”, “Gateway”, and “DNS The main menu appears onscreen. Server” settings yourself. If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the appropriate external input is selected on your TV. ■ IP Address 2 Use / to select “Hardware Setup”, and then If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must specify an IP address. Enter a static IP address provided press ENTER. The “Hardware Setup” menu appears. by your ISP. The IP address must be within the following ranges. 7. Hardware Setup Class A: 1. 2. Remote ID Multi Zone 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255 3. Tuner 4. HDMI Class B: 5. Auto Power Down 6. Network 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255 7. Firmware Update Class C: 3 Use / to select “Network”, and then press 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255 Most routers use Class C IP addresses. ENTER. The “Network” screen appears. ■ Subnet Mask 7-6. Network If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must MAC Address xx : xx : xx − yy : yy : yy specify a subnet mask address. DHCP Disable IP Address aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd Enter the subnet mask address provided by your ISP (typi- Subnet Mask aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd Gateway aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd cally: 255.255.255.0). DNS Server aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd Proxy URL http://www.proxy.xxx.com ■ Gateway Proxy Port 8080 If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must specify a gateway address. Enter the gateway address provided by your ISP. 4 Use / to select the setting, and use / to set ■ DNS Server them. To enter an IP address, select the setting, and then If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must press ENTER. The arrow can then be used to enter specify a DNS server. numbers. Press ENTER again to set the number. Enter the DNS server addresses provided by your ISP. The settings are explained below. ■ Proxy URL En To use a Web proxy, enter its URL here. 67
  • 68. ■ Proxy Port About USB If you’re using a Web proxy, enter a proxy port number here. USB can be used to play music files stored on USB mass storage devices (e.g., USB flash drives and MP3 players), ■ Control which can be plugged into the AV receiver’s USB port. This setting enables or disables control over the network. Enable: Supported Audio File Formats Control over the network enabled. Disable: For USB mass storage device playback, the AV receiver Control over the network disabled. supports music file formats. Note See “Supported Audio File Formats” (➔ 64). • When set to “Enable”, power consumption on standby mode USB Mass Storage Device Requirements slightly increases. ■ Port Number • The AV receiver supports USB devices that support the USB mass storage device class. This is the network port used for control over the network. • Playback may not be possible with some USB devices Note even if they conform to the USB mass storage device • Set the port number between from “49152” to “65535”. class. • USB devices formatted with the FAT16 or FAT32 file system are supported. • If the storage device has been partitioned, each section will be treated as an independent device. • Each folder may contain up to 20000 music files and folders, and folders may be nested up to 16 levels deep. • USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not supported. Playing Music Files on a USB Device This section explains how to play music files on a USB mass storage device. DISPLAY NET/USB ENTER / / / RETURN , , , , , , REPEAT RANDOM En 68
  • 69. 1 Plug your USB mass storage device into the AV receiver’s USB port. Random Playback The Random function can only be set while the PLAY 2 screen is displayed. Press NET/USB repeatedly to select the “USB” To play songs in random order, while the list of songs is input. displayed, press RANDOM. All of the songs in the cur- USB rent folder will be played in random order. When all of the USB Storage songs in the folder have been played once, they’ll all be played again in a different random order. To cancel ran- dom playback, press RANDOM again. Random playback supports up to 20,000 songs per folder. If a folder contains more than this, songs over 20,000 are 1/1 not included in random playback. Repeat Playback The USB indicator lights (➔ 9) if the AV receiver is The Repeat function can only be set while the PLAY able to read the USB mass storage device. The USB screen is displayed. indicator flashes if the AV receiver cannot read the To play songs repeatedly, during playback (or while play- USB mass storage device. back is paused or stopped), press REPEAT repeatedly to 3 Use / to select a USB mass storage device, and select: Repeat1, Repeat Folder, Repeat All, or Off. In Repeat1 mode, the current song is played repeatedly. then press ENTER. A list of the device’s contents appears. In Repeat Folder mode, all of the songs in the current folder are played repeatedly. USB Storage In Repeat All mode, all of the songs on the USB mass Folder1 Folder2 storage device (in the same partition) are played repeat- 01_Song_Track1 02_Song_Track2 edly. 03_Song_Track3 04_Song_Track4 To cancel repeat playback, press REPEAT repeatedly to 05_Song_Track5 06_Song_Track6 select Off. 07_Song_Track7 08_Song_Track8 Note 2/5 • If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the AV receiver’s USB To open a folder, use / to select it, and then press port, we recommend that you use its AC adapter to power it. • Do not connect the AV receiver’s USB port to a USB port on ENTER. your computer. Music on your computer cannot be played 4 Use / to select a music file, and press ENTER or through the AV receiver in this way. • The AV receiver supports USB MP3 players that support the to start playback. USB Mass Storage Class standard, which allows USB storage Playback starts and the following screen appears. devices to be connected to computers without the need for spe- Folder1 cial drivers or software. Note that not all USB MP3 players sup- port the USB Mass Storage Class standard. Refer your USB 1/17 MP3 player’s instruction manual for details. 02_Song_Track2 Artist • Protected WMA music files on an MP3 player cannot be played. Album 00:10 01:12:34 • Onkyo accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or dam- MP3 128kbps 16bit/44.1kHz age to data stored on a USB mass storage device when that device is used with the AV receiver. We recommend that you back up your important music files beforehand. • MP3 players containing music files that are managed with spe- To return to the previous menu during playback, cial music software, and the iPod containing music files man- press RETURN. aged with iTunes are not supported. • Operation with all USB mass storage devices including the abil- To stop or pause playback, press or , respec- ity to power them is not guaranteed. tively. • Do not connect your USB mass storage device via a USB hub. To select the next song, press . To select the The USB mass storage device must be connected directly to the beginning of the current song, press . To select AV receiver’s USB port. • If the USB mass storage device contains a lot of data, the AV the previous song, press twice. receiver make take a while to read it. To fast forward the current song, press . To fast • USB memory devices with security functions cannot be played. reverse the current song, press . Tip • If you press DISPLAY, you can toggle between the play- back screen and the list screen. En 69
  • 70. Multi Zone In addition to your main listening room, you can also enjoy playback in the other room, or as we call Multi Zone. And, you can select a different source for each room. Connecting Zone 2 Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers to an Amp in Zone 2 There are two ways you can connect Zone 2 speakers: This setup allows 7.1-channel playback in your main lis- 1. Connect them directly to the AV receiver. tening room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2, 2. Connect them to an amp in Zone 2. with a different source in each room. Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers Directly to the AV receiver Hookup • Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s This setup allows 5.1-channel playback in your main room ZONE 2 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input on and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2, with a different your Zone 2 amp. source in each room. This is called Powered Zone 2, as the • Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the speaker terminals on Zone 2 speakers are powered by the AV receiver. Note that your Zone 2 amp. when Powered Zone 2 is turned off, you can enjoy 7.1- channel playback in your main room. Main room To use this setup, you must set the “Powered Zone2” setting to “Act” (➔ 71). TV Hookup AV receiver • Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the AV receiver’s FRONT WIDE/ZONE 2 L/R terminals. Main room TV Zone 2 AV receiver IN R L Receiver/ integrated amp Note • With the default settings, the Zone 2 volume must be set on the Zone 2 Zone 2 amp. If your Zone 2 amp has no volume control, set the R L “Zone2 Out” setting to “Variable” so that you can set the Zone 2 volume on the AV receiver (➔ 72). Zone 2 12V Trigger When Zone 2 is turned on, the output from the ZONE 2 Note 12V TRIGGER OUT goes high (+12 volts, 150 milliam- • With this setup, the Zone 2 volume is controlled by the AV peres max). Connecting this jack to a 12-volt trigger input receiver. on a component in Zone 2 will make that component turn • Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if “Speakers Type(Front)” is on or off as and when Zone 2 is turned on or off on the AV set to “Bi-Amp” (➔ 45). receiver. En 70
  • 71. Connecting Zone 3 Setting the Powered Zone 2 Connecting Your Zone 3 Speakers to an If you’ve connected your Zone 2 speakers to the AV Amp in Zone 3 receiver, as explained in “Connecting Your Zone 2 Speak- ers Directly to the AV receiver” (➔ 70), you must set the This setup allows 7.1-channel playback in your main lis- “Powered Zone2” setting to “Act” (Activated). tening room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 3, with a different source in each room. 1 Press RECEIVER followed by SETUP. The main menu appears onscreen. Hookup Tip • Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s • If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the appropri- ZONE 3 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input on ate external input is selected on your TV. your Zone 3 amp. • Connect your Zone 3 speakers to the speaker terminals on 2 Use / to select “Speaker Setup”, and then press your Zone 3 amp. ENTER. The “Speaker Setup” menu appears. Main room 2. Speaker Setup 1. Speaker Settings 2. Speaker Configuration 3. Speaker Distance TV 4. Level Calibration 5. Equalizer Settings 6. THX Audio Setup AV receiver 3 Use / to select “Speaker Settings”, and then press ENTER. The “Speaker Settings” menu appears. 2–1. Speaker Settings Speaker Impedance 6ohms Speakers Type(Front) Normal Powered Zone2 Not Act 4 Use / to select “Powered Zone2”, and use / Zone 3 to select: Not Act: IN Use FRONT WIDE/ZONE 2 L/R terminals to R L connect front wide speakers. (Powered Zone 2 Receiver/ disabled.) integrated amp Act: Use FRONT WIDE/ZONE 2 L/R terminals to connect Zone 2 speakers. (Powered Zone 2 Note enabled.) • With the default settings, the Zone 3 volume must be set on the Zone 3 amp. If your Zone 3 amp has no volume control, set the 5 Press SETUP. The setup menu closes. “Zone3 Out” setting to “Variable” so that you can set the Zone 3 volume on the AV receiver (➔ 72). Note Zone 3 12V Trigger • Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if “Speakers Type(Front)” is set to “Bi-Amp” (➔ 45). When Zone 3 is turned on, the output from the ZONE 3 • This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver by 12V TRIGGER OUT goes high (+12 volts, 25 milliam- using SETUP, arrows, and ENTER. peres max). Connecting this jack to a 12-volt trigger input on a component in Zone 3 will make that component turn on or off as and when Zone 3 is turned on or off on the AV receiver. En 71
  • 72. To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver was Setting the Multi Zone last turned off, select “Last”. 1 Press RECEIVER followed by SETUP. The “Zone2 Power On Volume” and “Zone3 Power On Volume” cannot be set higher than the “Zone2 Maximum The main menu appears onscreen. Volume” and “Zone3 Maximum Volume” setting. Tip • If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the appropri- ate external input is selected on your TV. Using Zone 2/3 2 Use / to select “Hardware Setup”, and then This section explains how to turn Zone 2/3 on and off, how to select an input source for Zone 2/3, and how to press ENTER. The “Hardware Setup” menu appears. adjust the volume for Zone 2/3. 7. Hardware Setup Controlling Zone 2/3 from the AV receiver 1. Remote ID 2. Multi Zone 3. Tuner ZONE 3 indicator 4. HDMI 5. Auto Power Down ZONE 2 indicator 6. Network 7. Firmware Update 3 Use / to select “Multi Zone”, and then press ENTER. The “Multi Zone” menu appears. 7-2. Multi Zone Zone2 Out Fixed Zone2 Maximum Volume Off Zone2 Power On Volume Last Zone3 Out Fixed ZONE 3 Input selector buttons Zone3 Maximum Volume Off Zone3 Power On Volume Last ZONE 2 OFF 4 Use / to select an item, and use / to change 1 To turn on Zone 2/3 and select an input source, it. press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 followed by an input The items are explained below. selector button within 8 seconds. 5 Press SETUP. Zone 2/3 turns on, the ZONE 2/3 indicator lights. The setup menu closes. Tip Note • ZONE 2/3 12V TRIGGER OUT goes high (+12 V). • This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver by To select AM or FM, press TUNER input selector using SETUP, arrows, and ENTER. and ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 repeatedly. (North American models) You can also select SIR- ■ Zone2 Out, Zone3 Out IUS. Fixed: The Zone 2/3 volume must be set on the amp in that To select the same source as that of the main room, zone. press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 twice. “Zone 2 Selector: Variable: Source” or “Zone 3 Selector: Source” appears on The Zone 2/3 volume can be set on the AV receiver. the display. If you’ve connected your Zone 2/3 speakers to an amp with no volume control, set the “Zone2 Out” and “Zone3 2 To turn off Zone 2/3, press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3. ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator flashes. Out” setting, respectively, to “Variable” so that you can set the volume, balance, and tone of zone 2 and volume Press OFF. and balance of zone 3 on the AV receiver. The zone is turned off, and the ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator goes off. ■ Zone2 Maximum Volume, Zone3 Maximum Volume Note Off, 50 to 99 (Absolute display) • When Zone 2/3 is turned off, the output from the ZONE 2/3 Off, –32dB to +17dB (Relative display) 12V TRIGGER OUT goes low (0 volts). With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for Zone 2/3. ■ Zone2 Power On Volume, Zone3 Power On Volume Last, Min, 1 to 99 or Max (Absolute display) Last, – dB, –81dB to +18dB (Relative display) This setting determines what the volume will be for En Zone 2/3 each time the AV receiver is turned on. 72
  • 73. Controlling Zone 2/3 with the Remote Adjusting the Volume for Zones Controller On the remote controller, press ZONE repeatedly, STANDBY and then use VOL / . ON ZONE On the AV receiver, press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 (the ZONE 2/3 indicator and Zone 2/3 selector on INPUT the display flashes) and press LEVEL followed by SELECTOR Up /Down within 8 seconds. Muting Zones Note On the remote controller, press ZONE repeatedly, • To control Zone 2/3, you must press the remote controller’s and then press MUTING. ZONE first. • ZONE turns red while Zone 2 is on, and green while Zone 3 is To unmute a zone, on the remote controller, press on. ZONE, and then press MUTING again. 1 Press ZONE repeatedly, then point the remote controller at the AV receiver and press ON. Adjusting the Tone and Balance of Zones Tip • The ZONE 2/3 12V TRIGGER OUT goes high (+12 V). 1 On the AV receiver, press ZONE 2. 2 To select an input source for Zone 2/3, press ZONE repeatedly, followed by INPUT SELEC- 2 Press the AV receiver’s TONE repeatedly to select “Bass”, “Treble” or “Balance”. TOR. To select AM or FM, press TUNER input selector 3 Use / to adjust the bass, treble or balance. • You can boost or cut the bass or treble from –10 dB and ZONE repeatedly. to +10 dB in 2 dB steps. (North American models) You can also select SIR- • You can adjust the balance from 0 in the center to IUS. +10 dB to the right or +10 dB to the left in 2 dB 3 To turn off Zone 2/3, press ZONE repeatedly, fol- lowed by STANDBY. steps. Note Note • Zones can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume. • Only analog input sources are output by the ZONE 2/3 PRE • The Zone 2 volume, tone, and balance function have no effect on OUT and FRONT WIDE/ZONE 2 L/R terminals. Digital input ZONE 2 PRE OUT when the “Zone2 Out” setting is set to sources are not output. If no sound is heard when an input source “Fixed” (➔ 72). is selected, check if it’s connected to an analog input. • The Zone 3 volume function has no effect on ZONE 3 PRE • You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations for your OUT when the “Zone3 Out” setting is set to “Fixed” (➔ 72). main room and Zone 2/3. The same AM/FM radio station will be • Even if you repeatedly press the remote controller’s ZONE to heard in each room. For example, if you have an FM station for select zones, the last zone selection will be retained once you the main room, that station will also be used in Zone 2. have switched to other components by pressing other REMOTE • When you connect Zone 2 speakers directly to the AV receiver, MODE after pressing ZONE. listening modes that require surround back speakers or front high speakers or front wide speakers (6.1/7.1), such as Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES, THX Select2 Cinema, Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height, and Audyssey DSX™ are unavailable. • When the input selector of Zone 2/3 is selected, power consump- tion on standby mode slightly increases. • While Zone 2/3 is on, functions will not work. En 73
  • 74. Using the Remote Controller in Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet Zone 2/3 and Multiroom Control Kits In this setup, the IR receiver picks up the infrared signals from the remote controller and feeds them to the AV To control the AV receiver with the remote controller receiver located in the cabinet via the connecting block. while you’re in Zone 2 or Zone 3, you’ll need a commer- cially available multiroom remote control kit for each zone. IR • Multiroom kits are made by Niles and Xantech. Connecting receiver These kits can also be used when there isn’t a clear line of block sight to the AV receiver’s remote sensor, such as when it’s IR IN installed inside a cabinet. Using a Multiroom Kit with Zone 2/3 In this setup, the IR receiver in Zone 2/3 picks up the Inside cabinet Remote controller infrared signals from the remote controller and feeds them through to the AV receiver in the main room via the con- Signal flow necting block. IR IN Using a Multiroom Kit with Other Components IR Connect- In this setup, an IR emitter is connected to the AV receiver ing block receiver’s IR OUT jack and placed in front of the other component’s remote control sensor. Infrared signals received at the AV receiver’s IR IN jack are fed through to the other component via the IR emitter. Signals picked up by the AV receiver’s remote control sensor are not output. Remote controller Main room Zone 2/3 IR receiver Connecting Signal flow block IR IN The miniplug cable from the connecting block should be AV receiver IR OUT connected to the AV receiver’s IR IN jack, as shown below. IR Emitter From the connecting block Remote controller Other component Miniplug cable Signal flow The IR emitter should be connected to the AV receiver’s IR OUT jack, as shown below. Miniplug cable AV receiver Other component Remote AV receiver control sensor Emitter Miniplug IR Emitter Signal flow En 74
  • 75. Controlling iPod & Other Components Controlling iPod Connecting the iPod Directly to the 3 Press DISPLAY to switch to Extended Mode*3. USB Port A list of your iPod model’s contents appears. To open a folder, use / to select it, and then press USB can be used to play music files stored on iPod/ ENTER. iPhone, which can be plugged into the AV receiver’s USB Tip port. • With the default settings, the iPod/iPhone can be manipu- lated as Standard Mode*2. • Pressing DISPLAY again switches back to Standard Mode. 4 Use / to select a music file, and press ENTER or to start playback. • To return to the previous menu during playback, press RETURN. • To stop or pause playback, press or , respec- tively. • To select the next song, press . To select the USB port beginning of the current song, press . To select the previous song, press twice. Playing Music Files on the iPod/iPhone • To fast forward the current song, press . To This section explains how to play music files on the iPod/ fast reverse the current song, press . iPhone. • To switch the repeat mode, press REPEAT. To switch the random mode, press RANDOM. DISPLAY Standard Mode control The content information is not displayed onscreen, but can be manipulated using the iPod/iPhone or the Remote Con- trol (NET/USB). NET/USB Note • The audio of video content can be played back but no video will ALBUM +/– be displayed onscreen. / , ENTER, PLAYLIST / Extended Mode control The content information is displayed (lists are displayed) RETURN on the on-screen, and you can select and manipulate the content while looking at the screen. , , , , Top screen list: , , • Playlists*4 • Artists*4 REPEAT • Albums*4 RANDOM • Genres*4 • Songs*4 1 • Composers*4 Press NET/USB repeatedly to select the USB • Shuffle Songs*5 input. • Now Playing*6 2 Connect the USB cable that comes with the iPod/ iPhone*1 to the USB port at the front of the AV *1 Compatible iPod models Made for: receiver. • iPod touch (1st and 2nd generation) • The USB indicator lights (➔ 9) if the AV receiver • iPod classic is able to read the iPod/iPhone. • iPod (5th generation) • iPod nano (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation) • The USB indicator flashes if the AV receiver can- • All iPhone models not read the iPod/iPhone. iPod(STD) Push “DISPLAY” button switch to Extended mode. En 75
  • 76. *2 The following iPod models are not supported in Standard *3 When you disconnect the iPod/iPhone, the AV receiver stores Mode. These iPod models can only be controlled in Extended the mode. This means that if you disconnect when in Mode. Extended Mode, the AV receiver will start in Extended Mode • iPod (5th generation) when you next connect the iPod/iPhone. • iPod nano (1st generation) *4 Displays a list. *5 Plays all tracks in random order. *6 Displays information about currently playing track. Connecting an Onkyo Dock *1 No. Onkyo Dock Cable Note Page UP-A1 Dock — • When UP-A1 Dock that seated iPod is con- 77 (Universal Port Option Dock) nected, the power consumption on standby mode slightly increases. • You can control your iPod when “PORT” is selected as the input source. • See the UP-A1 Dock’s instruction manual for more information. ND-S1 Optical digital audio • See the ND-S1’s instruction manual for more 77 information. *1 The ND-S1’s audio outputs are digital out- ON Coaxial digital audio puts. If the digital audio input on your AV /ST AN DB receiver cannot be assigned to an input selec- Y ST AN DB Y tor whose Input Display can be set to iP o d PC UN SYN SY C/ NC cable*1 “DOCK”, do not connect the cable, oth- erwise a malfunction may occur. RI Dock Analog audio (RCA) • See the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more 78 information. *1 To use (Remote Interactive), you must make an analog audio connection (RCA) Component video between the AV receiver and the RI Dock. Y PB/CB PR/CR Composite video cable*1 Models sold are different depending on the region. En 76
  • 77. ■ Using Your iPod models Alarm Clock Using the Onkyo Dock You can use your iPod models Alarm Clock function to automatically turn on your iPod and the AV receiver at a Dock is sold separately. specified time. The AV receiver’s input source will auto- For the latest information on the Onkyo Dock compo- matically be set to the PORT selector. nents, see the Onkyo web site at: Note http://www.onkyo.com Before using the Onkyo Dock components, update • To use this function, your iPod must be in the UP-A1 Dock, and the UP-A1 Dock must be connected to the AV receiver. your iPod with the latest software, available from the • This function works only in the Standard mode (➔ 79). Apple web site. • When you use this function, be sure to set the AV receiver’s vol- For supported iPod models, see the instruction man- ume control to a suitable level. ual of the Onkyo Dock. • When Zone 2/3 is turned on, you can’t use this function. • You cannot use this function for sound effects on your iPod. UP-A1 Dock ■ Charging Your iPod models Battery With the UP-A1 Dock, you can easily play the music, The UP-A1 Dock charges your iPod models battery while photo, or movie stored on your Apple iPod through the AV your iPod is in the UP-A1 Dock and connected to the receiver and enjoy great sound. UNIVERSAL PORT jack on the AV receiver. While your You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to operate iPod is seated in the UP-A1 Dock, its battery will be your iPod. charged when the AV receiver is set to “On” or “Standby”. ■ Basic Operation Note • When UP-A1 Dock that seated iPod is connected, the power consumption on standby mode slightly increases. The AV receiver may take several seconds to startup, so you might not hear the first few seconds of the first ■ Status Messages song. • PORT Reading The AV receiver is checking the connection with the Auto Power On dock. If you start iPod playback while the AV receiver is on • PORT Not Support Standby, the AV receiver will automatically turn on and The AV receiver do not support the connected dock. select your iPod as the input source. • PORT UP-A1 Direct Change UP-A1 Dock is connected. If you start iPod playback while listening to another input source, the AV receiver will automatically select your iPod Note as the input source. • The AV receiver displays the message “UP-A1” for several sec- Using the AV receiver’s Remote Controller onds after recognizing the UP-A1. You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to control • When the status message is not displayed on the AV receiver’s display, check the connection to your iPod. basic iPod functions (➔ 78). ND-S1 ■ Operating Notes • Functionality depends on your iPod model and generation. With the ND-S1 Digital Media Transport, you can easily • Before selecting a different input source, stop iPod playback play the music stored on your iPod through the AV to prevent the AV receiver from selecting the iPod input receiver and enjoy great sound. source by mistake. The ND-S1 processes the digital audio signal directly • If any accessories are connected to your iPod, the AV receiver from your iPod for high-quality digital audio output (opti- may not be able to select the input source properly. cal or coaxial). • When connecting UP-A1 Dock to the radio tuner UP-HT1 (North American models)/UP-DT1 (European, Australian Note and Asian models) with AUTO selected by the tuner’s Mode • You must select “iPod” using ND-S1’s iPod/PC button. Selector switch, you can switch the input source between UP- • Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK” (➔ 27). A1 Dock and the tuner, by pressing PORT repeatedly on the front panel. • While your iPod is in the UP-A1 Dock, its volume control has no effect. If you adjust your iPod models volume control while it’s in the UP-A1 Dock, make sure it’s not set too high before you reconnect your headphones. • The Auto Power On function will not work if you set your iPod in the UP-A1 Dock while it is playing. • When Zone 2/3 is turned on, you can’t use Auto Power On and Direct Change functions. • Do not turn off the power with the iPod still connected to this unit via the UP-A1 Dock. • Set your iPod in the UP-A1 Dock after the AV receiver turns En on. 77
  • 78. RI Dock ■ Operating Notes With the RI Dock, you can easily play the music stored on • Use the AV receiver’s volume control to adjust the playback your Apple iPod through the AV receiver and enjoy great volume. sound, and watch iPod slideshows and videos on your TV. • While your iPod is inserted in the ND-S1 or RI Dock, its vol- In addition, the onscreen display (OSD) allows you to ume control has no effect. If you adjust your iPod models vol- ume control while it’s in the UP-A1 Dock, make sure it’s not set view, navigate, and select your iPod model’s contents on too high before you reconnect your headphones. your TV, and with the supplied remote controller, you can control your iPod from the comfort of your sofa. You can even use the AV receiver’s remote controller to operate Note your iPod. • On the 5th generation iPod and iPod nano, the click wheel is disabled during playback. For ND-S1, use iPod button to start Note and stop playback and the remote controller to control other iPod • Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the AV functions. receiver’s remote controller for the first time (➔ 82). • Connect the RI Dock to the AV receiver with an cable (➔ 76). Controlling Your iPod • Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or “HDD/ By pressing REMOTE MODE that’s been programmed DOCK”. with the remote control code for your Dock, you can con- • Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK” (➔ 27). trol your iPod in the Dock. ■ System Function See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for details on System On entering a remote control code (➔ 82). When you turn on the AV receiver, the ND-S1, RI Dock See the Dock’s instruction manual for more information. and iPod turn on automatically. In addition, when the ■ UP-A1 Dock ND-S1, RI Dock and iPod are on, the AV receiver can be turned on by pressing ON/STANDBY. PORT is preprogrammed with the remote control code for controlling a Dock with Universal Port connector. Auto Power On You can control your iPod when “PORT” is selected as If you press the remote controller’s while the AV the input source. receiver is on Standby, the AV receiver will automatically turn on, select your iPod as the input source, and your Without the RI Control iPod will start playback. Direct Change You must enter a remote control code 82990 first (➔ 82). If you start iPod playback while listening to another input ■ ND-S1 source, the AV receiver will automatically switch to the • Select “iPod” using ND-S1’s iPod/PC button. input to which the ND-S1 and RI Dock is connected. Using the AV receiver’s Remote Controller ■ RI Dock You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to control • Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or “HDD/ basic iPod functions. DOCK”. Using Your iPod models Alarm Clock • ON/STANDBY may not work with a remote control If you use the Alarm Clock function on your iPod to start code (without ). In this case, make an connection playback, the AV receiver will automatically turn on at the and enter a remote control code 81993 (with ). specified time and select your iPod as the input source. Note With the RI Control • Linked operations do not work with video playback or when the In this case, make an connection and enter a remote alarm is set to play a sound. • If you use your iPod with any other accessories, iPod playback control code 81993 (with ). detection may not work. • Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK” (➔ 27). • This function works only in the Standard mode (➔ 79). En 78
  • 79. ✔: Available buttons Press the appropriate REMOTE MODE first. Onkyo Dock UP-A1 Dock Dock ND-S1 Buttons ON, STANDBY ✔ ✔*1 TOP MENU ✔*5 ✔*6 / / / ENTER ✔ ✔*5 ✔ PLAYLIST / ✔*3 ✔ ✔ , , , , , ✔ ✔ ✔ , REPEAT ✔ ✔ ✔ RANDOM ✔ ✔ ✔ PLAY MODE ✔*4 ✔*5 ✔*4 DISPLAY*7 ✔*2 ✔*5 ✔ MUTING ✔ ✔*5 ✔ ALBUM +/– ✔ ✔ ✔ VOL / ✔ ✔*5 ✔ MENU ✔*5 ✔ RETURN ✔ • With some iPod models, generations and RI Docks, certain buttons may not work as expected. • For detailed operation of the iPod, please refer to the instruction manual of RI Dock. *1 This button does not turn the Onkyo DS-A2 or DS-A2X RI Dock on or off. Your iPod may not respond the first time you press this button, in which case you should press it again. This is because the remote controller transmits the On and Standby commands alternately, so if your iPod is already on, it will remain on when the remote controller transmits an On command. Similarly, if your iPod is already off, it will remain off when the remote controller transmits an Off command. *2 Press DISPLAY to change the following modes: Standard mode Nothing is displayed on your TV and you navigate and select your contents by using your iPod models display. Only this mode can playback the video. Extended mode (Music) Playlists (artists, albums, songs, and so on) are displayed on your TV, and you can navigate and select your music while looking at your TV. Extended mode (Video) Playlists (Movies, Music Videos, TV Shows, Video Podcasts, or Rentals) are displayed on your TV, and you can navigate and select your video while looking at your TV. *3 In Extended mode (see *2), PLAYLIST is used as the page jump button. With the page modes, you can quickly locate your favorite songs even when your song lists, artist lists, and so on are very long. *4 Resume mode With the Resume function, you can resume playback of the song that was playing when you removed your iPod from the RI Dock or Standard mode is selected. *5 Operation can be performed if you connect ND-S1 with an cable. *6 TOP MENU works as a Mode button when used with a DS-A2 RI Dock. *7 DISPLAY turns on backlight for 30 seconds. Note • In Extended mode (see *2), the playback will be continued even if the AV receiver is turned off. • In Extended mode (see *2), you cannot operate your iPod directly. • In Extended mode (see *2), it may take some time to acquire the contents. En 79
  • 80. Controlling Other Components You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller (RC-771M) to control your other AV components, includ- 4 Use / to select remote mode, and then press ENTER. ing those made by other manufacturers. This section The category selection menu appears. explains how to enter the remote control code (with the default underlined) for a component that you want to con- 8–1. Remote Mode Setup TV trol: DVD, TV, CD, etc. TV TV/DVD • Learn commands directly from another component’s TV/VCR remote controller (➔ 86). • Program ACTIVITIES to perform a sequence of up to 32 5 Use / to select category, and then press remote control actions (➔ 87). ENTER. The brand name input panel appears. Preprogrammed Remote Control 8–1. Remote Mode Setup TV Codes Category Brand TV The following REMOTE MODE are preprogrammed with remote control codes for controlling the components A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z listed. You do not need to enter a remote control code to 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 – & @ Space Back Space Search control these components. For details on controlling these components, see the pages 6 indicated. Use / / / to select a character, and then BD/DVD Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player (➔ 83) press ENTER. TV/CD Onkyo CD player (➔ 83) Repeat this step from the 1st character to the 3rd character of the brand name. PORT Onkyo Universal Port Option (➔ 78) When you have entered the 3rd character, press ENTER. Looking up for Remote Control Code After searching, a list of the brand name appears. You can look up for appropriate remote control code from 8–1. Remote Mode Setup TV on-screen setup menu. Category TV Brand Note • This setting can be carried out by using on-screen setup menu Sonawa Sonber only. Songba Sonic 1 Soniko Press RECEIVER followed by SETUP. Search DB The main menu appears onscreen. If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the appropriate external input is selected on your TV. 7 When you have a network connection, use to select “Search DB”, and then press ENTER. 2 Use / to select “Remote Controller Setup”, The AV receiver accesses and searches the data- base. After searching, a list of the brand name and then press ENTER. The “Remote Controller Setup” menu appears. appears. 8–1. Remote Mode Setup TV 8. Remote Controller Setup Category TV 1. Remote Mode Setup Brand 2. Activities Setup Sonawa Sonber 3 Songba Use / to select “Remote Mode Setup”, and Sonic Soniko then press ENTER. Not Listed The “Remote Mode Setup” menu appears. 8–1. Remote Mode Setup Tip TV • If you cannot access the database, a message “Cannot BD/DVD VCR/DVR connect to datebase.” will appear. Press ENTER to CBL/SAT GAME return to the previous step. PC AUX • If the brand name is not found, use to select “Not TV/CD Listed”, and then press ENTER. PHONO When you do NOT have a network connection, skip this step and go to step 8. En 80
  • 81. 8 When you have a network connection, select the brand name again, and then press ENTER. 13 When you have a network connection, a mes- sage “Successful” will appear. Now the transfer When you do NOT have a network connection, is successful! use / to select the brand name, and then You’ll return to the category selection menu. press ENTER. Press SETUP to end the remote mode setup. The following screen appears. When you do NOT have a network connection, the following screen appears. 8–1. Remote Mode Setup TV Push any key (except for arrow buttons and Category TV Brand Sonic ENTER) to see if the component responds. Model (Option) 8–1. Remote Mode Setup TV Category TV Brand XXXXX Code xxxxx[***/***] Skip 1. Push some key to see if the TV responds. Search by model number( via network ) (except Arrow and Enter.) 2. Choose “Works” or “Doesn’t work”. 9 The AV receiver accesses and searches the database. Select “Search by model number( via * Works Doesn’t work (Try next code) network )”, and then press ENTER. When you * When category other than TV have been selected, do NOT have a network connection, select the content is different. “Skip” when you don’t want to select the model, and then press ENTER. 14 If you can control component, press If you select “Skip”, you will go to step 11. RECEIVER, use / to select “Works”, and then press ENTER. 10 Enter the model in a similar manner as in the case of the brand name (step 6). 8–1. Remote Mode Setup TV Category TV Tip Brand XXXXX Code xxxxx[***/***] • After entering the 3rd character, press ENTER to start Now we are ready to transfer data to the remote. searching. Please hold the remote so that it is facing the receiver. Use ENTER button of your remote to activate “OK”. • You cannot enter a space character. Ready? 11 Use / to select the model, and then press OK ENTER. If the brand name is not found, use to select If you cannot control component, use / to “Not Listed”, and then press ENTER. select “Doesn’t work (Try next code)” and After searching is completed, a message for press ENTER. remote control code transfer will appear. The next code appears. 8–1. Remote Mode Setup Category TV TV 15 Press ENTER to transfer the determined code. Brand XXXXX Model xxxxx[***/***] Remote control sensor (Transmitter) Now we are ready to transfer data to remote. Please hold remote so that it is facing the receiver. Incoming sensor Ready? 15 OK 15 Approx. 12 While pointing the remote controller at the AV 15° off center 16ft. (5 m) (Left/Right/Up/Down) receiver’s remote control sensor, press ENTER. Remote control sensor (Transmitter) 16 Press ENTER. You’ll return to the category selection menu. Incoming sensor Press SETUP to end the remote mode setup. 15 15 Approx. 15° off center 16ft. (5 m) (Left/Right/Up/Down) En 81
  • 82. Entering Remote Control Codes 2 Enter the appropriate remote control code for REMOTE MODE. You’ll need to enter a code for each component that you • BD/DVD want to control. 31612: 1 Onkyo DVD player with Look up the appropriate remote control code in • TV/CD the separate Remote Control Codes list. 71327: The codes are organized by category (e.g., DVD player, TV, etc.). Onkyo CD player with 42157: 2 While holding down REMOTE MODE to which you want to enter a code, press and hold down Onkyo cassette tape deck with DISPLAY (about 3 seconds). • PORT The REMOTE MODE button lights. 81993: Onkyo Dock with Note See the previous section for how to enter remote • Remote control codes cannot be entered for RECEIVER control codes. and ZONE. • Only TV remote control codes can be entered for TV. Note • Except for RECEIVER, TV and ZONE, remote control • When using a cassette tape deck connected via , press codes from any category can be entered as REMOTE and hold TV/CD to switch to TAPE. 3 MODE. However, these buttons also work as input selec- tor buttons (➔ 25), so choose a REMOTE MODE that Press REMOTE MODE, point the remote control- corresponds with the input to which you connect your ler at the AV receiver, and operate the component. component. For example, if you connect your CD player to the CD input, choose TV/CD when entering its remote If you want to control an Onkyo component by pointing control code. the remote controller directly at it, or you want to control 3 Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the 5-digit remote control code. an Onkyo component that’s not connected via following remote control codes: , use the REMOTE MODE button flashes twice. • BD/DVD If the remote control code is not entered success- 30627: fully, REMOTE MODE button will flash once Onkyo DVD player without slowly. • TV/CD 71817: Note Onkyo CD player without • The remote control codes provided are correct at the time of 11807: printing, but are subject to change. TV with If you want to control an Onkyo component by pointing the Remote Control Codes for Onkyo remote controller directly at it, use the following remote control codes: Components Connected via 32900: Onkyo components that are connected via are con- Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player trolled by pointing the remote controller at the AV 32901: receiver, not the component. This allows you to control Onkyo HD-DVD player components that are out of view, in a rack, for example. 70868: Onkyo MD recorder without 1 Make sure the Onkyo component is connected 71323: with an cable and an analog audio cable Onkyo CD recorder without (RCA). 82990: See “Connecting Onkyo u Components” for details Onkyo Dock without (➔ 20). Note • If you connect a cassette tape deck to the TV/CD IN jack, or connect an RI Dock to the to the TV/CD IN or VCR/DVR IN or GAME IN jacks, for to work properly, you must set the Input Display accordingly (➔ 27). En 82
  • 83. Resetting REMOTE MODE Buttons Controlling Other Components You can reset a REMOTE MODE to its default remote By pressing REMOTE MODE that’s been programmed control code. with the remote control code for your component, you can control your component as below. 1 While holding down REMOTE MODE that you want to reset, press and hold down HOME until For details on entering a remote control code for other components, see “Entering Remote Control Codes” REMOTE MODE button lights (about 3 seconds). (➔ 82). 2 Within 30 seconds, press REMOTE MODE again. Controlling a TV REMOTE MODE button flashes twice, indicating that the button has been reset. TV is preprogrammed with the remote control code for Each of REMOTE MODE is preprogrammed with a controlling a TV that supports the *1 (limited to remote control code. When a button is reset, its pre- some models). The TV must be able to receive remote programmed code is restored. control commands via and be connected to the Note AV receiver via HDMI. If controlling your TV via • The learning command is also reset. doesn’t work very well, program your TV’s remote control code into TV and use the TV remote mode to control your TV. Resetting the Remote Controller You can reset the remote controller to its default settings. Controlling a Blu-ray Disc/DVD Player, HD DVD Player or DVD Recorder 1 While holding down RECEIVER, press and hold down HOME until RECEIVER lights (about 3 sec- BD/DVD is preprogrammed with the remote control code for controlling a component that supports the *1 onds). (limited to some models). The component must be able to 2 Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER again. receive remote control commands via and be RECEIVER flashes twice, indicating that the connected to the AV receiver via HDMI. remote controller has been reset. *1 The supported by the AV receiver is the CEC system control function of the HDMI standard. En 83
  • 84. ✔: Available buttons Press the appropriate REMOTE MODE first. Components DVD player/DVD recorder CD player/CD recorder Cassette tape deck Blu-ray Disc player Satellite receiver HD DVD player Cable receiver MD recorder VCR/PVR TV Buttons ON, STANDBY ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ , INPUT, ✔ TV VOL / GUIDE ✔ ✔ ✔ TOP MENU ✔ / / / ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ENTER SETUP ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ , , , , ✔*1 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔*3 , , SEARCH ✔*1*2 ✔*1 ✔*2 ✔*2 ✔ REPEAT ✔*1*2 ✔ ✔*2 ✔*2 ✔ RANDOM ✔*1*2 ✔*1 ✔*2 ✔*2 ✔ PLAY MODE ✔*1*2 ✔*1 ✔*2 ✔*2 ✔ Number: 1 to 9, 0 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Number: +10 ✔*1 ✔*1 ✔ ✔ ✔ DISPLAY ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ MUTING ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ CH +/– ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ DISC +/– ✔ ✔ PREV CH ✔ ✔ ✔ MENU ✔ RETURN ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ CLR ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ *1 The function is not supported. The sup- ported by the AV receiver is the CEC system control function of the HDMI standard. *2 These buttons function as colored buttons or A, B, C, D but- tons. *3 (Pause) functions as reverse playback. Note • See the “Controlling Your iPod” about the operation of iPod (➔ 78). Note • With some components, certain buttons may not work as expected, and some may not work at all. En 84
  • 85. Activities Setup ■ Source Power On Enable: Via onscreen menu, you can specify what actions will be Source to turn on “Enable”. taken by the Easy macro command in the Easy macro Disable: mode (➔ 27). Source to turn on “Disable”. This option enables the Source to turn on when 1 Press RECEIVER followed by SETUP. ACTIVITIES is pressed. The main menu appears onscreen. ■ Receiver Power On Tip Enable: • If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the appropri- AV receiver to turn on “Enable”. ate external input is selected on your TV. Disable: 2 Use / to select “Remote Controller Setup”, and AV receiver to turn on “Disable”. then press ENTER. This option enables the AV receiver to turn on The “Remote Controller Setup” menu appears. when ACTIVITIES is pressed. 8. Remote Controller Setup ■ Receiver Source Change 1. Remote Mode Setup 2. Activities Setup Enable: AV receiver input selector is change. Disable: 3 Use / to select “Activities Setup”, and then AV receiver input selector is not change. This option enables the AV receiver input selector press ENTER. The “Activities Setup” menu appears. to change when ACTIVITIES is pressed. ■ Source Play 8–2. Activities Setup My Movie Enable: My TV My Music Start playback the source of “Enable”. Disable: Start playback the source of “Disable”. 4 Use / to select “My Movie”, “My TV”, or “My This option enables the Source to start playback Music”, and then press ENTER. when ACTIVITIES is pressed. ■ My Movie: Actions for MY MOVIE is changed. Here are the default settings. ■ My TV: Item Default Settings Actions for MY TV is changed. My Movie My TV My Music Source BD/DVD CBL/SAT CD ■ My Music: TV Power On Enable Enable Disable Actions for MY MUSIC is changed. Source Power On Enable Enable Enable 5 Use / to select an item, and use / to change Receiver Power Enable Enable Enable the settings. On The items are explained below. Receiver Source Enable Enable Enable Change 8–2. Activities Setup My Movie Source Play Enable Disable Enable Source BD/DVD TV Power On Enable Source Power On Enable Receiver Power On Enable Receiver Source Change Enable Source Play Enable ■ Source BD/DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, AUX, TUNER, TV/CD, PHONO, PORT, NET/USB With this setting, you can choose the input source. ■ TV Power On Enable: TV to turn on “Enable”. Disable: TV to turn on “Disable”. This option enables the TV to turn on when ACTIVITIES is pressed. En 85
  • 86. 6 Press ENTER. Learning Commands A message for transfer will appear. The AV receiver’s remote controller can learn the com- 8–2. Activities Setup My Movie mands of other remote controllers. By transmitting, for example, the Play command from your CD player’s Now we are ready to transfer data to the remote. remote controller, the remote controller can learn it, and Please hold the remote so that it is facing the receiver. then transmit the exact same command when its is Use ENTER button of your remote to activate “OK”. Ready? pressed in the CD remote mode. OK This is useful when you’ve entered the appropriate remote control code (➔ 82) but some buttons don’t work as expected. To use the remote controller, point it at the AV receiver’s remote control sensor, as shown below. Transmitter AV receiver ON Incoming sensor 15 REMOTE MODE 15 Approx. 15° off center 16ft. (5 m) (Left/Right/Up/Down) 7 Press ENTER. 1 While holding down REMOTE MODE for the 8–2. Activities Setup My Movie mode in which you want to use the command, press and hold down ON until REMOTE MODE button lights (about 3 seconds). Wait... 2 On the supplied remote controller, press the but- ton you want to learn the new command. 3 Point the remote controllers at each other, about 2 to 6 inches (5 to 15 cm) apart, and then press and hold the button whose command you want to learn When the transfer is successful, the following screen until REMOTE MODE button flashes. appears. If the command is learned successfully, REMOTE MODE button flashes twice. 8–2. Activities Setup My Movie E M LU VO G TIN U STE TEON T L SE H C ET S ER E D N PR C D DV Successful H I-CT TU About 2 to 6 ULTPU O N M IN R O P TO PH U O R RE G SU D LE R C O SE E C M T UN -2 IS D EO D PU T C ER VID M PE IM IN inches (5 to 15 cm) -1 D TA EO P VID EE SL D DV ER W PO Return 8 Press ENTER. Supplied remote The “Activities Setup” menu appears onscreen. controller 9 Press SETUP. The setup menu closes. 4 To learn more commands, repeat steps 2 and 3. Press any REMOTE MODE when you’ve finished. REMOTE MODE button flashes twice. En 86
  • 87. Note 1 While holding down RECEIVER, press and hold down MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC until • The following buttons cannot learn new commands: REMOTE MODE, ALL OFF, MY MOVIE, MY TV, MY MUSIC. MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC lights (about • The remote controller can learn approximately 70 to 90 com- 3 seconds). mands, although this will be less if commands that use a lot of memory are learned. 2 Press the buttons whose actions you want to pro- gram into the macro in the order you want them • Remote controller buttons such as Play, Stop, Pause, and so on performed. are preprogrammed with commands for controlling Onkyo CD players, cassette decks, and DVD players. However, they can For the CD example above, you’d press the following learn new commands, and you can restore the preprogrammed buttons: ON, TV/CD, . commands at any time by resetting the remote controller (➔ 83). Note • To overwrite a previously learned command, repeat this proce- • MODE is invalid at macro making operation. dure. • Depending on the remote controller that you are using, there may be some buttons that won’t work as expected, or even some 3 When you’ve finished, press ACTIVITIES again. ACTIVITIES button flashes twice. remotes that cannot be learned at all. If you enter 32 commands, the process will finish • Only commands from infrared remote controllers can be learned. automatically. • When the remote controller’s batteries expire, all learned com- mands will be lost and will have to be learned all over again, so don’t discard your other remote controllers. Note ■ Deleting Learning Commands • Once you have taught a new macro commands, the original macro will no longer work. If you retrieve it, you will have to 1. While holding down REMOTE MODE for the mode taught again. in which you want to delete the command, press and hold down TV until REMOTE MODE button Running Macros lights (about 3 seconds). 2. Press REMOTE MODE or the button from which you Press MY MOVIE, MY TV, or MY MUSIC. want to delete the commands. REMOTE MODE button flashes twice. The commands in the macro are transmitted in the order in which they were programmed. Keep the When you press REMOTE MODE, all commands remote controller pointed at the AV receiver until all learned in that remote mode will be deleted. of the commands have been transmitted. Macros can be run at any time, regardless of the cur- Using Normal Macros rent remote controller mode. You can program the remote controller’s ACTIVITIES to perform a sequence of remote control actions. Deleting Macros Example: To play a CD you typically need to perform the following 1 While holding down HOME, press and hold down ALL OFF until ALL OFF lights (about 3 seconds). actions: 1. Press RECEIVER to select the Receiver remote con- troller mode. 2 Press ALL OFF again. ALL OFF flashes twice. 2. Press ON to turn on the AV receiver. Note 3. Press TV/CD to select the TV/CD input source. • It changes into Easy macro mode when the macro is 4. Press to start playback on the CD player. deleted (➔ 27). You can program ACTIVITIES so that all four actions are • When you using Normal macro mode, you cannot use the performed with just one button press. easy macro command including the change of the source component. Making Macros Each ACTIVITIES can store one macro, and each macro can contain up to 32 commands. ALL OFF MY MOVIE, MY TV, MY MUSIC RECEIVER En 87
  • 88. Others Troubleshooting If you have any trouble using the AV receiver, look for a Audio solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue your- self, contact your Onkyo dealer. ■ There’s no sound, or it’s very quiet Make sure that the digital input source is selected 45 If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting the properly. AV receiver before contacting your Onkyo dealer. Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed 17 To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults, turn it in all the way. on and, while holding down VCR/DVR, press ON/ Make sure that the inputs and outputs of all compo- 18-20 STANDBY. “Clear” will appear on the display and nents are connected properly. the AV receiver will enter Standby mode. Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is 13 correct, and that the bare wires are in contact with the metal part of each speaker terminal. Make sure that the input source is properly selected. 25 Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting. 13 Check the volume. The AV receiver is designed for — Note that resetting the AV receiver will delete your home theater enjoyment. It has a wide volume range, radio presets and custom settings. allowing precise adjustment. If the MUTING indicator is flashing on the display, 26 press the remote controller’s MUTING to unmute the AV receiver. While a pair of headphones is connected to the 27 PHONES jack, no sound is output by the speakers. If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to — an HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output set- tings, and be sure to select a supported audio format. RECEIVER Check the digital audio output setting on the con- — nected device. On some game consoles, such as those that support DVD, the default setting is off. With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an — HOME audio output format from a menu. If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must — connect an MC head amp, or an MC transformer. To reset the remote controller to its factory defaults, Make sure that none of the connecting cables are — while holding down RECEIVER, press and hold down bent, twisted, or damaged. HOME until RECEIVER button lights (about 3 sec- Not all listening modes use all speakers. 36 onds). Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER again. Specify the speaker distances and adjust the individ- 46 ual speaker levels. Power Make sure that the speaker setup microphone is not — still connected. ■ Can’t turn on the AV receiver The input signal format is set to “PCM” or “DTS”. 60 Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged — Set it to “Auto”. into the wall outlet. Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait five — ■ Only the front speakers produce sound seconds or more, then plug it in again. When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected, — only the front speakers and subwoofer produce ■ The STANDBY indicator flashes red sound. The protection circuit has been activated. Remove — In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers 49 the power cord from the wall outlet immediately. output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set Disconnect all speaker cables and input sources, and to “Left / Right”. leave the AV receiver with its power cord discon- Check the Speaker Configuration. 46 nected for 1 hour. After that, reconnect the power cord and set the volume to maximum. If the AV receiver stays on, set the volume to minimum, dis- connect the power cord, and reconnect your speakers and input sources. If the AV receiver turns off when you set the volume to maximum, disconnect the power cord, and contact your Onkyo dealer. En 88
  • 89. ■ Only the center speaker produces sound ■ Can’t get 6.1/7.1 playback If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro — If no surround back speakers, front wide and front — Logic IIx Music, or Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game lis- high speakers are connected, or the Zone 2 speakers tening mode with a mono source, such as an AM are being used, 6.1/7.1 playback is not possible. radio station or mono TV program, the sound is con- You can not always select all of the listening modes, 36–40 centrated in the center speaker. depending on the number of the speakers connected. In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers 49 output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set ■ The speaker volume cannot be set as required to “Center”. (The volume cannot be set to 100.0(MAX)) Make sure the speakers are configured correctly. 46 Check to see if a maximum volume has been set. 55 ■ The surround speakers produce no sound If the volume level of each individual speaker has 28, 46 been adjusted to high positive values, then the maxi- When the T-D (Theater-Dimensional), Stereo or — mum master volume possible may be reduced. Note Mono listening mode is selected, the surround that the individual speaker volume levels are set speakers produce no sound. automatically after Audyssey MultEQ® Room Cor- Depending on the source and current listening mode, — rection and Speaker Setup function has been com- not much sound may be produced by the surround pleted. speakers. Try selecting another listening mode. Make sure the speakers are configured correctly. 46 ■ Noise can be heard Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power — ■ The center speaker produces no sound cords, speaker cables, and so on may degrade the When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected, — audio performance, so don’t do it. the center speaker produces no sound. An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try — In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers 49 repositioning your cables. output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to “Left / Right”. ■ The Late Night function doesn’t work Make sure the speakers are configured correctly. 46 Make sure the source material is Dolby Digital, 59 Dolby Digital Plus, and Dolby TrueHD. ■ The front high, front wide and surround back speakers produce no sound ■ About DTS signals Depending on the current listening mode, no sound 36 When DTS program material ends and the DTS bit- — may be produced by the front high, front wide and stream stops, the AV receiver remains in DTS listen- surround back speakers. Select another listening ing mode and the DTS indicator remains on. This is mode. to prevent noise when you use the pause, fast for- Not much sound may be produced by the front high, — ward, or fast reverse function on your player. If you front wide and surround back speakers with some switch your player from DTS to PCM, because the sources. AV receiver does not switch formats immediately, Make sure the speakers are configured correctly. 46 you may not hear any sound, in which case you should stop your player for about three seconds, and While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback in the 70 then resume playback. main room is reduced to 5.1-channels and the front high, front wide and surround back speakers produce With some CD and LD players, you won’t be able to — no sound. playback DTS material properly even though your player is connected to a digital input on the AV receiver. This is usually because the DTS bitstream ■ The subwoofer produces no sound has been processed (e.g., output level, sampling rate, When you play source material that contains no — or frequency response changed) and the AV receiver information in the LFE channel, the subwoofer pro- doesn’t recognize it as a genuine DTS signal. In such duces no sound. cases, you may hear noise. Make sure the speakers are configured correctly. 46 When playing DTS program material, using the — pause, fast forward, or fast reverse function on your player may produce a short audible noise. This is not ■ There’s no sound with a certain signal format a malfunction. Check the digital audio output setting on the con- — nected device. On some game consoles, such as ■ The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN those that support DVD, the default setting is off. can’t be heard With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an — audio output format from a menu. Since it takes longer to identify the format of an — HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio sig- Depending on the input signal, some listening modes 36–40 nals, audio output may not start immediately. cannot be selected. ■ Can’t select the Pure Audio listening mode The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected — while Zone 2/3 is on. En 89
  • 90. Video Tuner ■ There’s no picture ■ Reception is noisy, FM stereo reception is Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed 17 noisy, or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t light in all the way. Relocate your antenna. — Make sure that each video component is properly 18, 19, Move the AV receiver away from your TV or com- — connected. 76 puter. If your TV is connected to the HDMI output, select 43 Listen to the station in mono. 31 “- - - - -” in the “HDMI Input” setup to watch com- When listening to an AM station, operating the — posite video, and component video sources. remote controller may cause noise. If the video source is connected to a component 19, 42 Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference. — video input, you must assign that input to an input selector, and your TV must be connected to either Concrete walls weaken radio signals. — the HDMI output or COMPONENT VIDEO MON- If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor — ITOR OUT. antenna. If the video source is connected to a composite video 19 input, your TV must be connected to the HDMI out- Remote Controller put or the corresponding composite video output. If the video source is connected to an HDMI input, 18, 43 ■ The remote controller doesn’t work you must assign that input to an input selector, and your TV must be connected to the HDMI output. Before operating this unit, be sure to press — RECEIVER. While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the — video circuitry is turned off and only video signals Make sure that the batteries are installed with the 4 input through HDMI IN can be output. correct polarity. On your TV, make sure that the video input to which — Install new batteries. Don’t mix different types of 4 the AV receiver is connected is selected. batteries, or old and new batteries. Make sure that the remote controller is not too far 4 ■ There’s no picture from a source connected to away from the AV receiver, and that there’s no obstruction between the remote controller and the an HDMI IN AV receiver’s remote control sensor. Reliable operation with an HDMI-to-DVI adapter is 95 Make sure that the AV receiver is not subjected to — not guaranteed. In addition, video signals from a PC direct sunshine or inverter-type fluorescent lights. are not guaranteed. Relocate if necessary. When the Resolution is set to any resolution not sup- 43 If the AV receiver is installed in a rack or cabinet — ported by the TV, no video is output by the HDMI with colored-glass doors, the remote controller may outputs. not work reliably when the doors are closed. If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the — Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote con- 11, 83 AV receiver’s display, this indicates that your TV troller mode. does not support the current video resolution and When using the remote controller to control other — you need to select another resolution on your DVD manufacturers’ AV components, some buttons may player. not work as expected. Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control 82 ■ The on-screen menus don’t appear code. (European, Australian and Asian models) Specify 55 Make sure to set the same ID on both the AV receiver 55 the TV system used in your area in the TV Format and remote controller. Setup. On your TV, make sure that the video input to which — ■ Can’t control other components the AV receiver is connected is selected. If it’s an Onkyo component, make sure that the 20 When the AV receiver doesn’t connect TV with — HDMI, onscreen menus are not displayed. cable and analog audio cable are connected properly. Connecting only an cable won’t work. ■ The picture is distorted Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote con- 11, 83 troller mode. (European, Australian and Asian models) Specify 55 If you’ve connected a cassette tape deck, to the TV/ 27 the TV system used in your area in the TV Format. CD IN jack, or an RI Dock to the TV/CD IN or GAME IN or VCR/DVR IN jacks, for the remote ■ The on screen display does not appear controller to work properly, you must set the display. Depending on the input signal, the on screen display 55 If you cannot operate it, you will need to enter the 80 may not appear when the input signal from the appropriate remote control code. HDMI IN is output to a device connected to the To control another manufacturer’s component, point 82 HDMI output. the remote controller at that component. To control an Onkyo component that’s connected via 82 , point the remote controller at the AV receiver. Be sure to enter the appropriate remote control code first. En 90
  • 91. To control an Onkyo component that’s not connected 82 If the server is serving large music files to several — via , point the remote controller at the compo- networked devices simultaneously, the network may nent. Be sure to enter the appropriate remote control become overloaded and playback may be inter- code first. rupted. Reduce the number of playback devices on The entered remote control code may not be correct. — the network, upgrade your network, or use a switch If more than one code is listed, try each one. instead of a hub. ■ Can’t learn commands from another remote ■ Can’t connect to the AV receiver from a Web controller browser When learning commands, make sure that the trans- — If you’re using DHCP, your router may not always — mitting ends of both remote controllers are pointing allocate the same IP address to the AV receiver, so if at each other. you find that you can’t connect to a server or Internet radio station, recheck the AV receiver’s IP address Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that — on Network screen. cannot be used for learning? Some commands can- not be learned, especially those that contain several Check the “Network Settings”. 67 instructions. USB Mass Storage Device Playback Recording ■ Can’t access the music files on a USB device ■ Can’t record Make sure the USB device is plugged in properly. — On your recorder, make sure the correct input is — The AV receiver supports USB devices that support — selected. the USB mass storage device class. However, play- To prevent signal loops and damage to the AV — back may not be possible with some USB devices receiver, input signals are not fed through to outputs even if they conform to the USB mass storage device with the same name (VCR/DVR IN to VCR/DVR class. OUT). USB memory devices with security functions cannot — When the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, — be played. recording is not possible because no video signals are output. Select another listening mode. Others Zone 2/3 ■ Stand-by power consumption In the following cases, the power consumption could 56, 68, ■ There’s no sound reach a maximum of 55W: 76 Only components connected to analog inputs can be — 1. You are using the Universal Port jack. played in Zone 2/3. 2. “Control” is set to “Enable” in the “Network” setting. ■ The Zone 2 speakers produce no sound 3. “HDMI Control (RIHD)” setting is set to “On”. (Depending on the TV status, the AV Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if “Speakers 45 receiver will enter Standby mode as usual.) Type(Front)” is set to “Bi-Amp”. To use the Zone 2 speakers, you must set the “Pow- 71 ■ The sound changes when I connect my ered Zone2” setting to “Act”. headphones When a pair of headphones is connected, the listen- — Music Server and Internet Radio ing mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo, Mono, Direct, or Pure Audio. ■ Can’t access the server or Internet radio Check the network connection between the AV — ■ The speaker distance cannot be set as required receiver and your router or switch. In some cases, corrected values suitable for home — Make sure that your modem and router are properly — theater use may be set automatically. connected, and make sure they are both turned on. Make sure the server is up and running and compati- 65, 66 ■ The display doesn’t work ble with the AV receiver. The display is turned off when the Pure Audio listen- — Check the “Network Settings”. 67 ing mode is selected. ■ Playback stops while listening to music files on ■ How do I change the language of a multiplex the server source Make sure your server is compatible with the AV 65, 66 Use the “Multiplex” setting on the “Audio Adjust” 49 receiver. menu to select “Main” or “Sub”. If you download or copy large files on your com- — puter, playback may be interrupted. Try closing any unused programs, use a more powerful computer, or use a dedicated server. En 91
  • 92. ■ The functions don’t work Important Note Regarding Video Playback To use , you must make an connection and an 20 analog audio connection (RCA) between the compo- The AV receiver can upconvert component video, S- nent and AV receiver, even if they are connected dig- Video, and composite video sources for display on a TV itally. connected to the HDMI output. However, if the picture quality of the source is poor, upconversion may make the ■ The functions System On/Auto Power On and picture worse or disappear altogether. Direct Change don’t work for components In this case, try the following: connected via These functions don’t work when Zone 2/3 is turned 20 1 If the video source is connected to a component video input, connect your TV to the COMPO- on. NENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT. ■ When performing “Audyssey MultEQ® Room If the video source is connected to an S-Video input, Correction and Speaker Setup”, the connect your TV to a MONITOR OUT S. measurement fails showing the message If the video source is connected to a composite video “Ambient noise is too high.”. input, connect your TV to MONITOR OUT V. 2 This can be caused by any malfunction in your — On the main menu, select “Input/Output Assign”, speaker unit. Check if the unit produces normal sounds. and then select “HDMI Input”. Select the relevant input selector, and assign it to ■ The following settings can be made for the “- - - - -” (➔ 43). 3 S-Video and composite video inputs On the main menu, select “Input/Output Assign”, You must use the buttons on the unit to make these set- and then select “Component Video Input” (➔ 44): tings. 1. While holding down the input selector button for the input If the video source is connected to COMPO- source that you want to set, press SETUP. NENT VIDEO IN 1, select the relevant input 2. Use / to change the setting. selector, and assign it to “IN1”. 3. Press the input selector button for the input source that you want to set when you’ve finished. If the video source is connected to COMPO- • Video Attenuation NENT VIDEO IN 2, select the relevant input selector, and assign it to “IN2”. This setting can be made for the BD/DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME, or AUX input. If the video source is connected to an S-Video If you have a games console connected to the composite input or composite video input, select the relevant video input, and the picture isn’t very clear, you can input selector, and assign it to “- - - - -”. attenuate the gain. Video ATT:OFF: (default). Note Video ATT:ON: Gain reduced by 2dB. • If “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog”, press VCR/DVR and RETURN on the AV receiver at the same time. Select The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for signal “Skip” in the “VideoProcessor” setting on the display. To reset processing and control functions. In very rare situations, back to the original setting, press the same button at the same time. If you select “Use”, the AV receiver will output video sig- severe interference, noise from an external source, or nals from the video processor. static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait at least five seconds, and then plug it back in again. Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by the unit’s malfunction. Before you record important data, make sure that the material will be recorded cor- rectly. Before disconnecting the power cord from the wall out- let, set the AV receiver to Standby. En 92
  • 93. Specifications Amplifier Section Tuner Section Rated Output Power FM Tuning Frequency Range All channels: (North American) (North American and Taiwan) 135 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm loads, 2 channels 87.5 MHz - 107.9 MHz driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a (Others) 87.5 MHz - 108.0 MHz, RDS maximum total harmonic distortion of AM Tuning Frequency Range 0.08% (FTC) (North American and Taiwan) 145 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm loads, 2 channels 530 kHz - 1710 kHz driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total (Others) harmonic distortion of 0.7% (FTC) 522/530 kHz - 1611/1710 kHz 160 watts minimum continuous power Preset Channel 40 per channel, 6 ohm loads, 2 channels driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total Digital Tuner (North American) harmonic distortion of 0.1% (FTC) SIRIUS (Others) 7 ch × 180 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven General (IEC) Maximum Effective Output Power (Asian) Power Supply (North American and Taiwan) 7 ch × 230 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven AC 120 V, 60 Hz (Others) AC 220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz (JEITA) Power Consumption (North American) 7.5 A Dynamic Power 300 W (3 Ω, Front) (Others) 710 W 250 W (4 Ω, Front) 150 W (8 Ω, Front) Stand-by Power Consumption THD (Total Harmonic Distortion) (North American and Taiwan) 0.2 W 0.08% (Power Rated) (Others) 0.3 W Damping Factor 60 (Front, 1 kHz, 8 Ω) Dimensions 435 mm × 198.5 mm × 435.5 mm (W × H × D) 17-1/8" × 7-13/16" × 17-1/8" Input Sensitivity and Impedance 200 mV/47 kΩ (LINE) Weight (North American and Taiwan) 2.5 mV/47 kΩ (PHONO MM) 18.3 kg (40.3 lbs.) Rated RCA Output Level and Impedance (Others) 18.4 kg (40.6 lbs.) 200 mV/470 Ω (PRE OUT) ■ HDMI Maximum RCA Output Level and Impedance 4.6 V/470 Ω (PRE OUT) Input IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4, IN 5, IN 6, Phono Overload 70 mV (MM 1 kHz 0.5%) AUX INPUT Frequency Response 5 Hz - 100 kHz/+1 dB, -3 dB (Direct mode) Output (North American and Taiwan) Tone Control Characteristics OUT (European, Australian and Asian) ±10 dB, 50 Hz (BASS) OUT MAIN, OUT SUB ±10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE) Video Resolution 1080p Signal to Noise Ratio 110 dB (LINE, IHF-A) 80 dB (PHONO, IHF-A) Audio Format Dolby TrueHD, DTS Master Audio, DVD-Audio, DSD Speaker Impedance 4 or 6 Ω - 16 Ω Supported 3D, Audio Return Channel, Deep Color, x.v.Color, LipSync, CEC Video Section ■ Video Inputs Input Sensitivity/Output Level and Impedance 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Component and S-Video Y) Component IN 1, IN 2 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (Component PB/CB, PR/CR) S-Video BD/DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME 0.25 Vp-p/75 Ω (S-Video C) Composite BD/DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME, 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Composite) AUX Component Video Frequency Response Analog RGB input PC IN 5 Hz - 100 MHz/+0 dB, -3 dB ■ Video Outputs Component MONITOR OUT S-Video MONITOR OUT, VCR/DVR OUT Composite MONITOR OUT, VCR/DVR OUT ■ Audio Inputs Digital Optical: 2 (Rear), 1 (Front) Coaxial: 3 Analog BD/DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME, PC, TV/CD, AUX, PHONO Multichannel Inputs 7.1 En 93
  • 94. ■ Audio Outputs Analog VCR/DVR, ZONE 2/3 PRE OUT Analog Multichannel Pre Outputs 7 Subwoofer Pre Outputs 2 Speaker Outputs Main (L, R, C, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, FHL, FHR) + ZONE2/Front Wide (L, R) Phones 1 (6.3 ø) ■ Others SETUP MIC 1 RS232 1 Ethernet 1 IR Input 1 IR Output 1 12 V Trigger Out 2 USB 1 Universal Port 1 RI 1 Specifications and features are subject to change without notice. En 94
  • 95. About HDMI Designed to meet the increased demands of digital TV, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a new digital interface standard for connecting TVs, projectors, Blu-ray Disc/DVD players, set-top boxes, and other video compo- nents. Until now, several separate video and audio cables have been required to connect AV components. With HDMI, a single cable can carry control signals, digital video, and up to eight channels of digital audio (2-channel PCM, multichan- nel digital audio, and multichannel PCM). The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface)*1, so TVs and displays with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (This may not work with some TVs and displays, resulting in no picture.) The AV receiver uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection)*2, so only HDCP-compatible components can display the picture. The AV receiver’s HDMI interface is based on the following: Audio Return Channel, 3D, x.v.Color, Deep Color, Lip Sync, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DSD and Multichannel PCM Supported Audio Formats • 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit) • Multichannel linear PCM (up to 7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit) • Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS-HD Master Audio) Your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player must also support HDMI output of the above audio formats. About Copyright Protection The AV receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection)*2, a copy-protection system for digital video signals. Other devices connected to the AV receiver via HDMI must also support HDCP. *1 DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface standard set by the DDWG*3 in 1999. *2 HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The video encryption technology developed by Intel for HDMI/DVI. It’s designed to protect video content and requires a HDCP-compatible device to display the encrypted video. *3 DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel, Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and Silicon Image, this open industry group’s objective is to address the industry’s requirements for a digital connectivity specification for high-performance PCs and digital displays. Note • The HDMI video stream is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface), so TVs and displays with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (Note that DVI connections only carry video, so you’ll need to make a separate connection for audio.) However, reliable operation with such an adapter is not guaranteed. In addition, video signals from a PC are not supported. • The HDMI audio signal (sampling rate, bit length, etc.) may be restricted by the connected source component. If the picture is poor or there’s no sound from a component connected via HDMI, check its setup. Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for details. En 95
  • 96. Using an RIHD-compatible TV, Player, or Recorder , which stands for Remote Interactive over HDMI, is the name of the system control function found on Onkyo components. The AV receiver can be used with CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), which allows system control over HDMI and is part of the HDMI standard. CEC provides interoperability between various components, however, opera- tion with components other than -compatible components cannot be guaranteed. ■ About -compatible components ■ Operations that can be performed with The following components are -compatible. (As connection of February 2010) See the Onkyo web site for latest infor- For -compatible TV mation. The following linked operation is possible by connecting TV the AV receiver to an -compatible TV. • Panasonic VIERA Link compatible TV • The AV receiver will enter Standby mode when the • Toshiba REGZA-LINK compatible TV power of the TV is turned to Standby. • Sharp TV (See Onkyo web site for latest information on • You can set on the menu screen of the TV to either out- compatible models.) put the audio from the speakers connected to the AV Players/Recorders receiver, or from the speakers of the TV. • Onkyo and Integra -compatible players • It is possible to output the video/audio from the antenna • Panasonic VIERA Link compatible players and record- or from the input jack of the TV from the speakers con- ers (only when used together with Panasonic VIERA nected to the AV receiver. (A connection such as optical Link compatible TV) digital cable or similar is required above the HDMI • Toshiba REGZA-LINK compatible players and record- cable.) ers (only when used together with Toshiba REGZA- • Input to the AV receiver can be selected with the remote LINK compatible TV) controller of the TV. • Sharp players and recorders (only when used together • Operations such as volume adjustment or similar for the with Sharp TV) AV receiver can be performed from the remote controller of the TV. * Models other than those mentioned above may have some For -compatible players/recorders interoperability if compatible with CEC which is part of the The following link operation is possible by connecting the HDMI Standard, but operation cannot be guaranteed. AV receiver to an -compatible player/recorder. Note • When the playback is started on the player/recorder, • Do not connect the -compatible component more than input of the AV receiver will switch to the HDMI input the following number to the HDMI input terminal so that the of the player/recorder that is playing back. linked operations work properly. • Operation of the player/recorder is possible with the –Blu-ray Disc/DVD player is up to three. remote controller supplied with the AV receiver. –Blu-ray Disc recorder/DVD recorder/Digital Video Recorder is up to three. * Not all functions may operate depending on the model. –Cable/Satellite Set-top box is up to four. • Do not connect the AV receiver to the other AV receiver/AV amplifier via HDMI. • When the -compatible component more than the above-mentioned is connected, the linked operations are not guaranteed. En 96
  • 97. ■ How to connect and setup 3 Confirm the settings. 1 1. Turn on the power for all connected components. Confirm the connecting and setting. 2. Turn off the power of the TV, and confirm that 1. Connect the HDMI OUT or HDMI OUT MAIN the power of the connected components is turned jack to the HDMI input jack of the TV. off automatically with the link operation. Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc. 3. Turn on the power of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player/recorder. 4. Start playback of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player/ HDMI recorder, and confirm the following. connection • The power of the AV receiver is turned on automatically, and input with the Blu-ray AV receiver Disc/DVD player/recorder connected is selected. DIGITAL AUDIO HDMI • The power of the TV is turned on automati- connection connection cally, and input with the AV receiver con- (OPTICAL) nected is selected. 5. Following the operating instructions of the TV, select “Use the TV speakers” from the menu TV, projector, etc. screen of the TV, and confirm that the audio is 2. Connect the audio output from the TV to the output from the speakers of the TV, and not from OPTICAL IN 2 jack of the AV receiver using an the speakers connected to the AV receiver. optical digital cable. 6. Select “Use the speakers connected from the AV receiver” from the menu screen of the TV, and Note confirm that the audio is output from the speak- • When you use the audio return channel (ARC) function ers connected to the AV receiver, and not from with TV an HDMI (Audio Return Channel) capable TV, this connection is not required (➔ 57). the TV speakers. 3. Connect the HDMI output of the Blu-ray Disc/ Note DVD player/recorder to the HDMI IN 1 jack of • Perform the above operations when you initially use the the AV receiver. AV receiver, when the settings of each component are changed, when the main power of each component is Note turned off, when the power cable is disconnected from the • It is necessary to assign the HDMI input when connecting power supply, or when there has been a power outage. the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player/recorder to other jacks (➔ 43). Do not assign the components connected to the 4 Operate with the remote controller. HDMI IN to the TV/CD input at this time. Appropriate See the list of available buttons (➔ 84). CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) operation can not be Note guaranteed. • Audio from DVD-Audio or Super Audio CD may not out- 2 Change each item in the “HDMI” as below: put from the TV speakers. You will be able to output the • HDMI Control (RIHD): On audio from the TV speakers by setting the audio output of • Audio Return Channel (ARC): Auto the DVD player to 2ch PCM. (It may not be possible • Power Control: On depending on the player models.) • Even if you set to output audio on the TV speakers, audio • TV Control: On will be output from the speakers connected to the AV receiver when you adjust the volume or switch the input See details of each setting (➔ 56, 57). on the AV receiver. To output audio from the TV speakers, re-do the operations on the TV. • Do not connect the cable when connecting to the and audio control compatible components. • When you select anything other than the HDMI jack where the AV receiver is connected as the input on the TV, input on the AV receiver will be switched to “TV/CD”. • The AV receiver will automatically power on in conjunc- tion when it determines it to be necessary. Even if the AV receiver is connected to an compatible TV or player/recorder, it will not power on if it is not necessary. It may not power on in conjunction when the TV is set to output audio from the TV. • Linked functions with the AV receiver may not work depending on the model. Operate the AV receiver directly in such cases. En 97
  • 98. Video Resolution Chart The following tables show how video signals at different resolutions are output by the AV receiver. NTSC/PAL ✔: Output Output HDMI Component S-Video Composite Input 1080p 1080i 720p 480p/ 480i/ 1080p 1080i 720p 480p/ 480i/ 480i/576i 576p 576i 576p 576i HDMI 1080p ✔ 1080i ✔ ✔ ✔ 720p ✔ ✔ ✔ 480p/576p ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ 480i/576i ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Component 1080p ✔ ✔ 1080i ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ 720p ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ 480p/576p ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔*2 ✔*2 ✔ 480i/576i ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔*2 ✔*2 ✔ ✔ S-Video 480i/576i ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔*2 ✔*2 ✔ ✔ ✔ Composite PC IN (Analog RGB)*1 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔*3 ✔*3 ✔*3 *1 Available resolution: [640 × 480 60/72/75 Hz] [800 × 600 56/60/72/75 Hz] [1024 × 768 60/70/75 Hz] [1280 × 1024 60 Hz] *2 The output is limited to 480p/576p for an effective signal in the effect of Macrovision. *3 PC IN (Analog RGB) input signal is output at 720p resolution when you select “Analog” in the “Monitor Out” setting (➔ 42) and “Through” in the “Resolution” setting (➔ 43). En 98
  • 99. Memo En 99
  • 100. Sales & Product Planning Div. : 2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8163 ONKYO U.S.A. CORPORATION 18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A. Tel: 800-229-1687, 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650 http://www.us.onkyo.com/ ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4401-555 http://www.eu.onkyo.com/ ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH (UK BRANCH) The Coach House 81A High Street, Marlow, Buckinghamshire, SL7 1AB, UK Tel: +44-(0)1628-473-350 Fax: +44-(0)1628-401-700 ONKYO CHINA LIMITED Unit 1 & 12, 9/F, Ever Gain Plaza Tower 1, 88, Container Port Road, Kwai Chung, N.T., Hong Kong. Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039 http://www.ch.onkyo.com/ Y1004-1 SN 29400329 (C) Copyright 2010 ONKYO CORPORATION Japan. All rights reserved. * 2 9 4 0 0 3 2 9 *